Loop-O9400S-1US4

SDH/SONET ADM/TM
(STM-1/4 & OC-3/12)
User’s Manual

LOOP TELECOMMUNICATION INTERNATIONAL, INC.
8F, NO. 8, HSIN ANN RD.
SCIENCE-BASED INDUSTRIAL PARK
HSINCHU, TAIWAN
Tel:
886-3-578-7696
Fax:
886-3-578-7695

© 2010 Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.
Version 15 19 AUG 2010

All rights reserved.

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION....................................................................................................................................1
1.1
1.2

2

DESCRIPTION.......................................................................................................................................................1
SPECIFICATIONS ..................................................................................................................................................3

INSTALLATION .....................................................................................................................................................7
2.1
SITE PREPARATION..............................................................................................................................................7
2.2
MECHANICAL INSTALLATION ..............................................................................................................................7
2.2.1
Installation Overview .................................................................................................................................7
2.2.2
Power..........................................................................................................................................................7
2.2.3
Chassis Grounding......................................................................................................................................8
2.2.4
Power Connection ......................................................................................................................................8
2.2.5
Fiber Optic Line Connections.....................................................................................................................8
2.2.6
Console Port ...............................................................................................................................................9
2.2.7
Main Module ..............................................................................................................................................9
2.2.8
Tributary Modules ......................................................................................................................................9
2.2.9
Interfaces ....................................................................................................................................................9

3

INTERFACES ........................................................................................................................................................10
3.1
POWER SUPPLY .................................................................................................................................................10
3.1.1
Power module, -48V DC ..........................................................................................................................10
3.1.2
Power module, 100~240 Vac ...................................................................................................................11
3.2
ALARM INTERFACE.....................................................................................................................................11
3.2.1
Description ...............................................................................................................................................11
Connectors................................................................................................................................................................12
3.2.2
Electrical Parameters Alarm Input............................................................................................................12
3.2.3
Electrical Parameters Alarm Output.........................................................................................................13
3.3
VT-100 TERMINAL INTERFACE .................................................................................................................13
3.3.1
Description ...............................................................................................................................................13
3.3.2
Connector .................................................................................................................................................13
3.3.3
Compliance...............................................................................................................................................13
3.4
SYSTEM TIMING SOURCES AND CONNECTOR ....................................................................................................14
3.4.1
Connectors................................................................................................................................................15
3.4.2
Compliance...............................................................................................................................................15
3.5
16 E1/T1 ...........................................................................................................................................................16
3.5.1
Brief description .......................................................................................................................................16
3.5.2
Power consumption ..................................................................................................................................16
3.5.3
Connector type..........................................................................................................................................16
3.5.4
Compliance...............................................................................................................................................18
3.5.5
Functional Block Diagram........................................................................................................................18
3.6
E3/T3 INTERFACE CARD ...................................................................................................................................19
3.6.1
Brief description .......................................................................................................................................19
3.6.2
Power consumption ..................................................................................................................................19
3.6.3
Connector type..........................................................................................................................................19
3.6.4
Compliance...............................................................................................................................................19
3.6.5
Functional Block Diagram........................................................................................................................20
3.7
RS232 X 2 .........................................................................................................................................................21
3.7.1
Brief description .......................................................................................................................................21
3.7.2
Power consumption ..................................................................................................................................21
3.7.3
Connector type..........................................................................................................................................21
3.7.4
Compliance...............................................................................................................................................21
3.7.5
Functional Block Diagram........................................................................................................................22
3.8
ETHERNET INTERFACE ......................................................................................................................................23
3.8.1
Brief Description ......................................................................................................................................23
3.8.1.1
3.8.1.2

3.8.2
3.8.3

Ethernet Interface with Switch .............................................................................................................................. 23
Ethernet Interface without Switch ......................................................................................................................... 25

Power Consumption .................................................................................................................................26
RJ45 Connector ........................................................................................................................................27

i

4

OPERATION..........................................................................................................................................................28
4.1
SYSTEM ..........................................................................................................................................................28
4.1.1
Introduction ..............................................................................................................................................28
4.1.2
Technical overview ..................................................................................................................................28
4.1.2.1
4.1.2.2
4.1.2.3
4.1.2.4
4.1.2.5

4.2
5

Management port................................................................................................................................................... 28
VT100 Port............................................................................................................................................................ 28
Clock Source ......................................................................................................................................................... 28
Power .................................................................................................................................................................... 28
LEDs ..................................................................................................................................................................... 28

EXTERNAL ALARMS ..........................................................................................................................................32

SYSTEM OPERATIONS ......................................................................................................................................33
5.1
LOGON AND PASSWORD SETUP .........................................................................................................................40
5.1.1
Logon/off..................................................................................................................................................40
5.1.2
Change a Password...................................................................................................................................41
5.2
SYSTEM SETUP ..................................................................................................................................................44
5.2.1
Setup Screen Access.................................................................................................................................44
5.2.2
System Setup Procedure ...........................................................................................................................45
5.3
TIMING SOURCE SETUP .....................................................................................................................................47
5.3.1
Setup Screen Access.................................................................................................................................47
5.3.2
Timing Source Setup Procedure ...............................................................................................................48
5.4
LOOPBACK TIMER SETUP ..................................................................................................................................50
5.4.1
Setup Screen Access.................................................................................................................................50
5.4.2
LoopBack Timer Setup Procedure............................................................................................................51
5.5
BRIDGE AND RSTP INFO. SETUP .......................................................................................................................52
5.5.1
Setup Screen Access.................................................................................................................................52
5.5.2
Bridge and RSTP Info Setup Procedure ...................................................................................................53
5.6
GATEWAY NETWORK ELEMENT SETUP .............................................................................................................55
5.6.1
Setup Screen Access.................................................................................................................................55
5.6.2
Gateway Network Element Setup Procedure............................................................................................55
5.7
DHCP RELAY SETUP ........................................................................................................................................58
5.7.1
Setup Screen Access.................................................................................................................................58
5.8
DHCP RELAY SETUP PROCEDURE ....................................................................................................................59
5.9
REMOTE MANAGEMENT SETUP .........................................................................................................................60
5.9.1
Setup Screen Access.................................................................................................................................60
5.9.2
Remote Management Setup Procedure.....................................................................................................60
5.10 SNTP SETUP .....................................................................................................................................................63
5.10.1 Setup Screen Access.................................................................................................................................63
5.10.2 SNTP Setup Procedure .............................................................................................................................64
5.11 RS232 CONFIGURATION SETUP .........................................................................................................................65
5.11.1 Setup Screen Access.................................................................................................................................65
5.11.2 RS232 Config Setup Procedure ................................................................................................................66
5.12 RS232 LOOPBACK TEST ....................................................................................................................................67
5.12.1 Setup Screen Access.................................................................................................................................67
5.12.2 RS232 Loopback Test Setup Procedure ...................................................................................................68
5.13 HAND-WAVING LED SETUP ..............................................................................................................................69
5.13.1 Setup Screen Access.................................................................................................................................69
5.13.2 Hand-waving LED Setup Procedure ........................................................................................................70
5.14 SNMP SYSTEM CONFIG SETUP .........................................................................................................................71
5.14.1 Setup Screen Access.................................................................................................................................71
5.14.2 SNMP System Configuration Setup Procedure ........................................................................................72
5.15 SSH SETUP........................................................................................................................................................74
5.15.1 Setup Screen Access.................................................................................................................................74
5.16 SDH/SONET MODE SETUP ..............................................................................................................................76
5.16.1 Setup Screen Access.................................................................................................................................76
5.16.2 SDH/SONET Mode Setup Procedure.......................................................................................................76
5.17 SDH/SONET PROTECTION SETUP ....................................................................................................................79
5.17.1 Setup Screen Access.................................................................................................................................79
5.17.2 SDH/SONET Protection Setup Procedure................................................................................................79
5.18 ALS/APSD SETUP ............................................................................................................................................82
5.18.1 Setup Screen Access.................................................................................................................................82

ii

5.18.2 ALS/APSD Setup Procedure ....................................................................................................................83
5.19 SDH/SONET GRANULARITY SETUP .................................................................................................................84
5.19.1 Setup Screen Access.................................................................................................................................84
5.19.2 SDH/SONET Granularity Setup Procedure..............................................................................................85
5.20 XC/TSA CREATE SETUP ...................................................................................................................................87
5.20.1 Setup Screen Access.................................................................................................................................87
5.20.2 XC/TSA Create Setup ..............................................................................................................................88
5.21 XC/TSA DELETE SETUP ...................................................................................................................................92
5.21.1 Setup Screen Access.................................................................................................................................92
5.21.2 XC/TSA Delete Setup ..............................................................................................................................93
5.22 XC/TSA MAP CONFIGURATION ........................................................................................................................94
5.22.1 Setup Screen Access.................................................................................................................................94
5.22.2 XC/TSA Map Configuration Setup ..........................................................................................................95
5.23 SDH/SONET OVERHEAD SETUP ......................................................................................................................96
5.23.1 Setup Screen Access.................................................................................................................................96
5.23.2 SDH/SONET Overhead Setup..................................................................................................................97
5.24 LINE LOOPBACK SETUP ...................................................................................................................................100
5.24.1 Setup Screen Access...............................................................................................................................101
5.24.2 Line Loopback Setup..............................................................................................................................101
5.25 MSP USER COMMAND ...................................................................................................................................103
5.25.1 Setup Screen Access...............................................................................................................................103
5.25.2 MSP Command ......................................................................................................................................104
5.26 CUSTOMER INFORMATION SETUP ....................................................................................................................105
5.26.1 Setup Screen Access...............................................................................................................................105
5.26.2 Customer Information Setup Procedure .................................................................................................106
5.27 ALARM SETUP .................................................................................................................................................107
5.27.1 Setup Screen Access...............................................................................................................................107
5.27.2 System Alarm Setup ...............................................................................................................................108
5.27.3 SDH-Line/SONET-Line Alarm Mask/Relay Setup................................................................................108
5.27.4 Ho-Path/STS-Path Alarm Mask/Relay Setup .........................................................................................109
5.27.5 Lo-Path/VT-Path Alarm Mask/Relay Setup ...........................................................................................111
5.27.6 SDH/SONET Alarm Severity Setup.......................................................................................................112
5.27.7 SD/SF Threshold Setup ..........................................................................................................................113
5.27.8 External Alarm Setup .............................................................................................................................114
5.27.9 Insert AIS Alarm Setup ..........................................................................................................................114
5.28 CLEAR PERFORMANCE DATA ..........................................................................................................................116
5.28.1 Setup Screen Access...............................................................................................................................116
5.28.2 Clear Performance Procedure.................................................................................................................116
5.29 SDH/SONET PERFORMANCE REPORT ............................................................................................................117
5.29.1 1-Hour Performance Report ...................................................................................................................117
5.29.2 24-Hour Performance Report .................................................................................................................117
5.29.3 7-Day Performance Report.....................................................................................................................118
5.30 PERFORMANCE TCA SETUP ............................................................................................................................119
5.30.1 Setup Screen Access...............................................................................................................................119
5.30.2 Performance TCA Setup Procedure........................................................................................................119
5.31 STORE/RETRIEVE BACKUP CONFIGURATION ...................................................................................................121
5.32 DOWNLOAD CURRENT CONFIGURATION .........................................................................................................122
5.32.1 Setup Screen Access...............................................................................................................................122
5.32.2 Download Current Configuration Procedure..........................................................................................122
5.33 DOWNLOAD FIRMWARE ..................................................................................................................................124
5.33.1 Setup Screen Access...............................................................................................................................124
5.33.2 Download Firmware Setup Procedure....................................................................................................124
5.34 DOWNLOAD BACKUP CONFIGURATION ...........................................................................................................127
5.34.1 Setup Screen Access...............................................................................................................................127
5.34.2 Download Backup Configuration Procedure..........................................................................................127
5.35 UPLOAD CURRENT CONFIGURATION FROM FLASH........................................................................................129
5.35.1 Setup Screen Access...............................................................................................................................129
5.35.2 Upload Current Configuration Procedure...............................................................................................130
5.36 UPLOAD BACKUP CONFIGURATION FROM FLASH..........................................................................................131
5.36.1 Setup Screen Access...............................................................................................................................131
5.36.2 Upload Backup Configuration Procedure...............................................................................................131

iii

5.37 CHANGE FIRMWARE BOOT BANK ...................................................................................................................133
5.37.1 Setup Screen Access...............................................................................................................................133
5.37.2 Change Firmware Boot Bank Procedure ................................................................................................133
5.38 E1 SETUP ........................................................................................................................................................135
5.38.1 Choose a Unit .........................................................................................................................................135
5.38.2 E1/T1 Mode Setup..................................................................................................................................136
5.38.3 Line Config Setup...................................................................................................................................136
5.38.3.1
5.38.3.2
5.38.3.3

5.38.4
5.38.4.1
5.38.4.2

5.38.5
5.38.6
5.38.6.1
5.38.6.2

5.38.7
5.38.7.1
5.38.7.2

5.38.8
5.38.8.1
5.38.8.2
5.38.8.3

E1 Line Coding Setup ..................................................................................................................................... 137
E1 Low-Order Path Overhead Setup............................................................................................................... 138
E1 Customer Information Setup...................................................................................................................... 140

Unit Diagnostics Setup ...........................................................................................................................141
Channel Loopback Setup ................................................................................................................................ 142
Unit Diagnostics Setup.................................................................................................................................... 143

SNCP User Command ............................................................................................................................144
E1 Unit Alarm Setup ..............................................................................................................................145
E1 Unit Alarm Mask/Relay Setup................................................................................................................... 146
Unit Alarm Severity Setup .............................................................................................................................. 147

Performance Setup/Clear........................................................................................................................149
Clear Performance Data .................................................................................................................................. 149
Unit Performance TCA Setup ......................................................................................................................... 150

E1 Performance Report ..........................................................................................................................151
1-Hour Performance Report............................................................................................................................ 151
24-Hour Performance Report .......................................................................................................................... 152
7-Day Performance Report ............................................................................................................................. 152

5.39 T1 SETUP ........................................................................................................................................................153
5.39.1 Choose a Unit .........................................................................................................................................153
5.39.2 E1/T1 Mode Setup..................................................................................................................................154
5.39.3 Line Config Setup...................................................................................................................................154
5.39.3.1
5.39.3.2
5.39.3.3
5.39.3.4

5.39.4
5.39.4.1
5.39.4.2

5.39.5
5.39.6
5.39.6.1
5.39.6.2

5.39.7
5.39.7.1
5.39.7.2

5.39.8
5.39.8.1
5.39.8.2
5.39.8.3

T1 Line Coding Setup ..................................................................................................................................... 155
T1 Low-Order Path Overhead Setup............................................................................................................... 157
TU11/TU12 Mapping Mode Setup ................................................................................................................. 158
T1 Customer Information Setup...................................................................................................................... 160

Unit Diagnostics Setup ...........................................................................................................................161
Channel Loopback Setup ................................................................................................................................ 161
Unit Diagnostics Setup.................................................................................................................................... 162

SNCP USER Command .........................................................................................................................163
T1 Unit Alarm Setup ..............................................................................................................................165
T1 Unit Alarm Mask/Relay Setup................................................................................................................... 165
Unit Alarm Severity Setup .............................................................................................................................. 167

Performance Setup/Clear........................................................................................................................168
Clear Performance Data .................................................................................................................................. 168
Unit Performance TCA Setup ......................................................................................................................... 169

T1 Performance Report ..........................................................................................................................170
1-Hour Performance Report............................................................................................................................ 170
24-Hour Performance Report .......................................................................................................................... 170
7-Day Performance ......................................................................................................................................... 171

5.40 E3 SETUP ........................................................................................................................................................172
5.40.1 Choose a Unit .........................................................................................................................................172
5.40.2 E3/T3 Mode Setup..................................................................................................................................173
5.40.3 Line Config Setup...................................................................................................................................173
5.40.3.1
5.40.3.2

5.40.4
5.40.4.1
5.40.4.2

5.40.5
5.40.6
5.40.6.1
5.40.6.2

5.40.7
5.40.7.1
5.40.7.2

5.40.8
5.40.8.1
5.40.8.2

SDH/SONET Path Overhead Setup ................................................................................................................ 174
E3 Customer Information Setup...................................................................................................................... 176

Unit Diagnostics Setup ...........................................................................................................................177
Channel Loopback Setup ................................................................................................................................ 177
Unit Diagnostics Setup.................................................................................................................................... 178

SNCP USER Command .........................................................................................................................179
E3 Unit Alarm Setup ..............................................................................................................................180
E3 Unit Alarm Mask/Relay Setup................................................................................................................... 181
Unit Alarm Severity Setup .............................................................................................................................. 182

Performance Setup/Clear........................................................................................................................183
Clear Performance Data .................................................................................................................................. 184
Performance Threshold Setup ......................................................................................................................... 185

E3 Performance Report ..........................................................................................................................186
1-Hour Performance........................................................................................................................................ 186
24-Hour Performance Report .......................................................................................................................... 186

iv

5.40.8.3

7-Day Performance Report ............................................................................................................................. 187

5.41 T3 SETUP ........................................................................................................................................................188
5.41.1 Choose a Unit .........................................................................................................................................188
5.41.2 E3/T3 Mode Setup..................................................................................................................................189
5.41.3 Line Config Setup...................................................................................................................................189
5.41.3.1
5.41.3.2
5.41.3.3
5.41.3.4

5.41.4

Line Transmit Length Setup............................................................................................................................ 190
Mapping Mode Setup...................................................................................................................................... 191
SDH/SONET Path Overhead Setup ................................................................................................................ 192
Customer Information Setup ........................................................................................................................... 194

Unit Diagnostics Setup ...........................................................................................................................195

5.41.4.1
5.41.4.2

5.41.5
5.41.6

Channel Loopback Setup ................................................................................................................................ 195
Unit Diagnostics Setup.................................................................................................................................... 196

SNCP USER Command .........................................................................................................................197
T3 Unit Alarm Setup ..............................................................................................................................199

5.41.6.1
5.41.6.2

5.41.7

T3 Unit Alarm Mask/Relay Setup................................................................................................................... 199
Unit Alarm Severity Setup .............................................................................................................................. 201

Performance Setup/Clear........................................................................................................................202

5.41.7.1
5.41.7.2

5.41.8

Clear Performance Data .................................................................................................................................. 202
Unit Performance TCA Setup ......................................................................................................................... 203

T3 Performance Report ..........................................................................................................................204

5.41.8.1
5.41.8.2
5.41.8.3

1-Hour Performance Report............................................................................................................................ 204
24-Hour Performance Report .......................................................................................................................... 205
7-Day Performance ......................................................................................................................................... 206

5.42 ETHERNET SWITCH SETUP...............................................................................................................................207
5.42.1 Unit Menu Tree ......................................................................................................................................207
5.42.2 Choosing a Trib Unit ..............................................................................................................................208
5.42.3 Mode Setup.............................................................................................................................................209
5.42.4 VCG & Link Setup.................................................................................................................................209
5.42.4.1
5.42.4.2
5.42.4.3
5.42.4.4
5.42.4.5
5.42.4.6
5.42.4.7
5.42.4.8
5.42.4.9
5.42.4.10

5.42.5

Performance Setup/Clear........................................................................................................................220

5.42.5.1
5.42.5.2

5.42.6
5.42.7
5.42.8

Payload/LCAS Setup ...................................................................................................................................... 210
Encapsulation Type Setup............................................................................................................................... 211
Encapsulation Parameter Setup....................................................................................................................... 212
Path Alarm Setup ............................................................................................................................................ 214
WAN (VCG) Alarm Threshold Setup............................................................................................................. 215
Linkdown Alarm Setup................................................................................................................................... 216
Link Config Setup........................................................................................................................................... 217
Customer Information Setup ........................................................................................................................... 218
Link Failure Propagation Setup....................................................................................................................... 218
Inter-Frame Gap (IFG) Setup.......................................................................................................................... 220
Clear Performance Data .................................................................................................................................. 221
Performance Threshold Setup ......................................................................................................................... 221

Loopback Test ........................................................................................................................................222
SNCP User Command ............................................................................................................................222
Switch Setup...........................................................................................................................................223

5.42.8.1
5.42.8.2
5.42.8.3
5.42.8.4
5.42.8.5
5.42.8.6
5.42.8.7
5.42.8.7.1
5.42.8.7.2
5.42.8.7.3
5.42.8.7.4
5.42.8.7.5

VLAN Setup ................................................................................................................................................... 223
Port Map Setup ............................................................................................................................................... 226
Port Trunk Setup ............................................................................................................................................. 228
MSTP/RSTP Setup ......................................................................................................................................... 229
IGMP Setup .................................................................................................................................................... 234
Flow Control Setup ......................................................................................................................................... 238
QoS Setup ....................................................................................................................................................... 239
Class of Service Setup..................................................................................................................................... 240
TCP/UDP Port Access Control ....................................................................................................................... 243
Transmission Scheduling ................................................................................................................................ 245
Transmission WRED Setup ............................................................................................................................ 247
Rate Control Setup .......................................................................................................................................... 248

5.42.9 MAC Learning Setup .............................................................................................................................250
5.42.10
Unit Load Default and Reset ..............................................................................................................250
5.43 ETHERNET NO-SWITCH SETUP ........................................................................................................................251
5.43.1 Unit Menu Tree ......................................................................................................................................251
5.43.2 Choosing a Trib Unit ..............................................................................................................................252
5.43.3 Mode Setup.............................................................................................................................................253
5.43.4 WAN (VCG) & Link Setup....................................................................................................................253
5.43.4.1
5.43.4.2

Payload/LCAS Setup ...................................................................................................................................... 254
Encapsulation Type Setup............................................................................................................................... 255

v

5.43.4.3
5.43.4.4
5.43.4.5
5.43.4.6
5.43.4.7
5.43.4.8
5.43.4.9
5.43.4.10

5.43.5
5.43.5.1
5.43.5.2

5.43.6
5.43.7
5.43.8
6

Encapsulation Parameter Setup....................................................................................................................... 255
Path Alarm Setup ............................................................................................................................................ 258
WAN (VCG) Alarm Threshold Setup............................................................................................................. 259
Linkdown Alarm Setup................................................................................................................................... 260
Link Config Setup........................................................................................................................................... 260
Customer Information Setup ........................................................................................................................... 261
Link Failure Propagation Setup....................................................................................................................... 261
Inter-Frame Gap (IFG) Setup.......................................................................................................................... 262

Performance Setup/Clear........................................................................................................................263
Clear Performance Data .................................................................................................................................. 263
Performance Threshold Setup ......................................................................................................................... 264

Loopback Test ........................................................................................................................................264
SNCP USER Command .........................................................................................................................265
Unit Load Default and Reset ..................................................................................................................265

SDH/SONET FEATURES...................................................................................................................................266
6.1
INTRODUCTION................................................................................................................................................266
6.2
MULTIPLEXING STRUCTURE AND MAPPING MODES .........................................................................................267
6.2.1
Mapping of Tributaries into VC-n..........................................................................................................267
6.2.1.1
6.2.1.2
6.2.1.3
6.2.1.4
6.2.1.5
6.2.1.6
6.2.1.7
6.2.1.8
6.2.1.9
6.2.1.10

6.2.2
6.2.3

Asynchronous mapping of 44 736 kbps .............................................................................................................. 267
Asynchronous mapping of 34 368 kbps .............................................................................................................. 268
Asynchronous mapping of 2048kbps .................................................................................................................. 268
Mapping of GFP Frames ..................................................................................................................................... 269
Loop Proprietary Mapping of RS232 .................................................................................................................. 269
TM-N Physical layer ........................................................................................................................................... 270
STM-N Regenerator and Multiplex Section layer ............................................................................................... 270
VC-n/m Path layer............................................................................................................................................... 270
VC4-Xc/VC-4/VC-3 POH Implementation......................................................................................................... 271
VC-2/VC-1 POH Implementation................................................................................................................... 272

Cross-connect .........................................................................................................................................272
Concatenation schemes...........................................................................................................................272

6.2.3.1

6.2.4

Virtual concatenation .......................................................................................................................................... 272

Protection................................................................................................................................................273

6.2.4.1
6.2.4.2

6.2.5

MSP 1+1 linear.................................................................................................................................................... 273
SNC Protection.................................................................................................................................................... 273

Performance Monitoring.........................................................................................................................274

6.2.5.1
6.2.5.2
6.2.5.3

Regenerator and multiplex section performance monitoring............................................................................... 274
Path performance monitoring .............................................................................................................................. 275
Synchronization................................................................................................................................................... 275

6.3
PDH FEATURES...............................................................................................................................................277
6.3.1
E1 features..............................................................................................................................................277
6.3.1.1
6.2.1.2

6.3.2

General information ............................................................................................................................................ 277
Transparent Leased Line ..................................................................................................................................... 277

E3/T3 Features........................................................................................................................................277

6.3.2.1
6.3.2.2
6.3.2.3

General information ............................................................................................................................................ 277
E3 transparent leased line.................................................................................................................................... 277
T3 transparent leased line.................................................................................................................................... 277

6.3.3
Loop-back...............................................................................................................................................277
6.4
MANAGEMENT FEATURES ...............................................................................................................................279
6.4.1
Introduction ............................................................................................................................................279
6.4.2
Management Interfaces...........................................................................................................................279
6.4.2.1
6.4.2.2
6.4.2.3
6.4.2.4
6.4.2.5

Management port................................................................................................................................................. 279
DCC channels...................................................................................................................................................... 279
Device ................................................................................................................................................................. 279
SDH..................................................................................................................................................................... 280
Tributary Module ................................................................................................................................................ 281

6.5
CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT .....................................................................................................................285
6.5.1
Backup and Restoration of Configuration Data......................................................................................285
6.5.2
Software download.................................................................................................................................285
6.5.3
Feature management...............................................................................................................................285
6.5.4
Device reset ............................................................................................................................................285
7

ETHERNET APPENDIX ....................................................................................................................................286
7.1
7.2

FLOW CONTROL...............................................................................................................................................286
TRUNK ............................................................................................................................................................286

vi

7.3
QUALITY OF SERVICE (QOS) ...........................................................................................................................286
7.3.1
Internal Priority Setup (Class of Service) ...............................................................................................287
7.3.1.1
7.3.1.2
7.3.1.3
7.3.1.4

7.3.2
7.3.2.1
7.3.2.2
7.3.2.3

7.3.3
7.3.4
7.3.5
7.3.5.1

7.3.6
7.3.6.1
7.3.6.2

7.3.7
7.3.7.1
7.3.7.2

Using Fixed Priority ............................................................................................................................................ 287
Using the Priority Defined in the VLAN Tag...................................................................................................... 287
Distrusted Port..................................................................................................................................................... 287
Using the Priority Defined in the TOS Field of the IP Header ............................................................................ 288

Layer 4 TCP/UDP Port Configure(TCP/UDP Port Access Control)......................................................288
Well Known Ports ............................................................................................................................................... 288
User Defined Logical Ports ................................................................................................................................. 288
User Defined Logical Port Range........................................................................................................................ 289

Transmission Queues..............................................................................................................................289
Transmission Scheduling Setup..............................................................................................................289
Strict Priority (SP) ..................................................................................................................................289
Weighted Fair Queuing (WFQ) ........................................................................................................................... 289

Drop Precedence.....................................................................................................................................290
Drop Precedence Setup........................................................................................................................................ 290
Weighted Random Early Drop Settings............................................................................................................... 291

Rate Control ...........................................................................................................................................291
Egress Rate Control............................................................................................................................................. 291
Ingress Rate Control............................................................................................................................................ 292

7.4
ETHERNET CARD FUNCTIONS AND DESCRIPTIONS ..........................................................................................293
7.4.1
Card Functions........................................................................................................................................293
7.4.2
O9400S FE (4EoS1SW) Module............................................................................................................293
7.4.2.1
7.4.2.2
7.4.2.3
7.4.2.4

7.4.3
7.4.3.1
7.4.3.2
7.4.3.3
7.4.3.4

7.4.4
7.4.4.1

7.4.5
7.4.5.1

8

E- Line................................................................................................................................................................. 293
E- Lan.................................................................................................................................................................. 294
Port Map.............................................................................................................................................................. 295
Port Trunking (Line Aggregation)....................................................................................................................... 296

O9400S FE (4EoS6SW) Module............................................................................................................297
E-Line.................................................................................................................................................................. 297
E-LAN................................................................................................................................................................. 298
Port MAP ............................................................................................................................................................ 299
Port Trunking (Line Aggregation)....................................................................................................................... 300

O9400S FE (4FE4NSW) Module...........................................................................................................300
E-Line.................................................................................................................................................................. 300

O9400S (1GE4NSW) Module................................................................................................................301
E-Line.................................................................................................................................................................. 301

ALARM TRAP APPENDIX ...............................................................................................................................302
8.1
LOCAL ALARM TRAP.......................................................................................................................................302
8.2
CRITICAL ALARMACTIVE TRAP ......................................................................................................................302
8.3
CRITICAL ALARM CLEARED TRAP ..................................................................................................................303
8.4
MAJOR ALARM ACTIVE TRAP .........................................................................................................................303
8.5
MAJOR ALARM CLEARED TRAP ......................................................................................................................304
8.6
MINOR ALARM ACTIVE TRAP .........................................................................................................................304
8.7
MINOR ALARM CLEARED TRAP ......................................................................................................................305
8.8
INFO ACTIVE TRAP ..........................................................................................................................................305
8.9
INFO CLEARED TRAP .......................................................................................................................................306
8.9.1
alarmQueueUnit .....................................................................................................................................306
8.9.2
alarmQueueCardModel: Card model type..............................................................................................306
8.9.3
alarmQueuePortNum: Port index ...........................................................................................................307
8.9.4
alarmQueueVcChan: VC channel...........................................................................................................307
8.9.5
alarmQueueAlmNum 0 ~ 30: System alarm...........................................................................................307
8.9.6
alarmQueueAlmNum 30 ~ 74: SDH alarm ............................................................................................308
8.9.7
alarmQueueAlmNum 130 ~ 234: SONET alarm....................................................................................309
8.9.8
alarmQueueAlmNum 250 ~ 252: E1/T1 alarm ......................................................................................310
8.9.9
alarmQueueAlmNum 300 ~ 303: Ethernet alarm...................................................................................310
8.9.10 alarmQueueVC43STS31Type: AU4/ AU3 type in SDH, STS3-C or STS-1 type in SONET................310
8.9.11 alarmQueueTU1xVTxType: Tu1x type..................................................................................................310
8.9.12 alarmQueueAUG1STS3: The number of STM1 ....................................................................................311
8.9.13 alarmQueueVC3STS1: The number of STS1.........................................................................................311
8.9.14 alarmQueueTUG2VTG: The number of Tug2 .......................................................................................311
8.9.15 alarmQueueTU1xVTx: The number of Tu1x.........................................................................................311

9

GLOSSARY..........................................................................................................................................................312

vii

LIST OF FIGURES
FIGURE 1-1 O9400S............................................................................................................................................................1
FIGURE 1-2 APPLICATION ILLUSTRATION............................................................................................................................2
FIGURE 2-1 POWER CONNECTION .......................................................................................................................................7
FIGURE 2-2 GROUND SCREW LOCATION .............................................................................................................................8
FIGURE 2-3 INTERFACE BLOCK DIAGRAM...........................................................................................................................9
FIGURE 3-1 TIMING INPUTS FOR THE O9400S ...................................................................................................................14
FIGURE 3-2 LOOP SCSI CONNECTOR ................................................................................................................................17
FIGURE 3-3 16 E1 BLOCK DIAGRAM .................................................................................................................................18
FIGURE 3-4 LOOP RF CONNECTOR ....................................................................................................................................19
FIGURE 3-5 E3/DS3 BLOCK DIAGRAM ..............................................................................................................................20
FIGURE 3-6 RS232X2 BLOCK DIAGRAM ...........................................................................................................................22
FIGURE 3-7 FAST ETHERNET INTERFACE WITH SWITCH ....................................................................................................23
FIGURE 3-8 FAST ETHERNET (FE) WITH SWITCH BLOCK DIAGRAM ..................................................................................23
FIGURE 3-9 GIGA ETHERNET INTERFACE WITH SWITCH ....................................................................................................24
FIGURE 3-10 GIGABIT ETHERNET (GBE) WITH SWITCH BLOCK DIAGRAM ........................................................................24
FIGURE 3-11 FAST ETHERNET INTERFACE WITHOUT SWITCH............................................................................................25
FIGURE 3-12 FAST ETHERNET (FE) WITHOUT SWITCH BLOCK DIAGRAM .........................................................................25
FIGURE 3-13 GIGA ETHERNET INTERFACE WITHOUT SWITCH ...........................................................................................26
FIGURE 3-14 GIGABIT ETHERNET (GBE) WITHOUT SWITCH BLOCK DIAGRAM .................................................................26
FIGURE 5-1 VT-100 MAIN MENU TREE OVERVIEW ..........................................................................................................33
FIGURE 5-2 VT-100 E1 MENU TREE – LOG AND MISC SECTIONS ...................................................................................34
FIGURE 5-3 VT-100 T1 MENU TREE – LOG AND MISC SECTIONS ...................................................................................35
FIGURE 5-4 VT-100 E3 MENU TREE – LOG AND MISC SECTIONS ...................................................................................36
FIGURE 5-5 VT-100 T3 MENU TREE – LOG AND MISC SECTIONS ...................................................................................37
FIGURE 5-6 VT-100 MENU TREE – DISPLAY SECTION ...................................................................................................38
FIGURE 5-7 VT-100 MENU TREE – SETUP SECTION ........................................................................................................39
FIGURE 5-8 DCC(E) + DCC(W) .......................................................................................................................................61
FIGURE 5-9 DCC(E) + INBAND .........................................................................................................................................61
FIGURE 5-10 DCC(W) + INBAND ......................................................................................................................................62
FIGURE 5-11 O9400S LOOPBACK DIAGRAM ...................................................................................................................100
FIGURE 5-12 ETHERNET INTERFACE CARD WITH SWITCH VT-100 MENU TREE .............................................................207
FIGURE 5-13 ETHERNET INTERFACE CARD WITHOUT SWITCH VT-100 MENU TREE .......................................................251
FIGURE 6-1 SONET LAYER TERMINOLOGY ....................................................................................................................266
FIGURE 6-2 SDH LAYER TERMINOLOGY.........................................................................................................................266
FIGURE 6-3 MULTIPLEXING/MAPPING STRUCTURE ADAPTED FROM ITU-T G.707/Y.1322.............................................267
FIGURE 6-4 ASYNCHRONOUS MAPPING OF 44 736 KBPS TRIBUTARY INTO VC-3 ............................................................267
FIGURE 6-5 ASYNCHRONOUS MAPPING OF 34 368 KBPS TRIBUTARY INTO VC-3 ............................................................268
FIGURE 6-6 ASYNCHRONOUS MAPPING OF 2048KBPS INTO VC-12 .................................................................................268
FIGURE 6-7 MAPPING OF GFP FRAMES INTO C-N ............................................................................................................269
FIGURE 6-8 LOOP PROPRIETARY MAPPING OF RS232 .....................................................................................................269
FIGURE 6-9 STM-N SECTION OVERHEAD (SOH) ............................................................................................................270
FIGURE 6-10 VC-4 POH .................................................................................................................................................271
FIGURE 6-11 VC-12 POH ...............................................................................................................................................272
FIGURE 6-12 PROTECTION SCHEMES FOR O9400S...........................................................................................................273
FIGURE 6-13 O9400S LOOPBACK DIAGRAM ...................................................................................................................278
FIGURE 6-14 ALARM SUPPRESSION SEQUENCE ...............................................................................................................284
FIGURE 7-1 RULE FOR DETERMINING TRANSMISSION CLASS ..........................................................................................287
FIGURE 7-2 FE (4EOS1SW) MODULE E-LINE .................................................................................................................294
FIGURE 7-3 FE (4EOS1SW) MODULE E-LAN .................................................................................................................294
FIGURE 7-4 FE (4EOS1SW) MODULE PORT MAP ...........................................................................................................295
FIGURE 7-5 FE (4EOS1SW) MODULE PORT TRUNKING ..................................................................................................296
FIGURE 7-6 FE (4EOS6SW) MODULE E-LINE .................................................................................................................297
FIGURE 7-7 FE (4EOS6SW) MODULE E-LAN ................................................................................................................298
FIGURE 7-8 FE (4EOS6SW) MODULE PORT MAP ...........................................................................................................299
FIGURE 7-9 FE (4EOS6SW) MODULE PORT TRUNKING ..................................................................................................300
FIGURE 7-10 FE (4FE4NSW) MODULE ..........................................................................................................................300
FIGURE 7-11 1GE4NSW MODULE ..................................................................................................................................301

viii

LIST OF TABLES
TABLE 2-1 DB9 CONSOLE PORT PINOUT TABLE .................................................................................................................9
TABLE 3-1 PIN-OUT FOR -48 DC CONNECTOR...................................................................................................................10
TABLE 3-2 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR DC COMPLIANCE.......................................................................................10
TABLE 3-3 POWER SUPPLY COMPLIANCE..........................................................................................................................10
TABLE 3-4 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR AC ............................................................................................................11
TABLE 3-5 AC COMPLIANCE.............................................................................................................................................11
TABLE 3-6 PIN-OUT FOR ALARM INPUT CONNECTOR ........................................................................................................12
TABLE 3-7 PIN-OUT FOR ALARM OUTPUT CONNECTOR ....................................................................................................12
TABLE 3-8 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS AT ALARM INPUT .............................................................................................12
TABLE 3-9 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS AT ALARM OUTPUT ..........................................................................................13
TABLE 3-10 PIN-OUT FOR VT-100 CONNECTOR ................................................................................................................13
TABLE 3-11 RS-232 INTERFACE COMPLIANCE..................................................................................................................13
TABLE 3-12 PIN-OUT FOR SYNCHRONIZATION PORT .........................................................................................................15
TABLE 3-13 SYNCHRONIZATION INTERFACE COMPLIANCE ...............................................................................................15
TABLE 3-14 PIN-OUT FOR SCSI Ⅱ CONNECTOR ...............................................................................................................16
TABLE 3-15 16 E1 INTERFACE COMPLIANCE .....................................................................................................................18
TABLE 3-16 E3/DS3 INTERFACE COMPLIANCE .................................................................................................................19
TABLE 3-17 PIN-OUT FOR 2*RS232 CONNECTOR .............................................................................................................21
TABLE 3-18 RS232 INTERFACE COMPLIANCE ...................................................................................................................21
TABLE 3-19 ETHERNET SWITCH POWER CONSUMPTION ...................................................................................................26
TABLE 3-20 RJ-45 PINOUT FOR ETHERNET PORT ..............................................................................................................27
TABLE 4-1 LED INDICATION FOR MAIN UNIT ...................................................................................................................29
TABLE 4-2 LED INDICATION FOR SYSTEM MODE .............................................................................................................29
TABLE 4-3 LED INDICATIONS FOR E1/T1, E3/T3, ETHERNET CARDS ...............................................................................30
TABLE 5-1 SYSTEM SETUP SETTING OPTIONS ...................................................................................................................45
TABLE 5-2 TIMING SOURCE SETTING OPTIONS .................................................................................................................48
TABLE 5-3 BRIDGE AND RSTP INFO. SETTING OPTIONS ...................................................................................................53
TABLE 5-4 G AT E WA Y N E T W OR K E L E M EN T S ET T I NG O P TI O NS 1 .........................................................................56
TABLE 5-5 G AT E WA Y N E T W OR K E L E M EN T S ET T I NG O P TI O NS 2 .........................................................................56
TABLE 5-6 REMOTE MANAGEMENT SETUP OPTIONS ........................................................................................................61
TABLE 5-7 SNTP SETTING OPTIONS .................................................................................................................................64
TABLE 5-8 RS232 CONFIG SETTING OPTIONS ...................................................................................................................66
TABLE 5-9 HAND-WAVING LED SETTING OPTIONS ..........................................................................................................70
TABLE 5-10 SSH SERTTINGS ............................................................................................................................................75
TABLE 5-11 SDH/SONET MODE SETTINGS .....................................................................................................................77
TABLE 5-12 SDH/SONET LINE SIDE SETTINGS ...............................................................................................................77
TABLE 5-13 SDH/SONET PROTECTION SETTING OPTIONS ..............................................................................................80
TABLE 5-14 ALS/APSD SETTING OPTIONS ......................................................................................................................83
TABLE 5-15 SDH/SONET GRANULARITY SETTING OPTIONS ...........................................................................................85
TABLE 5-16 XC/TSA SETTING OPTIONS ...........................................................................................................................88
TABLE 5-17 XC/TSA CREATE SETUP SETTING OPTIONS ..................................................................................................89
TABLE 5-18 LCAS STATUS ABBREVIATIONS AND REMARK .............................................................................................91
TABLE 5-19 XC/TSA DELETE SETTING OPTIONS .............................................................................................................93
TABLE 5-20 SDH/SONET OVERHEAD LINE SIDE SETTING OPTIONS ...............................................................................97
TABLE 5-21 ADDITIONAL SDH/SONET OVERHEAD SETTING OPTIONS ...........................................................................97
TABLE 5-22 HO-PATH/STS-PATH LINE SIDE SETTING OPTIONS .......................................................................................98
TABLE 5-23 ADDITIONAL HO-PATH/STS-PATH OVERHEAD SETTING OPTIONS ................................................................98
TABLE 5-24 MSP COMMAND SETTINGS ..........................................................................................................................104
TABLE 5-25 SYSTEM ALARM SETTING OPTIONS .............................................................................................................108
TABLE 5-26 SDH-LINE/SONET-LINE ALARM MASK/RELAY SETTING OPTIONS ...........................................................109
TABLE 5-27 HO-PATH/STS-PATH ALARM MASK/RELAY SETTING OPTIONS ..................................................................110
TABLE 5-28 LO-PATH/VT-PATH ALARM MASK/RELAY SETTING OPTIONS ....................................................................111
TABLE 5-29 SD/SF THRESHOLD SETTINGS .....................................................................................................................113
TABLE 5-30 THRESHOLD TO BIT ERROR RATE CONVERSION TABLE...............................................................................113
TABLE 5-31 EXTERNAL ALARM SETTING OPTIONS .........................................................................................................114
TABLE 5-32 LOW-ORDER PATH OVERHEAD SETTINGS ...................................................................................................139
TABLE 5-33 SNCP COMMAND SETTINGS ........................................................................................................................145
TABLE 5-34 U NI T P ERF OR MA NC E TCA S E TT I NG S .................................................................................................150

ix

TABLE 5-35 LOW-ORDER PATH OVERHEAD SETTINGS ...................................................................................................157
TABLE 5-36 SNCP COMMAND SETTINGS ........................................................................................................................164
TABLE 5-37 U NI T P ERF OR MA NC E TCA S E TT I NG S .................................................................................................169
TABLE 5-38 SDH/SONET PATH OVERHEAD SETTINGS ..................................................................................................175
TABLE 5-39 SNCP COMMAND SETTINGS ........................................................................................................................180
TABLE 5-40 P ERF . T HR E SH O LD C R O S S A LA R M S E T TI NG S ...................................................................................185
TABLE 5-41 SDH/SONET P AT H O V ER H EA D S E T T IN G O P T I ON S ........................................................................193
TABLE 5-42 SNCP COMMAND SETTINGS ........................................................................................................................198
TABLE 5-43 U NI T P ERF OR MA NC E TCA S E TT I NG S .................................................................................................204
TABLE 5-44 MODE SETTING OPTIONS .............................................................................................................................209
TABLE 5-45 MODE SUPPORT TABLE ...............................................................................................................................209
TABLE 5-46 PAYLOAD/LCAS SETTING OPTIONS ............................................................................................................211
TABLE 5-47 ENCAPSULATION TYPE SETTING OPTIONS ...................................................................................................211
TABLE 5-48 ENCAPSULATION PARAMETER SETTING OPTIONS ........................................................................................212
TABLE 5-49 GFP PARAMETER SETTING OPTIONS ...........................................................................................................212
TABLE 5-50 LAPS PARAMETER SETTING OPTIONS .........................................................................................................213
TABLE 5-51 BCP PARAMETER SETTING OPTIONS ...........................................................................................................214
TABLE 5-52 PATH ALARM SETTING OPTIONS 1...............................................................................................................214
TABLE 5-53 PATH ALARM SETTING OPTIONS 2...............................................................................................................215
TABLE 5-54 WAN (VCG) ALARM THRESHOLD SETTING OPTIONS .................................................................................216
TABLE 5-55 LINKDOWN ALARM SETTING OPTIONS ........................................................................................................217
TABLE 5-56 LINK CONFIG SETTING OPTIONS FOR ETHERNET WITH SWITCH...................................................................217
TABLE 5-57 LINK FAILURE PROPAGATION SETTING OPTIONS.........................................................................................218
TABLE 5-58 LINK FAULT PROPAGATION—E-LINE MODE ...............................................................................................219
TABLE 5-59 LINK FAULT PROPAGATION—PORTMAP/TRUNK MODE ..............................................................................219
TABLE 5-60 INTER-FRAME GAP (IFG) SETTING OPTIONS ..............................................................................................220
TABLE 5-61 PERFORMANCE THRESHOLD SETTING OPTIONS ...........................................................................................221
TABLE 5-62 LOOPBACK TEST SETTING OPTIONS ............................................................................................................222
TABLE 5-63 SNCP SETTING OPTIONS .............................................................................................................................222
TABLE 5-64 VLAN TAG PROTOCOL ID SETTING OPTIONS .............................................................................................224
TABLE 5-65 VLAN TAG PROTOCOL ID SETTING OPTIONS FOR SCREEN 1 ......................................................................224
TABLE 5-66 VLAN TAG PROTOCOL ID SETTING OPTIONS FOR SCREEN 2 ......................................................................225
TABLE 5-67 VLAN PORT ASSOCIATION ID SETTING OPTIONS FOR SCREEN 1................................................................225
TABLE 5-68 VLAN PORT ASSOCIATION ID SETTING OPTIONS FOR SCREEN 2................................................................226
TABLE 5-69 WAN PORT MAP SETTING OPTIONS ............................................................................................................227
TABLE 5-70 LAN PORT MAP SETTING OPTIONS .............................................................................................................227
TABLE 5-71 PORT TRUNK SETTING OPTIONS FOR ETHERNET WITH SWITCH ...................................................................228
TABLE 5-72 MSTP REGION/CIST SETUP ........................................................................................................................230
TABLE 5-73 SPANTREE PORT ENABLE SETTING OPTIONS ...............................................................................................230
TABLE 5-74 MSTP INSTANCE/VLAN SETTING OPTIONS #1 ............................................................................................231
TABLE 5-75 MSTP INSTANCE/PRIORITY SETTNG OPTIONS .............................................................................................232
TABLE 5-76 MST INSTANCE SETTING OPTIONS ..............................................................................................................232
TABLE 5-77 MSTP PORT SETTING OPTIONS ...................................................................................................................233
TABLE 5-78 RSTP PORT SETTING OPTIONS ....................................................................................................................233
TABLE 5-79 RSTP BRIDGE SETTING OPTIONS FOR ETHERNET WITH SWITCH .................................................................234
TABLE 5-80 IGMP SNOOPING SETTING OPTIONS ............................................................................................................235
TABLE 5-81 IGMP ROUTER PORT SETTING OPTIONS......................................................................................................236
TABLE 5-82 IP MULTICAST RANGE SETTING OPTIONS ...................................................................................................237
TABLE 5-83 IGMP CROSS VLAN Ι SETTING OPTIONS .....................................................................................................237
TABLE 5-84 IGMP CROSS VLAN ΙΙ SETTING OPTIONS ....................................................................................................238
TABLE 5-85 FLOW CONTROL SETTING OPTIONS FOR ETHERNET WITH SWITCH ..............................................................239
TABLE 5-86 PRIORITY MODE SETTING OPTIONS FOR ETHERNET WITH SWITCH ..............................................................240
TABLE 5-87 FIXED PRIORITY SETTING OPTIONS FOR ETHERNET WITH SWITCH ..............................................................241
TABLE 5-88 VLAN TAG PRIORITY SETTING OPTIONS FOR ETHERNET WITH SWITCH .....................................................242
TABLE 5-89 TOS FIELD PRIORITY SETTING OPTIONS FOR ETHERNET WITH SWITCH ......................................................242
TABLE 5-90 DISTRUSTED PORT SETTING OPTIONS..........................................................................................................243
TABLE 5-91 USER DEFINE PORT PRIORITY SETTING OPTIONS ........................................................................................244
TABLE 5-92 CP/UDP PORT RANGE PRIORITY SETTINGS.................................................................................................245
TABLE 5-93 SCHEDULING ALGORITHM SETTING OPTIONS ..............................................................................................246
TABLE 5-94 WFQ WEIGHT SETUP SETTING OPTIONS .....................................................................................................247
TABLE 5-95 TRANSMISSION WRED SETTING OPTIONS ..................................................................................................248

x

TABLE 5-96 RATE CTRL/INGRESS WRED SETTING OPTIONS..........................................................................................248
TABLE 5-97 PORT BITRATE SETTING OPTIONS ................................................................................................................249
TABLE 5-98 MAC LEARNING SETTING OPTIONS ............................................................................................................250
TABLE 5-99 MODE SETTING OPTIONS .............................................................................................................................253
TABLE 5-100 MODE SUPPORT TABLE .............................................................................................................................253
TABLE 5-101 PAYLOAD/LCAS SETTING OPTIONS ..........................................................................................................254
TABLE 5-102 ENCAPSULATION TYPE SETTING OPTIONS .................................................................................................255
TABLE 5-103 ENCAPSULATION PARAMETER SETTING OPTIONS ......................................................................................255
TABLE 5-104 GFP PARAMETER SETTING OPTIONS .........................................................................................................256
TABLE 5-105 LAPS PARAMETER SETTING OPTIONS .......................................................................................................256
TABLE 5-106 BCP PARAMETER SETTING OPTIONS .........................................................................................................257
TABLE 5-107 PATH ALARM SETTING OPTIONS 1.............................................................................................................258
TABLE 5-108 PATH ALARM SETTING OPTIONS 2.............................................................................................................259
TABLE 5-109 WAN (VCG) ALARM THRESHOLD SETTING OPTIONS ...............................................................................259
TABLE 5-110 LINKDOWN ALARM SETTING OPTIONS ......................................................................................................260
TABLE 5-111 LINK CONFIG SETTING OPTIONS FOR ETHERNET WITH SWITCH.................................................................261
TABLE 5-112 LINK FAILURE PROPAGATION SETTING OPTIONS.......................................................................................262
TABLE 5-113 LINK FAULT PROPAGATION—E-LINE MODE .............................................................................................262
TABLE 5-114 INTER-FRAME GAP (IFG) SETTING OPTIONS .............................................................................................263
TABLE 5-115 PERFORMANCE THRESHOLD SETTING OPTIONS .........................................................................................264
TABLE 5-116 LOOPBACK TEST SETTING OPTIONS ..........................................................................................................265
TABLE 5-117 LOOPBACKTEST SETTING OPTIONS ...........................................................................................................265
TABLE 6-1 O9400S DEVICE (SYSTEM) ALARMS .............................................................................................................279
TABLE 6-2 SDH ALARMS................................................................................................................................................280
TABLE 6-3 MISCELLANEOUS ALARMS ............................................................................................................................281
TABLE 6-4 ALARM PARAMETERS ....................................................................................................................................281
TABLE 6-5 ALARM SUPPRESSION TABLE FOR SDH RELATED ITEMS ..............................................................................283
TABLE 6-6 ALARM SUPPRESSION TABLE FOR PDH (TRIBUTARY) ALARMS.....................................................................283
TABLE 7-1 WELL-KNOWN PORT NUMBER VERSUS SERVICE TYPE ..................................................................................288
TABLE 7-2 WRED LOGIC BEHAVIOUR ...........................................................................................................................291
TABLE 7-3 O9400S ETHERNET CARD FUNCTION TABLE ................................................................................................293
TABLE 8-1 ALARMQUEUEUNIT: UNIT INDEX ..................................................................................................................306
TABLE 8-2 ALARM QUEUE CARD MODEL: CARD MODEL TYPE........................................................................................306
TABLE 8-3 ALARMQUEUEPORTNUM: PORT INDEX ..........................................................................................................307
TABLE 8-4 ALARMQUEUEVCCHAN: VC CHANNEL .........................................................................................................307
TABLE 8-5 ALARMQUEUEALMNUM 0 ~ 30: SYSTEM ALARM ..........................................................................................307
TABLE 8-6 ALARMQUEUEALMNUM 30 ~ 74: SDH ALARM .............................................................................................308
TABLE 8-7 ALARMQUEUEALMNUM 130 ~ 234: SONET ALARM ....................................................................................309
TABLE 8-8 ALARMQUEUEALMNUM 220 ~ 252:E1/T1 ALARM ........................................................................................310
TABLE 8-9 ALARMQUEUEALMNUM 300 ~ 303:ETHERNET ALARM .................................................................................310
TABLE 8-10 ALARMQUEUEVC43STS31TYPE: AU4 /AU3 TYPE IN SDH, STS-3C OR.....................................................310
TABLE 8-11 ALARMQUEUETU1XVTXTYPE: TU1X TYPE ................................................................................................310
TABLE 8-12 ALARMQUEUEAUG1STS3: THE NUMBER OF STM1 ...................................................................................311
TABLE 8-13 ALARMQUEUEVC3STS1: THE NUMBER OF STS1........................................................................................311
TABLE 8-14 ALARMQUEUETUG2VTG: THE NUMBER OF TUG2 .....................................................................................311
TABLE 8-15 ALARMQUEUETU1XVTX: THE NUMBER OF TU1X.......................................................................................311

xi

D
GB
F
ES

Bitte führen Sie das Gerät am Ende seinerLewbensdauer den zue Verfügung
stehended Rückgabeund Sammelsystemen zu.
At the end of the product's useful life, please dispose of it at appropriate collection
points provided in your country
Une fois le produit en fin devie, veuillez le déposer dans un point de recyclage
approprié.
Para preservar el medio ambiente, al final dela vida útil de su producto, depositelo
en los laguares destinado aello de acuerdo con la legislación vigente.

P

No final de vida útil do producto, por favor coloque no ponto de recolha apropriado.

I

Onde tutelare l'ambiente, non buttate l'apparecchio trai i normali rifiuti al termine
della sua vita utile, ma portatelo presso i punti do taccolta specifici per questi rifiuti
previsti dalla normativa vigente.

NL

Wij raden u aan het apparant aan het einde van zijn nuttige levensduur, niet bij hey
gewone huisafval te deponeren, maar op de dearvoor bestemde adressen.

DK

Når produktet er udtjent, bor det børtskaffes via de sæ rlige indsamlingssteder i
landet.

N

Ved slutten av produktets levetid bør det avhendes på en kommunal miljøstasjon
eller leveres til en elektroforhandler.

S

Lämna vänligen in produkten på lämplig återvinningsstation när den är förbrukad.

FIN

Hävitä tuote käytöiän päättyessä viemällä se asianmukaiseen keräyspisteeseen.

PL

Gdy produkt nie nadaje sie juz do dalszego uzytku, nalezy zostawic go w jednym ze
specjalnych punktów zajmujacych sie zbiórka zuzytych producktów w wybranych
miejscach na terenie kraju.

CZ

Po skončení jeho životnosti odložte prosím výrobek na přislušném sbĕrném místé
zřízeném dle předpisů ve vaší zemi.

SK

Po skončení jeho životnosti odovzdajte prosím zariadenie na príslušnom zbernom
mieste podía platných miestnych predpisov a noriem.

SLO

Ko se izdelku izteče življenska doba, ga odnesite na ustrezno zbirno mesto oziroma
ga odvrzite v skladu z veljavnimi predpisi.

GR

Στο Тέλος тης λειτουργικής Ζωής του προϊόντος παρακαλώ
Πετξτε το στα ειōικά σημεία που Παρέχονται οτη χωρα σας.

PRC

當產品使用壽命結束,請在你的國家所提供的適當地點做好回收處理

xii

CHAPTER 1 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

1 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
1.1

Description

Loop-O9400S STM-1/4 (OC-3/12) is an economical, compact, front access ADM. The 1U
shelf is designed to add & drop up to: forty-eight E1/T1 Tributaries, three E3/T3 Tributary and
four 10/100M Ethernet Tributaries.
With up to 2 aggregate optical/electrical STM-1/4 (OC-3/12) interfaces, the O9400S can offer
the service provider a versatile protection scheme including SNCP, and MSP (1+1) protection
for both ring and linear Network topology.
All interfaces are fully compliant with the relevant ETSI standards and ITU recommendations.
The O9400S provides powerful Operation, Administration, Maintenance and Provisioning
(OAM&P) functionality, including fault management, performance monitoring, configuration
management, and network security management. Through console port, LAN port, and DCC
channel, the OAM&P can be achieved both locally and remotely via SNMP or menu-driven
interfaces.
The O9400S provides a complete set of operation interfaces that are consistent with the
Telecommunication Management Network (TMN) concept (ITU Recommendation M.30,G.784)
for SDH Network Element/Operations System (NE/OS), NE/NE, and NE/Craft
communications. User can easily operate O9400S locally or remotely for centralized
management.
The O9400S supports Ethernet Order Wire (EOW) using VoIP technology.

Figure 1-1 O9400S

1

CHAPTER 1 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Applications

SDH/SONET
backbone

LOOP
INMS

STM-1/4
(OC-3/12)
O9400R
0 1
0
1

O9400R

E3/T3
E1/T1
Ethernet

0 1
1
0

O9400S
0
1

E3/T3
E1/T1
Ethernet
STM-1
STM-4

0
1

O9400 S

O9400S

O9400R

STM-1/4
(OC-3/12)
Ring

E3/T3
E1/T1
Ethernet

0 1
1
0

O9100
01
0
1

O9100

O9400S
01
0
1

0 1
1
0

0 1
0
1

0 1
1
0

O9400S
0 1
0
1

10/100M
Ethernet
Ethernet
Switch

E1/T1

AM3440

10/100M
Ethernet
xDSL
IP-DSLAM

E1 /T1

AM3420

E 1/T1

E1 /T1

AM 3440

E1/T1

E 3/T3
3/D S3

V4200-9

E 1/T1

V4200-28

E3/T3

V4200-28

V4200-9

Figure 1-2 Application Illustration

2

C 5500

E3/T3
C5500

E3/ T3
E1/ T1
Ethernet

CHAPTER 1 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

1.2

Specifications

Aggregate Lines - Daughter Board SFP Module Characteristics
SFP
Optical
Module
MHATW
MHBTW
PHB3W
PHB5W
PHCUW
PHCXW
PHB3D
PHB5D
PHC8D
PHCUD
PHCXD
PHCRD
PHCYD
PHCZD
PHD2W
PHE2W
PHD4W
PHE4W
PHD6W
PHE6W
PHD8W
PHE8W
PHQ8W
PHR8W
PHQXW
PHRXW
PHQRW
PHRRW
PHQYW
PHRYW
SFP
Electrical
Module
EHNAC

SFP
Optical
Module
PKB1W
PJB2W
PJB5W
PJC8W
PJB2D
PJB4D
PJB5D
PJC8D
PJCXW
PJCXD
PJCRD
PJCYD
PJD2W
PJE2W
PJD4W
PJE4W
PJD6W
PJE6W

Direction

Data Rate

Wavelength(nm)

Connector

Distance

Dual uni-directional fiber
Dual uni-directional fiber
Dual uni-directional fiber
Dual uni-directional fiber
Dual uni-directional fiber
Dual uni-directional fiber
Dual uni-directional fiber
Dual uni-directional fiber
Dual uni-directional fiber
Dual uni-directional fiber
Dual uni-directional fiber
Dual uni-directional fiber
Dual uni-directional fiber
Dual uni-directional fiber
Single bi-directional fiber
Single bi-directional fiber
Single bi-directional fiber
Single bi-directional fiber
Single bi-directional fiber
Single bi-directional fiber
Single bi-directional fiber
Single bi-directional fiber
Single bi-directional fiber
Single bi-directional fiber
Single bi-directional fiber
Single bi-directional fiber
Single bi-directional fiber
Single bi-directional fiber
Single bi-directional fiber
Single bi-directional fiber

155M
155M
155M
155M
155M
155M
155M
155M
155M
155M
155M
155M
155M
155M
155M
155M
155M
155M
155M
155M
155M
155M
155M
155M
155M
155M
155M
155M
155M
155M

850nm
1310nm
1310nm
1310nm
1550nm
1550nm
1310nm
1310nm
1550nm
1550nm
1550nm
1550nm
1550nm
1550nm
Tx 1310 nm/Rx 1550 nm
Tx 1550 nm/Rx 1310nm
Tx 1310 nm/Rx 1550nm
Tx 1550 nm/Rx 1310 nm
Tx 1310 nm/Rx 1550nm
Tx 1550 nm/Rx 1310 nm
Tx 1310 nm/Rx 1550 nm
Tx 1550 nm/Rx 1310nm
Tx 1490 nm/Rx 1570nm
Tx 1570 nm/Rx 1490 nm
Tx 1510 nm/Rx 1590nm
Tx 1590 nm/Rx 1510 nm
Tx 1510 nm/Rx 1590nm
Tx 1590 nm/Rx 1510 nm
Tx 1510 nm/Rx 1590nm
Tx 1590 nm/Rx 1510 nm

LC without DDM
LC without DDM
LC without DDM
LC without DDM
LC without DDM
LC without DDM
LC with DDM
LC with DDM
LC with DDM
LC with DDM
LC with DDM
LC with DDM
LC with DDM
LC with DDM
LC without DDM
LC without DDM
LC without DDM
LC without DDM
LC without DDM
LC without DDM
LC without DDM
LC without DDM
LC without DDM
LC without DDM
LC without DDM
LC without DDM
LC without DDM
LC without DDM
LC without DDM
LC without DDM

2 Km
2 Km
30 Km
50 Km
100 Km
120 Km
30 Km
50 Km
80 Km
100 Km
120 Km
160 Km
200 Km
240 Km
10~20 Km
10~20 Km
40 Km
40 Km
60 Km
60 Km
80 Km
80 Km
80 Km
80 Km
120 Km
120 Km
160 Km
160 Km
200 Km
200 Km

Direction

Data Rate

Wavelength(nm)

Connector

Distance

Dual uni-directional

155M

n.a.

RF connector
1.0/2.3 (75-ohm
impedance)

Direction

Data Rate

Wavelength(nm)

Connector

Distance

Dual uni-directional fiber
Dual uni-directional fiber
Dual uni-directional fiber
Dual uni-directional fiber
Dual uni-directional fiber
Dual uni-directional fiber
Dual uni-directional fiber
Dual uni-directional fiber
Dual uni-directional fiber
Dual uni-directional fiber
Dual uni-directional fiber
Dual uni-directional fiber
Single bi-directional fiber
Single bi-directional fiber
Single bi-directional fiber
Single bi-directional fiber
Single bi-directional fiber
Single bi-directional fiber

622M~1.2G
155~622M
155~622M
155~622M
155~622M
155~622M
155~622M
155~622M
155~622M
155~622M
155~622M
155~622M
155~622M
155~622M
155~622M
155~622M
155~622M
155~622M

1310nm
1310nm
1310nm
1550nm
1310nm
1310nm
1310nm
1550nm
1550nm
1550nm
1550nm
1550nm
Tx 1310 nm/Rx 1550 nm
Tx 1550 nm/Rx 1310nm
Tx 1310 nm/Rx 1550nm
Tx 1550 nm/Rx 1310 nm
Tx 1310 nm/Rx 1550nm
Tx 1550 nm/Rx 1310 nm

LC without DDM
LC without DDM
LC without DDM
LC without DDM
LC with DDM
LC with DDM
LC with DDM
LC with DDM
LC without DDM
LC with DDM
LC with DDM
LC with DDM
LC without DDM
LC without DDM
LC without DDM
LC without DDM
LC without DDM
LC without DDM

10 Km
15~20 Km
50 Km
80 Km
15~20 Km
40 Km
50 Km
80 Km
120 Km
120 Km
160 Km
200 Km
20 Km
20 Km
40 Km
40 Km
60 Km
60 Km

3

100 m

CHAPTER 1 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
PJQ8W
PJR8W
PJQXW
PJRXW
PJD2D
PJE2D
PJD4D
PJE4D
PJD6D
PJE6D

Single bi-directional fiber
Single bi-directional fiber
Single bi-directional fiber
Single bi-directional fiber
Single bi-directional fiber
Single bi-directional fiber
Single bi-directional fiber
Single bi-directional fiber
Single bi-directional fiber
Single bi-directional fiber

155~622M
155~622M
155~622M
155~622M
155~622M
155~622M
155~622M
155~622M
155~622M
155~622M

Max. Number of Cross-connect Modules
2 STM-1/4 (OC-3/12) aggregate lines
Max. Number of Tributary Modules
48 E1/T1 tributaries
2 E3/T3 tributaries
2 GbE tributaries
8 FE tributaries
Tributary Modules
E1 Interface
Line Rate
2.048 M bps ± 50 ppm

Tx 1510 nm/Rx 1590 nm
Tx 1590 nm/Rx 1510nm
Tx 1510 nm/Rx 1590nm
Tx 1590 nm/Rx 1510 nm
Tx 1310 nm/Rx 1550nm
Tx 1550 nm/Rx 1310 nm
Tx 1310 nm/Rx 1550nm
Tx 1550 nm/Rx 1310 nm
Tx 1310 nm/Rx 1550nm
Tx 1550 nm/Rx 1310 nm

80 Km
80 Km
120 Km
120 Km
20 Km
20 Km
40 Km
40 Km
60 Km
60 Km

AMI/HDB3
ITU G.703
ITU G.703

Jitter
Framing
Impedance
Connector

ETS 300 689 Sec.4.2.1.2 ITU
G.703
ITU G.823
Unframed
75 ohm coax/120 ohm twisted pair
One SCSI-II 68-pin

1.544 M bps ± 32 ppm
AMI/B8ZS
DSX-1 0dB to –6dB w/ALBO
DSX-1 w/short haul (0-133,
133-266,266-399, 399-533,
533-655 feet)

Output Mask
Jitter
Framing
Impedance
Connector

Bellcore GR-499-core
ITU G.824
Unframed
100 ohm
One SCSI-II 68-pin

E3 Interface
Line Rate

34.368 M bps ± 20ppm

Output Mask

Line Code
Input Signal
Output Signal

HDB3
ITU G.703
ITU G.703

Jitter
Framing
Connector

ETS 300 689 Sec.4.2.1.2 ITU
G.703
ITU G.823
Unframed
RF connector 1.0/2.3 (75-ohm
impedance)
75 ohm coax

Line Code
Input Signal
Output Signal

T1 Interface
Line Rate
Line Code
Input Signal
Output Signal

Output Mask

LC without DDM
LC without DDM
LC without DDM
LC without DDM
LC with DDM
LC with DDM
LC with DDM
LC with DDM
LC with DDM
LC with DDM

Impedance
T3 Interface
Line Rate
Line Code
Input Signal
Output Signal

44.736 M bps ± 20ppm
B3ZS
ITU G.703
ITU G.703

RS232 Interface
Rate
up to 19.2K bps,
Asynchronous
Fast Ethernet (FE) interface
Line Rate
10/100M bps
Layer2
Protocol

RSTP (802.1W),
VLAN (802.1Q, 802.1P)
Flow Control (802.3X)
MSTP (802.1S)

Output Mask
Jitter
Framing
Connector
Impedance

Bellcore GR-499-core
ITU G.824
Unframed
RF connector 1.0/2.3 (75-ohm
impedance)
75 ohm coax

Connector

Two ports in one DB9, female

Mapping

n x VC12, n x VC11, n x VC3 or
n x VC4
RJ45

Connector

IGMP Snooping (RFC2236)

4

CHAPTER 1 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
QoS (802.1p)
Process
Protocol

VCAT, GFP(G.7041), LAPS,
LCAS(G.7042), BCP, and
non-LCAS

Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) interface
Line Rate
10/100/1000Mbps
(1GE4NSW only supports
1000Mbps)
Layer2
RSTP (802.1W),
Protocol
VLAN (802.1Q, 802.1P)
Flow Control (802.3X)
MSTP (802.1S)
IGMP Snooping (RFC2236)
QoS (802.1p)
Process
VCAT, GFP(G.7041), LAPS,
Protocol
LCAS(G.7042), BCP,and
non-LCAS
System Clock
Clock Source

Management
LEDs
Console port

Mapping

n x VC12, n x VC11, n x VC3 or
n x VC4

Connector

RJ45

Internal clock
2 aggregate lines clocks (East STM-1/4 (OC-3/12), West STM-1/4 (OC-3/12))
3 tributary clocks
1 external input and output clock (2.048 MHz of ITU-T G.703 or E1 for STM-1/4, T1
for OC-3/12)
Multi-color LEDs
Electrical: RS232
Connector: DB9S (female, DCE)
Protocol: Menu driven VT-100

Telnet
SNMP
SNMPv1 (RFC1213)
Inband interface Using 1 E1
Outband
Using DCC channel, user selectable 3, 9 or 12 channels
interface
Diagnostics
Mainboard
Loopback Test
BERT Test

Direction: to optical lines, to tributary lines
Optical interface
Direction: to optical lines

TE1 card
Loopback Test
BERT Test

Direction: to optical lines, to tributary lines
TE1 interface
Direction: to optical lines, to tributary lines

TE3 card
Loopback Test
BERT Test

Direction: to optical lines, to tributary lines
TE3 interface
Direction: to optical lines, to tributary lines

Performance Monitor
Performance
Performance Parameters: Error Block (EB), Background Block Error (BBE), Error
Reports
Second (ES), Burst Error Second (BES), Severe Error Second (SES), Unavailable
Second (UAS)
Alarm History

System Alarm

Alarm Cut Off, Power Loss, TS Sync Loss, SNCP Switch,
MSP Switch, Login/Logout, FOM Equip/Unequip, SFP Tx
Fail, SFP Rx Fail, SFP Temperature

SDH/SONET
Line Alarm

SDH

Line

5

PI-LOS, RS-LOF, RS-TIM, RS-BIP
UAS, MS-SD, MS-SF, MS-AIS, MSRDI, MS-BIP UAS, MS-REI UAS

CHAPTER 1 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

SONET

Ho-Path

AU-LOP, AU-AIS, HP-SD, HP-SF, HPTIM, HP-UNEQ, HP-PLM, HP-RDI-S,
HP-RDI-C, HP-RDI-P, HP-BIP UAS,
HP-REI UAS, LOM

Lo-Path

TU-LOP, TU-AIS, LP-SD, LP-SF

Line

LOS-PI, LOF-S, TIM-S, BIP-S UAS,
SD-L , SF-L , IS-L , RDI-L , BIP-L UAS,
REI-L UAS

STS-Path LOP-P, AIS-P, SD-P, SF-P, TIM-P,
UNEQ-P, PLM-P, RDI-S-P, RDI-C-P,
RDI-P-P, BIP-P UAS, REI-P UAS,
LOM
Alarm Queue

VT-Path LOP-V, AIS-V, SD-V, SF-V
Contains up to 200 alarm records of latest alarm types, alarm severity, date and
time.

Power
AC module
DC module
AC and DC coexistent module
Power Consumption

Physical and Environmental
Dimensions for 1u
Temperature
Humidity
Mounting
Standards Compliance
ITU

100 to 240 Vac, 50/60Hz
-48 Vdc (-36 to -75 Vdc)
100 to 240 Vac, 50/60Hz, -36 to -75 Vdc
DC: Max 39.6 W
AC: Max 43.9 W
DC & AC: Max 47.1 W

432 x 44x 240 mm. (W x H x D)
0 to 50°C
0-95%RH (non-condensing)
19 inch rack mountable, and wall mountable

G.664, G.707, G.7041, G.7042, G.775, G.783, G.806, G.823,
G.747, X.86

ANSI

T1.105, T1.107

IEEE

802.1q (VLAN), 802.1w (RSTP), 802.1s (MSTP), 802.1ad (stack
VLAN),
802.3x (flow control), 802.1p (QoS)

IETF

Certification
EMC
EMI
Safety

RFC2236 (IGMP Snooping), RFC1213 (SNMPv1)

EN55024
EN55022 Class A, FCC Part 15 Class A, EN55024
EN60950-1, IEC60950-1

6

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION

2 INSTALLATION
2.1

Site Preparation

Ensure that your installation site conforms to all environmental and structural regulations. A
power supply must be available that conforms to the O9400S power requirements. It is
recommended that a minimum bay access of 500mm be provided.

2.2

Mechanical Installation

Wear a grounding wrist strap while installing the Loop equipment. Familiarize yourself
with the instructions in this manual before commencing any work.
2.2.1 Installation Overview
The O9400S will fit in 485 mm (19-in.) equipment racks, and can be adapted for 600 mm ETSI
(23.6-in.) racks. The racks must be accessible from the front and rear for equipment
installation. You must allow at least 500mmm of space for this.
2.2.2 Power
The O9400S can be powered using 100 to 240 Vac, 50/60Hz or -48 Vdc
(-36 to -75 Vdc). The power connection is illustrated in Figure 2-1, below.

Figure 2-1 Power Connection

7

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION

2.2.3 Chassis Grounding
The chassis is grounded when rack mounted. However, if extra grounding protection for rack
mounted units is desired, a dedicated chassis ground screw and lock washer is provided. The
chassis ground screw for the O9400S is located in the right hand corner of the front panel.

Figure 2-2 Ground Screw Location

y
y
y
y

When attaching a ground wire to the chassis ground screw, please follow these
instructions.
Use copper grounding conductors of 18 AWG
Conductors should not be of dissimilar metals.
The bare conductors should be coated with anti-oxidant before crimp connections are
made.
Any unplated connection surfaces, connectors, braided strap and bus bars must be
bought to a bright finish and coated with anti-oxidant before connections are made.

2.2.4 Power Connection
The power connection on your unit will be one of the following:
• Single AC plug-in power supply module (100 to 240 Vac, 50/60Hz) with
three-pronged head.
• Single DC plug-in power supply module -48 Vdc (-36 to -75 Vdc) with three-pin block
• Fixed AC/DC power supply (100 to 240 Vac, 50/60Hz) / -48 Vdc (-36 to -75 Vdc) with
three-pronged head.and three-pin block
The power switch should be in the OFF position while you connect the power source.
Caution: Do not (under any circumstances) connect the O9400S-1US4 device to
a power source that is inconsistent with the power rating labeled on the
rear of the device. Do not (under any circumstances) remove the power
module from the O9400S-1US4 device while it is connected to a live
power source. Disconnect the module from the power source before
removing it from the O9400S-1US4 device.

2.2.5 Fiber Optic Line Connections
To install fiber-optic cables in the O9400S, connect a fiber cable with SC or SFP type
connectors to the transmit and receive ports of the transmission system. It is a good idea
to label the transmit and receive fibers at each end of the fiber span to avoid confusion
with cables that are similar in appearance.

8

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION

2.2.6 Console Port
The RS232 interface for O9400S is provided via a DB-9 connector, with the following
pin-out:
Table 2-1 DB9 Console Port Pinout Table
DB9 Console Port Pinout Table
Pin
Signal
1
DCD
2
TXD
3
RXD
4
NC
5
GND
6
DSR
7
NC
8
CTS
9
NC

2.2.7 Main Module
The main module is optical aggregate STM-1/4. Please refer to Section 1.3, (Specifications)
for more information. Note: The term STM-1 also refers to OC-3.
.
2.2.8 Tributary Modules
Available tributary modules include E1, T1, T3, E3 and Ethernet. Please refer to Section 1.3,
(Specifications) for more information.
2.2.9 Interfaces
The O9400S interface block diagram is shown in Figure 2-3, below.

STM-1/4
(OC-3/12)

VC11 / 12 & VC3 / 4
XC Fabric

E3 / T3

FE / GBE

E 1/ T1

Figure 2-3 Interface Block Diagram

9

STM-1/4
(OC-3/12)

CHAPTER 3 INTERFACES

3 INTERFACES
3.1

Power Supply

The O9400S supports various power supply interfaces:
• Single AC plug-in power supply module (100 to 240 Vac, 50/60Hz)
• Single DC plug-in power supply module -48 Vdc (-36 to -75 Vdc)
• Fixed AC/DC power supply (100 to 240 Vac, 50/60Hz) / -48 Vdc (-36 to-75 Vdc)
3.1.1 Power module, -48V DC
The -48V DC supply input is provided via a 3 pin power connector with the following pin-out:
Table 3-1 Pin-out for -48 DC Connector
Pin-out for -48 DC
Pin
Signal
+

+48

-

-48V
GND

The -48V DC input conforms to the specifications given in the table below.
Table 3-2 Electrical Specifications for DC Compliance
Electrical Specifications for DC Module Compliance
Parameter
Limit
Input power dissipation
Fuse
Battery voltage range

Less than 37W
3.15A
-36 to -75V

Table 3-3 Power Supply Compliance
Power Supply Compliance
Standard

Comment

EN/IEC 60950

Safety General information

ETS 300 132-2

Power supply interface at the input to the
telecommunication equipment; Part 2: Operated at DC

ETS 300 253

Grounding and bonding of telecommunication
equipment in telecommunication centers

10

CHAPTER 3 INTERFACES

3.1.2 Power module, 100~240 Vac
• Single AC plug-in power supply module (100 to 240 Vac, 50/60Hz)
Connection
Power supply cord (2.5m) with safety ground.

Table 3-4 Electrical Specifications for AC
Electrical Specifications for AC Module
Parameter

Limit

Power dissipation

34 Watts

Fuse

2A

Output power

36.3 Watts

Table 3-5 AC Compliance
Standard
EN/IEC 60950-1
ETS 300 253

Comment
Single phase 100 to 240 Vac, 50/60Hz AC mains
supply
Grounding and bonding of telecommunication
equipment in telecommunication centers

3.2

ALARM INTERFACE

3.2.1 Description
The O9400S provides facilities to report a minimum of 4 auxiliary alarm inputs for
associated equipment, e.g. power unit failure battery condition, cabinet door etc. and
4 dedicated alarm outputs. The alarm outputs are related to the unit alarm indicator
and the traffic alarm indicator. The input alarms are reported to the management
system and are activated by a closed or open Loop condition between a pair of
contacts.

11

CHAPTER 3 INTERFACES
Connectors
The alarm input interface connector is a RJ-45 connector. The pin-out is defined in the table
below.
Table 3-6 Pin-out for Alarm Input Connector
Pin-out for Alarm Input Connector
Pin

Signal

1

Alarm input 1 ground

2

Alarm input 1 power

3

Alarm input 2 ground

4

Alarm input 2 power

5

Alarm input 3 ground

6

Alarm input 3 power

7

Alarm input 4 ground

8

Alarm input 4 power

The alarm output interface connector is a RJ-45 connector, with the pin-out defined in the
table below.
Table 3-7 Pin-out for Alarm Output Connector
Pin-out for Alarm Output Connector
Pin

3.2.2

Signal

1

Critical alarm output pin 1

2

Critical alarm output pin 2

3

Major alarm output pin 1

4

Major alarm output pin 2

5

Minor alarm output pin 1

6

Minor alarm output pin 2

7

Information alarm output pin 1

8

Information alarm output pin 2

Electrical Parameters Alarm Input
Table 3-8 Electrical Specifications at Alarm Input
Electrical Specifications at Alarm Input
Parameter
Value

Nominal open contact voltage
Nominal closed contact current
Max. closed contact resistance
Min. open contact resistance

12

5V
5 mA
33 ohm
10k ohm

CHAPTER 3 INTERFACES
3.2.3

Electrical Parameters Alarm Output
Table 3-9 Electrical Specifications at Alarm Output
Electrical Specifications at Alarm Output
Parameter
Value
Maximum switching voltage
110 V DC, 125 V AC

Maximum switching current
Initial surge voltage Between open contacts
Maximum contact resistance

3.3

1A
1,500 V (FCC Part 68)
100mΩ

VT-100 TERMINAL INTERFACE

3.3.1 Description
The O9400S offers an interface for connecting a VT-100 monitor. The interface is runs at
a data rate of 9600 baud
3.3.2 Connector
The RS232 interface for O9400S is provided via a DB-9 connector, with the following
pin-out:

Table 3-10 Pin-out for VT-100 Connector

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

3.3.3

Pin-out for VT-100 Connector
Pin
Signal
DCD
TXD
RXD
NC
GND
DSR
NC
CTS
NC

Compliance
Table 3-11 RS-232 Interface Compliance
RS-232 Interface Compliance
Standard
Comment

EIA RS-232

Physical interface

13

CHAPTER 3 INTERFACES

3.4

System Timing Sources and Connector

Loop-O9400-S
Loop-O9400S

West STM-1/4
(OC-3/12)
Line Clock (SSM)

East STM-1/4
(OC-3/12)
Line Clock (SSM)

Internal

External Timing
(Fixed Clock Quality
Setting)

1 out of 3 Tributary Clocks
(Fixed Clock Quality
Setting)

Figure 3-1 Timing Inputs for the O9400S

As illustrated in the figure above, the timing sources for the O9400S are:
Internal clock
West STM-1/4 (OC-3/12) Line clock
East STM-1/4 (OC-3/12) Line clock
1 External Clock
3 Tributary clocks
The accuracy of the Internal Clock is 4.6 ppm.
The external timing can be:
SDH:
E1-CRC, E1-FAS, 2MHz
SONET: T1-ESF, T1-D4, 2 MHz
Per G.811, the clock quality can be distributed to and derived from the East STM-1/4 (OC3/12) Line and West STM-1/4 (OC-3/12) Line by using SSM (Synchronization Status
Message) over S1 byte. The SSM message is carried over S1 bytes on the two STM-1/4
(OC-3/12) aggregate lines. For External Timing interfaces and Tributary Timing interfaces,
the SSM messaging of clock quality is not supported. Instead, the clock quality of External
Timing and Tributary Timing are user configurable and static once set. In summary, the clock
sources with SSM support (East STM-1/4 (OC-3/12) Line & West STM-1/4 (OC-3/12) Line)
are defined as Dynamic-Quality Clock Group. While the clock sources (External timing,
Tributary timing, & Internal timing) with fixed clock quality are defined as Fixed-Quality Clock
Group
Note: Optionally, the system can be dynamically locked to a clock source based on the
quality, either of dynamic or of fixed type, of the enabled clock sources.
In addition to clock quality, the O9400S accept user programmable priority setting for each
clock input.
Note: Optionally, the O9400S can also do clock selection strictly based on the priorities set by
the user.
In summary, there are 3 clock selection modes supported on O9400S. They are listed below.

14

CHAPTER 3 INTERFACES


Strictly Priority Based Revertive Î denoted as Revertive mode
Strictly Priority Based Nonrevertive Î Denoted as Non-Revertive mode
SSM + Priority Î SSM mode

If Revertive is chosen as the clock selection mode, then the system clock selection will be
strictly based on the availability and priority of each interface. When a valid clock with the
highest priority among the available clocks, then it will be chosen. The clock quality will be
ignored in this mode. Obviously, Revertive means the clock source will be switch back to the
interface of higher priority when it’s recovered from failure. If all the clock inputs become
unavailable, then the system will enter Clock Hold-over mode.
If Non-Revertive is chosen as the clock selection mode, then the behavior will be exactly the
same as Revertive mode, except the switch back activity, described above. Even though a
clock input with higher priority is recovered from failure, the system clock source will NOT be
switch from existing locked source with lower priority to the higher one.
If the SSM clock mode is chosen, then the clock source selection decision will be based on
• the SSM clock quality received from East and West STM-1/4 (OC-3/12) lines.
• the clock quality of the clock source with highest priority, if any, within the Fixed-Quality
Clock Group
The O9400S system will be locked to the clock input with higher clock quality (lower value).
Note: Hold-over means that when clock loss occurs, the PLL (Phase Lock Loop) will
synchronize clock phases so no data glitches occur during clock reference switchover from
primary to secondary or vise versa.
3.4.1 Connectors
External timing input and output is provided on 8 pin RJ-45 connector, with the
following pin-out:
Table 3-12 Pin-out for Synchronization Port

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

3.4.2

Pin-out for Synchronization Port
Pin
Signal
Sync input +
Sync input NC
Sync output +
Sync output -

NC

GND
GND

Compliance
Table 3-13 Synchronization Interface Compliance
Synchronization Interface Compliance
Standard
Comment

ETS 300 246
ETS 300 247
ETS 300 011
ETS 300 126
ITU-T G.703

Connector
Connector
Impedance towards ground
Output signal balance
Cable attenuation

15

CHAPTER 3 INTERFACES

3.5

16 E1/T1

3.5.1 Brief description
The tributaries on the main board unit are classified as the 1st Tributary Group.
E1/T1are the only interface types available on the main board unit. The interface type is
software readable. Only short-haul E1/T1 interface is required. The E1 and T1 are
configurable through software.
Depending upon manufacturing options there are Nx E1/T1 ports available, where N=16, 8,
0.
When N=0, there are two possibilities as listed below:
(a). Regenerator case or (b) only Adding/dropping traffic from the 2nd Tributary group.
Intra-building lightening protection circuit is supported for all E1/T1 ports.
3.5.2 Power consumption
Total power consumption => Up to 16 ports Max. 3.1W
3.5.3 Connector type
The 16xE1/T1 card for O9400S is provided via one SCSI Ⅱconnector, with the
following pin-out:

Table 3-14 Pin-out for SCSI Ⅱ Connector
E1/T1
Port Number
(Port 1-16)
1

2

3

4

5

6
7

SCSI 68
Pin Number

E1
Signal

15
16
49
50
13
14
47
48
11
12
45
46
9
10
43
44
7
8
41
42
5
6
39
40
3

Tx Tip
Tx Ring
Rx Tip
RX Ring
Tx Tip
Tx Ring
Rx Tip
RX Ring
Tx Tip
Tx Ring
Rx Tip
RX Ring
Tx Tip
Tx Ring
Rx Tip
RX Ring
Tx Tip
Tx Ring
Rx Tip
RX Ring
Tx Tip
Tx Ring
Rx Tip
RX Ring
Tx Tip

16

CHAPTER 3 INTERFACES
E1/T1
Port Number
(Port 1-16)

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

SCSI 68
Pin Number

E1
Signal

4
37
38
1
2
35
36
31
32
65
66
29
30
63
64
27
28
61
62
25
26
59
60
23
24
57
58
21
22
55
56
19
20
53
54
17
18
51
52

Tx Ring
Rx Tip
RX Ring
Tx Tip
Tx Ring
Rx Tip
RX Ring
Tx Tip
Tx Ring
Rx Tip
RX Ring
Tx Tip
Tx Ring
Rx Tip
RX Ring
Tx Tip
Tx Ring
Rx Tip
RX Ring
Tx Tip
Tx Ring
Rx Tip
RX Ring
Tx Tip
Tx Ring
Rx Tip
RX Ring
Tx Tip
Tx Ring
Rx Tip
RX Ring
Tx Tip
Tx Ring
Rx Tip
RX Ring
Tx Tip
Tx Ring
Rx Tip
RX Ring

Note: Loop E1/T1 products use SCSI-68 pin connectors with two hexagonal stand-off screws
as shown in the photo below. The nut portion of the stand-off screw has an inside diameter of
2.2 mm. It is not a standard size for most cable connectors.

Figure 3-2 Loop SCSI Connector

17

CHAPTER 3 INTERFACES
In order to use standard, commercially available cable connectors, you must replace the
stand-off screws with the screws in this package. The nut portion of these screws has an
inside diameter of 2.6 mm.
3.5.4

Compliance
Table 3-15 16 E1 interface Compliance
Standard
ETS 300 011

Impedance towards ground
Tolerable longitudinal voltage

ETS 300 126

Output signal balance

ITU-T G.703

Cable attenuation
Input reflection loss
Input port immunity against reflection
Output pulse mask
Output jitter in the absence of input jitter
Output combined jitter

ITU-T G.783

3.5.5

16 E1 interface Compliance
Comment

Functional Block Diagram
30x3 Header
Pitch:2.54mm

Microprocess
or
Interface

SCSI II
68-Pins

Transformer

LIU

E1/T1
Mapper

Telecom
Bus

Interrupt
Equipment

Figure 3-3 16 E1 Block Diagram

18

CHAPTER 3 INTERFACES

3.6

E3/T3 Interface Card

3.6.1 Brief description
The tributaries on the main board unit are classified as the 2nd and 3rd Tributary Group.
E3/T3 are the only interface types available on the daughter board unit. The interface type is
software readable and configurable. The board provides 3 ports DS3/E3 for O9400S. The port
can be configured to be either DS3 or E3. The E3 can be mapped into STM-1/TUG-3. The
DS3 can be mapped into either STM-1/TUG-3 or STS-3/STS-1.
3.6.2 Power consumption
Total power consumption => Up to 3 ports Max. 4.2W
3.6.3

Connector type

The connector type is RF.

Figure 3-4 Loop RF Connector
3.6.4

Compliance
Table 3-16 E3/DS3 Interface Compliance
Standard

E3/DS3 Interface Compliance
Comment

ITU-T G.823

E3 Outuput Jitter/Input Jitter Tolerance

ITU-T G.824

DS3 Output Jitter/ Input Jitter Tolerance

ITU-T G.703
Bellcore GR-499

E3 Pulse Mask.
DS3 Pulse Mask.

19

CHAPTER 3 INTERFACES

3.6.5

Functional Block Diagram

Figure 3-5 E3/DS3 Block Diagram

20

CHAPTER 3 INTERFACES

3.7

RS232 x 2

3.7.1 Brief description
This RS232x2 function is on the O9400S main-board. Both Revertive or Non-Revertive 1+1
protection are supported. There are up to 31 channels per E1, where n = 1~31.
3.7.2 Power consumption
Total power consumption => 0.4W
3.7.3 Connector type
The RS232x2 for O9400S is provided via one DB9 connector, with the following pin-out:
Table 3-17 Pin-out for 2*RS232 Connector
Pin-out for 2*RS232 Connector
Pin

Signal

1

RS232_TXD1

2

RS232_RXD1

3

GND

4

NC

5

RS232_TXD2

6

RS232_RXD2

7

GND

8

NC

9

NC

Note: Pins 1~4 and pins 5~8 are referred to as Port-1 and Port-2 respectively on the O9400S
device.
3.7.4

Compliance
Table 3-18 RS232 Interface Compliance
RS232 Interface Compliance
Standard

Comment

RS-232-C

RS-232 protocol

21

CHAPTER 3 INTERFACES
3.7.5

Functional Block Diagram

Digital Interface
TCLK1

Digital Interface

TXD1

SDH
component

RCLK1

TXD1

RXD1

RXD1

FPGA
TCLK2

TXD2

TXD2

RXD2

RCLK2
RXD2

Figure 3-6 RS232x2 Block Diagram

22

Analog Interface
TXD1

RS232
LIU

RXD1

DB9
TXD2
RXD2

CHAPTER 3 INTERFACES

3.8

Ethernet Interface

3.8.1 Brief Description
Two types of Ethernet interface cards are available – Ethernet card with switch and Ethernet
card without switch. Please refer to section 7.4 on page 293 for information on card types and
functions.
3.8.1.1 Ethernet Interface with Switch
The EoS module with L2 switch can be ordered with an uplink speed of 1 GbE or 4/8 100
Mbps.
Fast Ethernet Interface with Switch (1GbE + 3 FE)
LAN1~3 are FE interfaces
LAN4 is a GbE interface
WAN1~8 available (maximum bandwidth of 100Mbps per WAN)

Figure 3-7 Fast Ethernet Interface with Switch

LAN
1
LAN
2

FE Phy.
Switch

LAN
3

LAN
4

Ethernet
Mapper

Telecom
Bus

GE Phy.

Figure 3-8 Fast Ethernet (FE) with Switch Block Diagram

23

CHAPTER 3 INTERFACES
Giga Ethernet Interface with Switch (1GbE + 3 FE)
LAN1~3 are FE interfaces
LAN4 is a GbE interface
WAN1 available only (maximum bandwidth is 622Mbps)

Figure 3-9 Giga Ethernet Interface with Switch

LAN
1
LAN
2

FE Phy.

LAN
3

LAN
4

Switch

Ethernet
Mapper

Telecom
Bus

GE Phy.

Figure 3-10 Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) with Switch Block Diagram

24

CHAPTER 3 INTERFACES
3.8.1.2

Ethernet Interface without Switch

The Eternet interface without a switch can be ordered as either Fast Ethernet or Giga
Ethernet.
The differences are explained below.
Fast Ethernet Interface without Switch (4 FE)
LAN1~4 are FE interfaces

Figure 3-11 Fast Ethernet Interface without Switch

Figure 3-12 Fast Ethernet (FE) without Switch Block Diagram

25

CHAPTER 3 INTERFACES
Giga Ethernet Interface without Switch (1GbE)
LAN1 is a GbE interface

Figure 3-13 Giga Ethernet Interface without Switch

WAN Side

LAN Side

LAN
14

Ethernet
Mapper

GE Phy.

Telecom
Bus

Figure 3-14 Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) without Switch Block Diagram

3.8.2

Power Consumption
Table 3-19 Ethernet Switch Power Consumption

Item
O9400S startup with Ethernet
SW
add one optical module
add a second optical module
net 4 port linkup and run traffic

Power Consumption
27.1 W
28.3 W
29.1 W
31.8 W

26

Note
These figures are for a
device using single DC
power.

CHAPTER 4 OPERATION
3.8.3

RJ45 Connector

The Ethernet Port Interface has an RJ-45 connector. The pinouts are listed below.
Table 3-20 RJ-45 Pinout for Ethernet Port
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

RJ-45 Pinout for Ethernet Port
Signal
Signal Direction
Transmit Data +
Output from O9400S
Transmit Data Output from O9400S
Receive Data +
Input to O9400S
No Connection
No Connection
Receive Data Input to O9400S
No Connection
No Connection

27

CHAPTER 4 OPERATION

4 OPERATION
4.1

SYSTEM

4.1.1 Introduction
The system module contains the processor system for the O9400S.
The module supports a serial RS-232/VT100 interface for local access. A VT100 terminal
can be used for initial configuration. The module also supports a 10/100Base-T LAN
interface used for management purposes.
The module contains the local synchronization interface for the O9400S. This interface is
directly connected to the SETS functionality on the motherboard. The module also provides
ten LEDs to indicate the status of the O9400S. The LED's are visible at the front of the
O9400S.
4.1.2 Technical overview
4.1.2.1
Management port
A local Ethernet port (10/100BaseT), called the Management Port, is available for
connecting to a management DCN. The management signals goes to an Ethernet
Controller in the MPC852 processor situated on the module.
4.1.2.2
VT100 Port
The O9400S offers a VT-100 interface for connection of Terminal/CLI interface. The interface
is running at a data rate of 1.2K to 38.4K.
4.1.2.3
Clock Source
System clock sources (both in and out) are as follows: Internal clock, East STM-1/4 (OC-3/12)
line clock, West STM-1/4 (OC-3/12) line clock, one external clock, three tributary clocks. For
further clock source details please refer to Section 3.4, System Timing Sources and
Connector, in this manual.
4.1.2.4 Power
The voltages are generated on board with the exception of the 3.3V that comes directly from
the power module(s). The power consumption should not exceed 18.9W.
Reset – If the O9400S system is not active, it should be reset.
4.1.2.5 LEDs
The front panel of the O9400S has multi-color LEDs for operation and error indications. The
indication is either off, steady on, or flickering. The following table lists each LED and its color
and the meaning it represents. Note that when powering up and the selftest is in progress,
the unit front panel LEDs are also used to indicate fault conditions.

28

CHAPTER 4 OPERATION

Table 4-1 LED Indication for Main Unit
LED
POWER
ACTIVE

ALM

Color

Indication

Off

Power off or self-test failure

Green

Normal operation

Off

CPU fails

Flashing Green Normal

Off

This LED is used to indicate SDH/SONET alarm status. LP-TIM, LPUNEQ, LP-PLM, LP-RDI, LP-BIP, LP-REI, E1/T1-LOS, and E1/T1-AIS are
indicated only when TSA assigned.
Alarm is disabled

Red

Critical alarm or Major alarm occurs

Amber

Minor alarm occurs

Green

Normal, alarm informative message occurs
This LED is used to indicate the status of 1st east-side trunk module

Ea
Off

Trunk module is not installed or not be used by a selected system mode

Green

Normal

Red

Loss of frame (LOF) or Loss of signal (LOS)

Amber

Alarm indication signal (MS-AIS) or Remote defect indication (MS-RDI)

Flashing Amber Loopback or diagnostics
This LED is used to indicate the status of 2nd east-side trunk module

Eb
Off

Trunk module is not installed or not be used by a selected system mode

Green

Normal

Red

Loss of frame (LOF) or Loss of signal (LOS)

Amber

Alarm indication signal (MS-AIS) or Remote defect indication (MS-RDI)

Flashing Amber Loopback or diagnostics
This LED is used to indicate the status of 1st west-side trunk module

Wa
Off

Trunk module is not installed or not in use by a selected system mode

Green

Normal

Red

Loss of frame (LOF) or Loss of signal (LOS)

Amber

Alarm indication signal (MS-AIS) or Remote defect indication (MS-RDI)

Flashing Amber Loopback or diagnostics
ACO

Off

Normal

Red

Alarm occurs (For any alarm type)

Table 4-2 LED Indication for System Mode
System Mode
TM 1+1
2TM
ADM

Ea

Eb

Wa

ON
ON
ON

ON
OFF
OFF

OFF
ON
ON

Note: for ON, the LED color could be green, red, or amber.

29

CHAPTER 4 OPERATION
Table 4-3 LED Indications for E1/T1, E3/T3, Ethernet Cards
E1/T1 Single LED

Color

Indication

Off
Red
Amber
Green
Flashing Amber

This LED is used to indicate the alarm status of E1/T1:
TU-LOP,TU-AIS,LP-TIM,LP-UNEQ,LP-PLM,LP-RDI,LPBIP,LP-REI,E1/T1-LOS,and E1/T1-AIS (only when TSA
assigned)
No TSA assigned
Critical alarm or Major alarm occurs
Minor alarm occurs
Normal or Alarm informative message occurs
Loopback or diagnostics

E1/T1 LED

E3/T3 Single LED
E3/T3 LED

Color

Indication
This LED is used to indicate the alarm status of E3/T3:
LOP, AIS, TIM, UNEQ, PLM, RDI, BIP, REI, E3/T3LOS, and E3/T3-AIS (only when TSA assigned)

Off
Red
Amber

No TSA assigned
Critical alarm or Major alarm occurs
Minor alarm occurs

Green
Flashing Amber

Normal or Alarm informative message occurs
Loopback or diagnostics

Giga Ethernet without Switch (1GE4NSW Card)
LED
Color
Indication
Red
TG init fail /Critical or major alarms occur
ACT

ACT

Amber
Green
Off
Amber
Off

TG is initializing/Minor alarms occur
TG init OK/ Informative alarms occur
Unsync or link down
Link speed 1000M
No TX/RX Data

DUP

Blinking Green
Off

TX/RX Data
Link down

Green

Full duplex

G
P1

Fast Ethernet Without Switch (4FE4NSW)
LED
Color
ACT

10/100
P1
ACT

10/100
P2
ACT
10/100
P3
ACT
P4

10/100
ACT

Red
Amber
Green
Off
Green
Off
Green
Blinking Green
Off
Green
OFF
Green
Blinking Green
OFF
Green
OFF
Green
Blinking Green
OFF
Green
OFF
Green
Blinking Green

Indication

TG init fail /Critical or major alarms occur
TG is initializing/Minor alarms occur
TG init OK/ Informative alarms occur
Link speed 10M
Link speed 100M
Link down
Link up
TX/RX Data
Link speed 10M
Link speed 100M
Link down
Link up
TX/RX Data
Link speed 10M
Link speed 100M
Link down
Link up
TX/RX Data
Link speed 10M
Link speed 100M
Link down
Link up
TX/RX Data

30

CHAPTER 4 OPERATION
Fast Ethernet Switch & Giga Ethernet Switch (4EoS1SW/4EoS6SW)
LED
ACT

P4 LINK

ACT
P1
A10/100
ACT
P2
10/100
ACT
P3
10/100
P4

ACT
DUP

Color
Red
Amber
Green

Indication
TG init fail /Critical or major alarms occur
TG is initializing/Minor alarms occur
TG init OK/ Informative alarms occur

Off
Amber
Green
Off
Off
Blinking Green
Off
Green
Off
Blinking Green
Off
Green

Link down
Link speed 1G
Link speed 100M
Link speed 10M
Link down
Data TX/RX
Link speed 10M
Link speed 100M
Link down
Data TX/RX
Link speed 10M
Link speed 100M

Off
Blinking Green
Off

Link down
Data TX/RX
Link speed 10M

Green

Link speed 100M

Off
Blinking Green
Off
Green

Link down
Data TX/RX
Half-Duplex
Full-Duplex

Note: 1GE4NSW card only supports 1000 M Full duplex.

31

CHAPTER 4 OPERATION

4.2

External Alarms

The O9400S provides facilities to report four auxiliary alarm inputs for associated
equipment, e.g. power module failure, battery condition, open cabinet door etc. It also
supports two alarm outputs used to signal equipment alarms and traffic related alarms.
The alarm input/output connector is placed on the fan unit front cover.

32

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS

5 System Operations
The O9400S provides comprehensive report and configuration capability through the console
port. By using single-character commands and arrow keys, the O9400S can be configured
and monitored through the use of a VT-100 terminal. The single-character commands are not
case sensitive, except for when using a password. On each screen, the available commands
and the configurable fields are highlighted.
When a VT-100 terminal is connected to the CONSOLE port of the O9400S, a main menu is
displayed on the VT-100 monitor. The main menu consists of four groups of commands,
DISPLAY, LOG, SETUP, and MISC. All commands are detailed in the VT-100 Main Menu
Tree illustrations below.
This chapter provides detailed setup instructions. After connecting your VT-100 monitor to
the Loop device, your first setup steps should be as follows:
1. Log on and set up your password (see Section 5.1 Logon and Password Setup)
2. Set your system to SDH or SONET (see Section 5.14 SDH/SONET System Mode
Setup)

VT-100 Main Menu
Tree Overview

[SETUP]

[DISPLAY]
C > System Config Display

S > System Config Setup
D > SDH/SONET Config Setup

I > System Information
B > SDH/SONET Config Display

M > Alarm Setup

Q > Alarm Queue

V > Store/Retrieve Backup Config

T > System Log Information

L > File Transfer

A > SDH/SONET Alarm Status

R > Performance Setup/Clear

P > SDH/SONET Performance

[MISC]

[LOG]
F > Log off

Y > Alarm Cut off

O > Log on

Z > System Reset
X > Clear Alarm Queue

U > Choose a Unit

W > Return to Default

Figure 5-1 VT-100 Main Menu Tree Overview

33

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS

VT-100 Menu Tree
LOG and MISC Sections

[LOG]

[MISC]

F > Log off

Y > Alarm Cutoff

O > Logon

Z > System Reset

U>

X >

Clear Alarm Queue

W >

Return to Default

Choose a Unit

[Display]
N > E 1 /T 1 Mode Display

A

> Line Coding Display

D > Line Config Display

B

> Low - Order Path Overhead Display

S > Unit Diagnostics
.
Display

C

> Customer Information Display

A

> Currently-Active Alarm Summary

B

> Unit Alarm Status

H > E1/ T1 SNCP Status
A > Current Alarm Status
P>

Unit Performance
1 > 01-Hour Performance

[Log]

2 > 24-Hour Performance

F > Log Off

3 > 07-Day Performance

O > Log On
U > Choose a Unit
E > Return to Main Menu
[ Setup]
T > E1/T1 Mode Setup
C > Line Config Setup
G > Unit Diagnostics Setup

A > Line Coding Setup
B > Low- Order Path Overhead Setup
C > Customer Information Setup
A > Channel Looback Setup
B > Channel Diagnostics Setup

K > SNCP User Command
M > Unit Alarm Setup
R > Performance Setup/Clear
[ Misc]

A > Unit Alarm Mask/Relay Setup
B > Unit Alarm Severity Setup
A > Clear Performance Data
B > Performance Threshold Setup

X > Clear Unit Alarm Queue
W > Unit Load Default & Reset

Figure 5-2 VT-100 E1 Menu Tree – LOG and MISC Sections

34

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS

VT-100 Menu Tree
LOG and MISC Sections

[LOG]

[MISC]

F > Log off

Y > Alarm Cutoff

O > Logon

Z > System Reset

U>

X >

Clear Alarm Queue

W >

Return to Default

Choose a Unit

[Display]
N > E 1 /T 1 Mode Display

A

> Line Coding Display

D > Line Config Display

B

> Low - Order Path Overhead Display

S > Unit Diagnostics
.
Display

C
D

> TU11/TU12 Mapping Mode Display
> Customer Information Display

A

> Currently-Active Alarm Summary

B

> Unit Alarm Status

H > E1/ T1 SNCP Status
A > Current Alarm Status
P>

Unit Performance
1 > 01-Hour Performance

[Log]

2 > 24-Hour Performance

F > Log Off

3 > 07-Day Performance

O > Log On
U > Choose a Unit
E > Return to Main Menu
[ Setup]
T > E1/T1 Mode Setup
C > Line Config Setup
G > Unit Diagnostics Setup

A > Line Coding Setup
B > Low-Order Path Overhead Setup
C > TU11/TU12 Mapping Mode Setup
D > Customer Information Setup
A > Channel Looback Setup
B > Channel Diagnostics Setup

K > SNCP User Command
M > Unit Alarm Setup
R > Performance Setup/Clear
[ Misc]

A > Unit Alarm Mask/Relay Setup
B > Unit Alarm Severity Setup
A > Clear Performance Data
B > Performance Threshold Setup

X > Clear Unit Alarm Queue
W > Unit Load Default & Reset

Figure 5-3 VT-100 T1 Menu Tree – LOG and MISC Sections

35

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS

Figure 5-4 VT-100 E3 Menu Tree – LOG and MISC Sections

36

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS

VT- 100 Menu Tree
LOG and MISC Sections

[LOG]

[MISC]

F > Log off

Y

>

Alarm Cutoff

O > Logon

Z

>

System Reset

U>

X

>

Clear Alarm Queue

Choose a Unit

[Display]
A

W > Return to Default
> Line Transmit Length Display

D > Line Config Display

B

>

S > Unit Diagnostics Display

C
D

> Mapping Mode Display
> Customer Information Display

N > E3/T3 Mode Display

H > E3/T3 SNCP Status

SDH/ SONET Path Overhead Display

A > Currently - Active Alarm Summary

A > Current Alarm Status

B > Unit Alarm Status

P > Unit Performance
1 > 01-Hour Performance

[Log]
F >

Log Off

2 > 24-Hour Performance
3 > 07-Day Performance

O > Log On
U > Choose a Unit
E > Return to Main Menu
[Setup]
T > E3 /T 3 Mode Setup
C > Line Config Setup
G > Unit Diagnostics Setup

A > Line Transmit Length Setup
B > Mapping Mode Setup
C > SDH/ SONET Path Overhead Setup
D > Customer Information Setup
A > Channel Looback Setup
B > Channel Diagnostics Setup

K > SNCP User Command
M > Unit Alarm Setup
R > Performance Setup/Clear
[Misc]

A > Unit Alarm Mask/Relay Setup
B > Unit Alarm Severity Setup
A > Clear Performance Data
B > Performance Threshold Setup

X > Cl ear Unit Alarm History
W > Unit Load Default

Figure 5-5 VT-100 T3 Menu Tree – LOG and MISC Sections

37

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS

VT-

100 Menu Tree
DISPLAY Section

[ DISPLAY
]

C>

System Config Display

I>

System Information

B >SDH/

SONET Config Display

A > System Display

1 > East & West Fiber Information

A > SDH/ SONET Mode Display

B>

Timing Source Display

2 > Unit Information

B > SDH/ SONET Protection Display

C>

Loopback Timer Display

3 > Power & Chassis Information

C > ALS/ APSD Display

4 > CPU Information

D > SDH/ SONET Granularity Display

D > Bridge& RSTP Info Display
E>

Gateway Network Element

E >XC/ TSA Table Display

F>

DHCP Relay Display

F >XC/

G>

Remote Management Display

G > SDH/ SONET Overhead Display
A > SDH/ SONET Line Overhead Display

H > SNTP Display

TSA Active Map Display

B > Ho- Path/ STS- Path Overhead Display

I > RS232 Config Display

H>

Active Diagnostics Display

J > Hand - waving LED Display

I>

MSP Status Display

K > SNMP System Config Display

J>

Customer Information Display

Q > Alarm Queue

A > SDH/

T > System Log Information

SONET Alarm Status

P > SDH/SONET Performance Statistics

A > Current Active Alarm Status

1 > 01-

Hour Performance

B > SDH/SONET Line Alarm Status

2 > 24-

Hour Performance

C> Ho- Path/ STS- Path Alarm Status

3 > 07-

Day Performance

D> Lo- Path/ VT-

Path Alarm Status

Figure 5-6 VT-100 Menu Tree – DISPLAY Section

38

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS

VT- 100 Menu Tree
SETUP Section
[ SETUP]

S > System Config Setup

D > SDH/ SONET Config Setup

M > Alarm Setup

A > System Setup

A > SDH/ SONET Mode Setup

A > System Alarm Setup

B > Timing Source Setup

B > SDH/SONET Protection Setup

B > SDH- Line/ SONET- Line Alarm
Mask/ Relay Setup

C > Loopback Timer Setup

C > ALS/ APSD Setup

C > Ho- Path/ STS- Path Alarm
Mask/ Relay Setup

D > Password Setup

D > SDH/ SONET Granularity Setup

D > Lo- Path/ VT- Path Alarm
Mask/ Relay Setup

E>

E > XC/ TSA Create Setup

E > SDH/ SONET Alarm Severity Setup

F > Gateway Network Element Setup

F > XC/ TSA Delete Setup

F > SD/ SF Threshold Setup

G > DHCP Relay Setup

G > XC/ TSA Map Configuration

G > External Alarm Setup

H>

H > SDH/SONET Overhead
. Setup

H > Insert AIS Alarm Setup

Bridge and RSTP Info Setup

Remote Management Setup

I > SNTP Setup

I > Line Loopback Setup

J > RS 232 Config Setup

J > MSP USER Command

K > RS 232 Loopback Test

K>

Customer Information Setup

L > Hand- waving LED Setup
M > SNMP System Config Setup
N > SSH Setup

V > Store/ Retrieve Backup Config

L > File Transfer

R > Performance Setup
/ Clear

A > Download Firmware

A > Clear Performance Data

B > Download Current Configuration

B>

Performance Threshold Setup

C >Download Backup Configuration
D > Upload Current Configuration from FLASH
E > Upload Backup Configuration from FLASH
F > Change Firmware Boot Bank

Figure 5-7 VT-100 Menu Tree – SETUP Section

39

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS

5.1

Logon and Password Setup

5.1.1 Logon/off
When the O9400S is powered on, the screen will show as below. If the terminal screen is
illegible, press the Enter and Esc key alternatively to bring up the main menu. This is
particularly needed if the terminal is connected to the controller while the power is already
applied. If the main menu still fails to appear, check to see that the terminal is configured as
9600, 8, n, 1, and that a proper null modem or a null modem cable is used.
Press O to logon. A prompt will ask you for your user name. Five user names are available.
One is ADMIN, which allows you to view and modify the system configuration. The others
are OPERATOR, OPERATOR1, OPERATOR2 and OPERATOR3. Signing in as an Operator
allows you to view the current configuration only. Key in one of these user names in upper
case (ie. capital) letters. Then press the Enter key. A new prompt will ask for your password.
Key it in using capital letters only. (The default password is LOOP.)
Press the Enter key.
O9400SA

=== Main Menu ===

14:04:50 03/30/2007

Serial Number
: 000045
Hardware Version: D
Software Version: V1.01.01 03/29/2007

Connect Port: SUPV_PORT
Start Time : 17:22:04 03/29/2007

[DISPLAY]

[SETUP]

[LOG]
F -> Log Off
O -> Log On

[MISC]

>>SPACE bar to refresh or enter a command ===>

For an ADMIN user, a full Main Menu will appear after keying in the password. To logoff press
F.
O9400SA

=== Main Menu ===

18:26:12 03/22/2007

Serial Number
: 000045
Hardware Version: D
Software Version: V1.01.01 03/20/2007

Connect Port: SUPV_PORT
Start Time : 11:29:08 03/22/2007

[DISPLAY]
C -> System Config Display
I -> System Information
B -> SDH/SONET Config Display
Q -> Alarm Queue
T -> System Log Information
A -> SDH/SONET Alarm Status
P -> SDH/SONET Performance Statistics

[SETUP]
S -> System Config Setup
D -> SDH/SONET Config Setup
M -> Alarm Setup
V -> Store/Retrieve Backup Config
L -> File Transfer
R -> Performance Setup/Clear

[LOG]
F -> Log Off
O -> Log On
U -> Choose a Unit

[MISC]
Y -> Alarm Cut Off
Z -> System Reset
X -> Clear Alarm Queue
W -> Return to Default

>>SPACE bar to refresh or enter a command ===>

40

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS

For an OPERATOR user, a partial Main Menu will appear after keying in the password. To
logoff, press F.
O9400SA

=== Main Menu ===

18:26:12 03/22/2007

Serial Number
: 000045
Hardware Version: D
Software Version: V1.01.01 03/20/2007

Connect Port: SUPV_PORT
Start Time : 11:29:08 03/22/2007

[DISPLAY]
C -> System Config Display
I -> System Information
B -> SDH/SONET Config Display
Q -> Alarm Queue
T -> System Log Information
A -> SDH/SONET Alarm Status
P -> SDH/SONET Performance Statistics

[SETUP]

[LOG]
F -> Log Off
O -> Log On
U -> Choose a Unit

[MISC]

>>SPACE bar to refresh or enter a command ===>

5.1.2 Change a Password
The full menu path for changing a password is as follows:
O > Logon
S > System Config Setup
D > Password Setup
A screen by screen setup example is shown below.
Note: Password can be alphabetic, numeric or a combination of both. Alphabetic characters
can be keyed in as upper case or lower case. Maximum password size is 10 characters.
To change a password, press S from the Main Menu.
O9400SA

=== Main Menu ===

18:26:12 03/22/2007

Serial Number
: 000045
Hardware Version: D
Software Version: V1.01.01 03/20/2007

Connect Port: SUPV_PORT
Start Time : 11:29:08 03/22/2007

[DISPLAY]
C -> System Config Display
I -> System Information
B -> SDH/SONET Config Display
Q -> Alarm Queue
T -> System Log Information
A -> SDH/SONET Alarm Status
P -> SDH/SONET Performance Statistics

[SETUP]
S -> System Config Setup
D -> SDH/SONET Config Setup
M -> Alarm Setup
V -> Store/Retrieve Backup Config
L -> File Transfer
R -> Performance Setup/Clear

[LOG]
F -> Log Off
O -> Log On
U -> Choose a Unit

[MISC]
Y -> Alarm Cut Off
Z -> System Reset
X -> Clear Alarm Queue
W -> Return to Default

>>SPACE bar to refresh or enter a command ===>

41

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS

The System Config Setup screen will appear. Press D.
O9400SA

=== System Config Setup ===

A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N

->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->

10:01:58 10/23/2008

System Setup
Timing Source Setup
Loopback Timer setup
Password Setup
Bridge and RSTP Info Setup
Gateway Network Element Setup
DHCP Relay Setup
Remote Management Setup
SNTP Setup
RS232 Config Setup
RS232 Loopback Test
Hand-waving LED setup
SNMP System Config Setup
SSH Setup

<< Press ESC key to return to Main Menu or enter a command >>

The password setup screen will appear. Use your keyboard arrow keys to move the asterisk
to select either Operator or Administrator. Press the Enter key.
O9400SA

=== Password Setup ===

11:03:02 07/16/2007

<< ARROW LEFT/RIGHT: Select Password; Enter: Accept to change; ESC: Exit. >>
Select :
Operator
*Administrator

Key in your old password and press the Enter key. (The default password is LOOP in upper
case letters.)
O940 0SA
= Pa sswo rd Set up = ==
11 :07 :06
07/1 6/2 007
ARRO W K EYS : CU RSO R M OVE, BA CKS PACE to ed it, ESC to abo rt
<< A RRO W L EFT/ RIG HT: Sel ect Pa sswo rd; En ter: Ac cep t to ch ang e; E SC: Ex it.
>>
Sele ct :
Op era tor
* Adm ini stra tor
O ld

Pas swo rd : XX XX

>> Ple ase inp ut old pas swo rd, the n p res s EN TER .

42

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS

Key in your new password and press the Enter key.
Note: Maximum password size is 10 characters. Minimum password size is 1 character.
Both alphabetic and/or numeric characters are allowed.
O9400SA
=== Password Setup ===
11:07:06 07/16/2007
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, BACKSPACE to edit, ESC to abort
<< ARROW LEFT/RIGHT: Select Password; Enter: Accept to change; ESC: Exit. >>
Select :
Operator
*Administrator
Old
New

Password : XXXX
Password : XXXX

>> Please input new password, then press ENTER .

Confirm your password by keying it in again. Press the Enter key.
O9400SA
=== Password Setup ===
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, BACKSPACE to edit, ESC to abort

11:07:06 07/16/2007

<< ARROW LEFT/RIGHT: Select Password; Enter: Accept to change; ESC: Exit. >>
Select :
Operator
*Administrator
Old Password : XXXX
New Password : XXXX
Confirm Password: XXXX

>> Please input new password again to confirm, then press ENTER .

A prompt will ask if you want to save the new password. Press Y for yes.
O9400SA
=== Password Setup ===
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, BACKSPACE to edit, ESC to abort

11:14:47 07/16/2007

<< ARROW LEFT/RIGHT: Select Password; Enter: Accept to change; ESC: Exit. >>
Select :
Operator
*Administrator
Old Password : XXXX
New Password : XXXX
Confirm Password: XXXX

>> Save new password (Y/N)?

Note: Write your password down and keep it in a safe place in case you forget it.
Press the Esc key twice to return to the Main Menu.

43

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS

5.2

System Setup

The full menu path for System Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
S > System Config Setup
A > System Setup
A screen by screen setup example is shown below.
5.2.1 Setup Screen Access
To setup the System Configuration, press S from the Main Menu.
O9400SA

=== Main Menu ===

18:26:12 03/22/2007

Serial Number
: 000045
Hardware Version: D
Software Version: V1.01.01 03/20/2007

Connect Port: SUPV_PORT
Start Time : 11:29:08 03/22/2007

[DISPLAY]
C -> System Config Display
I -> System Information
B -> SDH/SONET Config Display
Q -> Alarm Queue
T -> System Log Information
A -> SDH/SONET Alarm Status
P -> SDH/SONET Performance Statistics

[SETUP]
S -> System Config Setup
D -> SDH/SONET Config Setup
M -> Alarm Setup
V -> Store/Retrieve Backup Config
L -> File Transfer
R -> Performance Setup/Clear

[LOG]
F -> Log Off
O -> Log On
U -> Choose a Unit

[MISC]
Y -> Alarm Cut Off
Z -> System Reset
X -> Clear Alarm Queue
W -> Return to Default

>>SPACE bar to refresh or enter a command ===>

The System Config Setup menu will appear. Press A.
O9400SA

=== System Config Setup ===

A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N

->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->

10:01:58 10/23/2008

System Setup
Timing Source Setup
Loopback Timer setup
Password Setup
Bridge and RSTP Info Setup
Gateway Network Element Setup
DHCP Relay Setup
Remote Management Setup
SNTP Setup
RS232 Config Setup
RS232 Loopback Test
Hand-waving LED setup
SNMP System Config Setup
SSH Setup

<< Press ESC key to return to Main Menu or enter a command >>

44

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS
5.2.2 System Setup Procedure
The System Setup screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to each field.
Key in the Time and Date.
Time format is hr (0-24):min.(0-60):sec.(0-60).
Date format is month (1-12):day(1-31):year(4 digits)
Key in the IP Address, Gateway IP and Subnet Mask for your O9400S device. If you do not
know these addresses, obtain them from your network administrator. The valid range for
these addresses is 0∼255.
Use the Tab key to scroll in a setting for the fields shown in the following table.

Table 5-1 System Setup Setting Options
Field

Setting Options

Ethernet Port
Ethernet Port
RSTP
Telnet Lockout
Telnet Timeout
Console Timeout
System Location:
System Contact
Baud Rate

System Contact

[Console Port]
Baud Rate
Data Length
Parity

DISABLE
ENABLE

ENABLE, DISABLE
Range is 300~3600 sec
Range is 300~3600 sec

DISABLE
0600 seconds
0600 seconds

Note

Key in info.
Key in info.
1200, 2400, 4800, 9600,
19200, 38400
7-Bits, 8-bits
NONE, EVEN, ODD
1-Bit, 2-Bits
XON, XOFF

Data Length
Parity
Stop Bit
XON_XOFF

O9400SA
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR
[System]
Time/Date
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Ethernet Port
Ethernet Port RSTP
Device Name
System Location

Default Setting

ENABLE, DISABLE
ENABLE, DISABLE

9600
8-bit
NONE
1-Bit
XOFF

=== System Setup ===
14:14:34 05/21/2009
MOVE, Please Input: hh:mm:ss mm/dd/yyyy, BACKSPACE to edit
:
:
:
:
:
:
:

14:14:35 05/21/2009
000.000.000.000
000.000.000.000
DISABLE
ENABLE
O9400SA
8F, No.8 Hsin Ann Rd.
Science-Based Industrial
Hsinchu, 30078 Taiwan

Gateway IP

Telnet Lockout : DISABLE
Telnet Timeout : 0600 seconds
Console Timeout: 0600 seconds
Park

: Name:FAE Tel:+886-3-5787696
E-mail: FAE@loop.com.tw

: 9600
: 8-Bits
: NONE

: 000.000.000.000

Fax:+886-3-5787695

Stop Bit
XON_XOFF

: 1-Bit
: XOFF

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

After scrolling in your settings press the Enter key.
Note: Disabling the Ethernet Port RSTP may cause a looping problem.
Note: Device name field will accept up to 25 characters
A prompt will ask if you want to change the configuration. Press Y for yes.

45

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS

You will be returned to the System Config setup menu. Press the ESC key to return to the
Main Menu.
The full menu path for storing a configuration is as follows:
O > Logon
S > System Config Setup
V > Store/Retrieve Backup Config
A screen by screen setup example is shown below.
Press V to store the configuration.
O9400SA

=== Main Menu ===

18:26:12 03/22/2007

Serial Number
: 000045
Hardware Version: D
Software Version: V1.01.01 03/20/2007

Connect Port: SUPV_PORT
Start Time : 11:29:08 03/22/2007

[DISPLAY]
C -> System Config Display
I -> System Information
B -> SDH/SONET Config Display
Q -> Alarm Queue
T -> System Log Information
A -> SDH/SONET Alarm Status
P -> SDH/SONET Performance Statistics

[SETUP]
S -> System Config Setup
D -> SDH/SONET Config Setup
M -> Alarm Setup
V -> Store/Retrieve Backup Config
L -> File Transfer
R -> Performance Setup/Clear

[LOG]
F -> Log Off
O -> Log On
U -> Choose a Unit

[MISC]
Y -> Alarm Cut Off
Z -> System Reset
X -> Clear Alarm Queue
W -> Return to Default

>>SPACE bar to refresh or enter a command ===>

The Store/Retrieve Configuration screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to move your cursor
to STORE. Press the Enter key. A prompt will ask if you wish to store this configuration.
Press Y for yes.
O940 0SA
7/16 /20 07

=== Sto re/ Retr iev e C onfi gur ati on== =

1 6:06 :37

>> S ele ct ?
*ST ORE
R ETR IEVE
>> S tor e C urre nt Con figu rat ion ? [ Y/N ]

A prompt will ask you to key in your password. After keying it in press the Enter key.
O940 0SA
07/1 6/2 007

=== Stor e/R etr ieve Co nfi gura tio n== =

16 :08 :40

>> S ele ct ?
*ST ORE
R ETR IEVE
==>> En ter pas swo rd : XX XX

The word “Saving” will temporarily appear on your screen. When it disappears, press the Esc
key to return to the Main Menu.
O940 0SA
07/1 6/2 007

= ==S tore /Re tri eve Con fig urat ion ===

>> S ele ct ?
*ST ORE
=== > S avi ng.. ... ..

R ETR IEVE

46

16: 09: 37

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS

5.3

Timing Source Setup

The full menu path for Timing Source Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
S > System Config Setup
B > Timing Source Setup
A screen by screen setup example is shown below.
5.3.1 Setup Screen Access
To setup the clock source, press S from the Main Menu.
O9400SA

=== Main Menu ===

18:26:12 03/22/2007

Serial Number
: 000045
Hardware Version: D
Software Version: V1.01.01 03/20/2007

Connect Port: SUPV_PORT
Start Time : 11:29:08 03/22/2007

[DISPLAY]
C -> System Config Display
I -> System Information
B -> SDH/SONET Config Display
Q -> Alarm Queue
T -> System Log Information
A -> SDH/SONET Alarm Status
P -> SDH/SONET Performance Statistics

[SETUP]
S -> System Config Setup
D -> SDH/SONET Config Setup
M -> Alarm Setup
V -> Store/Retrieve Backup Config
L -> File Transfer
R -> Performance Setup/Clear

[LOG]
F -> Log Off
O -> Log On
U -> Choose a Unit

[MISC]
Y -> Alarm Cut Off
Z -> System Reset
X -> Clear Alarm Queue
W -> Return to Default

>>SPACE bar to refresh or enter a command ===>

The System Config Setup menu will appear. Press B.
O9400SA

=== System Config Setup ===

A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N

->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->

10:01:58 10/23/2008

System Setup
Timing Source Setup
Loopback Timer setup
Password Setup
Bridge and RSTP Info Setup
Gateway Network Element Setup
DHCP Relay Setup
Remote Management Setup
SNTP Setup
RS232 Config Setup
RS232 Loopback Test
Hand-waving LED setup
SNMP System Config Setup
SSH Setup

<< Press ESC key to return to Main Menu or enter a command >>

To setup the clock source, press S from the Main Menu.

47

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS
5.3.2 Timing Source Setup Procedure
The Timing Source Setup screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the
Clock Mode field. Use the tab key to scroll in your settings. Available choices are: Strict
(Non-revertive), Strict (Revertive) and SSM. Press the Enter key.
Note: For clock mode
Strict (Non-revertive) means that if a clock source fails, the next clock source in line will be
used. When the original clock source functions again, the device will not revert back to that
clock source.
Strict (Revertive) means that if a clock source fails, the next clock source in line will be used.
When the original clock source functions again, the device will revert back to that clock source.
SSM stands for Synchronous Status Message. Basically, SSM monitors the clock sources
and automatically selects the best one.
O9400SA
=== Timing Source Setup ===
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB/`: ROLL UP/DOWN OPTIONS
Clock Mode

:

16:44:30 07/16/2007

Strict(Revertive)

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

An expanded setup screen will appear. Use the Tab key to scroll in the settings in the Priority,
Interface, Carry Bit, and Impedance fields.

Table 5-2 Timing Source Setting Options
Field

Priority 1st
Priority 2nd
Priority 3rd
Priority 4th
Interface
Quality
SSM Message
Carry Bit:
Impedance

Setting Options

Default Setting

East, West, External, Trib-1, Trib-2*,
Trib-3*, NULL

NULL

Internal, NULL
SDH: E1-CRC, E1-FAS, 2 MHz
SONET: T1-ESF, T1-D4, 2 MHz
Static, Auto (for SSM Mode)
Key in any message you wish to use
(0~9, A~F)
Sa4, Sa5, Sa6, Sa7, Sa8
120 ohm, 75 ohm

Internal
SDH: E1-CRC
SONET: T1-ESF
Static
0

*Note: This option is only available on E1T1 and E3T3 cards.

48

Sa4
120 ohm

Note

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS

After scrolling in your settings press the Enter key.
O9400SA
=== Timing Source Setup ===
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB/`: ROLL UP/DOWN OPTIONS
Clock Mode

:

Priority
Priority
Priority
Priority

:
:
:
:

1st
2nd
3rd
4th

Current Clock

16:47:31 07/16/2007

Strict(Revertive)
[Source]
East
West
External
Internal

[Quality]
Static
Static
Static
Static

[SSM Message]
0
0
0
0

: 4th

External Clock
-------------Interface: E1-CRC
Carry Bit: Sa4
Impedance: 120ohm

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

A prompt will ask if you want to change the configuration. Press Y for yes. Press Enter
O9400SA

=== Timing Source Setup ===

17:29:44 07/16/2007

ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB/`: ROLL UP/DOWN OPTIONS
Clock Mode

:

Priority
Priority
Priority
Priority

:
:
:
:

1st
2nd
3rd
4th

Current Clock

Strict(Revertive)
[Source]
East
West
External
Internal

[Quality]
Static
Static
Static
Static

[SSM Message]
0
0
0
0

: 4th

External Clock
-------------Interface: E1-CRC
Carry Bit: Sa4
Impedance: 120ohm
>> Change configuration (Y/N)? (Note:to save,please use V-command)

You will be returned to the System Config Setup menu. Press the ESC key to return to the
Main Menu.
To store the configuration you must press V from the Main Menu. The menu path is as
follows:
O > Logon
S > System Config Setup
V > Store/Retrieve Backup Config
For a detailed, screen by screen example of this procedure, please refer to Section 5.30,
Store/Retrieve Backup Configuration.

49

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS

5.4

Loopback Timer Setup

The full menu path for Loopback Timer Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
S > System Config Setup
C > Loopback Timer setup
A screen by screen setup example is shown below.
5.4.1 Setup Screen Access
To setup the clock source, press S from the Main Menu.
O9400SA

=== Main Menu ===

18:26:12 03/22/2007

Serial Number
: 000045
Hardware Version: D
Software Version: V1.01.01 03/20/2007

Connect Port: SUPV_PORT
Start Time : 11:29:08 03/22/2007

[DISPLAY]
C -> System Config Display
I -> System Information
B -> SDH/SONET Config Display
Q -> Alarm Queue
T -> System Log Information
A -> SDH/SONET Alarm Status
P -> SDH/SONET Performance Statistics

[SETUP]
S -> System Config Setup
D -> SDH/SONET Config Setup
M -> Alarm Setup
V -> Store/Retrieve Backup Config
L -> File Transfer
R -> Performance Setup/Clear

[LOG]
F -> Log Off
O -> Log On
U -> Choose a Unit

[MISC]
Y -> Alarm Cut Off
Z -> System Reset
X -> Clear Alarm Queue
W -> Return to Default

>>SPACE bar to refresh or enter a command ===>

The System Config Setup menu will appear. Press C.
O9400SA

=== System Config Setup ===

A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N

->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->

10:01:58 10/23/2008

System Setup
Timing Source Setup
Loopback Timer setup
Password Setup
Bridge and RSTP Info Setup
Gateway Network Element Setup
DHCP Relay Setup
Remote Management Setup
SNTP Setup
RS232 Config Setup
RS232 Loopback Test
Hand-waving LED setup
SNMP System Config Setup
SSH Setup

<< Press ESC key to return to Main Menu or enter a command >>

50

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS

5.4.2 LoopBack Timer Setup Procedure
Loopback Timer Setup screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the
All line Loopback timer field. Use the tab key to scroll in your setting. Setting range is
0~260000)
Press the Enter key.
O9400SA
=== Loopback Timer setup ===
15:52:06 09/17/2007
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, Please Input: 0~260000, BACKSPACE to edit
All Line loopback timer : 000060 sec.
('0 sec.' represents doing loopback in unlimited time)
(Warning!!! line will not recover if doing loopback in unlimited time)

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

A prompt will ask if you want to change the configuration. Press Y for yes. Press Enter
>> C han ge conf igu rat ion (Y/ N)? (No te: to save ,pl eas e us e V -co mman d)

To store the configuration you must press V from the Main Menu. The menu path is as
follows:
O > Logon
S > System Config Setup
V > Store/Retrieve Backup Config
For a detailed, screen by screen example of this procedure, please refer to Section 5.30,
Store/Retrieve Backup Configuration.

51

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS

5.5

Bridge and RSTP Info. Setup

The full menu path for Bridge and RSTP Info. Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
S > System Config Setup
E > Bridge and RSTP Info Setup
A screen by screen setup example is shown below.
5.5.1 Setup Screen Access
To setup the clock source, press S from the Main Menu.
O9400SA

=== Main Menu ===

18:26:12 03/22/2007

Serial Number
: 000045
Hardware Version: D
Software Version: V1.01.01 03/20/2007

Connect Port: SUPV_PORT
Start Time : 11:29:08 03/22/2007

[DISPLAY]
C -> System Config Display
I -> System Information
B -> SDH/SONET Config Display
Q -> Alarm Queue
T -> System Log Information
A -> SDH/SONET Alarm Status
P -> SDH/SONET Performance Statistics

[SETUP]
S -> System Config Setup
D -> SDH/SONET Config Setup
M -> Alarm Setup
V -> Store/Retrieve Backup Config
L -> File Transfer
R -> Performance Setup/Clear

[LOG]
F -> Log Off
O -> Log On
U -> Choose a Unit

[MISC]
Y -> Alarm Cut Off
Z -> System Reset
X -> Clear Alarm Queue
W -> Return to Default

>>SPACE bar to refresh or enter a command ===>

The System Config Setup menu will appear. Press E.
O9400SA

=== System Config Setup ===

A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N

->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->

10:01:58 10/23/2008

System Setup
Timing Source Setup
Loopback Timer setup
Password Setup
Bridge and RSTP Info Setup
Gateway Network Element Setup
DHCP Relay Setup
Remote Management Setup
SNTP Setup
RS232 Config Setup
RS232 Loopback Test
Hand-waving LED setup
SNMP System Config Setup
SSH Setup

<< Press ESC key to return to Main Menu or enter a command >>

52

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS

5.5.2 Bridge and RSTP Info Setup Procedure
The Bridge and RSTP Info Setup screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor
to the various fields. Key in your settings.
Note: Some settings must be scrolled in with the Tab key.
Table 5-3 Bridge and RSTP Info. Setting Options
Field
Bridge

Bridge ID Priority
Bridge Max Age
Hello time
Forward Delay
Aging Time

Cost
Prio
EDG-p
P-P

Setting Options
Range is 0~65535.
Range is 4~40.
Range is 1~10.
Range is 4~30.
Range is 0~999.
Range is 1~999.
Range is 0~255
No, Yes
No, Yes

Default Setting

Note

32678
20
02
15
300
019
128
NO
NO

Key in settings

Note: Bridge max. age must be ≥ 2 x (Hello time+1) and ≤ 2 x (Forward Delay – 1).
Note: EDG-p (Edge-Port): This command is used to specify an interface as an edge port.
User can enable this option if an interface is attached to a LAN segment that is at the
end of a bridged LAN or to an end node.
P-P (Link-Type P-P): A full-duplex interface is considered a point-to-point link, while a
half-duplex interface is assumed to be on a shared link.
Press the Enter key.

O9400SA
=== Bridge and RSTP Info Setup ===
17:43:46 09/17/2007
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, Please Input: 0~65535, BACKSPACE to edit
Designated Root MAC ADDR : 00:0E:83:15:43:40
Designated Root Priority : 24579
Designated Root Cost :
19
Root Max Age :
14 sec
Hello Time :
2 sec
Bridge ID MAC ADDR :
Bridge ID Priority :
Bridge Max Age : 20 sec
Aging time
: 300 sec

00:50:C6:00:00:11
32768
Hello Time : 02 sec

Forward Delay :

10 sec

Forward Delay : 15

sec

Port RootP State Cost Prio Edg-p P-P
----- ----- ----- ---- ---- ----- --Fec
Yes
Fwd 019 128
No
No
DCC(W) No
Dis 019 128
No
Yes
DCC(E) No
Dis 019 128
No
Yes

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

A prompt will ask if you want to change the configuration. Press Y for yes. Press Enter
>> C han ge conf igu rat ion (Y/ N)? (No te: to save ,pl eas e us e V -co mman d)

53

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS
To store the configuration you must press V from the Main Menu. The menu path is as
follows:
O > Logon
S > System Config Setup
V > Store/Retrieve Backup Config
For a detailed, screen by screen example of this procedure, please refer to Section 5.30,
Store/Retrieve Backup Configuration.

54

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS

5.6

Gateway Network Element Setup

The full menu path for Gateway Network Element Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
S > System Config Setup
F > Gateway Network Element Setup
A screen by screen setup example is shown below.
5.6.1 Setup Screen Access
To setup the clock source, press S from the Main Menu.
O9400SA

=== Main Menu ===

18:26:12 03/22/2007

Serial Number
: 000045
Hardware Version: D
Software Version: V1.01.01 03/20/2007

Connect Port: SUPV_PORT
Start Time : 11:29:08 03/22/2007

[DISPLAY]
C -> System Config Display
I -> System Information
B -> SDH/SONET Config Display
Q -> Alarm Queue
T -> System Log Information
A -> SDH/SONET Alarm Status
P -> SDH/SONET Performance Statistics

[SETUP]
S -> System Config Setup
D -> SDH/SONET Config Setup
M -> Alarm Setup
V -> Store/Retrieve Backup Config
L -> File Transfer
R -> Performance Setup/Clear

[LOG]
F -> Log Off
O -> Log On
U -> Choose a Unit

[MISC]
Y -> Alarm Cut Off
Z -> System Reset
X -> Clear Alarm Queue
W -> Return to Default

>>SPACE bar to refresh or enter a command ===>

The System Config Setup menu will appear. Press F.
O9400SA

=== System Config Setup ===

A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N

->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->

10:01:58 10/23/2008

System Setup
Timing Source Setup
Loopback Timer setup
Password Setup
Bridge and RSTP Info Setup
Gateway Network Element Setup
DHCP Relay Setup
Remote Management Setup
SNTP Setup
RS232 Config Setup
RS232 Loopback Test
Hand-waving LED setup
SNMP System Config Setup
SSH Setup

<< Press ESC key to return to Main Menu or enter a command >>

5.6.2 Gateway Network Element Setup Procedure
The Gateway Network Element (GNE) setup screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to move
the cursor to the Gateway Network Element field. use the tab key to scroll in your setting.
Setting Options are Enable or Disable. Press the Enter key.
Note: If the Gateway Network Element is set to Disable, the DHCP Relay will be cleared and
closed.

55

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS
Press the Enter key.
O940 0SA
=== Gat ewa y N etwo rk Ele ment Se tup ===
09/2 7/2 007
ARRO W K EYS : CU RSO R M OVE, TA B/` : RO LL UP/ DOWN OP TIO NS
Gate way Ne twor k E lem ent
: Ena ble

1 6:5 0:42

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to prev iou s m enu >>

The following expanded screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to move your cursor to the
various fields. Use the Tab key to select your settings.
Note: Some settings must be keyed in.
Table 5-4 Gatew ay Network Element Setting Options 1
Field

Setting Options

Lan IP Address
Lan Subnet Mask
Lan Routing Protocol

Key in IP address
Key in Subnet Mask
RIP1, RIP2, STATIC

Default Setting

Note

0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
RIP2

Press the Enter key.
O940 0SA
== = G atew ay Net work El eme nt S etu p = ==
16: 49: 49 0 9/2 7/2 007
ARRO W K EYS : CU RSO R M OVE, Pl eas e In put : n nn.n nn. nnn .nnn , B ACK SPAC E t o e dit
Gate way Ne twor k E lem ent
: Ena ble
Lan IP Add ress
: 00 0.00 0.0 00. 000
Sy stem IP Ad dres s
: 1 92.1 68. 001 .200
Lan Sub net Mas k : 00 0.00 0.0 00. 000
Sy stem Su bne t Ma sk : 2 55.2 55. 000 .000
Lan Rou tin g Pr oto col : R IP2

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to prev iou s m enu >>

The following expanded screen will appear. Select or key in your settings. Press the Enter
key.
Table 5-5 Gatew ay Network Element Setting Options 2
Field

Setting Options

Destination
Prefix
Gateway

Key in IP address
Range is 0~32
Key in Gateway
address

Default Setting
0.0.0.0
16
0.0.0.0

56

Note

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS

O9400SA
=== Gateway Network Element Setup === 16:50:42 09/27/2007
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, Please Input: 0~32, BACKSPACE to edit
Gateway Network Element : Enable
Lan IP Adrress : 000.000.000.000
System IP Address : 192.168.001.200
Lan Subnet Mask : 000.000.000.000
System Subnet Mask : 255.255.000.000
Lan Routing Protocol : STATIC
Num
Destination
Prefix
Gateway
01
000.000.000.000
16
000.000.000.000
02
000.000.000.000
16
000.000.000.000
03
000.000.000.000
16
000.000.000.000
04
000.000.000.000
16
000.000.000.000
05
000.000.000.000
16
000.000.000.000
06
000.000.000.000
16
000.000.000.000
07
000.000.000.000
16
000.000.000.000
08
000.000.000.000
16
000.000.000.000
09
000.000.000.000
16
000.000.000.000
10
000.000.000.000
16
000.000.000.000
11
000.000.000.000
16
000.000.000.000
12
000.000.000.000
16
000.000.000.000
13
000.000.000.000
16
000.000.000.000
14
000.000.000.000
16
000.000.000.000
15
000.000.000.000
16
000.000.000.000
16
000.000.000.000
16
000.000.000.000
<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

A prompt will ask if you want to change the configuration. Press Y for yes. Press Enter
>> C han ge conf igu rat ion (Y/ N)? (No te: to save ,pl eas e us e V -co mman d)

To store the configuration you must press V from the Main Menu. The menu path is as
follows:
O > Logon
S > System Config Setup
V > Store/Retrieve Backup Config
For a detailed, screen by screen example of this procedure, please refer to Section 5.30,
Store/Retrieve Backup Configuration.

57

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS

5.7

DHCP Relay Setup

The full menu path for DHCP Relay Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
S > System Config Setup
G > DHCP Relay Setup
A screen by screen setup example is shown below.
Note: DHCP Relay is available only when the Gateway Network Element is enabled. For
instructions on enabling the GNE please refer to Section 5.6, Gateway Network
Element.
5.7.1 Setup Screen Access
To setup the clock source, press S from the Main Menu.
O9400SA

=== Main Menu ===

18:26:12 03/22/2007

Serial Number
: 000045
Hardware Version: D
Software Version: V1.01.01 03/20/2007

Connect Port: SUPV_PORT
Start Time : 11:29:08 03/22/2007

[DISPLAY]
C -> System Config Display
I -> System Information
B -> SDH/SONET Config Display
Q -> Alarm Queue
T -> System Log Information
A -> SDH/SONET Alarm Status
P -> SDH/SONET Performance Statistics

[SETUP]
S -> System Config Setup
D -> SDH/SONET Config Setup
M -> Alarm Setup
V -> Store/Retrieve Backup Config
L -> File Transfer
R -> Performance Setup/Clear

[LOG]
F -> Log Off
O -> Log On
U -> Choose a Unit

[MISC]
Y -> Alarm Cut Off
Z -> System Reset
X -> Clear Alarm Queue
W -> Return to Default

>>SPACE bar to refresh or enter a command ===>

The System Config Setup menu will appear. Press G.
O9400SA

=== System Config Setup ===

A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N

->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->

10:01:58 10/23/2008

System Setup
Timing Source Setup
Loopback Timer setup
Password Setup
Bridge and RSTP Info Setup
Gateway Network Element Setup
DHCP Relay Setup
Remote Management Setup
SNTP Setup
RS232 Config Setup
RS232 Loopback Test
Hand-waving LED setup
SNMP System Config Setup
SSH Setup

<< Press ESC key to return to Main Menu or enter a command >>

58

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS

5.8

DHCP Relay Setup Procedure

The DHCP Relay Setup Screen will appear. Key in the DHCP server IP address. Scroll in the
DHCP relay setting. Setting options are Enable or Disable. Press the Enter key.
O9400SA
=== DHCP Relay Setup ===
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB/`: ROLL UP/DOWN OPTIONS
DHCP server IP : 000.000.000.000
DHCP relay
: Enable

17:13:12 09/27/2007

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

A prompt will ask if you want to change the configuration. Press Y for yes. Press Enter
>> C han ge conf igu rat ion (Y/ N)? (No te: to save ,pl eas e us e V -co mman d)

To store the configuration you must press V from the Main Menu. The menu path is as
follows:
O > Logon
S > System Config Setup
V > Store/Retrieve Backup Config
For a detailed, screen by screen example of this procedure, please refer to Section 5.30,
Store/Retrieve Backup Configuration.

59

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS

5.9

Remote Management Setup

The full menu path for Remote Management Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
S > System Config Setup
H > Remote Management Setup
A screen by screen setup example is shown below.
5.9.1 Setup Screen Access
To setup remote management, press S from the Main Menu.
O9400SA

=== Main Menu ===

18:26:12 03/22/2007

Serial Number
: 000045
Hardware Version: D
Software Version: V1.01.01 03/20/2007

Connect Port: SUPV_PORT
Start Time : 11:29:08 03/22/2007

[DISPLAY]
C -> System Config Display
I -> System Information
B -> SDH/SONET Config Display
Q -> Alarm Queue
T -> System Log Information
A -> SDH/SONET Alarm Status
P -> SDH/SONET Performance Statistics

[SETUP]
S -> System Config Setup
D -> SDH/SONET Config Setup
M -> Alarm Setup
V -> Store/Retrieve Backup Config
L -> File Transfer
R -> Performance Setup/Clear

[LOG]
F -> Log Off
O -> Log On
U -> Choose a Unit

[MISC]
Y -> Alarm Cut Off
Z -> System Reset
X -> Clear Alarm Queue
W -> Return to Default

>>SPACE bar to refresh or enter a command ===>

The System Config Setup menu will appear. Press H.
O9400SA

=== System Config Setup ===

10:01:58 10/23/2008

A -> System Setup
B -> Timing Source Setup
C -> Loopback Timer setup
D -> Password Setup
E -> Bridge and RSTP Info Setup
F -> Gateway Network Element Setup
G -> DHCP Relay Setup
H -> Remote Management Setup
I -> SNTP Setup
J -> RS232 Config Setup
K -> RS232 Loopback Test
L -> Hand-waving LED setup
M -> SNMP System Config Setup
N -> SSH Setup

<< Press ESC key to return to Main Menu or enter a command >>

5.9.2 Remote Management Setup Procedure
The Remote Management setup screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor
to the various fields.

60

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS

Table 5-6 Remote Management Setup Options
Field

Setting Options

Channel Type

OFF, DCC(E)+DCC(W),
DCC(E)+InBand,
DCC(W)+InBand
3, 9, 12

DCC Bandwidth

Default Setting

Note

DCC(E)+DCC(W)
12

The figures below help to illustrate the difference in operation between a DCC (Data
Communication Channel setup and a DDC + Inband setup. Three cases are explained for
the O9400S devlce.
Case 1: DCC(E) + DCC(W)
In this case: PC1 can go through O9400S#1 to manage O9400S#2 and O9400S#3 via East
and West DCC.

Figure 5-8 DCC(E) + DCC(W)
Case 2: DCC(E) + Inband
In this case: PC1 can go through O9400S#1 to manage O9400S#2 and O9400S#3 via East
DCC and InBand Channel.

Figure 5-9 DCC(E) + Inband

61

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS
Case 3: DCC(W) + Inband
In this case: PC1 can go through O9400S#1 to manage O9400S#2 and O9400S#3 via West
DCC and InBand Channel.

PC 1

DCC(E) + DCC(W)
O 9400S
#1

DCC
West

East

O 9400S
#3

West

E1 Inband

E1 Inband

East

O 9400S
#2

West
O
9400S
#3

DCC(E) + Inband)

Figure 5-10 DCC(W) + Inband

After all settings are scrolled in, press the Enter key.
O9400SA
=== Remote Management Setup ===
TAB or Enter key to select

17:42:52 07/16/2007

Channal Type : OFF
DCC Bandwidth : 3 Channels
<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

A prompt will ask if you want to change the configuration. Press Y for yes. Press Enter
O940 0SA
=== Re mot e Ma nag eme nt S etu p = ==
TAB or Ent er k ey to sele ct

17: 42:5 2 0 7/1 6/20 07

Chan nal Ty pe
: O FF
DCC Ban dwi dth : 3 Ch anne ls

>> C han ge conf igu rat ion (Y/ N)? (No te: to save ,pl eas e us e V -co mman d)

You will be returned to the System Config Setup menu. Press the ESC key to return to the
Main Menu.
To store the configuration you must press V from the Main Menu. The menu path is as
follows:
O > Logon
S > System Config Setup
V > Store/Retrieve Backup Config
For a detailed, screen by screen example of this procedure, please refer to Section 5.30,
Store/Retrieve Backup Configuration.

62

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS

5.10 SNTP Setup
The full menu path for SNTP Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
S > System Config Setup
I > SNTP Setup
A screen by screen setup example is shown below.
5.10.1 Setup Screen Access
To setup the clock source, press S from the Main Menu.
O9400SA

=== Main Menu ===

18:26:12 03/22/2007

Serial Number
: 000045
Hardware Version: D
Software Version: V1.01.01 03/20/2007

Connect Port: SUPV_PORT
Start Time : 11:29:08 03/22/2007

[DISPLAY]
C -> System Config Display
I -> System Information
B -> SDH/SONET Config Display
Q -> Alarm Queue
T -> System Log Information
A -> SDH/SONET Alarm Status
P -> SDH/SONET Performance Statistics

[SETUP]
S -> System Config Setup
D -> SDH/SONET Config Setup
M -> Alarm Setup
V -> Store/Retrieve Backup Config
L -> File Transfer
R -> Performance Setup/Clear

[LOG]
F -> Log Off
O -> Log On
U -> Choose a Unit

[MISC]
Y -> Alarm Cut Off
Z -> System Reset
X -> Clear Alarm Queue
W -> Return to Default

>>SPACE bar to refresh or enter a command ===>

The System Config Setup menu will appear. Press I.
O9400SA

=== System Config Setup ===

A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N

->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->

10:01:58 10/23/2008

System Setup
Timing Source Setup
Loopback Timer setup
Password Setup
Bridge and RSTP Info Setup
Gateway Network Element Setup
DHCP Relay Setup
Remote Management Setup
SNTP Setup
RS232 Config Setup
RS232 Loopback Test
Hand-waving LED setup
SNMP System Config Setup
SSH Setup

<< Press ESC key to return to Main Menu or enter a command >>

63

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS

5.10.2 SNTP Setup Procedure
The SNTP Setup screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the various
fields. Use the Tab key to scroll in your settings.
Note: Some settings must be keyed in.
Table 5-7 SNTP Setting Options
Field

Setting Options

SNTP
SNTP server 1
SNTP server 2
SNTP timezone

ON, OFF

-12 to +12

Default Setting
OFF
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
+0

Note
Key in server IP
address
Scroll in a time zone
setting See note below

Note: Timezone setting is the number of hours that you must add to or subtract from
Greenwich Mean Time to obtain your local time. The setting range is 0, +1, +2 … +12, and 12, -11… -1. You can find tables on the internet that display this information.

Press the Enter key.
O9400SA
=== SNTP setup ===
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB/`: ROLL UP/DOWN OPTIONS

13:47:02 09/20/2007

SNTP ON/OFF
: OFF
SNTP server 1 : 000.000.000.000
SNTP server 2 : 000.000.000.000
SNTP timezone : +0

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

A prompt will ask if you want to change the configuration. Press Y for yes. Press Enter
>> C han ge conf igu rat ion (Y/ N)? (No te: to sav e, ple ase use V- comm and )

To store the configuration you must press V from the Main Menu. The menu path is as
follows:
O > Logon
S > System Config Setup
V > Store/Retrieve Backup Config
For a detailed, screen by screen example of this procedure, please refer to Section 5.30,
Store/Retrieve Backup Configuration.

64

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS

5.11 RS232 Configuration Setup
The full menu path for RS232 Configuration setup is as follows:
O > Logon
S > System Config Setup
J > RS232 Config Setup
A screen by screen setup example is shown below.
5.11.1 Setup Screen Access
To setup the clock source, press S from the Main Menu.
O9400SA

=== Main Menu ===

18:26:12 03/22/2007

Serial Number
: 000045
Hardware Version: D
Software Version: V1.01.01 03/20/2007

Connect Port: SUPV_PORT
Start Time : 11:29:08 03/22/2007

[DISPLAY]
C -> System Config Display
I -> System Information
B -> SDH/SONET Config Display
Q -> Alarm Queue
T -> System Log Information
A -> SDH/SONET Alarm Status
P -> SDH/SONET Performance Statistics

[SETUP]
S -> System Config Setup
D -> SDH/SONET Config Setup
M -> Alarm Setup
V -> Store/Retrieve Backup Config
L -> File Transfer
R -> Performance Setup/Clear

[LOG]
F -> Log Off
O -> Log On
U -> Choose a Unit

[MISC]
Y -> Alarm Cut Off
Z -> System Reset
X -> Clear Alarm Queue
W -> Return to Default

>>SPACE bar to refresh or enter a command ===>

The System Config Setup menu will appear. Press J.
O9400SA

=== System Config Setup ===

A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N

->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->

10:01:58 10/23/2008

System Setup
Timing Source Setup
Loopback Timer setup
Password Setup
Bridge and RSTP Info Setup
Gateway Network Element Setup
DHCP Relay Setup
Remote Management Setup
SNTP Setup
RS232 Config Setup
RS232 Loopback Test
Hand-waving LED setup
SNMP System Config Setup
SSH Setup

<< Press ESC key to return to Main Menu or enter a command >>

65

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS

5.11.2 RS232 Config Setup Procedure
The RS232 Config Setup screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the
various fields. Use the Tab key to scroll in your settings.
Note: Some settings must be keyed in.
Note: The user must also set up a cross connect map between the SDH/SONET path and the
RS232 (port1,port2). For instructions on creating a cross connect refer to Section 5.20,
XC/TSA Create Setup, in this manual.
Table 5-8 RS232 Config Setting Options
Field

Setting Options

Node Mode
Port-1
Port-1 TS#
Port-2
Port-2 TS#

SLAVE, MASTER
ON/OFF
Range is 1~31
ON/OFF
Range is 1~31

Default Setting

Note

SLAVE
OFF
1
OFF
1

Press the Enter key.
O940 0SA
= == RS23 2 C onf ig S etu p = ==
01/0 4/2 010
ARRO W K EYS : CU RSO R M OVE, TA B/` : RO LL UP/ DOWN OP TIO NS

Node Mo de
:
Port -1 ON/ OFF:
Port -1 TS#
:
Port -2 ON/ OFF:
Port -2 TS#
:

1 0:52 :39

S lav e
O FF
01
O FF
01

#NOT E:U ser als o n eed to set XC bet wee n S DH/S ONE T p ath and RS 232( por t1,
port 2).

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to prev iou s m enu >>

A prompt will ask if you want to change the configuration. Press Y for yes. Press Enter
>> C han ge conf igu rat ion (Y/ N)? (No te: to save ,pl eas e us e V -co mman d)

To store the configuration you must press V from the Main Menu. The menu path is as
follows:
O > Logon
S > System Config Setup
V > Store/Retrieve Backup Config
For a detailed, screen by screen example of this procedure, please refer to Section 5.30,
Store/Retrieve Backup Configuration.

66

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS

5.12 RS232 Loopback Test
The full menu path for RS232 Loopback Test setup is as follows:
O > Logon
S > System Config Setup
K > RS232 Loopback Test
A screen by screen setup example is shown below.

5.12.1 Setup Screen Access
To setup the clock source, press S from the Main Menu.
O9400SA

=== Main Menu ===

18:26:12 03/22/2007

Serial Number
: 000045
Hardware Version: D
Software Version: V1.01.01 03/20/2007

Connect Port: SUPV_PORT
Start Time : 11:29:08 03/22/2007

[DISPLAY]
C -> System Config Display
I -> System Information
B -> SDH/SONET Config Display
Q -> Alarm Queue
T -> System Log Information
A -> SDH/SONET Alarm Status
P -> SDH/SONET Performance Statistics

[SETUP]
S -> System Config Setup
D -> SDH/SONET Config Setup
M -> Alarm Setup
V -> Store/Retrieve Backup Config
L -> File Transfer
R -> Performance Setup/Clear

[LOG]
F -> Log Off
O -> Log On
U -> Choose a Unit

[MISC]
Y -> Alarm Cut Off
Z -> System Reset
X -> Clear Alarm Queue
W -> Return to Default

>>SPACE bar to refresh or enter a command ===>

The System Config Setup menu will appear. Press K.
O9400SA

=== System Config Setup ===

A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N

->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->

10:01:58 10/23/2008

System Setup
Timing Source Setup
Loopback Timer setup
Password Setup
Bridge and RSTP Info Setup
Gateway Network Element Setup
DHCP Relay Setup
Remote Management Setup
SNTP Setup
RS232 Config Setup
RS232 Loopback Test
Hand-waving LED setup
SNMP System Config Setup
SSH Setup

<< Press ESC key to return to Main Menu or enter a command >>

67

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS
5.12.2 RS232 Loopback Test Setup Procedure
The RS232 Loopback Test screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the
RS232-1 field setting you desire. Press the Enter key. Repeat the process for the RS232-2
field.
Note: To set the Looback timer see Section 5.4, LoopbackTimer Setup, in this manual.
O940 0SA

=== RS2 32 Loop bac k T est ===

09: 16: 51 1 1/1 9/2 006

Loop bac k T imer : 000 060 sec .

RS23 2-1 : * OFF
RS23 2-2 : * OFF

TO -OP TICA L-L INE
TO -OP TICA L-L INE

TO -TR IBU TARY -LI NE
TO -TR IBU TARY -LI NE

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to prev iou s m enu >>

This procedure is complete. Press the Esc. Key to return to the previous menu.

68

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS

5.13 Hand-waving LED Setup
The full menu path for Hand-waving LED Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
S > System Config Setup
L > Hand-waving LED setup
A screen by screen setup example is shown below.

5.13.1 Setup Screen Access
To setup the clock source, press S from the Main Menu.
O9400SA

=== Main Menu ===

18:26:12 03/22/2007

Serial Number
: 000045
Hardware Version: D
Software Version: V1.01.01 03/20/2007

Connect Port: SUPV_PORT
Start Time : 11:29:08 03/22/2007

[DISPLAY]
C -> System Config Display
I -> System Information
B -> SDH/SONET Config Display
Q -> Alarm Queue
T -> System Log Information
A -> SDH/SONET Alarm Status
P -> SDH/SONET Performance Statistics

[SETUP]
S -> System Config Setup
D -> SDH/SONET Config Setup
M -> Alarm Setup
V -> Store/Retrieve Backup Config
L -> File Transfer
R -> Performance Setup/Clear

[LOG]
F -> Log Off
O -> Log On
U -> Choose a Unit

[MISC]
Y -> Alarm Cut Off
Z -> System Reset
X -> Clear Alarm Queue
W -> Return to Default

>>SPACE bar to refresh or enter a command ===>

The System Config Setup menu will appear. Press F.
O9400SA

=== System Config Setup ===

A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N

->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->

10:01:58 10/23/2008

System Setup
Timing Source Setup
Loopback Timer setup
Password Setup
Bridge and RSTP Info Setup
Gateway Network Element Setup
DHCP Relay Setup
Remote Management Setup
SNTP Setup
RS232 Config Setup
RS232 Loopback Test
Hand-waving LED setup
SNMP System Config Setup
SSH Setup

<< Press ESC key to return to Main Menu or enter a command >>

69

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS
5.13.2 Hand-waving LED Setup Procedure
The Hand-waving LED Setup screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to
the various fields. Use the Tab key to scroll in your setting.
Note: Some settings must be keyed in.
Table 5-9 Hand-waving LED Setting Options
Field

Setting Options

Command
Timer

STOP, START
Range is 0~99999

Default Setting

Note

STOP
180

Press the Enter key.
O940 0SA
=== Ha nd-w avi ng LED Set up ===
01/0 4/2 010
ARRO W K EYS : CU RSO R M OVE, TA B/` : RO LL UP/ DOWN OP TIO NS

1 0:56 :01

Co mma nd : ST OP
Ti mer
: 00 180
( 0 : m ean s th e L ED flas hin g w ill las t f orev er aft er t he "st art" co mma nd.)

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to prev iou s m enu >>

A prompt will ask if you want to change the configuration. Press Y for yes. Press Enter
>> C han ge conf igu rat ion (Y/ N)? (No te: to save ,pl eas e us e V -co mman d)

To store the configuration you must press V from the Main Menu. The menu path is as
follows:
O > Logon
S > System Config Setup
V > Store/Retrieve Backup Config
For a detailed, screen by screen example of this procedure, please refer to Section 5.30,
Store/Retrieve Backup Configuration.

70

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS

5.14 SNMP System Config Setup
The full menu path for SNMP System Config Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
S > System Config Setup
M > SNMP System Config Setup
A screen by screen setup example is shown below.
5.14.1 Setup Screen Access
To setup SNMP management, press S from the Main Menu.
O9400SA

=== Main Menu ===

18:26:12 03/22/2007

Serial Number
: 000045
Hardware Version: D
Software Version: V1.01.01 03/20/2007

Connect Port: SUPV_PORT
Start Time : 11:29:08 03/22/2007

[DISPLAY]
C -> System Config Display
I -> System Information
B -> SDH/SONET Config Display
Q -> Alarm Queue
T -> System Log Information
A -> SDH/SONET Alarm Status
P -> SDH/SONET Performance Statistics

[SETUP]
S -> System Config Setup
D -> SDH/SONET Config Setup
M -> Alarm Setup
V -> Store/Retrieve Backup Config
L -> File Transfer
R -> Performance Setup/Clear

[LOG]
F -> Log Off
O -> Log On
U -> Choose a Unit

[MISC]
Y -> Alarm Cut Off
Z -> System Reset
X -> Clear Alarm Queue
W -> Return to Default

>>SPACE bar to refresh or enter a command ===>

The System Config Setup menu will appear. Press M.
O9400SA

=== System Config Setup ===

A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N

->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->

10:01:58 10/23/2008

System Setup
Timing Source Setup
Loopback Timer setup
Password Setup
Bridge and RSTP Info Setup
Gateway Network Element Setup
DHCP Relay Setup
Remote Management Setup
SNTP Setup
RS232 Config Setup
RS232 Loopback Test
Hand-waving LED setup
SNMP System Config Setup
SSH Setup

<< Press ESC key to return to Main Menu or enter a command >>

71

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS
5.14.2 SNMP System Configuration Setup Procedure
The SNMP System Config Setup screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to move your cursor
to the various fields.
Key a name into the Get Community field. Any name will do up to a maximum of 12
characters.
Note: Case sensitivity exists for Community field settings. If you are using Castle Rock
SNMPc in conjunction with the Looop-O9400S device, you must make sure that if the
community name is written in the lower case letters on your SNMPc screen setup it
must also be in lower case letters on the Loop screen setup. The cases (either lower
or upper) must match.
Key a name into the Set Community field. Any name will do up to a maximum of 12
characters.
Key in appropriate IP Addresses and Community names for the Trap IPs.
Use the Tab key to scroll in the Alarm Trap setting. Available choices are: ENABLE and
DISABLE.
Use the Tab key to scroll in the LED Trap setting. Available choices are: ENABLE and DISABLE.
Press the Enter key.
O9400SA
=== SNMP System Config Setup ===
17:58:17 07/16/2007
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, BACKSPACE to edit, ESC to abort
[SNMP]
Get Community : public______
Set Community : private
[Trap Server]
Trap IP 1
Trap IP 2
Trap IP 3
Trap IP 4
Trap IP 5

:
:
:
:
:

000.000.000.000
000.000.000.000
000.000.000.000
000.000.000.000
000.000.000.000

[Trap Control]
Alarm Trap
: DISABLE

Community
Community
Community
Community
Community

Name
Name
Name
Name
Name

LED Trap

:
:
:
:
:

public
public
public
public
public

: DISABLE

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

A prompt will ask if you want to change the configuration. Press Y for yes. Press Enter
O9400SA
=== SNMP System Config Setup ===
18:33:27 07/16/2007
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, BACKSPACE to edit, ESC to abort
[SNMP]
Get Community : public
Set Community : private
[Trap Server]
Trap IP 1
Trap IP 2
Trap IP 3
Trap IP 4
Trap IP 5

:
:
:
:
:

000.000.000.000
000.000.000.000
000.000.000.000
000.000.000.000
000.000.000.000

[Trap Control]
Alarm Trap
: DISABLE

Community
Community
Community
Community
Community

LED Trap

Name
Name
Name
Name
Name

:
:
:
:
:

public
public
public
public
public

: DISABLE

>> Change configuration (Y/N)? (Note:to save,please use V-command)

You will be returned to the System Config Setup menu. Press the ESC key to return to the
Main Menu.

72

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS
To store the configuration you must press V from the Main Menu. The menu path is as
follows:
O > Logon
S > System Config Setup
V > Store/Retrieve Backup Config
For a detailed, screen by screen example of this procedure, please refer to Section 5.30,
Store/Retrieve Backup Configuration.

73

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS

5.15 SSH Setup
The full menu path for SSH Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
S > System Config Setup
N > SSH Setup
A screen by screen setup example is shown below.
5.15.1 Setup Screen Access
To setup SSH, press S from the Main Menu.
O9400SA

=== Main Menu ===

18:26:12 03/22/2007

Serial Number
: 000045
Hardware Version: D
Software Version: V1.01.01 03/20/2007

Connect Port: SUPV_PORT
Start Time : 11:29:08 03/22/2007

[DISPLAY]
C -> System Config Display
I -> System Information
B -> SDH/SONET Config Display
Q -> Alarm Queue
T -> System Log Information
A -> SDH/SONET Alarm Status
P -> SDH/SONET Performance Statistics

[SETUP]
S -> System Config Setup
D -> SDH/SONET Config Setup
M -> Alarm Setup
V -> Store/Retrieve Backup Config
L -> File Transfer
R -> Performance Setup/Clear

[LOG]
F -> Log Off
O -> Log On
U -> Choose a Unit

[MISC]
Y -> Alarm Cut Off
Z -> System Reset
X -> Clear Alarm Queue
W -> Return to Default

>>SPACE bar to refresh or enter a command ===>

The System Config Setup menu will appear. Press N.
O9400SA

=== System Config Setup ===

A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N

->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->

10:01:58 10/23/2008

System Setup
Timing Source Setup
Loopback Timer setup
Password Setup
Bridge and RSTP Info Setup
Gateway Network Element Setup
DHCP Relay Setup
Remote Management Setup
SNTP Setup
RS232 Config Setup
RS232 Loopback Test
Hand-waving LED setup
SNMP System Config Setup
SSH Setup

<< Press ESC key to return to Main Menu or enter a command >>

The SSH Setup screen will appear.
O9400SA
=== SSH Setup ===
ARROW KEYS : CURSOR MOVE , ENTER KEY : ITEM SELECT

10:02:37 10/23/2008

SSH Server : OFF

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

Use the arrow keys to move your cursor. Use the Tab key to scroll in the setting.

74

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS

Table 5-10 SSH Serttings
Field

Setting Options

Default Setting

SSH Server

ON, OFF

OFF

75

Note

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS

5.16 SDH/SONET Mode Setup
The full menu path for SDH/SONET Mode Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
D > SDH/SONET Config Setup
A > System Setup
A screen by screen setup example is shown below.
5.16.1 Setup Screen Access
To setup the SDH/SONET configuration mode, press D from the Main Menu.
O9400SA

=== Main Menu ===

18:26:12 03/22/2007

Serial Number
: 000045
Hardware Version: D
Software Version: V1.01.01 03/20/2007

Connect Port: SUPV_PORT
Start Time : 11:29:08 03/22/2007

[DISPLAY]
C -> System Config Display
I -> System Information
B -> SDH/SONET Config Display
Q -> Alarm Queue
T -> System Log Information
A -> SDH/SONET Alarm Status
P -> SDH/SONET Performance Statistics

[SETUP]
S -> System Config Setup
D -> SDH/SONET Config Setup
M -> Alarm Setup
V -> Store/Retrieve Backup Config
L -> File Transfer
R -> Performance Setup/Clear

[LOG]
F -> Log Off
O -> Log On
U -> Choose a Unit

[MISC]
Y -> Alarm Cut Off
Z -> System Reset
X -> Clear Alarm Queue
W -> Return to Default

>>SPACE bar to refresh or enter a command ===>

The SDH/SONET Config Setup menu will appear. Press A.
O9400SA

=== SDH/SONET Config Setup ===

A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K

->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->

11:21:07 07/17/2007

SDH/SONET Mode Setup
SDH/SONET Protection Setup
ALS/APSD Setup
SDH/SONET Granularity Setup
XC/TSA Create Setup
XC/TSA Delete Setup
XC/TSA Map Configuration
SDH/SONET Overhead Setup
Line Loopback Setup
MSP USER Command
Customer information Setup

<< Press ESC key to return to Main Menu or enter a command >>

5.16.2 SDH/SONET Mode Setup Procedure
The SDH/SONET Mode Setup screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to move your cursor to
the various fields. Use the Tab key to scroll in the Rate and Mode settings.

76

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS
Table 5-11 SDH/SONET Mode Settings
Field

Setting Options

Rate
Mode
Implicit Bypass XC:

STM-1, STM-4, OC-3, OC-12
ADM(SNCP), 2TM, TM1+1
Enable, Disable

Default Setting

Note

STM-4
ADM(SNCP)
Enable

Note: When you change the mode settings, the available line side settings will also be
changed. Please refer to table below.
Table 5-12 SDH/SONET Line Side Settings
Field

Setting Options

ADM
2TM
TM1+1

Ea or Wa *
Ea or Wa
Ea

Default Setting

Note

Note: * Ea denotes East and Wa denotes West.

Press the Enter key.
O940 0SA
== = S DH/S ONE T M ode Set up ===
09/0 4/2 009
ARRO W K EYS : CU RSO R M OVE, TA B/` : RO LL UP/ DOWN OP TIO NS
Rate
Mode

:
:

1 0:17 :45

S TM1
A DM( SNC P)

Impl ici t B ypas s X C:

Ena ble

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to prev iou s m enu >>

Note: Implicit Bypass XC can only be used in ADM mode. If enabled, it allows signals to
pass through the device (East to West bi-direction only).
A prompt will ask if you want to change the configuration. Press Y for yes. Press Enter
Note: A warning will appear on your screen to remind you that if you change the settings and
save them they will become the new default settings.
O940 0SA
== = S DH/S ONE T M ode Set up ===
09/0 4/2 009
ARRO W K EYS : CU RSO R M OVE, TA B/` : RO LL UP/ DOWN OP TIO NS
Rate
Mode

:
:

1 0:17 :45

S TM1
A DM( SNC P)

Impl ici t B ypas s X C:

Ena ble

Warn ing !!! !Sys tem wi ll b e l oad ed d efa ult ,aft er you cha nge th ese set tin gs.
>> C han ge conf igu rat ion (Y/ N)? (No te: to save ,pl eas e us e V -co mman d)

You will be returned to the SDH/SONET Config Setup menu. Press the ESC key to return to
the Main Menu
To store the configuration you must press V from the Main Menu. The menu path is as
follows:
O > Logon
S > System Config Setup
V > Store/Retrieve Backup Config

77

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS
For a detailed, screen by screen example of this procedure, please refer to Section 5.30,
Store/Retrieve Backup Configuration.

78

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS

5.17 SDH/SONET Protection Setup
The full menu path for SDH/SONET Protection Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
D > SDH/SONET Config Setup
B > SDH/SONET Protection Setup
A screen by screen setup example is shown below.
5.17.1 Setup Screen Access
To setup SDH/SONET protection, press D from the Main Menu.
O9400SA

=== Main Menu ===

18:26:12 03/22/2007

Serial Number
: 000045
Hardware Version: D
Software Version: V1.01.01 03/20/2007

Connect Port: SUPV_PORT
Start Time : 11:29:08 03/22/2007

[DISPLAY]
C -> System Config Display
I -> System Information
B -> SDH/SONET Config Display
Q -> Alarm Queue
T -> System Log Information
A -> SDH/SONET Alarm Status
P -> SDH/SONET Performance Statistics

[SETUP]
S -> System Config Setup
D -> SDH/SONET Config Setup
M -> Alarm Setup
V -> Store/Retrieve Backup Config
L -> File Transfer
R -> Performance Setup/Clear

[LOG]
F -> Log Off
O -> Log On
U -> Choose a Unit

[MISC]
Y -> Alarm Cut Off
Z -> System Reset
X -> Clear Alarm Queue
W -> Return to Default

>>SPACE bar to refresh or enter a command ===>

The SDH/SONET Config Setup menu will appear. Press B.
O9400SA

=== SDH/SONET Config Setup ===

A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K

->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->

11:21:07 07/17/2007

SDH/SONET Mode Setup
SDH/SONET Protection Setup
ALS/APSD Setup
SDH/SONET Granularity Setup
XC/TSA Create Setup
XC/TSA Delete Setup
XC/TSA Map Configuration
SDH/SONET Overhead Setup
Line Loopback Setup
MSP USER Command
Customer information Setup

<< Press ESC key to return to Main Menu or enter a command >>

5.17.2 SDH/SONET Protection Setup Procedure
The SDH/SONET Mode Setup screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to move your cursor to
the various fields. Use the Tab key to scroll in your settings.

79

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS

Table 5-13 SDH/SONET Protection Setting Options
Field

Setting Options

Type

MSP1+1, SNCP

Setting
Options

MSP1+1 Setting
Options

MSP1+1
Default
Setting

SNCP
Setting
Options

SNCP
Default
Setting

Protection
Revertive

ON, OFF
Revertive, Nonrevertive

ON
Non-revertive

ON
Non-revertive

Direction

Uni-direction, Bidirection
--

Uni-direction

ON
Revertive,
Nonrevertive
-SNCP/I,
SNCP/N

SNCP/I

3~900

300

Mode
WTR
Timer(s)

Note

--

--

--

--

Press the Enter key.
O940 0SA
== = S DH/ SONE T P rot ecti on Set up = ==
07/1 7/2 007
ARRO W K EYS : CU RSO R M OVE, TA B/` : RO LL UP/ DOWN OP TIO NS

1 1:48 :44

---- --- Pro tect ion Se tup- --Type
:MSP 1+1
Prot ect ion :ON
Reve rti ve :Non -re ver tive
Dire cti on :Uni -di rec tion

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to prev iou s m enu >>

A prompt will ask if you want to change the configuration. Press Y for yes. Press Enter
O940 0SA
== = S DH/ SONE T P rot ecti on Set up = ==
07/1 7/2 007
ARRO W K EYS : CU RSO R M OVE, TA B/` : RO LL UP/ DOWN OP TIO NS

1 1:48 :44

---- --- Pro tect ion Se tup- --Type
:MSP 1+1
Prot ect ion :ON
Reve rti ve :Non -re ver tive
Dire cti on :Uni -di rec tion

>> C han ge conf igu rat ion (Y/ N)? (No te: to save ,pl eas e us e V -co mman d)

A prompt will ask if you want to change the configuration. Press Y for yes. Press Enter
Note: The sample screen shown below is for MSP1+1.
O9400SA
=== SDH/SONET Protection Setup ===
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB/`: ROLL UP/DOWN OPTIONS

09:47:29 04/16/2009

-------Protection Setup---Type
:MSP1+1
Protection :ON
Revertive
:Non-revertive
Direction
:Uni-direction
WTR Timer(S):300
>> C han ge conf igu rat ion (Y/ N)? (No te: to save ,pl eas e us e V -co mman d)

You will be returned to the SDH/SONET Config Setup menu. Press the ESC key to return to
the Main Menu.

80

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS
To store the configuration you must press V from the Main Menu. The menu path is as
follows:
O > Logon
S > System Config Setup
V > Store/Retrieve Backup Config
For a detailed, screen by screen example of this procedure, please refer to Section 5.30,
Store/Retrieve Backup Configuration.

81

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS

5.18 ALS/APSD Setup
The full menu path for ALS/APSD Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
D > SDH/SONET Config Setup
C > ALS/APSD Setup
A screen by screen setup example is shown below.

5.18.1 Setup Screen Access
To setup ALS/APSD, press D from the Main Menu.
O9400SA

=== Main Menu ===

18:26:12 03/22/2007

Serial Number
: 000045
Hardware Version: D
Software Version: V1.01.01 03/20/2007

Connect Port: SUPV_PORT
Start Time : 11:29:08 03/22/2007

[DISPLAY]
C -> System Config Display
I -> System Information
B -> SDH/SONET Config Display
Q -> Alarm Queue
T -> System Log Information
A -> SDH/SONET Alarm Status
P -> SDH/SONET Performance Statistics

[SETUP]
S -> System Config Setup
D -> SDH/SONET Config Setup
M -> Alarm Setup
V -> Store/Retrieve Backup Config
L -> File Transfer
R -> Performance Setup/Clear

[LOG]
F -> Log Off
O -> Log On
U -> Choose a Unit

[MISC]
Y -> Alarm Cut Off
Z -> System Reset
X -> Clear Alarm Queue
W -> Return to Default

>>SPACE bar to refresh or enter a command ===>

The SDH/SONET Config Setup menu will appear. Press C.
O9400SA

=== SDH/SONET Config Setup ===

A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K

->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->

11:21:07 07/17/2007

SDH/SONET Mode Setup
SDH/SONET Protection Setup
ALS/APSD Setup
SDH/SONET Granularity Setup
XC/TSA Create Setup
XC/TSA Delete Setup
XC/TSA Map Configuration
SDH/SONET Overhead Setup
Line Loopback Setup
MSP USER Command
Customer information Setup

<< Press ESC key to return to Main Menu or enter a command >>

82

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS
5.18.2 ALS/APSD Setup Procedure
The ALS/APSD Setup screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to move your cursor to the
various fields. Use the Tab key to scroll in your settings.
Table 5-14 ALS/APSD Setting Options
Field

Setting Options

Ea laser power
Wa laser power
Ea ALS enable
Wa ALS enable
Automatic restart sec)
Ea manual restart
Wa manual restart

ON, OFF
ON, OFF
ON, OFF
ON, OFF
60-300
ON, OFF
ON, OFF

Default Setting

Note

ON
ON
OFF
OFF
300
OFF
OFF

Press the Enter key.
O940 0SA
== = A LS/A PSD Se tup ===
ARRO W K EYS : CU RSO R M OVE, TA B/` : RO LL UP/ DOWN OP TIO NS

1 0:0 3:44 10 /23 /200 8

Ea l ase r p ower : ON
Wa l ase r p ower : ON
Ea A LS ena ble : O FF
Wa A LS ena ble : O FF
puls e r epe titi on tim e fo r a uto mati c r est art( sec ) : 300
Ea m anu al rest art : OFF
Wa m anu al rest art : OFF

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to prev iou s m enu >>

A prompt will ask “Are you Sure? (Y/N)” Press Y for yes. You will be returned to the previous
menu.
>>Ar e y ou sure (Y /N) ?

This procedure is complete.
The Store/Retrieve Configuration screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to move your cursor
to STORE. Press the Enter key. A prompt will ask if you wish to store this configuration.
Press Y for yes.

83

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS

5.19 SDH/SONET Granularity Setup
The full menu path for SDH/SONET Protection Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
D > SDH/SONET Config Setup
D > SDH/SONET Granularity Setup
A screen by screen setup example is shown below.
5.19.1 Setup Screen Access
To setup SDH/SONET Granularity, press D from the Main Menu.
O9400SA

=== Main Menu ===

18:26:12 03/22/2007

Serial Number
: 000045
Hardware Version: D
Software Version: V1.01.01 03/20/2007

Connect Port: SUPV_PORT
Start Time : 11:29:08 03/22/2007

[DISPLAY]
C -> System Config Display
I -> System Information
B -> SDH/SONET Config Display
Q -> Alarm Queue
T -> System Log Information
A -> SDH/SONET Alarm Status
P -> SDH/SONET Performance Statistics

[SETUP]
S -> System Config Setup
D -> SDH/SONET Config Setup
M -> Alarm Setup
V -> Store/Retrieve Backup Config
L -> File Transfer
R -> Performance Setup/Clear

[LOG]
F -> Log Off
O -> Log On
U -> Choose a Unit

[MISC]
Y -> Alarm Cut Off
Z -> System Reset
X -> Clear Alarm Queue
W -> Return to Default

>>SPACE bar to refresh or enter a command ===>

The SDH/SONET Config Setup menu will appear. Press D.
O9400SA

=== SDH/SONET Config Setup ===

A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K

->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->

11:21:07 07/17/2007

SDH/SONET Mode Setup
SDH/SONET Protection Setup
ALS/APSD Setup
SDH/SONET Granularity Setup
XC/TSA Create Setup
XC/TSA Delete Setup
XC/TSA Map Configuration
SDH/SONET Overhead Setup
Line Loopback Setup
MSP USER Command
Customer information Setup

<< Press ESC key to return to Main Menu or enter a command >>

84

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS
5.19.2 SDH/SONET Granularity Setup Procedure
The SDH/SONET Granularity Setup screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to move your
cursor to the various fields. Use the Tab key to scroll in your settings.

Table 5-15 SDH/SONET Granularity Setting Options
Field
AUG1# (SDH)
STS3# (SONET)

Setting Options

Default Setting

--

Field

Note
Setting is automatic and
depends on the
SDH/SONET rate.

--

Setting Options

Default Setting

AU4-TUG3,
AU3-3, VC4

AU4-TUG3

Setting Options

Default Setting

AU4-TUG3
AU3-3
VC4

TU3, TU11, TU12
AU3, TU11, TU12
BYPASS

TU12
TU12
BYPASS

Field

Setting Options

Default Setting

Note

HO-Path Granularity

STS3, STS3C

STS3

SDH

HO-Path Granularity

SDH

LO-Path#1 Granularity
LO-Path#2 Granularity
LO-Path #3 Granularity

SONET

SONET

LO-Path#1 Granularity
LO-Path#2 Granularity
LO-Path #3 Granularity

Field

Field
STS3
STS3C

Note

Setting Options

Default Setting

STS1, VT2, VT15
BYPASS

VT2
BYPASS

Press the Enter key.
This is a sample SDH screen at STM-1 rate.
O940 0SA
== = SD H/S ONE T Gr anu lar ity Set up ===
ARRO W K EYS : CU RSO R M OVE, TA B/` : RO LL UP/ DOWN OP TIO NS

1 7:0 8:26 09 /20 /200 7

==== === === ==== === === ==== === === EAS T = === ==== === === ==== === === ==== === === ==
AUG1 #
: 1
HO-P ath
Gran ula rit y : AU4 -TU G3
LO-P ath #1 Gran ula rit y : TU1 2
LO-P ath #2 Gran ula rit y : TU1 2
LO-p ath #3 Gran ula rit y : TU1 2

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to prev iou s m enu >>

This is a sample SONET screen at OC-12 rate.
O940 0SA
=== SD H/S ONET Gr anu lari ty Set up = ==
10/0 1/2 007
ARRO W K EYS : CU RSO R M OVE, TA B/` : RO LL UP/ DOWN OP TIO NS

==== === === ==== === === ==== === === EAS T
STS3 #
: 1
STS3
Gra nula rit y
: STS 3
STS1 #1 Gra nula rit y
: VT1 5
STS1 #2 Gra nula rit y
: VT1 5
STS1 #3 Gra nula rit y
: VT1 5

1 2:37 :02

= === ==== === === ==== === === ==== === === ==
2
3
4
S TS3
ST S3
STS3
V T15
VT 15
VT15
V T15
VT 15
VT15
V T15
VT 15
VT15

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to prev iou s m enu >>.

85

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS
A prompt will ask if you want to change the configuration. Press Y for yes. Press Enter
>> C han ge conf igu rat ion (Y/ N)? (No te: to save ,pl eas e us e V -co mman d)

You will be returned to the SDH/SONET Config Setup menu. Press the ESC key to return to
the Main Menu.
To store the configuration you must press V from the Main Menu. The menu path is as
follows:
O > Logon
S > System Config Setup
V > Store/Retrieve Backup Config
For a detailed, screen by screen example of this procedure, please refer to Section 5.30,
Store/Retrieve Backup Configuration.

86

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS

5.20 XC/TSA Create Setup
The full menu path for XC/TSA Create Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
D > SDH/SONET Config Setup
E > XC/TSA Create Setup
A screen by screen setup example is shown below.
5.20.1 Setup Screen Access
To setup a TSA cross connect, press D from the Main Menu.
O9400SA

=== Main Menu ===

18:26:12 03/22/2007

Serial Number
: 000045
Hardware Version: D
Software Version: V1.01.01 03/20/2007

Connect Port: SUPV_PORT
Start Time : 11:29:08 03/22/2007

[DISPLAY]
C -> System Config Display
I -> System Information
B -> SDH/SONET Config Display
Q -> Alarm Queue
T -> System Log Information
A -> SDH/SONET Alarm Status
P -> SDH/SONET Performance Statistics

[SETUP]
S -> System Config Setup
D -> SDH/SONET Config Setup
M -> Alarm Setup
V -> Store/Retrieve Backup Config
L -> File Transfer
R -> Performance Setup/Clear

[LOG]
F -> Log Off
O -> Log On
U -> Choose a Unit

[MISC]
Y -> Alarm Cut Off
Z -> System Reset
X -> Clear Alarm Queue
W -> Return to Default

>>SPACE bar to refresh or enter a command ===>

The SDH/SONET Config Setup menu will appear. Press E.
O9400SA

=== SDH/SONET Config Setup ===

A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K

->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->

11:21:07 07/17/2007

SDH/SONET Mode Setup
SDH/SONET Protection Setup
ALS/APSD Setup
SDH/SONET Granularity Setup
XC/TSA Create Setup
XC/TSA Delete Setup
XC/TSA Map Configuration
SDH/SONET Overhead Setup
Line Loopback Setup
MSP USER Command
Customer information Setup

<< Press ESC key to return to Main Menu or enter a command >>

87

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS

5.20.2 XC/TSA Create Setup
The XC/TSA Create Setup screen will appear. Use the Tab key to scroll in a setting for the
Granularity field. Setting options are: TU3, AU3/C3, TU11, TU12, and AU4/C4.
Table 5-16 XC/TSA Setting Options
System Mode

Field

Setting Options

Default Setting

STM-1, STM-4

Granularity

TU12

OC-3, OC-12

Granularity

TU3, TU11, TU12,
AU3/C3, AU4/C4
STS1, STS3C, VT2,
VT15

Note

VT2

Press the Enter key.
O9400SA
=== XC/TSA Create Setup ===
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB/`: ROLL UP/DOWN OPTIONS
Granularity
: TU12

11:04:14 03/26/2008

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

An expanded screen will appear as shown below. Use the arrow keys to move your cursor to
the various fields. Use the Tab key to scroll in the your settings.
Note: Some settings must be keyed in.
O9400SA
=== XC/TSA Create Setup ===
11:04:14 03/26/2008
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB/`: ROLL UP/DOWN OPTIONS
Granularity
: TU12
Map
: map1
------------------------------- Source ------------------------------------From Unit
: East
From AUG1 : 1
From TS
: 1 -VC3/TUG3 01 -VC1x
Count
: 01
KLM
: [ TUG3#1, TUG2#1, TU12#1 ]
------------------------------- Destination -------------------------------To Unit
: East
To AUG1
: 1
To TS
: 1 -VC3/TUG3 01 -VC1x
XC Type
: Uni-Xc
KLM
: [ TUG3#1, TUG2#1, TU12#1 ]
VC3/TUG3
#1
#2
#3

VC1x
01~21
01~21
01~21

:
:
:
:

Source
o o o
o o o
o o o

-> East
AUG1#1 Timeslot Available
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o

o o o
o o o
o o o

VC3/TUG3
#1
#2
#3

VC1x
01~21
01~21
01~21

:
:
:
:

Destination -> East
AUG1#1 Timeslot Available
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o

o o o
o o o
o o o

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

88

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS

Table 5-17 XC/TSA Create Setup Setting Options
Field

Setting Options

Active Map
SDH
From unit
Source
AUG1#
TS VC3
TS VC1x
Count Setting

SONET
Source

map1, map2
East, West, TG1,TG2, TG3,
Inband, Async

TU3
AU3/C3
AU4/C4
TU11
TU12

TG2 and TG3 available only if device
is equipped with those options
Default setting is East

Default setting is 1

XC Type

Uni-Xc, Bi-Xc,
A&D, PP-A&D

Default setting is Uni-Xc

From unit

East, West, TG1, TG2,
TG3, Inband, RS232

TG2 and TG3 available only if device
is equipped with those options
Default setting is East

STS3
TSSTS1
TS VTxx
Count Setting

Range is 1~4 **
Range is 1~3
Range is 1~28
1
Range is 1~3
Range is 1~84
Range is 1~63

STS3C
STS1
VT15
VT2

XC Type
Destinati
on

Range is 1~4 **
Range is 1~3*
Range is 1~28*
Range is 1~3
Range is 1~3
1
Range is 1~84
Range is 1~63

Note

Uni-Xc, Bi-Xc,
A&D, PP-A&D

Default setting is 1

Default setting is Uni-Xc

Destination setting options are the same as the source setting options

* Note: Available VC1x and VC3 setting options depend on SDH/SONET Granularity.
**Note: This setting depends on the SDH/SONET rate.
Note: - means timeslot is not available.
o means timeslot is unused
x means timeslot is used
Note: You cannot cross AUG1 (or STS3) boundaries when setting up an XC/TSA map.
Because of this, you can only set up one AUG1 at a time.
A sample map setup screen is shown below. Press the Enter key when your mapping is
complete.

89

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS
O9400SA
=== XC/TSA Create Setup ===
11:09:50 03/26/2008
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB/`: ROLL UP/DOWN OPTIONS
Granularity
: TU12
Map
: map1
------------------------------- Source ------------------------------------From Unit
: East
From AUG1 : 1
From TS
: 1 -VC3/TUG3 01 -VC1x
Count
: 10
KLM
: [ TUG3#1, TUG2#1, TU12#1 ]
------------------------------- Destination -------------------------------To Unit
: East
To AUG1
: 1
To TS
: 1 -VC3/TUG3 01 -VC1x
XC Type
: Uni-Xc
KLM
: [ TUG3#1, TUG2#1, TU12#1 ]
VC3/TUG3
#1
#2
#3

VC1x
01~21
01~21
01~21

:
:
:
:

Source
o o o
o o o
o o o

-> East
AUG1#1 Timeslot Available
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o

o o o
o o o
o o o

VC3/TUG3
#1
#2
#3

VC1x
01~21
01~21
01~21

:
:
:
:

Destination -> East
AUG1#1 Timeslot Available
x x x
x x x
x x x
x o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o

o o o
o o o
o o o

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

A prompt will ask “Are you sure (Y/N)?” Press Y for yes.
>>Ar e y ou sure (Y /N) ?

Your new map will appear as shown below. Press the Esc key twice to return to the Main
Menu.
O9400SA
=== XC/TSA Create Setup ===
11:09:50 03/26/2008
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB/`: ROLL UP/DOWN OPTIONS
Granularity
: TU12
Map
: map1
------------------------------- Source ------------------------------------From Unit
: East
From AUG1 : 1
From TS
: 1 -VC3/TUG3 01 -VC1x
Count
: 10
KLM
: [ TUG3#1, TUG2#1, TU12#1 ]
------------------------------- Destination -------------------------------To Unit
: East
To AUG1
: 1
To TS
: 1 -VC3/TUG3 01 -VC1x
XC Type
: Uni-Xc
KLM
: [ TUG3#1, TUG2#1, TU12#1 ]
VC3/TUG3
#1
#2
#3

VC1x
01~21
01~21
01~21

:
:
:
:

Source
o o o
o o o
o o o

-> East
AUG1#1 Timeslot Available
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o

o o o
o o o
o o o

VC3/TUG3
#1
#2
#3

VC1x
01~21
01~21
01~21

:
:
:
:

Destination -> East
AUG1#1 Timeslot Available
x x x
x x x
x x x
x o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o

o o o
o o o
o o o

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

Note: The setup will take about 5 to 10 minutes to be applied. Please check the LCAS status
in the unit menu (of Ethernet cards) to confirm that the setup is successful. The path is as
follows:
Enter the unit menu (please refer to 5.42.2 or 5.43.2)
(C) WAN (VCG) & Link Display
(D) LCAS Channel Status

90

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS
The LCAS Channel Status:
Unit TG3 -FE-SW
=== LCAS Channel Status ===
09:39:31 04/23/2010
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, Please Input: 1~8, BACKSPACE to edit
VCG: 1 Direction: Source
Member State
Member State
------ ------- ------ ------01 :
NORM
02 :
NORM
05 :
NORM
06 :
NORM
09 :
NORM
10 :
NORM
13 :
NORM
14 :
NORM
17 :
NORM
18 :
NORM
21 :
NORM
22 :
NORM
25 :
NORM
26 :
NORM
29 :
NORM
30 :
NORM
33 :
NORM
34 :
NORM
37 :
NORM
38 :
NORM
41 :
NORM
42 :
NORM
45 :
NORM
46 :
NORM
49 :
NORM
50 :
NORM
53 :
NORM
54 :
NORM
57 :
NORM
58 :
NORM
61 :
NORM
62 :
NORM

Member
-----03 :
07 :
11 :
15 :
19 :
23 :
27 :
31 :
35 :
39 :
43 :
47 :
51 :
55 :
59 :
63 :

State
------NORM
NORM
NORM
NORM
NORM
NORM
NORM
NORM
NORM
NORM
NORM
NORM
NORM
NORM
NORM
EOS

Member
-----04 :
08 :
12 :
16 :
20 :
24 :
28 :
32 :
36 :
40 :
44 :
48 :
52 :
56 :
60 :

State
------NORM
NORM
NORM
NORM
NORM
NORM
NORM
NORM
NORM
NORM
NORM
NORM
NORM
NORM
NORM

The abbreviations and the remarks are listed below:
Table 5-18 LCAS Status Abbreviations and Remark
LCAS Status Abbreviations
none-LCAS
ADD
NORM
EoS
IDLE
DNU

Remarks
This is an indication that this end uses fixed bandwidth
This member is about to be added to the group
Normal transmission
End of Sequence indication and Normal transmission
This member is not part of the group or about to be removed
Do Not Use (the payload), the sink side reported FAIL status

91

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS

5.21 XC/TSA Delete Setup
The full menu path for XC/TSA Create Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
D > SDH/SONET Config Setup
F > XC/TSA Delete Setup
A screen by screen setup example is shown below.
5.21.1 Setup Screen Access
To setup a TSA cross connect, press D from the Main Menu.
O9400SA

=== Main Menu ===

18:26:12 03/22/2007

Serial Number
: 000045
Hardware Version: D
Software Version: V1.01.01 03/20/2007

Connect Port: SUPV_PORT
Start Time : 11:29:08 03/22/2007

[DISPLAY]
C -> System Config Display
I -> System Information
B -> SDH/SONET Config Display
Q -> Alarm Queue
T -> System Log Information
A -> SDH/SONET Alarm Status
P -> SDH/SONET Performance Statistics

[SETUP]
S -> System Config Setup
D -> SDH/SONET Config Setup
M -> Alarm Setup
V -> Store/Retrieve Backup Config
L -> File Transfer
R -> Performance Setup/Clear

[LOG]
F -> Log Off
O -> Log On
U -> Choose a Unit

[MISC]
Y -> Alarm Cut Off
Z -> System Reset
X -> Clear Alarm Queue
W -> Return to Default

>>SPACE bar to refresh or enter a command ===>

The SDH/SONET Config Setup menu will appear. Press F.
O9400SA

=== SDH/SONET Config Setup ===

A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K

->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->

11:21:07 07/17/2007

SDH/SONET Mode Setup
SDH/SONET Protection Setup
ALS/APSD Setup
SDH/SONET Granularity Setup
XC/TSA Create Setup
XC/TSA Delete Setup
XC/TSA Map Configuration
SDH/SONET Overhead Setup
Line Loopback Setup
MSP USER Command
Customer information Setup

<< Press ESC key to return to Main Menu or enter a command >>

92

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS

5.21.2 XC/TSA Delete Setup
The XC/TSA Delete Setup screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to move your cursor to the
various fields. Use the Tab key to scroll in your settings.
Note: Some settings must be keyed in.

Table 5-19 XC/TSA Delete Setting Options
Field
Active Map
SDH Source

From unit
AUG1#
TS VC3
TS VC1x
Count Setting

TU3
AU3/C3
AU4/C4
TU11
TU12

Setting
Options

Default
Setting

map1, map2
East, West, TG1,
Inband, Async
Range is 1~4 **
Range is 1~3*
Range is 1~28*
Range is 1~3

map1

1

Range is 1~4**
Range is 1~84
Range is 1~63

STS3

SONET

Range is 1~4 **
1
Range is 1~3*
1
Range is 1~28*
STS1
Range is 1~3
VT2
Range is 1~63
VT15
Range is 1~84
Destination setting options are the same as the source setting options
TS VC3/AUG3
TS VTxx
Count Setting

Destination

* Note: Available VC1x and VC3 setting options depend on SDH/SONET Granularity.
**Note: This setting depends on the SDH/SONET rate.

After selecting all of your settings, press the Enter key.
O9400SA
=== XC/TSA Delete Setup ===
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB/`: ROLL UP/DOWN OPTIONS
Map

12:10:28 03/28/2008

: map1

Count
: 01
------------------------------- Destination -------------------------------To Slot
: East
To AUG1
: 1
To TS
: 1 -VC3/TUG3 01 -VC1x
KLM
: [ TUG3#1, TUG2#1, TU12#1 ]
VC3/TUG3
#1
#2
#3

VC1x
01~21
01~21
01~21

:
:
:
:

Destination -> East
AUG1#1 Timeslot Available
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o

A prompt will ask “Are you sure (Y/N)?” Press Y for yes.
>>Ar e y ou sure (Y /N) ?

A further prompt will appear that says the deletion was successful.
>>De let e S ucce ss!

This procedure is now complete.

93

o o o
o o o
o o o

Note

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS

5.22 XC/TSA Map Configuration
The full menu path for XC/TSA Create Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
D > SDH/SONET Config Setup
G > XC/TSA Map Configuration
A screen by screen setup example is shown below.
5.22.1 Setup Screen Access
To setup a TSA cross connect, press D from the Main Menu.
O9400SA

=== Main Menu ===

18:26:12 03/22/2007

Serial Number
: 000045
Hardware Version: D
Software Version: V1.01.01 03/20/2007

Connect Port: SUPV_PORT
Start Time : 11:29:08 03/22/2007

[DISPLAY]
C -> System Config Display
I -> System Information
B -> SDH/SONET Config Display
Q -> Alarm Queue
T -> System Log Information
A -> SDH/SONET Alarm Status
P -> SDH/SONET Performance Statistics

[SETUP]
S -> System Config Setup
D -> SDH/SONET Config Setup
M -> Alarm Setup
V -> Store/Retrieve Backup Config
L -> File Transfer
R -> Performance Setup/Clear

[LOG]
F -> Log Off
O -> Log On
U -> Choose a Unit

[MISC]
Y -> Alarm Cut Off
Z -> System Reset
X -> Clear Alarm Queue
W -> Return to Default

>>SPACE bar to refresh or enter a command ===>

The SDH/SONET Config Setup menu will appear. Press G.
O9400SA

=== SDH/SONET Config Setup ===

A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K

->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->

11:21:07 07/17/2007

SDH/SONET Mode Setup
SDH/SONET Protection Setup
ALS/APSD Setup
SDH/SONET Granularity Setup
XC/TSA Create Setup
XC/TSA Delete Setup
XC/TSA Map Configuration
SDH/SONET Overhead Setup
Line Loopback Setup
MSP USER Command
Customer information Setup

<< Press ESC key to return to Main Menu or enter a command >>

94

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS
5.22.2 XC/TSA Map Configuration Setup
The XC/TSA Map Configuration Setup screen will appear as shown below.
O9400SA

=== XC/TSA MAP Configuration ===

10:23:15 09/21/2007

A -> Map Change
B -> Map Delete
C -> Map Copy

<< Press ESC key to return to Main Menu or enter a command >>

A → Map Change
Press A to select the Map Change screen
O9400SA

=== MAP Change ===

10:30:54 09/21/2007

Current Active Map: map1
Change Current Active Map to map2 (Y/N)?

A prompt will ask if you are sure. Press Y for yes.
>>Are you sure (Y/N)?

Key in your password. Press the Enter key. This procedure is complete.
==>> Enter password :

B → Map Delete
Press B to select the Map Delete screen. Use the tab key to scroll in either map1 or map2 as
your setting. Press the Enter key.
O9400SA
TAB or Enter key to select

=== Map Delete ===

10:41:05 09/21/2007

Delete All TSA in map2
<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

A prompt will ask if you are sure. Press Y for yes.
>>Are you sure (Y/N)?

Key in your password. Press the Enter key. This procedure is complete.
==>> Enter password :

C → Map Copy
Press C to select the Map Copy screen. To copy the Active Map to map1 press the Enter
key.
O9400SA

=== TSA Map Copy ===

10:44:25 09/21/2007

Copy Active Map to the Other Map: map2->map1
Copy Active Map to map1 (Y/N)?

A prompt will ask if you are sure. Press Y for yes.
>>Are you sure (Y/N)?

Key in your password. Press the Enter key. This procedure is complete.
==>> Enter password :

95

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS

5.23 SDH/SONET Overhead Setup
The full menu path for XC/TSA Create Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
D > SDH/SONET Config Setup
H -> SDH/SONET Overhead Setup
A screen by screen setup example is shown below.

5.23.1 Setup Screen Access
To setup a TSA cross connect, press D from the Main Menu.
O9400SA

=== Main Menu ===

18:26:12 03/22/2007

Serial Number
: 000045
Hardware Version: D
Software Version: V1.01.01 03/20/2007

Connect Port: SUPV_PORT
Start Time : 11:29:08 03/22/2007

[DISPLAY]
C -> System Config Display
I -> System Information
B -> SDH/SONET Config Display
Q -> Alarm Queue
T -> System Log Information
A -> SDH/SONET Alarm Status
P -> SDH/SONET Performance Statistics

[SETUP]
S -> System Config Setup
D -> SDH/SONET Config Setup
M -> Alarm Setup
V -> Store/Retrieve Backup Config
L -> File Transfer
R -> Performance Setup/Clear

[LOG]
F -> Log Off
O -> Log On
U -> Choose a Unit

[MISC]
Y -> Alarm Cut Off
Z -> System Reset
X -> Clear Alarm Queue
W -> Return to Default

>>SPACE bar to refresh or enter a command ===>

The SDH/SONET Config Setup menu will appear. Press H.
O9400SA

=== SDH/SONET Config Setup ===

A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K

->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->

11:21:07 07/17/2007

SDH/SONET Mode Setup
SDH/SONET Protection Setup
ALS/APSD Setup
SDH/SONET Granularity Setup
XC/TSA Create Setup
XC/TSA Delete Setup
XC/TSA Map Configuration
SDH/SONET Overhead Setup
Line Loopback Setup
MSP USER Command
Customer information Setup

<< Press ESC key to return to Main Menu or enter a command >>

96

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS
5.23.2 SDH/SONET Overhead Setup
The SDH/SONET Overhead Setup screen will appear as shown below.
O9400SA

=== SDH/SONET Overhead Setup ===

11:30:45 09/21/2007

A -> SDH/SONET Line Overhead Setup
B -> Ho-Path/STS-Path Overhead Setup

<< Press ESC key to return to Main Menu or enter a command >>

A → SDH/SONET Line Overhead Setup
Press A to select the SDH/SONET Line Overhead screen. Use the Tab key to scroll in a Line
Side setting. Press the Enter key.

Table 5-20 SDH/SONET Overhead Line Side Setting Options
System
Mode
STM-1
STM-4
OC-3
OC-12

Field

Line
Side

Setting Options
If SDH/SONET is
in ADM or 2TM
mode

Default
Setting

Ea, Wa

Ea

Setting Options
If SDH/SONET is
in TM1+1 mode
Ea, Eb

O9400SA
=== SDH/SONET Line Overhead Setup ===
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB/`: ROLL UP/DOWN OPTIONS
Line Side : Ea

Default
Setting

Note

Ea

11:34:26 09/21/2007

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

An expanded screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the various fields.
Use the Tab key to scroll in your settings. Press the Enter key.
Note: Some settings must be keyed in.

Table 5-21 Additional SDH/SONET Overhead Setting Options
System Mode
STM-1
STM-4
OC-3
OC-12

Field
J0_LEN
Exoect_J0_M
TX_J0_MSG
RX_J0_MSG

Setting Options
NULL, 1-Byte,
16-byte (NULL padding),
16-byte (SPACE padding)
0~0xFF (key in)
0~0xFF (key in)

O9400SA
=== SDH/SONET Line Overhead Setup ===
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB/`: ROLL UP/DOWN OPTIONS
Line Side : Ea

J0_LEN
Expect_J0_MSG
TX_J0_MSG
RX_J0_MSG

: 16-BYTE (NULL padding)
:
:
:

97

Default
Setting
NULL
Key in message
Key in message

11:51:52 09/21/2007

Note

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS
B → Ho-Path/STS-Path Overhead Setup
Press B to select the Ho-Path/STS-Path Overhead Setup screen. Use the Tab key to scroll in
a Line Side setting. Press the Enter key.

Table 5-22 Ho-Path/STS-Path Line Side Setting Options
System
Mode
STM-1

STM-4

Field
Line Side

Line Side

Setting
Options

in ATM or 2TM mode
in TM1+1 mode

Ea, Eb

in ATM or 2TM mode
in TM1+1 mode

Ea, Eb

AUG1#
VC3#
OC-3

OC-12

Ea, Wa

Ea, Wa
1~4
1~3*

Line Side

Line Side

in ATM or 2TM mode
in TM1+1 mode

Ea, Eb

in ATM or 2TM mode
in TM1+1 mode

Ea, Eb

STS3#
STS1#

Ea, Wa

Ea, Wa
1~4
1~3*

Default
Setting

Note

Ea
Ea
Ea
Ea
1
1
Ea
Ea
Ea
Ea
1
1

* NOTE: VC3# and STS1# are only available when the granularity of AUG1/STS3 is AU#-3
and STS3 respectively.

O9400SA

=== Ho-Path/STS-Path Overhead Setup === 10:52:08 05/27/2009

ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB/`: ROLL UP/DOWN OPTIONS
Line Side : Ea

AUG1# : 1

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

An expanded screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the various fields.
Use the Tab key to scroll in your settings. Press the Enter key.
Note: Some settings must be keyed in.

Table 5-23 Additional Ho-Path/STS-Path Overhead Setting Options
System Mode

Field

Setting Options

Default Setting

AUG#1

1 (for STM-1/OC-3),
1~4 (for STM-4/OC-12)
NULL, 16-BYTE (NULL padding),
16-BYTE (Space padding),
64-BYTE (NULL padding),
64-BYTE (Space padding)
Key in message
Key in message

1

0~0xFF (key in)

2

0~0xFF (key in)
Fixed

2

J1_LEN

Expect_J1_MSG
TX_J1_MSG
RX_J1_MSG
HP-TxPSL
HP-EPSL
HP-RxPSL

98

NULL

Note

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS

O9400SA

=== Ho-Path/STS-Path Overhead Setup === 13:29:30 12/02/2009

ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB/`: ROLL UP/DOWN OPTIONS
Line Side : Ea

J1_LEN : NULL
Expect_J1_MSG :
TX_J1_MSG :
RX_J1_MSG :

HP-TxPSL : 2

( TUG )

HP-EPSL : 2

( TUG )

HP-RxPSL : ff

( VC-AIS )

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

A prompt will ask if you want to change the configuration. Press Y for yes. Press Enter
>> C han ge conf igu rat ion (Y/ N)? (No te: to save ,pl eas e us e V -co mman d)

Press the ESC key twice to return to the Main Menu.
To store the configuration you must press V from the Main Menu. The menu path is as
follows:
O > Logon
S > System Config Setup
V > Store/Retrieve Backup Config
For a detailed, screen by screen example of this procedure, please refer to Section 5.30,
Store/Retrieve Backup Configuration.

99

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS

5.24 Line Loopback Setup
The O9400S provides the following diagnostic loopbacks:
¾
Receive line interface looped back to the transmit line interface
¾
Transmit line interfae looped back to the receive line interface
They are shown in Figure 5-11 below.

Figure 5-11 O9400S Loopback Diagram
1 To-optical Line Loopback is illustrated in Figure 5-11. The incoming STM-1/4 (OC-3/12) line

signal is looped back to the outgoing STM-1/4 (OC-3/12) signal before the SDH/SONET
transceiver framer. This loopback is used to isolate the local equipment from a troubled STM1/4 (OC-3/12) transmission line. Line loopback test can be activated from the terminal.
2 To-tributary Line Loopback is illustrated in Figure 5-11. The outgoing STM-1/4 (OC-3/12)

signal is looped back through the transceiver. All STM-1/4 (OC-3/12) signals are looped back
to the receiver path. This loopback test is activated by the Test command. This loopback test
can be used with the PRBS diagnostic test pattern to validate the local O9400's integrity.

The full menu path Line Loopback Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
D > SDH/SONET Config Setup
I > Line Loopback Setup
A screen by screen setup example is shown on the next page.

100

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS
5.24.1 Setup Screen Access
To setup a TSA cross connect, press D from the Main Menu.
O9400SA

=== Main Menu ===

18:26:12 03/22/2007

Serial Number
: 000045
Hardware Version: D
Software Version: V1.01.01 03/20/2007

Connect Port: SUPV_PORT
Start Time : 11:29:08 03/22/2007

[DISPLAY]
C -> System Config Display
I -> System Information
B -> SDH/SONET Config Display
Q -> Alarm Queue
T -> System Log Information
A -> SDH/SONET Alarm Status
P -> SDH/SONET Performance Statistics

[SETUP]
S -> System Config Setup
D -> SDH/SONET Config Setup
M -> Alarm Setup
V -> Store/Retrieve Backup Config
L -> File Transfer
R -> Performance Setup/Clear

[LOG]
F -> Log Off
O -> Log On
U -> Choose a Unit

[MISC]
Y -> Alarm Cut Off
Z -> System Reset
X -> Clear Alarm Queue
W -> Return to Default

>>SPACE bar to refresh or enter a command ===>

The SDH/SONET Config Setup menu will appear. Press I.
O9400SA

=== SDH/SONET Config Setup ===

A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K

->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->

11:21:07 07/17/2007

SDH/SONET Mode Setup
SDH/SONET Protection Setup
ALS/APSD Setup
SDH/SONET Granularity Setup
XC/TSA Create Setup
XC/TSA Delete Setup
XC/TSA Map Configuration
SDH/SONET Overhead Setup
Line Loopback Setup
MSP USER Command
Customer information Setup

<< Press ESC key to return to Main Menu or enter a command >>

5.24.2 Line Loopback Setup
The Line Loopback Setup screen will appear as shown below. Press A.
O9400SA

=== Line Loopback Setup ===

12:53:31 09/21/2007

A -> Line Loopback Test

<< Press ESC key to return to Main Menu or enter a command >>

101

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS
The following screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the East Side
Line setting you require. Press the Enter key. An asterisk will appear besides the setting you
selected.
Repeat this process for the West Side Line setting. This procedure is complete.
O9400SA
=== Line Loopback Test ===
ARROW KEYS : CURSOR MOVE , ENTER KEY : ITEM SELECT

12:54:23 09/21/2007

Loopback Timer : 000060 sec.

East Side Line : *OFF
West Side Line : *OFF

TO-OPTICAL-LINE
TO-OPTICAL-LINE

TO-TRIBUTARY-LINE
TO-TRIBUTARY-LINE

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

This procedure is complete.
Note: Line loopbacks are unsuitable for testing MSP protection.
.
The following screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the East Side
Line setting you require. Press the Enter key. An asterisk will appear besides the setting you
selected.
Repeat this process for the West Side Line setting. This procedure is complete.
O9400SA
=== Line Loopback Test ===
ARROW KEYS : CURSOR MOVE , ENTER KEY : ITEM SELECT
Loopback Timer : 000060 sec.

East Side Line : *OFF
West Side Line : *OFF

TO-OPTICAL-LINE
TO-OPTICAL-LINE

TO-TRIBUTARY-LINE
TO-TRIBUTARY-LINE

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

This procedure is complete.

102

12:54:23 09/21/2007

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS

5.25 MSP USER Command
The full menu path for MSP USER Command is as follows:
O > Logon
D > SDH/SONET Config Setup
J > MSP USER Command
A screen by screen setup example is shown below.

5.25.1 Setup Screen Access
To setup Customer Information, press D from the Main Menu.
O9400SA

=== Main Menu ===

18:26:12 03/22/2007

Serial Number
: 000045
Hardware Version: D
Software Version: V1.01.01 03/20/2007

Connect Port: SUPV_PORT
Start Time : 11:29:08 03/22/2007

[DISPLAY]
C -> System Config Display
I -> System Information
B -> SDH/SONET Config Display
Q -> Alarm Queue
T -> System Log Information
A -> SDH/SONET Alarm Status
P -> SDH/SONET Performance Statistics

[SETUP]
S -> System Config Setup
D -> SDH/SONET Config Setup
M -> Alarm Setup
V -> Store/Retrieve Backup Config
L -> File Transfer
R -> Performance Setup/Clear

[LOG]
F -> Log Off
O -> Log On
U -> Choose a Unit

[MISC]
Y -> Alarm Cut Off
Z -> System Reset
X -> Clear Alarm Queue
W -> Return to Default

>>SPACE bar to refresh or enter a command ===>

The SDH/SONET Config Setup menu will appear. Press J.
O9400SA

=== SDH/SONET Config Setup ===

A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K

->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->

09:55:49 09/07/2007

SDH/SONET Mode Setup
SDH/SONET Protection Setup
ALS/APSD Setup
SDH/SONET Granularity Setup
XC/TSA Create Setup
XC/TSA Delete Setup
XC/TSA Map Configuration
SDH/SONET Overhead Setup
Line Loopback Setup
MSP USER Command
Customer information Setup

<< Press ESC key to return to Main Menu or enter a command >>

103

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS
5.25.2 MSP Command
The MSP Command screen will appear.
O9400SA
=== MSP User Command ===
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB/`: ROLL UP/DOWN OPTIONS

15:02:16 11/27/2007

MSP Cmd :FS-Eb
Active Port : Ea
Current Tx K1: 0x00
Current Tx K2: 0x00
Current Rx K1: 0x00
Current Rx K2: 0x00

Note :
FS = Force Switch
MS = Manual Switch
LOP = Lockout of Protection

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the MSP Cmd field. Use the Tab key to scroll in
your settings.
Note: MSP USER Command is available only when system mode is TM 1+1 and protection
mode is enabled.
Command settings are listed in the table below. Some commands have higher priorities than
others. If the command you select has a lower priority than the existing setting, your selection
will be rejected. If you want to use a setting with a lower priority, use the clear command first.
This will clear the existing setting and allow you to choose a lower priority setting.
Table 5-24 MSP Command Settings
Priority

MSP Command Settings
Setting
Description

1 (high)
2
3
3
4 (low)
4 (low)

Clear
Lock-out
FS-Ea
FS-Eb
MS-Ea
MS-Eb

Clear any existing setting
Lock out protection
Force switch to East side(Ea)
Force switch to West side (Eb)
Manual switch to East side (Ea)
Manual switch to West side (Eb)

A prompt will ask if you are sure. Press Y for yes.
>>Are you sure (Y/N)?

A new prompt will appear to tell you that the user command is okay.
User Command OK!

This procedure is complete.

104

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS

5.26 Customer Information Setup
The full menu path for Customer Information Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
L > File Transfer
K > Customer information Setup
A screen by screen setup example is shown below.

5.26.1 Setup Screen Access
To setup Customer Information, press D from the Main Menu.
O9400SA

=== Main Menu ===

18:26:12 03/22/2007

Serial Number
: 000045
Hardware Version: D
Software Version: V1.01.01 03/20/2007

Connect Port: SUPV_PORT
Start Time : 11:29:08 03/22/2007

[DISPLAY]
C -> System Config Display
I -> System Information
B -> SDH/SONET Config Display
Q -> Alarm Queue
T -> System Log Information
A -> SDH/SONET Alarm Status
P -> SDH/SONET Performance Statistics

[SETUP]
S -> System Config Setup
D -> SDH/SONET Config Setup
M -> Alarm Setup
V -> Store/Retrieve Backup Config
L -> File Transfer
R -> Performance Setup/Clear

[LOG]
F -> Log Off
O -> Log On
U -> Choose a Unit

[MISC]
Y -> Alarm Cut Off
Z -> System Reset
X -> Clear Alarm Queue
W -> Return to Default

>>SPACE bar to refresh or enter a command ===>

The SDH/SONET Config Setup menu will appear. Press K.
O9400SA

=== SDH/SONET Config Setup ===

A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K

->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->

09:55:49 09/07/2007

SDH/SONET Mode Setup
SDH/SONET Protection Setup
ALS/APSD Setup
SDH/SONET Granularity Setup
XC/TSA Create Setup
XC/TSA Delete Setup
XC/TSA Map Configuration
SDH/SONET Overhead Setup
Line Loopback Setup
MSP USER Command
Customer information Setup

<< Press ESC key to return to Main Menu or enter a command >>

105

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS
5.26.2 Customer Information Setup Procedure
The following screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the various fields.
Key in your customer information. Press the Enter key.
O940 0SA
= == C ust ome r In for mat ion Set up ===
1 3:1 6:57 09 /21 /200 7
ARRO W K EYS : CU RSO R M OVE, BA CKS PACE to ed it, ESC to abo rt

Port #
Ea
Wa/E b

C usto mer In form ati on
S DH-L ine ___ ____ ___ __
S DH-L ine

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to prev iou s m enu >>

A prompt will ask if you want to change the configuration. Press Y for yes. Press Enter
>> C han ge conf igu rat ion (Y/ N)? (No te: to save ,pl eas e us e V -co mman d)

Press the ESC key twice to return to the Main Menu.
To store the configuration you must press V from the Main Menu. The menu path is as
follows:
O > Logon
S > System Config Setup
V > Store/Retrieve Backup Config
For a detailed, screen by screen example of this procedure, please refer to Section 5.30,
Store/Retrieve Backup Configuration.

106

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS

5.27 Alarm Setup
There are eight different types of alarm setup screens for the O9400S
5.27.1 Setup Screen Access
The initial menu path for Alarm Setup is:
O > Logon
M > Alarm Setup
From that point, the path to setup a specific alarm will be one of the following:
A > System Alarm Setup
B > SDH-Line/SONET-Line Alarm Mask/Relay Setup
C > Ho-Path/STS-Path Alarm Mask/Relay Setup
D > Lo-Path/VT-Path Alarm Mask/Relay Setup
E > SDH/SONET Alarm Severity Setup
F > SD/SF Threshold Setup
G > External Alarm Setup
H > Insert AIS Alarm Setup

To setup an alarm, press M from the Main Menu.
O9400SA

=== Main Menu ===

18:26:12 03/22/2007

Serial Number
: 000045
Hardware Version: D
Software Version: V1.01.01 03/20/2007

Connect Port: SUPV_PORT
Start Time : 11:29:08 03/22/2007

[DISPLAY]
C -> System Config Display
I -> System Information
B -> SDH/SONET Config Display
Q -> Alarm Queue
T -> System Log Information
A -> SDH/SONET Alarm Status
P -> SDH/SONET Performance Statistics

[SETUP]
S -> System Config Setup
D -> SDH/SONET Config Setup
M -> Alarm Setup
V -> Store/Retrieve Backup Config
L -> File Transfer
R -> Performance Setup/Clear

[LOG]
F -> Log Off
O -> Log On
U -> Choose a Unit

[MISC]
Y -> Alarm Cut Off
Z -> System Reset
X -> Clear Alarm Queue
W -> Return to Default

>>SPACE bar to refresh or enter a command ===>

The Alarm Setup screen will appear. Press the appropriate letter to select the setup screen
you require.
O9400SA

=== Alarm Setup ===

A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H

->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->

15:48:29 08/02/2007

System Alarm Setup
SDH-Line/SONET-Line Alarm Mask/Relay Setup
Ho-Path/STS-Path Alarm Mask/Relay Setup
Lo-Path/VT-Path Alarm Mask/Relay Setup
SDH/SONET Alarm Severity Setup
SD/SF Threshold Setup
External Alarm Setup
Insert AIS Alarm Setup

<< Press ESC key to return to Main Menu or enter a command >>

107

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS
5.27.2 System Alarm Setup
The menu path for System Alarm Setup is:
O > Logon
M > Alarm Setup
A > System Alarm Setup
Use the arrow keys to move the cursor. Use the Tab key to scroll in your setting.

Table 5-25 System Alarm Setting Options
Field

Setting Options

Default Setting

ALARM
RELAY

ENABLED, DISABLED
ENABLED, DISABLED

ENABLED

Note

Parameter

Alarm
Setting
Options

Default
Alarm
Settting

Relay
Setting
Options

Default
Relay
Settting

Severity
Setting
Options

Default
Severity
Settting

Alm Cut Off
Power Loss
TS Sync
Loss
SNCP Switch
MSP Switch
Login/Logout
FOM
Equip/Uneq
SFP Tx Fail
SFP Rx Fail
SFP
Temperature

ENABLED,
DISABLE

ENABLED

ENABLED,
DISABLE

DISABLED

MINR,
MAJR,
INFO,
CRIT

INFO
MAJR
MINR







MAJR
MAJR
INFO
INFO





INFO
INFO
INFO

Note: The Relay for the Alm Cut Off is always disabled.

O9400SA
=== System Alarm Setup ===
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB/`: ROLL UP/DOWN OPTIONS
ALARM:ENABLED
RELAY:ENABLED

Type
-------Alm Cut Off
Power Loss
TS Sync Loss
SNCP Switch
MSP Switch
Login/Logout
FOM Equip/Uneq
SFP Tx Fail
SFP Rx Fail
SFP Temperature

Alarm
-------ENABLED
ENABLED
ENABLED
ENABLED
ENABLED
ENABLED
ENABLED
ENABLED
ENABLED
ENABLED

Relay
-------DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED

12:56:58 11/21/2007

Severity
-------INFO
MAJR
MINR
MAJR
MAJR
INFO
INFO
INFO
INFO
MINR

(CRIT:CRITICAL, MAJR:MAJOR, MINR:MINOR, INFO:INFORM)
<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

5.27.3 SDH-Line/SONET-Line Alarm Mask/Relay Setup
The menu path for Ho-Path/STS-Path Alarm Mask/Relay Setup is:

108

Note

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS
O > Logon
M > Alarm Setup
B > SDH-Line/SONET-Line Alarm Mask/Relay Setup
Use the Tab key to scroll in a Line Side setting.
Note: The sample setup screen below is from a device in ADM mode. The mode that a
device is in determines what the available settings are for Line Side. The following
table details the Line Side settings for each of the five modes.

Table 5-26 SDH-Line/SONET-Line Alarm Mask/Relay Setting Options
Mode
ADM
2TM
TM1+1

Line Side Setting Options

Default Setting

Ea or Wa *
Ea or Wa
Ea

Ea

Note

* Ea denotes East and Wa denotes West.

O9400SA
=== SDH/SONET Line Alarm Mask/Relay Setup
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB/`: ROLL UP/DOWN OPTIONS
Line Side : Ea

===

15:52:52 08/02/2007

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

The following screen will appear. Use the Tab key to scroll in your settings. Press the Enter
key. The available setting choices are: ENABLED, DISABLED.
O9400SA
=== SDH/SONET Line Alarm Mask/Relay Setup ===14:31:57 03/21/2008
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB/`: ROLL UP/DOWN OPTIONS
Line Side : Ea
Type
-------PI-LOS
RS-LOF
RS-TIM
RS-BIP
MS-SD
MS-SF
MS-AIS
MS-RDI
MS-BIP
MS-REI

Alarm
-------ENABLED
ENABLED
ENABLED
ENABLED
ENABLED
ENABLED
ENABLED
ENABLED
ENABLED
ENABLED

Relay
-------DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

5.27.4 Ho-Path/STS-Path Alarm Mask/Relay Setup
The menu path for Ho-Path/STS-Path Alarm Mask/Relay Setup is:
O > Logon
M > Alarm Setup
C > Ho-Path/STS-Path Alarm Mask/Relay Setup
Use the arrow keys to move the cursor. Use the Tab key to scroll in your settings.

109

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS

Table 5-27 Ho-Path/STS-Path Alarm Mask/Relay Setting Options
System
Mode
STM-1

Field
Line Side

in ATM or 2TM mode
in TM1+1 mode

VC3#

STM-4

Line Side

in ATM or 2TM mode
in TM1+1 mode

Ea, Eb
Ea, Wa

Ea, Eb
1~4
1~3*

Line Side

in ATM or 2TM mode
in TM1+1 mode

STS1#

OC-12

Ea, Wa
1~3*

AUG1#
VC3#
OC-3

Setting
Options

Ea, Wa

Ea, Eb
1~3*

Line Side

in ATM or 2TM mode
in TM1+1 mode

STS3#
STS1#

Ea, Wa

Ea, Eb
1~4
1~3*

Default
Setting

Note

Ea
Ea
1
Ea
Ea
1
1
Ea
Ea
1

Ea
Ea
1
1

* NOTE: VC3# and STS1# are only available when the granularity of AUG1/STS3 is AU#-3
and STS3 respectively.
O9400SA
=== Ho-Path/STS-Path Alarm Mask/Relay Setup 15:53:29 08/02/2007
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB/`: ROLL UP/DOWN OPTIONS
Line Side : Ea
AUG1# : 1
<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

The following screen will appear. Use the Tab key to scroll in your settings. Press the Enter
key. The available setting choices are: ENABLED, DISABLED.
O9400SA
=== Ho-Path/STS-Path Alarm Mask/Relay Setup 14:34:03 03/21/2008
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB/`: ROLL UP/DOWN OPTIONS
Line Side : Ea
AUG1# : 1

Type
-------AU-LOP
AU-AIS
HP-SD
HP-SF
HP-TIM
HP-UNEQ
HP-PLM
HP-RDI-S
HP-RDI-C
HP-RDI-P
HP-B3-BIP
HP-REI
HP-LOM

Alarm
-------ENABLED
ENABLED
ENABLED
ENABLED
ENABLED
ENABLED
ENABLED
ENABLED
ENABLED
ENABLED
ENABLED
ENABLED
ENABLED

Relay
-------DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

110

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS

5.27.5 Lo-Path/VT-Path Alarm Mask/Relay Setup
The menu path for Lo-Path/VT-Path Alarm Mask/Relay Setup is:
O > Logon
M > Alarm Setup
D > Lo-Path/VT-Path Alarm Mask/Relay Setup
Use the arrow keys to move the cursor. Use the Tab key to scroll in your Line Side setting.

Table 5-28 Lo-Path/VT-Path Alarm Mask/Relay Setting Options
System
Mode
STM-1

Field
Line Side

in ATM or 2TM mode
in TM1+1 mode

VC1x

STM-4

Line Side

Line Side

in ATM or 2TM mode
in TM1+1 mode

Line Side
STS3#
STS1#
VTxx

Ea, Wa

Ea, Eb
1~4
1~3*
1~28**

in ATM or 2TM mode
in TM1+1 mode

STS1#
VTxx

OC-12

Ea, Wa

Ea, Eb
1~28**

AUG1#
VC3#
VC1x
OC-3

Setting
Options

Ea, Wa

Ea, Eb
1~3*
1~28**

in ATM or 2TM mode
in TM1+1 mode

Ea, Wa

Ea, Eb
1~4
1~3*
1~28**

Default
Setting

Note

Ea
Ea
1
Ea
Ea
1
1
1
Ea
Ea
1
1
Ea
Ea
1
1
1

NOTE: VC3# and STS1# are only available when the granularity of AUG1/STS3 is AU#-3
and STS3 respectively.
**NOTE: This setting depends on the granularity of VC1x/VTxx.

O9400SA
ARROW KEYS:
Line Side :
VC3# :
VC1x# :

=== Lo-Path/VT-Path Alarm Mask/Relay Setup 15:53:55 08/02/2007
CURSOR MOVE, TAB/`: ROLL UP/DOWN OPTIONS
Ea
AUG1# : 1
1 (TU12)
01 ( TUG3#1, TUG2#1, TU1x#1 )

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

111

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS
O9400SA
=== Lo-Path/VT-Path Alarm Mask/Relay Setup 13:45:05 09/04/2009
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB/`: ROLL UP/DOWN OPTIONS
Line Side : Ea
VC3# : 1 (TU12)
(TU12) :01 ( TUG3#1, TUG2#1, TU1x#1 )
Type
Alarm
Relay
--------------- -------TU-LOP
ENABLED DISABLED
TU-AIS
ENABLED DISABLED
LP-SD
ENABLED DISABLED
LP-SF
ENABLED DISABLED
LP-UNEQ
ENABLED DISABLED

Copy the same config. from VC12#01 to VC12#01
<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

5.27.6 SDH/SONET Alarm Severity Setup
The menu path for SDH/SONET Alarm Severity Setup is:
O > Logon
M > Alarm Setup
E > SDH/SONET Alarm Severity Setup
There are thirty-five alarm types on this screen. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor. Use
the Tab key to scroll in your setting.
The setting choices available are: MINR, MAJR, INFO or CRIT
O9400SA
=== SDH/SONET Alarm Severity Setup === 14:35:06 03/21/2008
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB/`: ROLL UP/DOWN OPTIONS

Line Type Severity
--------------------PI-LOS
CRIT
RS-LOF
CRIT
RS-TIM
MINR
RS-BIP
MINR
MS-SD
CRIT
MS-SF
CRIT
MS-AIS
MAJR
MS-RDI
MINR
MS-BIP
MINR
MS-REI
MINR

HP Type
Severity
--------------------AU-LOP
MAJR
AU-AIS
MAJR
HP-SD
MAJR
HP-SF
MAJR
HP-TIM
MINR
HP-UNEQ
MINR
HP-PLM
MINR
HP-RDI-S
MINR
HP-RDI-C
MINR
HP-RDI-P
MINR
HP-B3-BIP MINR
HP-REI
MINR
HP-LOM
MAJR

(CRIT:CRITICAL, MAJR:MAJOR, MINR:MINOR, INFO:INFORM)
<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

112

LP Type
Severity
--------------------TU-LOP
MAJR
TU-AIS
MAJR
LP-SD
MAJR
LP-SF
MAJR
LP-TIM
MINR
LP-UNEQ
MINR
LP-PLM
MINR
LP-RDI-S
MINR
LP-RDI-C
MINR
LP-RDI-P
MINR
LP-BIP
MINR
LP-REI
MINR

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS

5.27.7 SD/SF Threshold Setup
The menu path for SD/SF Threshold Setup is:
O > Logon
M > Alarm Setup
F > SD/SF Threshold Setup
There six alarm types on this screen. The setting choices available are shown in the table
below.
Table 5-29 SD/SF Threshold Settings
Alarm Type
MS-SD 1EMS-SF 1EHP-SD 1EHP-SF 1ELP-SD 1ELP-SF 1E-

Threshold Setting Choices
3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 or 9
3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 or 9
4, 5, 6, 7, 8 or 9
4, 5, 6, 7, 8 or 9
3, 4, 5, 6
3, 4, 5, 6

Note: Threshold settings are easily converted to the BER (Bit Error Rate). See table below.
Table 5-30 Threshold to Bit Error Rate Conversion Table
Threshold Setting
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

Bit Error Rate
10-3 (.001)
10-4 (.0001)
10-5 (.00001)
10-6 (.000001)
10-7 (.0000001)
10-8 (.00000001)
10-9 (.000000001)

O9400SA
=== SD/SF Threshold Setup ===
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB/`: ROLL UP/DOWN OPTIONS

Type
-------MS-SD
MS-SF
HP-SD
HP-SF
LP-SD
LP-SF

Threshold
--------1E-5
1E-3
1E-5
1E-3
1E-5
1E-3

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

113

15:55:13 08/02/2007

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS

5.27.8 External Alarm Setup
The menu path for External Alarm Setup is:
O > Logon
M > Alarm Setup
G > External Alarm Setup
There are four external alarms on this screen. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor. Use
the Tab key to scroll in your alarm, relay and severity settings.
Setting choices are illustrated in the table below.
Table 5-31 External Alarm Setting Options
External
Alarm
Ext. Alarm1
Ext. Alarm2
Ext. Alarm3
Ext.l Alarm4

Alarm
Setting
Options

Alarm
Default
Setting

Relay
Setting
Options

Relay
Default
Setting

ENABLED,
DISABLED

ENABLED

ENABLED,
DISABLED

DISABLED

Severity
Setting
Options
MINR
MAJR
INFO
CRIT

Severity
Default
Setting
INFO

The message field is used for keying in any info. you want (ie. perhaps the name of the place
where the remote unit is located)
O9400SA
=== External Alarm Setup ===
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB/`: ROLL UP/DOWN OPTIONS

External
External
External
External

alarm
Alarm1:ENABLED
Alarm2:ENABLED
Alarm3:ENABLED
Alarm4:ENABLED

relay
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED

severity
INFO
INFO
MINR
MAJR

message
external
external
external
external

15:55:39 08/02/2007

alarm1
alarm2
alarm3
alarm4

(CRIT:CRITICAL, MAJR:MAJOR, MINR:MINOR, INFO:INFORM)
<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

5.27.9 Insert AIS Alarm Setup
The menu path for Insert AIS Alarm Setup is:
O > Logon
M > Alarm Setup
H > Insert AIS Alarm Setup
There are thirteen alarms on this screen. Use the Tab key to scroll in the settings. The
available setting choices are: ENABLED or DISABLED.

114

Message

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS
O940 0SA
= == Line In ser t AI S A lar m Se tup == =
ARRO W K EYS : CU RSO R M OVE, TA B/` : RO LL UP/ DOWN OP TIO NS

T ype
- --- --- R S-T IM to
M S-A IS to
A U-L OP to
A U-A IS to
HP -UN EQ to
H P-T IM to
H P-L OM to
H P-P LM to
T U-L OP to
T U-A IS to
LP -UN EQ to
L P-T IM to
L P-P LM to

A IS
A IS
A IS
A IS
A IS
A IS
A IS
A IS
A IS
A IS
A IS
A IS
A IS

:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:

A larm
- ---- --E NABL ED
E NABL ED
E NABL ED
E NABL ED
E NABL ED
E NABL ED
E NABL ED
E NABL ED
E NABL ED
E NABL ED
E NABL ED
E NABL ED
E NABL ED

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to prev iou s m enu >>

115

15: 56: 11 0 8/0 2/2 007

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS

5.28 Clear Performance Data
The full menu path for Performance TCA Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
R > Performance Setup/Clear
A > Clear Performance Data
A screen-by-screen setup example is shown below.
5.28.1 Setup Screen Access
To setup Performance, press R from the Main Menu.
O9400SA

=== Main Menu ===

18:26:12 03/22/2007

Serial Number
: 000045
Hardware Version: D
Software Version: V1.01.01 03/20/2007

Connect Port: SUPV_PORT
Start Time : 11:29:08 03/22/2007

[DISPLAY]
C -> System Config Display
I -> System Information
B -> SDH/SONET Config Display
Q -> Alarm Queue
T -> System Log Information
A -> SDH/SONET Alarm Status
P -> SDH/SONET Performance Statistics

[SETUP]
S -> System Config Setup
D -> SDH/SONET Config Setup
M -> Alarm Setup
V -> Store/Retrieve Backup Config
L -> File Transfer
R -> Performance Setup/Clear

[LOG]
F -> Log Off
O -> Log On
U -> Choose a Unit

[MISC]
Y -> Alarm Cut Off
Z -> System Reset
X -> Clear Alarm Queue
W -> Return to Default

>>SPACE bar to refresh or enter a command ===>

The SDH/SONET Performance Setup/Clear menu will appear. Press A.
O9400SA

=== SDH/SONET Performance Setup/Clear ===10:19:20 08/03/2007

A -> Clear Performance Data
B -> Performance Threshold Setup

<< Press ESC key to return to Main Menu or enter a command >>

5.28.2 Clear Performance Procedure
The Clear Performance Data screen will appear. A prompt will ask if you are sure you want to
clear the data. Press Y for yes. The data will be cleared and you will be returned to the
previous screen. This procedure is complete.
O9400SA

=== Clear Performance Data ===

>> Clear performance data - are you sure [Y/N] ?

116

17:03:55 09/24/2007

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS

5.29 SDH/SONET Performance Report
5.29.1 1-Hour Performance Report
The full menu path for SDH/SONET one hour performance report is as follows:
O > Logon
P > Performance
1 > 1-Hour Performance
O9400SA
=== 1-Hour Performance ===
Ea RS-BIP(B1)
-- Valid Seconds in Current 15-Min Interval : 0 seconds

Current 15-Min Interval
1st Nearest 15-Min Interval
2nd Nearest 15-Min Interval
3rd Nearest 15-Min Interval
4rd Nearest 15-Min Interval

:
:
:
:
:

(EB)
0
---------------------

(BBE)
0
---------------------

(ES)
0
---------------------

17:11:38 11/19/2009

(BES)
0
---------------------

(SES)
0
---------------------

(UAS)
0
---------------------

<< Press TAB key to show Statistics Report >>
<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>

5.29.2 24-Hour Performance Report
The full menu path for SDH/SONET 24 hour performance report is as follows:
O > Logon
P > Performance
2 > 24-Hour Performance
O9400SA
=== 24-Hour Performance ===
17:12:34 11/19/2009
Ea EB RS-BIP(B1)
-- Valid Seconds in Current 15-Min Interval : 0 seconds
-- Valid 15-Min Intervals in Current 24-Hour Interval: 0
(EB)
(BBE)
(ES)
(BES)
(SES)
(UAS)
Current 15-Min Interval
: 0
0
0
0
0
0
Current Day
: ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ------- EB
01-08
09-16
17-24
25-32
33-40
41-48
49-56
57-64
65-72
73-80
81-88
89-96

, Last 96
(16:45) >
(14:45) >
(12:45) >
(10:45) >
(08:45) >
(06:45) >
(04:45) >
(02:45) >
(00:45) >
(22:45) >
(20:45) >
(18:45) >

15-Min Interval :
------ ------ ----------- ------ ----------- ------ ----------- ------ ----------- ------ ----------- ------ ----------- ------ ----------- ------ ----------- ------ ----------- ------ ----------- ------ ----------- ------ ------

-------------------------------------------------------------

-------------------------------------------------------------

-------------------------------------------------------------

<< Press TAB key to show Statistics Report >>
<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>

117

-------------------------------------------------------------

-------------------------------------------------------------

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS
5.29.3 7-Day Performance Report
The full menu path for SDH/SONET 7 Day performance report is as follows:
O > Logon
P > Performance
3 > 7-Day Performance
O9400SA
=== 7-Day Performance ===
Ea RS-BIP(B1)
-- Valid 15-Min Intervals in Current Day : 0

Current Day
11/18/2009
11/17/2009
11/16/2009
11/15/2009
11/14/2009
11/13/2009
11/12/2009

:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:

(EB)
-----------------------------------------

(BBE)
-----------------------------------------

(ES)
-----------------------------------------

17:13:09 11/19/2009

(BES)
-----------------------------------------

(SES)
-----------------------------------------

(UAS)
-----------------------------------------

<< Press TAB key to show Statistics Report >>
<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>

Note: The maximum value for line ES, BES, SES, UAS, and BPV is 65,535, respectively.

118

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS

5.30 Performance TCA Setup
The full menu path for Performance TCA Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
R > Performance Setup/Clear
B > Performance TCA Setup
A screen-by-screen setup example is shown below.
5.30.1 Setup Screen Access
To setup Performance, press R from the Main Menu.
O9400SA

=== Main Menu ===

18:26:12 03/22/2007

Serial Number
: 000045
Hardware Version: D
Software Version: V1.01.01 03/20/2007

Connect Port: SUPV_PORT
Start Time : 11:29:08 03/22/2007

[DISPLAY]
C -> System Config Display
I -> System Information
B -> SDH/SONET Config Display
Q -> Alarm Queue
T -> System Log Information
A -> SDH/SONET Alarm Status
P -> SDH/SONET Performance Statistics

[SETUP]
S -> System Config Setup
D -> SDH/SONET Config Setup
M -> Alarm Setup
V -> Store/Retrieve Backup Config
L -> File Transfer
R -> Performance Setup/Clear

[LOG]
F -> Log Off
O -> Log On
U -> Choose a Unit

[MISC]
Y -> Alarm Cut Off
Z -> System Reset
X -> Clear Alarm Queue
W -> Return to Default

>>SPACE bar to refresh or enter a command ===>

The SDH/SONET Performance Setup/Clear menu will appear. Press B.
O9400SA

=== SDH/SONET Performance Setup/Clear ===10:19:20 08/03/2007

A -> Clear Performance Data
B -> Performance Threshold Setup

<< Press ESC key to return to Main Menu or enter a command >>

5.30.2 Performance TCA Setup Procedure
The Performance TCA Setup screen will appear. There are five performance fields. Use the
arrow keys to move the cursor to each field.
Use the Tab key to scroll in your settings for Alarm. Available choices are :
ENABLE and DISABLE.

119

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS
Use the Tab key to scroll in your settings for Severity. Available choices are:
MINR, MAJR, INFO and CRIT.
Key in the value you wish to use for the Threshold level. Values range from 1∼9999 BIP Error
Rate.

O9400SA
=== Performance TCA Setup ===
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB/`: ROLL UP/DOWN OPTIONS

Type
-------RS-BIP
MS-BIP
MS-REI
HP-B3-BIP
HP-REI

Alarm
-------ENABLED
ENABLED
ENABLED
ENABLED
ENABLED

Severity
-------MINR
MINR
MINR
MINR
MINR

Threshold
--------2400
2400
2400
2400
2400

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

120

10:21:54 08/03/2007

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS

5.31 Store/Retrieve Backup Configuration
The full menu path for storing a configuration is as follows:
O > Logon
V > Store/Retrieve Backup Config
A screen-by-screen setup example is shown below.
Press V to store the configuration.
O9400SA

=== Main Menu ===

18:26:12 03/22/2007

Serial Number
: 000045
Hardware Version: D
Software Version: V1.01.01 03/20/2007

Connect Port: SUPV_PORT
Start Time : 11:29:08 03/22/2007

[DISPLAY]
C -> System Config Display
I -> System Information
B -> SDH/SONET Config Display
Q -> Alarm Queue
T -> System Log Information
A -> SDH/SONET Alarm Status
P -> SDH/SONET Performance Statistics

[SETUP]
S -> System Config Setup
D -> SDH/SONET Config Setup
M -> Alarm Setup
V -> Store/Retrieve Backup Config
L -> File Transfer
R -> Performance Setup/Clear

[LOG]
F -> Log Off
O -> Log On
U -> Choose a Unit

[MISC]
Y -> Alarm Cut Off
Z -> System Reset
X -> Clear Alarm Queue
W -> Return to Default

>>SPACE bar to refresh or enter a command ===>

The Store/Retrieve Configuration screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to
move your cursor to STORE. Press the Enter key. A prompt will ask if you
wish to store this configuration. Press Y for yes.
O940 0SA

=== Stor e/R etr ieve Co nfi gura tio n== =

16 :06 :37 07/ 16/ 2007

>> S ele ct ?
*ST ORE
R ETR IEVE
>> S tor e C urre nt Con figu rat ion ? [ Y/N ]

A prompt will ask you to key in your password. After keying it in press the Enter key.
O940 0SA

== =Sto re/ Ret riev e C onf igur ati on= ==

1 6:0 8:40 07 /16 /200 7

>> S ele ct ?
*ST ORE
R ETR IEVE
==>> En ter pas swo rd : XX XX

The word Saving will temporarily appear. When it disappears, press the Esc key to return to
the Main Menu.
O940 0SA

== =Sto re/ Ret riev e C onf igur ati on= ==

>> S ele ct ?
*ST ORE
=== > S avi ng.. ... ..

R ETR IEVE

121

1 6:0 9:37 07 /16 /200 7

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS

5.32 Download Current Configuration
The full menu path for Download Backup Configuration is as follows:
O > Logon
L > File Transfer
B > Download Current Configuration
A screen by screen setup example is shown below.

5.32.1 Setup Screen Access
To download the backup configuration, press L from the Main Menu.
O9400SA

=== Main Menu ===

18:26:12 03/22/2007

Serial Number
: 000045
Hardware Version: D
Software Version: V1.01.01 03/20/2007

Connect Port: SUPV_PORT
Start Time : 11:29:08 03/22/2007

[DISPLAY]
C -> System Config Display
I -> System Information
B -> SDH/SONET Config Display
Q -> Alarm Queue
T -> System Log Information
A -> SDH/SONET Alarm Status
P -> SDH/SONET Performance Statistics

[SETUP]
S -> System Config Setup
D -> SDH/SONET Config Setup
M -> Alarm Setup
V -> Store/Retrieve Backup Config
L -> File Transfer
R -> Performance Setup/Clear

[LOG]
F -> Log Off
O -> Log On
U -> Choose a Unit

[MISC]
Y -> Alarm Cut Off
Z -> System Reset
X -> Clear Alarm Queue
W -> Return to Default

>>SPACE bar to refresh or enter a command ===>

The File Transfer menu will appear. Press B.
O9400SA

===File Transfer===

A
B
C
D
E
F

->
->
->
->
->
->

16:31:21 07/17/2007

Download Firmware
Download Current Configuration
Download Backup Configuration
Upload Current Configuration from FLASH
Upload Backup Configuration from FLASH
Change Firmware Boot Bank

<< Press ESC key to return to Main Menu or enter a command >>

5.32.2 Download Current Configuration Procedure
The Download Current Configuration screen will appear. Use the backspace key to clear the
TFTP Server IP field. Open the TFTP server file on your PC to obtain the correct IP address
and file name. Enter these in the appropriate fields of the Download Current Configuration
screen. Press the Enter key.

122

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS
O940 0SA
== = D ownl oad Cu rren t C onf igur ati on ===
18 :40 :35 09/ 24/ 2007
ARRO W K EYS : CU RSO R M OVE, Pl eas e In put : n nn.n nn. nnn .nnn , B ACK SPAC E t o e dit

TFTP Se rve r IP
Conf ig Fil e Na me

: 0 00. 000 .000 .00 0
:

<< P res s E SC k ey to abor t, ENT ER k ey to Uplo ad/ Dow nloa d > >

123

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS

5.33 Download Firmware
The full menu path for Download Firmware is as follows:
O > Logon
L > File Transfer
A > Download Firmware
A screen by screen setup example is shown below.
5.33.1 Setup Screen Access
To setup SDH/SONET granularity, press L from the Main Menu.
O9400SA

=== Main Menu ===

18:26:12 03/22/2007

Serial Number
: 000045
Hardware Version: D
Software Version: V1.01.01 03/20/2007

Connect Port: SUPV_PORT
Start Time : 11:29:08 03/22/2007

[DISPLAY]
C -> System Config Display
I -> System Information
B -> SDH/SONET Config Display
Q -> Alarm Queue
T -> System Log Information
A -> SDH/SONET Alarm Status
P -> SDH/SONET Performance Statistics

[SETUP]
S -> System Config Setup
D -> SDH/SONET Config Setup
M -> Alarm Setup
V -> Store/Retrieve Backup Config
L -> File Transfer
R -> Performance Setup/Clear

[LOG]
F -> Log Off
O -> Log On
U -> Choose a Unit

[MISC]
Y -> Alarm Cut Off
Z -> System Reset
X -> Clear Alarm Queue
W -> Return to Default

>>SPACE bar to refresh or enter a command ===>

The File Transfer menu will appear. Press A.
O9400SA

===File Transfer===

A
B
C
D
E
F

->
->
->
->
->
->

16:31:21 07/17/2007

Download Firmware
Download Current Configuration
Download Backup Configuration
Upload Current Configuration from FLASH
Upload Backup Configuration from FLASH
Change Firmware Boot Bank

<< Press ESC key to return to Main Menu or enter a command >>

5.33.2 Download Firmware Setup Procedure
The Download Firmware screen will appear. Use the backspace key to clear the TFTP
Server IP field. Open the TFTP server file on your PC to obtain the correct IP address and
file name. Enter these in appropriate fields of the Download Firmware screen. Press the
Enter key.

124

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS
O9400SA
=== Download Firmware ===
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, BACKSPACE to edit, ESC to abort
Firmware 1 Version
:
Firmware 2 Version
:
Current Firmware Bank:
Next Boot Firmware
:
TFTP Server IP
:
Firmware File Name
:

12:48:20 07/18/2007

V1.01.01 07/10/2007
V1.01.01 07/10/2007
2
2
10.3.12.1
o9400-S-V1.01.01.run____________________________________

<< Press ESC key to abort, ENTER key to Upload/Download >>

A prompt will ask if you really want to download. Press Y for yes.
The following screen will show as the download takes place.
O9400SA
=== Download Firmware ===
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, BACKSPACE to edit, ESC to abort
Firmware 1 Version
:
Firmware 2 Version
:
Current Firmware Bank:
Next Boot Firmware
:
TFTP Server IP
:
Firmware File Name
:

12:51:32 07/18/07

12:48:20 07/18/2007

V1.01.01 07/10/2007
V1.01.01 07/10/2007
2
2
10.3.12.1
o9400-S-V1.01.01.run

Downloading firmware ........

<< Press ESC key to abort, ENTER key to Upload/Download >>

When the download is complete, the following messages will appear.
O9400SA
=== Download Firmware ===
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, BACKSPACE to edit, ESC to abort
Firmware 1 Version
:
Firmware 2 Version
:
Current Firmware Bank:
Next Boot Firmware
:
TFTP Server IP
:
Firmware File Name
:

12:52:43 07/18/07
12:53:44 07/18/07
12:53:45 07/18/07

12:52:28 07/18/2007

V1.01.01 07/10/2007
V1.01.01 07/10/2007
2
2
010.003.012.001
o9400-S-V1.01.01.run

Downloading firmware ........1076134 bytes received.
Check firmware checksum...
Checksum ok. Next boot firmware switch to bank 1.

<< Press ESC key to abort, ENTER key to Upload/Download >>

You must now reset the system. Press the Esc key twice to return to the Main Menu.
Next is to reset the system.
The full menu path for resetting the system is as follows:
O > Logon
Z > System Reset
A screen by screen setup example is shown below.
Press Z from the Main Menu.

125

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS
O9400SA

=== Main Menu ===

18:26:12 03/22/2007

Serial Number
: 000045
Hardware Version: D
Software Version: V1.01.01 03/20/2007

Connect Port: SUPV_PORT
Start Time : 11:29:08 03/22/2007

[DISPLAY]
C -> System Config Display
I -> System Information
B -> SDH/SONET Config Display
Q -> Alarm Queue
T -> System Log Information
A -> SDH/SONET Alarm Status
P -> SDH/SONET Performance Statistics

[SETUP]
S -> System Config Setup
D -> SDH/SONET Config Setup
M -> Alarm Setup
V -> Store/Retrieve Backup Config
L -> File Transfer
R -> Performance Setup/Clear

[LOG]
F -> Log Off
O -> Log On
U -> Choose a Unit

[MISC]
Y -> Alarm Cut Off
Z -> System Reset
X -> Clear Alarm Queue
W -> Return to Default

>>SPACE bar to refresh or enter a command ===>

The reset Main Board screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to move the asterisk to either
Warm Reset or Cold Reset. Press the Enter key.
Note:
1.
Warm Reset is used when there is traffic on your device and you wish to
update the software without disturbing that traffic.
2.
Warm Reset will result Packet Loss on Ethernet Switch Card, due to Ethernet
protocols restart.
O9400SA

>> Select ?

=== Reset Main Board ===

*Warm Reset

Cold Reset

The download firmware procedure is now complete.

126

12:55:01 07/18/2007

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS

5.34 Download Backup Configuration
The full menu path for Download Backup Configuration is as follows:
O > Logon
L > File Transfer
C > Download Backup Configuration
A screen by screen setup example is shown below.
5.34.1 Setup Screen Access
To download the backup configuration, press L from the Main Menu.
O9400SA

=== Main Menu ===

18:26:12 03/22/2007

Serial Number
: 000045
Hardware Version: D
Software Version: V1.01.01 03/20/2007

Connect Port: SUPV_PORT
Start Time : 11:29:08 03/22/2007

[DISPLAY]
C -> System Config Display
I -> System Information
B -> SDH/SONET Config Display
Q -> Alarm Queue
T -> System Log Information
A -> SDH/SONET Alarm Status
P -> SDH/SONET Performance Statistics

[SETUP]
S -> System Config Setup
D -> SDH/SONET Config Setup
M -> Alarm Setup
V -> Store/Retrieve Backup Config
L -> File Transfer
R -> Performance Setup/Clear

[LOG]
F -> Log Off
O -> Log On
U -> Choose a Unit

[MISC]
Y -> Alarm Cut Off
Z -> System Reset
X -> Clear Alarm Queue
W -> Return to Default

>>SPACE bar to refresh or enter a command ===>

The File Transfer menu will appear. Press C.
O9400SA

===File Transfer===

A
B
C
D
E
F

->
->
->
->
->
->

16:31:21 07/17/2007

Download Firmware
Download Current Configuration
Download Backup Configuration
Upload Current Configuration from FLASH
Upload Backup Configuration from FLASH
Change Firmware Boot Bank

<< Press ESC key to return to Main Menu or enter a command >>

5.34.2 Download Backup Configuration Procedure
The Download Backup Configuration screen will appear.
O940 0SA
= == Down loa d B acku p C onf igur ati on ===
16 :50 :20 07/ 17/ 2007
ARRO W K EYS : CU RSO R M OVE, Pl eas e In put : n nn.n nn. nnn .nnn , B ACK SPAC E t o e dit

TFTP Se rve r IP
Conf ig Fil e Na me

: 0 00. 000 .000 .00 0
:

<< P res s E SC k ey to abor t, ENT ER k ey to Uplo ad/ Dow nloa d > >

127

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS
Use the backspace key to clear the TFTP Server IP field. Open the TFTP server file on your
PC to obtain the correct IP address and file name. Enter these in appropriate fields of the
Download Backup Configuration screen. Press the Enter key.
O940 0SA
= == Down loa d B acku p C onf igur ati on ===
15 :01 :24 07/ 18/ 2007
ARRO W K EYS : CU RSO R M OVE, BA CKS PACE to ed it, ESC to abo rt

TFTP Se rve r IP
: 0 10. 003 .012 .00 1
Conf ig Fil e Na me
:
abc_ ___ ___ ____ ___ ___ ____ ___ ___ ____ ___ ___ ____ ___ ___ ____ __

<< P res s E SC k ey to abor t, ENT ER k ey to Uplo ad/ Dow nloa d > >

A prompt will ask if you really want to download. Press Y for yes.
O9400SA
=== Download Backup Configuration ===
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, BACKSPACE to edit, ESC to abort

TFTP Server IP
Config File Name

15:01:24 07/18/2007

: 010.003.012.001
: abc

Really want to Download ?

<< Press ESC key to abort, ENTER key to Upload/Download >>

The following screen will show as the download takes place.
O9400SA
=== Download Backup Configuration ===
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, BACKSPACE to edit, ESC to abort

TFTP Server IP
Config File Name

10:28:54
10:28:59
10:28:59
10:29:05

07/19/07
07/19/07
07/19/07
07/19/07

10:28:51 07/19/2007

: 010.003.012.001
: abc

Downloading backup config....217168 bytes received.
Download ok...
Check config checksum...
Checksum ok.

<< Press ESC key to abort, ENTER key to Upload/Download >>

The download backup configuration procedure is now complete.

128

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS

5.35 Upload Current Configuration from FLASH
The full menu path for Upload Current Configuration from FLASH is as follows:
O > Logon
L > File Transfer
D > Upload Current Configuration from FLASH
A screen by screen setup example is shown below.
5.35.1 Setup Screen Access
To upload the current configuration, press L from the Main Menu.
O9400SA

=== Main Menu ===

18:26:12 03/22/2007

Serial Number
: 000045
Hardware Version: D
Software Version: V1.01.01 03/20/2007

Connect Port: SUPV_PORT
Start Time : 11:29:08 03/22/2007

[DISPLAY]
C -> System Config Display
I -> System Information
B -> SDH/SONET Config Display
Q -> Alarm Queue
T -> System Log Information
A -> SDH/SONET Alarm Status
P -> SDH/SONET Performance Statistics

[SETUP]
S -> System Config Setup
D -> SDH/SONET Config Setup
M -> Alarm Setup
V -> Store/Retrieve Backup Config
L -> File Transfer
R -> Performance Setup/Clear

[LOG]
F -> Log Off
O -> Log On
U -> Choose a Unit

[MISC]
Y -> Alarm Cut Off
Z -> System Reset
X -> Clear Alarm Queue
W -> Return to Default

>>SPACE bar to refresh or enter a command ===>

The File Transfer menu will appear. Press F.
Note: You must already have a backup configuration in order to upload it. If you don’t have
one press V from the Main Menu to store one.
O9400SA

===File Transfer===

A
B
C
D
E
F

->
->
->
->
->
->

16:31:21 07/17/2007

Download Firmware
Download Current Configuration
Download Backup Configuration
Upload Current Configuration from FLASH
Upload Backup Configuration from FLASH
Change Firmware Boot Bank

<< Press ESC key to return to Main Menu or enter a command >>

129

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS

5.35.2 Upload Current Configuration Procedure
The Upload Current Configuration screen will appear. Use the backspace key to clear the
TFTP Server IP field. Open the TFTP server file on your PC to obtain the correct IP address
and file name. Enter these in appropriate fields of the Upload Current Configuration screen.
Press the Enter key.
O940 0SA
=== Upl oad Cu rren t C onf igur ati on ===
12 :35 :59 09/ 26/ 2007
ARRO W K EYS : CU RSO R M OVE, Pl eas e In put : n nn.n nn. nnn .nnn , B ACK SPAC E t o e dit

TFTP Se rve r IP
Conf ig Fil e Na me

: 0 00. 000 .000 .00 0
:

<< P res s E SC k ey to abor t, ENT ER k ey to Uplo ad/ Dow nloa d > >

A prompt will ask if you really want to upload. Press Y for yes.
Real ly wan t to Up loa d ?

The current configuration will be uploaded. This procedure is now complete.

130

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS

5.36 Upload Backup Configuration from FLASH
The full menu path for Upload Backup Configuration is as follows:
O > Logon
L > File Transfer
E > Upload Backup Configuration from FLASH
A screen by screen setup example is shown below.
5.36.1 Setup Screen Access
To upload the backup configuration, press L from the Main Menu.
O9400SA

=== Main Menu ===

18:26:12 03/22/2007

Serial Number
: 000045
Hardware Version: D
Software Version: V1.01.01 03/20/2007

Connect Port: SUPV_PORT
Start Time : 11:29:08 03/22/2007

[DISPLAY]
C -> System Config Display
I -> System Information
B -> SDH/SONET Config Display
Q -> Alarm Queue
T -> System Log Information
A -> SDH/SONET Alarm Status
P -> SDH/SONET Performance Statistics

[SETUP]
S -> System Config Setup
D -> SDH/SONET Config Setup
M -> Alarm Setup
V -> Store/Retrieve Backup Config
L -> File Transfer
R -> Performance Setup/Clear

[LOG]
F -> Log Off
O -> Log On
U -> Choose a Unit

[MISC]
Y -> Alarm Cut Off
Z -> System Reset
X -> Clear Alarm Queue
W -> Return to Default

>>SPACE bar to refresh or enter a command ===>

The File Transfer menu will appear. Press E.
Note: You must already have a backup configuration in order to upload it. If you don’t have
one press V from the Main Menu to store one.
O9400SA

===File Transfer===

A
B
C
D
E
F

->
->
->
->
->
->

16:31:21 07/17/2007

Download Firmware
Download Current Configuration
Download Backup Configuration
Upload Current Configuration from FLASH
Upload Backup Configuration from FLASH
Change Firmware Boot Bank

<< Press ESC key to return to Main Menu or enter a command >>

5.36.2 Upload Backup Configuration Procedure
The Upload Backup Configuration screen will appear.
O940 0SA
= == Uplo ad Bac kup Con fig urat ion == =
16: 57: 12 0 7/1 7/2 007
ARRO W K EYS : CU RSO R M OVE, Pl eas e In put : n nn.n nn. nnn .nnn , B ACK SPAC E t o e dit

TFTP Se rve r IP
Conf ig Fil e Na me

: 0 00. 000 .000 .00 0
:

<< P res s E SC k ey to abor t, ENT ER k ey to Uplo ad/ Dow nloa d > >

131

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS
Use the backspace key to clear the TFTP Server IP field. Open the TFTP server file on your
PC to obtain the correct IP address and file name. Enter these in appropriate fields of the
Upload Backup Configuration screen. Press the Enter key.
O940 0SA
=== Upl oad Ba ckup Co nfi gura tio n = ==
14 :59 :28 07/ 18/ 2007
ARRO W K EYS : CU RSO R M OVE, BA CKS PACE to ed it, ESC to abo rt
TFTP Se rve r IP
: 0 10. 003 .012 .00 1
Conf ig Fil e Na me
:
abc_ ___ ___ ____ ___ ___ ____ ___ ___ ____ ___ ___ ____ ___ ___ ____ __

<< P res s E SC k ey to abor t, ENT ER k ey to Uplo ad/ Dow nloa d > >

A prompt will ask if you really want to upload. Press Y for yes.
O940 0SA
=== Upl oad Ba ckup Co nfi gura tio n = ==
14 :57 :59 07/ 18/ 2007
ARRO W K EYS : CU RSO R M OVE, BA CKS PACE to ed it, ESC to abo rt

TFTP Se rve r IP
Conf ig Fil e Na me

: 0 10. 003 .012 .00 1
: a bc

Real ly wan t to Up loa d ?

<< P res s E SC k ey to abor t, ENT ER k ey to Uplo ad/ Dow nloa d > >

The following screen will show as the upload takes place.
O940 0SA
=== Upl oad Ba ckup Co nfi gura tio n = ==
14 :57 :10 07/ 18/ 2007
ARRO W K EYS : CU RSO R M OVE, BA CKS PACE to ed it, ESC to abo rt

TFTP Se rve r IP
Conf ig Fil e Na me

14: 57: 14 0 7/1 8/0 7
14: 57: 23 0 7/1 8/0 7

: 0 10. 003 .012 .00 1
: a bc

U plo adi ng b ack up conf ig. ... . 21 716 8 b ytes tr ans mitt ed.
U plo ad ok.

<< P res s E SC k ey to cont inu e > >

The upload backup configuration procedure is now complete.

132

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS

5.37 Change Firmware Boot Bank
The full menu path for Upload Backup Configuration is as follows:
O > Logon
L > File Transfer
F > Change Firmware Boot Bank
A screen by screen setup example is shown below.
5.37.1 Setup Screen Access
To change the Firmware Boot Bank, press L from the Main Menu.
O9400SA

=== Main Menu ===

18:26:12 03/22/2007

Serial Number
: 000045
Hardware Version: D
Software Version: V1.01.01 03/20/2007

Connect Port: SUPV_PORT
Start Time : 11:29:08 03/22/2007

[DISPLAY]
C -> System Config Display
I -> System Information
B -> SDH/SONET Config Display
Q -> Alarm Queue
T -> System Log Information
A -> SDH/SONET Alarm Status
P -> SDH/SONET Performance Statistics

[SETUP]
S -> System Config Setup
D -> SDH/SONET Config Setup
M -> Alarm Setup
V -> Store/Retrieve Backup Config
L -> File Transfer
R -> Performance Setup/Clear

[LOG]
F -> Log Off
O -> Log On
U -> Choose a Unit

[MISC]
Y -> Alarm Cut Off
Z -> System Reset
X -> Clear Alarm Queue
W -> Return to Default

>>SPACE bar to refresh or enter a command ===>

The File Transfer menu will appear. Press F.
O9400SA

===File Transfer===

A
B
C
D
E
F

->
->
->
->
->
->

16:31:21 07/17/2007

Download Firmware
Download Current Configuration
Download Backup Configuration
Upload Current Configuration from FLASH
Upload Backup Configuration from FLASH
Change Firmware Boot Bank

<< Press ESC key to return to Main Menu or enter a command >>

5.37.2 Change Firmware Boot Bank Procedure
The Change Firmware Boot Bank Procedure screen will appear. The current Boot Bank will
be displayed on the screen. Use the Tab key to scroll in which firmware Bank you wish to use
after the next reboot of the O9400S. Available choices are 1 or 2. Press the Enter key.
O940 0SA
= == C han ge Firm war e B oot Ban k = ==
ARRO W K EYS : CU RSO R M OVE, TA B/` : RO LL UP/ DOWN OP TIO NS

Cur ren t B oot Ban k : 1
Nex t B oot Ban k : 2

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to prev iou s m enu >>

133

1 2:4 3:09 09 /26 /200 7

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS
A prompt will ask if you really want to change the Firmware Bank. Press Y for yes. This
procedure is now complete and you will be returned to the previous menu.
Really want to change the boot bank ?
Note: This change will not go into effect until you power down the O9400S device and then
restart it.

134

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS

5.38 E1 Setup
5.38.1 Choose a Unit
To setup E1you must first choose a unit. The menu path is as follows:
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
A screen by screen setup example is shown below. Press U.
O9400SA

=== Main Menu ===

14:31:07 09/03/2007

Serial Number
: 000031
Hardware Version: D
Software Version: V1.01.01 07/10/2007

Connect Port: SUPV_PORT
Start Time : 13:24:48 09/03/2007

[DISPLAY]
C -> System Config Display
I -> System Information
B -> SDH/SONET Config Display
Q -> Alarm Queue
T -> System Log Information
A -> SDH/SONET Alarm Status
P -> SDH/SONET Performance Statistics

[SETUP]
S -> System Config Setup
D -> SDH/SONET Config Setup
M -> Alarm Setup
V -> Store/Retrieve Backup Config
L -> File Transfer
R -> Performance Setup/Clear

[LOG]
F -> Log Off
O -> Log On
U -> Choose a Unit

[MISC]
Y -> Alarm Cut Off
Z -> System Reset
X -> Clear Alarm Queue
W -> Return to Default

>>SPACE bar to refresh or enter a command ===>

A prompt will ask you to press the Tab key to select a unit. TG1 is the unit you want for E1/T1.
Press the Enter key.
==>> Pr ess Tab ke y t o se lec t t he u nit : T G1

A unit menu will appear. Note that the label “Unit TG1 –E1” at the top of the sample screen
below identifies the unit as a E1 unit which is the default setting of Unit TG1.
Unit TG1 -E1

=== Unit Menu ===

13:05:15 11/21/2007

HW Version : D

[DISPLAY]
N -> E1/T1 Mode Display
D -> Line Config Display
S -> Unit Diagnostics Display
H -> E1/T1 SNCP Status
A -> Current Alarm Status
P -> Unit Performance

[SETUP]
T -> E1/T1 Mode Setup
C -> Line Config Setup
G -> Unit Diagnostics Setup
K -> SNCP User Command
M -> Unit Alarm Setup
R -> Performance Setup/Clear

[LOG]
F -> Log Off
O -> Log On
U -> Choose a Unit
E -> Return to Main Menu

[MISC]
X -> Clear Unit Alarm Queue
W -> Unit Load Default

>>SPACE bar to refresh or enter a command ===>

To change to E1 or T1, press T from the unit menu. The E1/T1 Mode Setup screen will
appear. Use the Tab key to scroll in a E1/T1 mode setting. The choices are: T1-100 ohm for
T1 or E1-120 ohm for E1. Select E1-120 ohms. Press the Enter key. A prompt will ask if
you want to change the configuration. Press Y for Yes. You will be returned to the unit menu.
Press the Esc. key.

135

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS
Unit TG 1 - E1
=== === E1 /T1 Mod e S etup == =
ARRO W K EYS : CU RSO R M OVE, TA B/` : RO LL UP/ DOWN OP TIO NS

E1/T 1 M ode

15 :28 :08 09/ 03/ 2007

: E1- 120o hm

>> C han ge conf igu rat ion (Y/ N)? (No te: to save ,pl eas e us e V -co mman d)

Note: If the card is E1-75 ohm, it can not be changed to T1-100 ohm or E1-120 ohm.
You will be returned to the Unit Menu. Press E to return to the Main Menu. From the Main
Menu press V to save the change. The Store/Retrieve Configuration screen will appear. Use
the arrow key to move the asterisk to STORE. Press the Enter key.
O940 0SA

>> S ele ct ?

== =Sto re/ Ret riev e C onf igur ati on= ==

*ST ORE

1 5:4 1:57 09 /03 /200 7

R ETR IEVE

The following prompt will appear. Press Y for Yes.
>> Store Current Configuration ? [Y/N]
A password prompt will appear. Key in your password. Press the Enter key.
==>> En ter pas swo rd :

The following message will appear briefly. This procedure is now complete.
===> Saving.......
5.38.2 E1/T1 Mode Setup
The menu path for E1/T1 Mode Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
T > E1/T1 Mode Setup
The setup procedure has already been fully explained in Section 5.35.1, above.
5.38.3 Line Config Setup
The menu path for E1 Line Config Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
C > Line Config Setup

136

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS
Press C from the Unit Menu.
Unit TG1 -E1

=== Unit Menu ===

13:05:15 11/21/2007

HW Version : D

[DISPLAY]
N -> E1/T1 Mode Display
D -> Line Config Display
S -> Unit Diagnostics Display
H -> E1/T1 SNCP Status
A -> Current Alarm Status
P -> Unit Performance

[SETUP]
T -> E1/T1 Mode Setup
C -> Line Config Setup
G -> Unit Diagnostics Setup
K -> SNCP User Command
M -> Unit Alarm Setup
R -> Performance Setup/Clear

[LOG]
F -> Log Off
O -> Log On
U -> Choose a Unit
E -> Return to Main Menu

[MISC]
X -> Clear Unit Alarm Queue
W -> Unit Load Default

>>SPACE bar to refresh or enter a command ===>

The Config Setup menu screen will appear.
Unit TG1 -E1

=== Line Config Setup ===

09:59:15 04/16/2009

A -> Line Coding Setup
B -> Low-Order Path Overhead Setup
C -> Customer Information Setup

<< Press ESC key to return to Main Menu or enter a command >>

5.38.3.1 E1 Line Coding Setup
The menu path for E1 Line Coding Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
C > Line Config Setup
A > Line Coding Setup
Press A from the Config Setup screen. use the arrow keys to move the cursor to each field.
Use the Tab key to scroll in your settings. Available settings are: HDB3, AMI. Press the
Enter key.
Note: HDB3 (High Density Bipolar of order 3 code) is used in E1 and AMI (Alternate Mark
Inversion) is used in T1.

Unit TG1 -E1

=== Line Config Setup ===

A -> Line Coding Setup
B -> Low-Order Path Overhead Setup
C -> Customer Information Setup

<< Press ESC key to return to Main Menu or enter a command >>

137

09:59:15 04/16/2009

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS
Unit TG 1 - E1
= == Lin e Co din g S etup == =
ARRO W K EYS : CU RSO R M OVE, TA B/` : RO LL UP/ DOWN OP TIO NS

E1#
--01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16

1 8:3 4:33 09 /06 /200 7

C odi ng
- --- -H DB3
H DB3
H DB3
H DB3
H DB3
H DB3
H DB3
H DB3
H DB3
H DB3
H DB3
H DB3
H DB3
H DB3
H DB3
H DB3

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to prev iou s m enu >>

A prompt will ask if you want to change the configuration. Press Y for Yes. You will be
returned to the unit menu. Press the Esc. key
>> Change configuration (Y/N)? (Note:to save,please use V-command)
You will be returned to the Unit Menu. Press E to return to the Main Menu. From the Main
Menu press V to save the change. The Store/Retrieve Configuration screen will appear. Use
the arrow key to move the asterisk to STORE. Press the Enter key.
O940 0SA

>> S ele ct ?

=== Stor e/R etr ieve Co nfi gura tio n== =

*ST ORE

15 :41 :57 09/ 03/ 2007

R ETR IEVE

The following prompt will appear. Press Y for Yes.
>> Store Current Configuration ? [Y/N]
A password prompt will appear. Key in your password. Press the Enter key.
==>> En ter pas swo rd :

The following message will appear briefly. This procedure is now complete.
===> Saving.......

5.38.3.2 E1 Low-Order Path Overhead Setup
The menu path for E1 Low-Order Path Overhead Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
C > Line Config Setup
B > Low-Order Path Overhead Setup

138

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS
Press B from the Config Setup screen.
Unit TG1 -E1

=== Line Config Setup ===

09:59:15 04/16/2009

A -> Line Coding Setup
B -> Low-Order Path Overhead Setup
C -> Customer Information Setup

<< Press ESC key to return to Main Menu or enter a command >>

The Low-Order Path Overhead Setup screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to
move the cursor to The E1# field. Key a setting from the range 1~16. Press the Enter key.
Unit TG1 -E1
=== Low-Order Path Overhead Setup ===
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB/`: ROLL UP/DOWN OPTIONS
E1# : 01

10:01:31 04/16/2009

The Low-Order Path Overhead Setup screen will appear. Use the Tab key to move the
cursor to the various fields. Use the Tab key to scroll in your settings.
Note: Some settings must be keyed in. Press the Enter key when done.
Table 5-32 Low-Order Path Overhead Settings
Field

Setting Options

Default Setting

J2_LEN

NULL,
16-byte (NULL padding),
16-byte (SPACE padding)
Key in your message
Key in your message
Key in your message
Range 0~7
Fixed

NULL

Expected_J2_MSG
TX_J2_MSG
RX_J2_MSG
LP-EPSL
Rx-PSL

Note

2

This is a sample screen for 16-BYTE.
Unit TG1 -E1
=== Low-Order Path Overhead Setup ===
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB/`: ROLL UP/DOWN OPTIONS
E1# : 01

J2_LEN
Expected_J2_MSG
TX_J2_MSG
RX_J2_MSG

17:16:23 12/02/2009

: 16-BYTE (NULL padding)
:
:
:

LP-EPSL : 2
Rx-PSL : 0

( Asynchronous )
( Unequipped )

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

A prompt will ask if you want to change the configuration. Press Y for Yes. You will be
returned to the unit menu. Press the Esc. key
>> Change configuration (Y/N)? (Note:to save,please use V-command)

139

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS
You will be returned to the Unit Menu. Press E to return to the Main Menu. From the Main
Menu press V to save the change. The Store/Retrieve Configuration screen will appear. Use
the arrow key to move the asterisk to STORE. Press the Enter key.
O940 0SA
09/0 3/2 007

>> S ele ct ?

=== Sto re/ Retr iev e C onfi gur ati on== =

*ST ORE

1 5:41 :57

R ETR IEVE

The following prompt will appear. Press Y for Yes.
>> Store Current Configuration ? [Y/N]
A password prompt will appear. Key in your password. Press the Enter key.
==>> En ter pas swo rd :

The following message will appear briefly. This procedure is now complete.
===> Saving.......
5.38.3.3 E1 Customer Information Setup
The menu path for E1 Customer Information Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
C > Line Config Setup
C > Customer Information Setup
Press C from the Config Setup screen.
Unit TG 1 - E1

== = L ine Con fig Set up ===

16: 28:4 5 0 9/0 3/20 07

A -> L ine Co ding Se tup
B -> L ow- Ord er P ath Ov erhe ad Set up
C -> C ust ome r In for mat ion Set up

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to Main Me nu or e nte r a com man d > >

The Customer Information Setup screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to move
the cursor to each E1# field. Key in your customer information. Press the Enter key.

140

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS
Unit TG 1 - E1
= == C ust ome r In for mat ion Set up ===
0 9:2 9:49 09 /04 /200 7
ARRO W K EYS : CU RSO R M OVE, BA CKS PACE to ed it, ESC to abo rt

E1#
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16

Cus tome r I nfo rmat ion
E1- Line ___ ___ ____ ___
E1- Line
E1- Line
E1- Line
E1- Line
E1- Line
E1- Line
E1- Line
E1- Line
E1- Line
E1- Line
E1- Line
E1- Line
E1- Line
E1- Line
E1- Line

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to prev iou s m enu >>

A prompt will ask if you want to change the configuration. Press Y for Yes. You will be
returned to the unit menu. Press the Esc. key
>> Change configuration (Y/N)? (Note:to save,please use V-command)

You will be returned to the Unit Menu. Press E to return to the Main Menu. From the Main
Menu press V to save the change. The Store/Retrieve Configuration screen will appear. Use
the arrow key to move the asterisk to STORE. Press the Enter key.
O940 0SA

>> S ele ct ?

=== Stor e/R etr ieve Co nfi gura tio n== =

*ST ORE

15 :41 :57 09/ 03/ 2007

R ETR IEVE

The following prompt will appear. Press Y for Yes.
>> Store Current Configuration ? [Y/N]
A password prompt will appear. Key in your password. Press the Enter key.
==>> En ter pas swo rd :

The following message will appear briefly. This procedure is now complete.
===> Saving.......

5.38.4 Unit Diagnostics Setup
The menu path for E1 Unit Diagnostics Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
G > Unit Diagnostics Setup

Press G from the Unit Menu.

141

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS
Unit TG 1 - E1
HW V ers ion : D

=== Uni t M enu ===

1 1:0 2:21 03 /11 /201 0

[DIS PLA Y]
N -> Li ne Impe dan ce Disp lay
D -> Li ne Conf ig Dis play
S -> Un it Diag nos tic s Di spl ay
H -> E1 /T1 SNC P S tat us
A -> Cu rre nt A lar m S tatu s
P -> Pe rfo rman ce

[SET UP]
T -> Li ne Impe dan ce Setu p
C -> Li ne Conf ig Set up
G -> Un it Diag nos tic s Se tup
K -> SN CP User Co mma nd
M -> Un it Alar m S etu p
R -> Pe rfo rman ce Set up/C lea r

[LOG ]
F -> Lo g O ff
O -> Lo g O n
U -> Ch oos e a Uni t
E -> Re tur n to Ma in Menu

[MIS C]
X -> Cl ear Uni t A lar m Qu eue
W -> Un it Load De fau lt

>>SP ACE ba r to re fre sh o r e nte r a com man d == =>

The Unit Diagnostics Setup screen will appear.
Unit TG 1 - E1

== = Un it Dia gnos tic s S etup == =

17:4 8:4 1 0 9/03 /20 07

A -> C han nel Loo pba ck Setu p
B -> U nit Di agno sti cs Setu p

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to Main Me nu or e nte r a com man d > >

5.38.4.1 Channel Loopback Setup
The menu path for E1 Channel Loopback Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
G > Unit Diagnostics Setup
A > Channel Loopback Setup
Press A from the Unit Diagnostics Setup screen.
Unit TG 1 - E1

=== Uni t D iag nost ics Se tup ===

1 7:48 :41 09 /03/ 200 7

A -> C han nel Loo pba ck Setu p
B -> U nit Di agno sti cs Setu p

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to Main Me nu or e nte r a com man d > >

The Channel Loopback Test screen will appear. All setting choices are displayed on the
screen. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the selection you want for a particular
field. Then press the Enter key. Repeat this process for each setting you wish to make.
Note: The Loopback Timer is set up separately using the O9400S-1US1 main Main Menu.
Timer setup is a very simple procedure. The menu path is as follows:
O > Logon
S > System Config Setup
C > Loopback Timer setup

142

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS
Unit TG 1 - E1

=== Cha nne l Lo opb ack Tes t = ==

09 :38 :17 09/ 04/ 2007

Loop bac k T imer : 000 060 sec .
Unit
E1#
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16

*O FF

TO- ALL -LI NE

*O FF
*O FF
*O FF
*O FF
*O FF
*O FF
*O FF
*O FF
*O FF
*O FF
*O FF
*O FF
*O FF
*O FF
*O FF
*O FF

TO- OPT ICA L-LI NE
TO- OPT ICA L-LI NE
TO- OPT ICA L-LI NE
TO- OPT ICA L-LI NE
TO- OPT ICA L-LI NE
TO- OPT ICA L-LI NE
TO- OPT ICA L-LI NE
TO- OPT ICA L-LI NE
TO- OPT ICA L-LI NE
TO- OPT ICA L-LI NE
TO- OPT ICA L-LI NE
TO- OPT ICA L-LI NE
TO- OPT ICA L-LI NE
TO- OPT ICA L-LI NE
TO- OPT ICA L-LI NE
TO- OPT ICA L-LI NE

TO -LIN E
TO -LIN E
TO -LIN E
TO -LIN E
TO -LIN E
TO -LIN E
TO -LIN E
TO -LIN E
TO -LIN E
TO -LIN E
TO -LIN E
TO -LIN E
TO -LIN E
TO -LIN E
TO -LIN E
TO -LIN E

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to prev iou s m enu >>

This procedure is complete. Press the Esc key twice to return to the Unit Menu.
5.38.4.2 Unit Diagnostics Setup
The menu path for E1 Unit Diagnostics Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
G > Unit Diagnostics Setup
B > Unit Diagnostics Setup
Press B from the Unit Diagnostics Setup screen.
Unit TG 1 - E1

=== Uni t D iag nost ics Se tup ===

1 7:48 :41 09 /03/ 200 7

A -> C han nel Loo pba ck Setu p
B -> U nit Di agno sti cs Setu p

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to Main Me nu or e nte r a com man d > >

The Unit Diagnostics screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to
the E1# field. Use the Tab key to scroll in a setting. The range is 1~16. Press
the Enter key.
Unit TG 1 - E1
= == Uni t Di agn ost ics ===
10 :31 :53 09/ 04/ 2007
ARRO W K EYS : CU RSO R M OVE, Pl eas e In put : 1 ~16, BA CKS PACE to ed it
Sen d T est Pat ter n t o == >
E1 # :

01

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to prev iou s m enu >>

An expanded screen will appear. All setting choices are displayed on the screen.
Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the selection you want for a particular
field. Then press the Enter key.

143

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS
Unit TG 1 - E1
= == Uni t Di agn ost ics ===
ARRO W K EYS : C URS OR MOVE , ENT ER K EY : I TEM SEL ECT

10 :31 :53 09/ 04/ 2007

Sen d T est Pat ter n t o == >
E1 # :

01

Dire cti on

: *O pti cal- Lin e

TEST pa tte rn : *O FF

2^1 5-1

Trib uta ry- Line
2^ 20- 1

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to prev iou s m enu >>

A further screen will display the Test Pattern information.
Unit TG 1 - E1
=== Un it D iag nos tics == =
ARRO W K EYS : C URS OR MOVE , ENT ER K EY : I TEM SEL ECT

1 0:3 6:41 09 /04 /200 7

Sen d T est Pat ter n t o == >
E1 # :

01

Dire cti on

: *O pti cal- Lin e

TEST pa tte rn :

S YNC
ES
UAS
To tal

St ate
Co unt
Co unt
Co unt

O FF

=
=
=
=

* 2^1 5-1

UN SYNC
9
0
8

Trib uta ry- Line
2^ 20- 1

ES Rat io =
UAS Rat io =

1 00. 0%
0. 0%

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to prev iou s m enu >>

This procedure is complete. Press the Esc key to return to the previous menu if yo wish to
set up a different loopback.
5.38.5 SNCP User Command
The menu path for E1 SNCP USER Command Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
K > SNCP USER Command
Press K from the Unit Menu.
Unit TG 1 - E1

== = U nit Men u = ==

1 0:4 1:02 09 /04 /200 7

HW V ers ion : D

[DIS PLA Y]
N -> Li ne Impe dan ce Disp lay
D -> Li ne Conf ig Dis play
S -> Un it Diag nos tic s Di spl ay
H -> E1 /T1 SNC P S tat us
A -> Cu rre nt A lar m S tatu s
P -> Un it Perf orm anc e

[SET UP]
T -> Li ne Impe dan ce Setu p
C -> Li ne Conf ig Set up
G -> Un it Diag nos tic s Se tup
K -> SN CP User Co mma nd
M -> Un it Alar m S etu p
R -> Pe rfo rman ce Set up/C lea r

[LOG ]
F -> Lo g O ff
O -> Lo g O n
U -> Ch oos e a Uni t
E -> Re tur n to Ma in Menu

[MIS C]
X -> Cl ear Uni t A lar m Qu eue
W -> Un it Load De fau lt

>>SP ACE ba r to re fre sh o r e nte r a com man d == =>

144

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS
The SNCP User Command screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to
each field. Use the Tab key to scroll in your settings.
Port setting: range is 1~16.
Command settings are listed in the table below. Some commands have higher priorities than
others. If the command you select has a lower priority than the existing setting, your selection
will be rejected. If you want to use a setting with a lower priority, use the clear command first.
This will clear the existing setting and allow you to choose a lower priority setting.
Note: The command field settings can only be changed if the cross-connect is in PP-AD
mode. System mode type must be ADM (SNCP).

Table 5-33 SNCP Command Settings
Priority
1 (high)
2
3
3
4 (low)
4 (low)

SNCP Command Settings
Setting
Description
Clear
Clear any existing setting
Lock-out
Lock out protection
FS-Ea
Force switch to East side(Ea)
FS-Wa
Force switch to West side (Wa)
MS-Ea
Manual switch to East side (Ea)
MS-Wa
Manual switch to West side (Wa)

Press the Enter key.
nit TG1 -E 1
== = S NCP Use r C omm and ===
10 :40 :23 09/ 04/ 2007
ARRO W K EYS : CU RSO R M OVE, Pl eas e In put : 1 ~16, BA CKS PACE to ed it
Port
:
Comm and :

01
F S-W a

Note :
FS = Fo rce Sw itch
MS = Ma nua l S witc h
<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to prev iou s m enu >>

A prompt will ask if you are sure. Press Y for yes.
>>Ar e y ou sure (Y /N) ?

A new prompt will appear.
SNCP Us er Comm and OK .

This procedure is complete. Press the ESC key twice to return to the Unit Menu.
5.38.6 E1 Unit Alarm Setup
The menu path for E1 Unit Alarm Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
M > Unit Alarm Setup

145

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS
Press M from the Unit Menu.
Unit TG 1 - E1

= == Unit Me nu ===

10 :41 :02 09/ 04/ 2007

HW V ers ion : D

[DIS PLA Y]
N -> Li ne Impe dan ce Disp lay
D -> Li ne Conf ig Dis play
S -> Un it Diag nos tic s Di spl ay
H -> E1 /T1 SNC P S tat us
A -> Cu rre nt A lar m S tatu s
P -> Un it Perf orm anc e

[SET UP]
T -> Li ne Impe dan ce Setu p
C -> Li ne Conf ig Set up
G -> Un it Diag nos tic s Se tup
K -> SN CP User Co mma nd
M -> Un it Alar m S etu p
R -> Pe rfo rman ce Set up/C lea r

[LOG ]
F -> Lo g O ff
O -> Lo g O n
U -> Ch oos e a Uni t
E -> Re tur n to Ma in Menu

[MIS C]
X -> Cl ear Uni t A lar m Qu eue
W -> Un it Load De fau lt

>>SP ACE ba r to re fre sh o r e nte r a com man d == =>

The Unit Alarm Setup screen will appear.
Unit TG 1 - E1

= == Uni t Al arm Se tup ===

10 :47 :18 09/ 04/ 2007

A -> U nit Al arm Mas k/R elay Se tup
B -> U nit Al arm Sev eri ty S etu p
<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to Main Me nu or e nte r a com man d > >

5.38.6.1 E1 Unit Alarm Mask/Relay Setup
The menu path for E1 Unit Alarm Mask/Relay Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
M > Unit Alarm Setup
A > Unit Alarm Mask/Relay Setup
Press A from the Unit Alarm Setup menu. The Unit Alarm setup screen will appear. To
select a port move the cursor to the E1# field. Use the Tab key to scroll n a port number.
Setting range is 1~16. Press the Enter key.
Unit TG 1 - E1
=== Un it A lar m S etup == =
1 0:5 6:28 09 /04 /200 7
ARRO W K EYS : CU RSO R M OVE, Pl eas e In put : 1 ~16, BA CKS PACE to ed it
E1# : 0 1

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to prev iou s m enu >>

146

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS
An expanded screen will appear. Use the Tab key to scroll in an Alarm and Relay setting for
each alarm type. If you wish to copy the same configuration to different channels, key in the
channel settings. Press the Enter key.
ARRO W K EYS : CU RSO R M OVE, Pl eas e In put : 1 ~16, BA CKS PACE to ed it
E1# : 0 1

Ty pe
-- --- --TU -LO P
TU -AI S
LP -TI M
LP -UN EQ
LP -PL M
LP -RD I-S
LP -RD I-C
LP -RD I-P
LP -BI P
LP -RE I
E1 -LO S
E1 -AI S
E1 -UA S
Co py the sam e

A lar m
Re lay
- --- ---- -- --- --E NAB LED
DI SAB LED
E NAB LED
DI SAB LED
E NAB LED
DI SAB LED
E NAB LED
DI SAB LED
E NAB LED
DI SAB LED
E NAB LED
DI SAB LED
E NAB LED
DI SAB LED
E NAB LED
DI SAB LED
E NAB LED
DI SAB LED
E NAB LED
DI SAB LED
E NAB LED
DI SAB LED
E NAB LED
DI SAB LED
E NAB LED
DI SAB LED
c onf ig. fro m C han# 01 to chan #01

A prompt will ask if you want to change the configuration. Press Y for Yes. You will be
returned to the unit menu. Press the Esc. key
>> Change configuration (Y/N)? (Note:to save,please use V-command)

You will be returned to the Unit Menu. Press E to return to the Main Menu. From the Main
Menu press V to save the change. The Store/Retrieve Configuration screen will appear. Use
the arrow key to move the asterisk to STORE. Press the Enter key.
O940 0SA

>> S ele ct ?

== =Sto re/ Ret riev e C onf igur ati on= ==

*ST ORE

1 5:4 1:57 09 /03 /200 7

R ETR IEVE

The following prompt will appear. Press Y for Yes.
>> Store Current Configuration ? [Y/N]
A password prompt will appear. Key in your password. Press the Enter key.
==>> En ter pas swo rd :

The following message will appear briefly. This procedure is now complete.
===> Saving.......
5.38.6.2 Unit Alarm Severity Setup
The menu path for E1 Unit Alarm Mask/Relay Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
M > Unit Alarm Setup
B > Unit Alarm Severity Setup
Press B from the Unit Alarm Setup menu. The Unit Alarm Severity Setup screen will appear.
Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to each alarm field. Use the Tab key to scroll in a
setting. Settings are: INFO, MINR, MAJR, CRIT. Press the Enter key.

147

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS
Unit TG1 -E1
=== Unit Alarm Severity Setup ===
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB/`: ROLL UP/DOWN OPTIONS

Type
-------TU-LOP
TU-AIS
LP-TIM
LP-UNEQ
LP-PLM
LP-RDI-S
LP-RDI-C
LP-RDI-P
LP-V5-BIP
LP-V5-REI
E1-LOS
E1-AIS
E1-UAS

10:04:39 04/16/2009

Severity
-------MAJR
MAJR
MINR
MINR
MINR
MINR
MINR
MINR
MINR
MINR
MAJR
MINR
MINR

(CRIT:CRITICAL, MAJR:MAJOR, MINR:MINOR, INFO:INFORM)
<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

A prompt will ask if you want to change the configuration. Press Y for Yes. You will be
returned to the unit menu. Press the Esc. key
>> Change configuration (Y/N)? (Note:to save,please use V-command)

You will be returned to the Unit Menu. Press E to return to the Main Menu. From the Main
Menu press V to save the change. The Store/Retrieve Configuration screen will appear. Use
the arrow key to move the asterisk to STORE. Press the Enter key.

O940 0SA

>> S ele ct ?

=== Stor e/R etr ieve Co nfi gura tio n== =

*ST ORE

15 :41 :57 09/ 03/ 2007

R ETR IEVE

The following prompt will appear. Press Y for Yes.
>> Store Current Configuration ? [Y/N]
A password prompt will appear. Key in your password. Press the Enter key.
==>> En ter pas swo rd :

The following message will appear briefly. This procedure is now complete.
===> Saving.......

148

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS

5.38.7 Performance Setup/Clear
The menu path for E1 /Performance Setup/Clear is as follows:
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
R > Performance Setup/Clear
Press R from the Unit Menu.
Unit TG 1 - E1

=== Uni t M enu ===

1 0:4 1:02 09 /04 /200 7

HW V ers ion : D

[DIS PLA Y]
N -> Li ne Impe dan ce Disp lay
D -> Li ne Conf ig Dis play
S -> Un it Diag nos tic s Di spl ay
H -> E1 /T1 SNC P S tat us
A -> Cu rre nt A lar m S tatu s
P -> Un it Perf orm anc e

[SET UP]
T -> Li ne Impe dan ce Setu p
C -> Li ne Conf ig Set up
G -> Un it Diag nos tic s Se tup
K -> SN CP User Co mma nd
M -> Un it Alar m S etu p
R -> Pe rfo rman ce Set up/C lea r

[LOG ]
F -> Lo g O ff
O -> Lo g O n
U -> Ch oos e a Uni t
E -> Re tur n to Ma in Menu

[MIS C]
X -> Cl ear Uni t A lar m Qu eue
W -> Un it Load De fau lt

>>SP ACE ba r to re fre sh o r e nte r a com man d == =>

The SDH/SONET Performance Setup/Clear screen will appear.
Unit TG 1 - E1

== = S DH/S ONE T P erfo rma nce Set up/ Cle ar = ==1 1:1 2:51 09 /04 /200 7

A -> Clear Performance Data
B -> Performance Threshold Setup

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to Main Me nu or e nte r a com man d > >

5.38.7.1 Clear Performance Data
The menu path for E1 Clear Performance Data setup is as follows:
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
R > Performance Setup/Clear
A > Clear Performance Data
Press A from the SDH/SONET Performance Setup/Clear menu.
Unit TG 1 - E1

== = S DH/S ONE T P erfo rma nce Set up/ Cle ar = ==1 1:1 2:51 09 /04 /200 7

A -> Clear Performance Data
B -> Performance Threshold Setup

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to Main Me nu or e nte r a com man d > >

149

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS
The Clear Performance Data screen will appear. Press Y to clear performance data.
Unit TG 1 - E1

=== Cle ar Perf orm anc e Da ta ===

11 :18 :29 09/ 04/ 2007

>> C lea r p erfo rma nce dat a - ar e yo u s ure [Y/ N] ?

This procedure is complete.

5.38.7.2 Unit Performance TCA Setup
The menu path for E1 Unit Performance TCA Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
R > Performance Setup/Clear
B > Unit Performance TCA Setup
Press B from the SDH/SONET Performance Setup/Clear menu.
Unit TG 1 - E1

== = S DH/S ONE T P erfo rma nce Set up/ Cle ar = ==1 1:1 2:51 09 /04 /200 7

A -> Clear Performance Data
B -> Performance Threshold Setup

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to Main Me nu or e nte r a com man d > >

The Unit Performance TCA Setup screen will appear. Use the Arrow keys to move the cursor
to each field.
Note: Some settings must be keyed in.
Press the Enter key after you have finished making all of your settings for this screen.

Table 5-34 Unit Performance TCA Settings
Field
Alarm
Severity
Threshold

Setting Options

Default Setting

ENABLED, DISABLED
INFO, MINR, MAJR, CRIT
Range: 1~9999

Note

ENABLED
MINR
600, 600, 2048

Unit TG 1 - E1 = == Per form anc e T hres hol d C ross Al arm Set up 18: 48:0 1 0 9/0 6/20 07
ARRO W K EYS : CU RSO R M OVE, TA B/` : RO LL UP/ DOWN OP TIO NS

Ty pe
-- --- --LP -BI P
LP -RE I
Li ne BPV

A lar m
- --- ---E NAB LED
E NAB LED
E NAB LED

Se ver ity
-- --- --MI NR
MI NR
MI NR

Thr esh old
--- --- --060 0
060 0
204 8

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to prev iou s m enu >>

150

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS
A prompt will ask if you want to change the configuration. Press Y for Yes. You will be
returned to the unit menu. Press the Esc. key
>> Change configuration (Y/N)? (Note:to save,please use V-command)

You will be returned to the Unit Menu. Press E to return to the Main Menu. From the Main
Menu press V to save the change. The Store/Retrieve Configuration screen will appear. Use
the arrow key to move the asterisk to STORE. Press the Enter key.
O940 0SA

>> S ele ct ?

=== Sto re/ Retr iev e C onfi gur ati on== =

*ST ORE

1 5:41 :57 09 /03/ 200 7

R ETR IEVE

The following prompt will appear. Press Y for Yes.
>> Store Current Configuration ? [Y/N]
A password prompt will appear. Key in your password. Press the Enter key.
==>> En ter pas swo rd :

The following message will appear briefly. This procedure is now complete.
===> Saving.......
5.38.8 E1 Performance Report
5.38.8.1 1-Hour Performance Report
The full menu path for E1 one hour performance report is as follows:
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
P > Unit Performance
1 > 1-Hour Performance
Press Enter
O9400SA
=== 1-Hour Performance ===
LP-BIP(V5)
-- Valid Seconds in Current 15-Min Interval : 0 seconds

Current 15-Min Interval
1st Nearest 15-Min Interval
2nd Nearest 15-Min Interval
3rd Nearest 15-Min Interval
4rd Nearest 15-Min Interval

:
:
:
:
:

(EB)
0
---------------------

(BBE)
0
---------------------

(ES)
0
---------------------

09:41:22 11/20/2009

(BES)
0
---------------------

<< Press TAB key to show Statistics Report >>
<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>

151

(SES)
0
---------------------

(UAS)
0
---------------------

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS

5.38.8.2 24-Hour Performance Report
The full menu path for E1 24 hour performance report is as follows:
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
P > Unit Performance
2 > 24-Hour Performance
Press Enter
O9400SA
=== 24-Hour Performance ===
09:41:51 11/20/2009
EB LP-BIP(V5)
-- Valid Seconds in Current 15-Min Interval : 0 seconds
-- Valid 15-Min Intervals in Current 24-Hour Interval: 0
(EB)
(BBE)
(ES)
(BES)
(SES)
(UAS)
Current 15-Min Interval
: 0
0
0
0
0
0
Current Day
: ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ------- EB
01-08
09-16
17-24
25-32
33-40
41-48
49-56
57-64
65-72
73-80
81-88
89-96

, Last 96
(09:15) >
(07:15) >
(05:15) >
(03:15) >
(01:15) >
(23:15) >
(21:15) >
(19:15) >
(17:15) >
(15:15) >
(13:15) >
(11:15) >

15-Min Interval :
------ ------ ----------- ------ ----------- ------ ----------- ------ ----------- ------ ----------- ------ ----------- ------ ----------- ------ ----------- ------ ----------- ------ ----------- ------ ----------- ------ ------

-------------------------------------------------------------

-------------------------------------------------------------

-------------------------------------------------------------

-------------------------------------------------------------

-------------------------------------------------------------

<< Press TAB key to show Statistics Report >>
<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>

5.38.8.3 7-Day Performance Report
The full menu path for E1 7 day performance report is as follows:
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
P > Unit Performance
3 > 7-Day Performance
Press Enter
O9400SA
=== 7-Day Performance ===
LP-BIP(V5)
-- Valid 15-Min Intervals in Current Day : 0

Current Day
11/19/2009
11/18/2009
11/17/2009
11/16/2009
11/15/2009
11/14/2009
11/13/2009

:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:

(EB)
-----------------------------------------

(BBE)
-----------------------------------------

(ES)
-----------------------------------------

09:42:14 11/20/2009

(BES)
-----------------------------------------

(SES)
-----------------------------------------

(UAS)
-----------------------------------------

<< Press TAB key to show Statistics Report >>
<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>

Note: The maximum value for line ES, BES, SES, UAS, and BPV is 65,535 respectively.

152

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS

5.39 T1 Setup
5.39.1 Choose a Unit
To setup T1you must first choose a unit. The menu path is as follows:
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
.A screen by screen setup example is shown below. Press U.
O9400SA

=== Main Menu ===

14:31:07 09/03/2007

Serial Number
: 000031
Hardware Version: D
Software Version: V1.01.01 07/10/2007

Connect Port: SUPV_PORT
Start Time : 13:24:48 09/03/2007

[DISPLAY]
C -> System Config Display
I -> System Information
B -> SDH/SONET Config Display
Q -> Alarm Queue
T -> System Log Information
A -> SDH/SONET Alarm Status
P -> SDH/SONET Performance Statistics

[SETUP]
S -> System Config Setup
D -> SDH/SONET Config Setup
M -> Alarm Setup
V -> Store/Retrieve Backup Config
L -> File Transfer
R -> Performance Setup/Clear

[LOG]
F -> Log Off
O -> Log On
U -> Choose a Unit

[MISC]
Y -> Alarm Cut Off
Z -> System Reset
X -> Clear Alarm Queue
W -> Return to Default

>>SPACE bar to refresh or enter a command ===>

A prompt will ask you to press the Tab key to select a unit. TG1 is the unit you want for E1/T1.
Press the Enter key.
==>> Pr ess Tab ke y t o se lec t t he u nit : T G1

A unit menu will appear. Note that the label “Unit TG1 –E1” at the top of the sample screen shown
below identifies the unit as an E1 unit which is the default setting of the Unit TG1. Instructions for
changing to T1 are listed below.
Unit TG1 -E1

=== Unit Menu ===

13:11:03 11/21/2007

HW Version : D

[DISPLAY]
N -> E1/T1 Mode Display
D -> Line Config Display
S -> Unit Diagnostics Display
H -> E1/T1 SNCP Status
A -> Current Alarm Status
P -> Unit Performance

[SETUP]
T -> E1/T1 Mode Setup
C -> Line Config Setup
G -> Unit Diagnostics Setup
K -> SNCP User Command
M -> Unit Alarm Setup
R -> Performance Setup/Clear

[LOG]
F -> Log Off
O -> Log On
U -> Choose a Unit
E -> Return to Main Menu

[MISC]
X -> Clear Unit Alarm Queue
W -> Unit Load Default

>>SPACE bar to refresh or enter a command ===>

To change to T1, press T from the unit menu. The E1/T1 Mode Setup screen will appear.
Use the Tab key to scroll in a Line Impedance setting. The choices are: T1-100 ohm or E1120 ohm. Select T1-100 ohm. Press the Enter key. A prompt will ask if you want to change
the configuration. Press Y for Yes. You will be returned to the unit menu. Press the Esc. key

153

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS
Unit TG 1 - T1
== = E 1/T1 Mo de Setu p = ==
ARRO W K EYS : CU RSO R M OVE, TA B/` : RO LL UP/ DOWN OP TIO NS

15 :28 :08 09/ 03/ 2007

E1/T 1 M ode : T 1-1 00o hm

>> C han ge conf igu rat ion (Y/ N)? (No te: to save ,pl eas e us e V -co mman d)

You will be returned to the Unit Menu. Press E to return to the Main Menu. From the Main
Menu press V to save the change. The Store/Retrieve Configuration screen will appear. Use
the arrow key to move the asterisk to STORE. Press the Enter key.
O940 0SA

>> S ele ct ?

=== Stor e/R etr ieve Co nfi gura tio n== =

*ST ORE

15 :41 :57 09/ 03/ 2007

R ETR IEVE

The following prompt will appear. Press Y for Yes.
>> Store Current Configuration ? [Y/N]

A password prompt will appear. Key in your password. Press the Enter key.
==>> En ter pas swo rd :

The following message will appear briefly. This procedure is now complete.
===> Saving.......
5.39.2 E1/T1 Mode Setup
The menu path for T1 Line Impedance Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
T > E1/T1 Mode Setup
The setup procedure has already been fully explained in Section 5.35, above.
5.39.3 Line Config Setup
The menu path for T1 Line Config Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
C > Line Config Setup

154

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS
Press C from the Unit Menu.
Unit TG1 -T1

=== Unit Menu ===

13:11:03 11/21/2007

HW Version : D

[DISPLAY]
N -> E1/T1 Mode Display
D -> Line Config Display
S -> Unit Diagnostics Display
H -> E1/T1 SNCP Status
A -> Current Alarm Status
P -> Unit Performance

[SETUP]
T -> E1/T1 Mode Setup
C -> Line Config Setup
G -> Unit Diagnostics Setup
K -> SNCP User Command
M -> Unit Alarm Setup
R -> Performance Setup/Clear

[LOG]
F -> Log Off
O -> Log On
U -> Choose a Unit
E -> Return to Main Menu

[MISC]
X -> Clear Unit Alarm Queue
W -> Unit Load Default

>>SPACE bar to refresh or enter a command ===>

The Config Setup menu screen will appear.
Unit TG1 -T1

=== Line Config Setup ===

A
B
C
D

->
->
->
->

15:50:36 09/11/2007

Line Coding Setup
Low-Order Path Overhead Setup
TU11/TU12 Mapping Mode Setup
Customer Information Setup

<< Press ESC key to return to Main Menu or enter a command >>

5.39.3.1 T1 Line Coding Setup
The menu path for T1 Line Coding Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
C > Line Config Setup
A > Line Coding Setup
Press A from the Config Setup screen
Unit TG1 -T1

=== Line Config Setup ===

A
B
C
D

->
->
->
->

Line Coding Setup
Low-Order Path Overhead Setup
TU11/TU12 Mapping Mode Setup
Customer Information Setup

<< Press ESC key to return to Main Menu or enter a command >>

155

15:50:36 09/11/2007

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS
The Line Coding Setup screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to each
field. Use the Tab key to scroll in your settings.
Line Code setting choices are: B8ZS (Bipolar with 8 Zeros Substitution) or AMI (Alternate
Mark Inversion)
Cable Length setting choices are: 0~133, 133~266, 266~399, 399~533, 533~655
Press the Enter key.
Unit TG 1 - T1
== = L ine Cod ing Se tup ===
ARRO W K EYS : CU RSO R M OVE, TA B/` : RO LL UP/ DOWN OP TIO NS

T1#
--01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16

C odi ng
- --- -B 8ZS
B 8ZS
B 8ZS
B 8ZS
B 8ZS
B 8ZS
B 8ZS
B 8ZS
B 8ZS
B 8ZS
B 8ZS
B 8ZS
B 8ZS
B 8ZS
B 8ZS
B 8ZS

12 :15 :40 09/ 11/ 2007

cab le leng th
--- --- ---- -5 33~ 655 ft
0 ~13 3ft
0 ~13 3ft
0 ~13 3ft
0 ~13 3ft
0 ~13 3ft
0 ~13 3ft
0 ~13 3ft
0 ~13 3ft
0 ~13 3ft
0 ~13 3ft
0 ~13 3ft
0 ~13 3ft
0 ~13 3ft
0 ~13 3ft
0 ~13 3ft

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to prev iou s m enu >>

A prompt will ask if you want to change the configuration. Press Y for Yes. You will be
returned to the unit menu. Press the Esc. key
>> Change configuration (Y/N)? (Note:to save,please use V-command)

You will be returned to the Unit Menu. Press E to return to the Main Menu. From the Main
Menu press V to save the change. The Store/Retrieve Configuration screen will appear. Use
the arrow key to move the asterisk to STORE. Press the Enter key.
O940 0SA

>> S ele ct ?

=== Stor e/R etr ieve Co nfi gura tio n== =

*ST ORE

15 :41 :57 09/ 03/ 2007

R ETR IEVE

The following prompt will appear. Press Y for Yes.
>> Store Current Configuration ? [Y/N]
A password prompt will appear. Key in your password. Press the Enter key.
==>> En ter pas swo rd :

The following message will appear briefly. This procedure is now complete.
===> Saving.......

156

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS
5.39.3.2 T1 Low-Order Path Overhead Setup
The menu path for T1 Low-Order Path Overhead Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
C > Line Config Setup
B > Low-Order Path Overhead Setup
Press B from the Config Setup screen.
Unit TG1 -T1

=== Line Config Setup ===

A
B
C
D

->
->
->
->

15:50:36 09/11/2007

Line Coding Setup
Low-Order Path Overhead Setup
TU11/TU12 Mapping Mode Setup
Customer Information Setup

<< Press ESC key to return to Main Menu or enter a command >>

The Low-Order Path Overhead Setup screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to
move the cursor to the T1# field. Key a setting from the range 1~16. Press the Enter key.
Unit TG 1 - T1
= == Low- Ord er Path Ov erh ead Set up ===
12 :26 :02 09/ 11/ 2007
ARRO W K EYS : CU RSO R M OVE, Pl eas e In put : 1 ~16, BA CKS PACE to ed it
T1# : 0 1

The Low-Order Path Overhead Setup screen will appear. Use the Tab key to move the
cursor to the various fields. Use the Tab key to scroll in your settings.
Note: Some settings must be keyed in.
Table 5-35 Low-Order Path Overhead Settings
Field

Setting Options

Default Setting

J2_LENf

NULL, 16-BYTE (NULL padding), 16BYTE (SPACE padding)
Key in your message
Key in your message
Key in your message
Range 0~7
Fixed

NULL

Expected_J2_MSG
TX_J2_MSG
RX_J2_MSG
LP-EPSL
Rx-PSL

2

Note: Setting fields vary depending on the setting you choose for J2_LEN.
This sample screen is for a NULL setting.
Unit TG1 -T1
=== Low-Order Path Overhead Setup ===
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB/`: ROLL UP/DOWN OPTIONS
T1# : 01

J2_LEN : NULL

LP-EPSL : 2
Rx-PSL : 0

( Asynchronous )
( Unequipped )

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

157

12:26:02 09/11/2007

Note

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS
This is a sample screen for 16-BYTE.
Unit TG1 -T1
=== Low-Order Path Overhead Setup ===
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB/`: ROLL UP/DOWN OPTIONS
T1# : 01

J2_LEN
Expected_J2_MSG
TX_J2_MSG
RX_J2_MSG

17:28:23 12/02/2009

: 16-BYTE (NULL padding)
:
:
:

LP-EPSL : 2
Rx-PSL : 3

( Asynchronous )
( Bit Synchronous )

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

Press the Enter key after selecting your settings.
A prompt will ask if you want to change the configuration. Press Y for Yes. You will be
returned to the unit menu. Press the Esc. key
>> Change configuration (Y/N)? (Note:to save,please use V-command)
You will be returned to the Unit Menu. Press E to return to the Main Menu. From the Main
Menu press V to save the change. The Store/Retrieve Configuration screen will appear. Use
the arrow key to move the asterisk to STORE. Press the Enter key.
O940 0SA

>> S ele ct ?

= ==S tore /Re tri eve Con fig urat ion ===

*ST ORE

15: 41: 57 0 9/0 3/2 007

R ETR IEVE

The following prompt will appear. Press Y for Yes.
>> Store Current Configuration ? [Y/N]
A password prompt will appear. Key in your password. Press the Enter key.
==>> En ter pas swo rd :

The following message will appear briefly. This procedure is now complete.
===> Saving.......
5.39.3.3 TU11/TU12 Mapping Mode Setup
The menu path for TU11/TU12 Mapping Mode Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
C > Line Config Setup
C > TU11/TU12 Mapping Mode Setup

158

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS
Press C from the Config Setup screen.
Unit TG1 -T1

=== Line Config Setup ===

A
B
C
D

->
->
->
->

15:50:36 09/11/2007

Line Coding Setup
Low-Order Path Overhead Setup
TU11/TU12 Mapping Mode Setup
Customer Information Setup

<< Press ESC key to return to Main Menu or enter a command >>

The TU11/TU12 Mapping Mode Setup screen will appear. Use the Tab key to scroll in
your setting for the XC Granularity field. Setting choices are TU11, TU12. Press the Enter
key.
Unit TG 1 - T1
=== TU 11/ TU12 Ma ppi ng M ode Se tup ===
09/1 1/2 007
ARRO W K EYS : CU RSO R M OVE, TA B/` : RO LL UP/ DOWN OP TIO NS
XC G ran ula rity

1 5:57 :42

: T U11

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to prev iou s m enu >>

A prompt will ask if you want to change the configuration. Press Y for Yes. You will be
returned to the unit menu. Press the Esc. key
>> Change configuration (Y/N)? (Note:to save,please use V-command)

You will be returned to the Unit Menu. Press E to return to the Main Menu. From the Main
Menu press V to save the change. The Store/Retrieve Configuration screen will appear. Use
the arrow key to move the asterisk to STORE. Press the Enter key.
O940 0SA

>> S ele ct ?

=== Stor e/R etr ieve Co nfi gura tio n== =

*ST ORE

15 :41 :57 09/ 03/ 2007

R ETR IEVE

The following prompt will appear. Press Y for Yes.
>> Store Current Configuration ? [Y/N]
A password prompt will appear. Key in your password. Press the Enter key.
==>> En ter pas swo rd :

The following message will appear briefly. This procedure is now complete.
===> Saving.......

159

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS

5.39.3.4 T1 Customer Information Setup
The menu path for T1 Customer Information Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
C > Line Config Setup
D > Customer Information Setup
Press D from the Config Setup screen.
Unit TG1 -T1

=== Line Config Setup ===

A
B
C
D

->
->
->
->

15:50:36 09/11/2007

Line Coding Setup
Low-Order Path Overhead Setup
TU11/TU12 Mapping Mode Setup
Customer Information Setup

<< Press ESC key to return to Main Menu or enter a command >>

The Customer Information Setup screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to move
the cursor to each T1# field. Key in your customer information. Press the Enter key.
Unit TG 1 - T1
== = Cu sto mer Inf orm ati on S etu p = ==
12 :56 :55 09/ 11/ 2007
ARRO W K EYS : CU RSO R M OVE, BA CKS PACE to ed it, ESC to abo rt

T1#
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16

Cus tome r I nfo rmat ion
T1- Line ___ ___ ____ ___
T1- Line
T1- Line
T1- Line
T1- Line
T1- Line
T1- Line
T1- Line
T1- Line
T1- Line
T1- Line
T1- Line
T1- Line
T1- Line
T1- Line
T1- Line

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to prev iou s m enu >>

A prompt will ask if you want to change the configuration. Press Y for Yes. You will be
returned to the unit menu. Press the Esc. key
>> Change configuration (Y/N)? (Note:to save,please use V-command)
You will be returned to the Unit Menu. Press E to return to the Main Menu. From the Main
Menu press V to save the change. The Store/Retrieve Configuration screen will appear. Use
the arrow key to move the asterisk to STORE. Press the Enter key.
O940 0SA

>> S ele ct ?

=== Stor e/R etr ieve Co nfi gura tio n== =

*ST ORE

R ETR IEVE

160

15 :41 :57 09/ 03/ 2007

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS
The following prompt will appear. Press Y for Yes.
>> Store Current Configuration ? [Y/N]
A password prompt will appear. Key in your password. Press the Enter key.
==>> En ter pas swo rd :

The following message will appear briefly. This procedure is now complete.
===> Saving.......
5.39.4 Unit Diagnostics Setup
The menu path for T1 Unit Diagnostics Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
G > Unit Diagnostics Setup
Press G from the Unit Menu.
Unit TG 1 - T1

=== Un it M enu == =

1 3:0 0:1 4 09 /11 /20 07

HW V ers ion : D

[DIS PLA Y]
N -> Li ne Impe dan ce Disp lay
D -> Li ne Conf ig Dis play
S -> Un it Diag nos tic s Di spl ay
H -> E1 /T1 SNC P S tat us
A -> Cu rre nt A lar m S tatu s
P -> Un it Perf orm anc e

[SET UP]
T -> E1 /T1 Mod e S etu p
C -> Li ne Conf ig Set up
G -> Un it Diag nos tic s Se tup
K -> SN CP User Co mma nd
M -> Un it Alar m S etu p
R -> Pe rfo rman ce Set up/C lea r

[LOG ]
F -> Lo g O ff
O -> Lo g O n
U -> Ch oos e a Uni t
E -> Re tur n to Ma in Menu

[MIS C]
X -> Cl ear Uni t A lar m Qu eue
W -> Un it Load De fau lt

>>SP ACE ba r to re fre sh o r e nte r a com man d == =>

The Unit Diagnostics Setup screen will appear.
Unit TG 1 - T1

=== Uni t D iag nost ics Se tup ===

A -> C han nel Loo pba ck Setu p
B -> U nit Di agno sti cs Setu p

5.39.4.1 Channel Loopback Setup
The menu path for T1 Channel Loopback Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
G > Unit Diagnostics Setup
A > Channel Loopback Setup
Press A from the Unit Diagnostics Setup screen.

161

1 2:59 :37 09 /11/ 200 7

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS
Unit TG 1 - T1

== = Un it Dia gnos tic s S etup == =

12:5 9:3 7 0 9/11 /20 07

A -> C han nel Loo pba ck Setu p
B -> U nit Di agno sti cs Setu p

The Channel Loopback Test screen will appear. All setting choices are displayed on the
screen. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the selection you want for a particular field.
Then press the Enter key. Repeat this process for each setting you wish to make.
Note: The Loopback Timer is set up separately using the O9400S main Main Menu. Timer
setup is a very simple procedure. The menu path is as follows:
O > Logon
S > System Config Setup
C > Loopback Timer setup
Unit TG 1 - T1

=== Ch ann el L oop bac k Te st ===

1 3:0 1:20 09 /11 /200 7

Loop bac k T imer : 000 060 sec .
Unit
T1#
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16

*O FF

TO- ALL -LI NE

*O FF
*O FF
*O FF
*O FF
*O FF
*O FF
*O FF
*O FF
*O FF
*O FF
*O FF
*O FF
*O FF
*O FF
*O FF
*O FF

TO- OPT ICA L-LI NE
TO- OPT ICA L-LI NE
TO- OPT ICA L-LI NE
TO- OPT ICA L-LI NE
TO- OPT ICA L-LI NE
TO- OPT ICA L-LI NE
TO- OPT ICA L-LI NE
TO- OPT ICA L-LI NE
TO- OPT ICA L-LI NE
TO- OPT ICA L-LI NE
TO- OPT ICA L-LI NE
TO- OPT ICA L-LI NE
TO- OPT ICA L-LI NE
TO- OPT ICA L-LI NE
TO- OPT ICA L-LI NE
TO- OPT ICA L-LI NE

TO -LIN E
TO -LIN E
TO -LIN E
TO -LIN E
TO -LIN E
TO -LIN E
TO -LIN E
TO -LIN E
TO -LIN E
TO -LIN E
TO -LIN E
TO -LIN E
TO -LIN E
TO -LIN E
TO -LIN E
TO -LIN E

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to prev iou s m enu >>

This procedure is complete. Press the Esc key twice to return to the Unit Menu.
5.39.4.2 Unit Diagnostics Setup
The menu path for T1 Channel Loopback Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
G > Unit Diagnostics Setup
B > Unit Diagnostics Setup
Press B from the Unit Diagnostics Setup screen.
Unit TG 1 - T1

== = Un it Dia gnos tic s S etup == =

A -> C han nel Loo pba ck Setu p
B -> U nit Di agno sti cs Setu p

162

12:5 9:3 7 0 9/11 /20 07

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS
The Unit Diagnostics screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the T1#
field. Use the Tab key to scroll in a setting. The range is 1~16. Press the Enter key.
Unit TG 1 - T1
=== Un it D iag nos tics == =
1 3:0 9:42 09 /11 /200 7
ARRO W K EYS : CU RSO R M OVE, Pl eas e In put : 1 ~16, BA CKS PACE to ed it
Sen d T est Pat ter n t o == >
T1 # :

01

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to prev iou s m enu >>

An expanded screen will appear. All setting choices are displayed on the screen. Use the
arrow keys to move the cursor to the selection you want for a particular field. Then press the
Enter key.
Unit TG 1 - T1
=== Un it D iag nos tics == =
ARRO W K EYS : C URS OR MOVE , ENT ER K EY : I TEM SEL ECT

1 3:0 9:42 09 /11 /200 7

Sen d T est Pat ter n t o == >
T1 # :

01

Dire cti on

: *O pti cal- Lin e

TEST pa tte rn : *O FF

Trib uta ry- Line

2^1 5-1

2^ 20- 1

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to prev iou s m enu >>

A further screen will display the Test Pattern information.
Unit TG 1 - T1
=== Un it D iag nos tics == =
ARRO W K EYS : C URS OR MOVE , ENT ER K EY : I TEM SEL ECT

1 3:0 9:42 09 /11 /200 7

Sen d T est Pat ter n t o == >
T1 # :

01

Dire cti on

:

O pti cal- Lin e * Trib uta ry- Line

TEST pa tte rn :

S YNC
ES
UAS
To tal

St ate
Co unt
Co unt
Co unt

O FF

=
=
=
=

* 2^1 5-1

UN SYNC
0
6
6

2^ 20- 1

ES Rat io =
UAS Rat io =

0. 0%
1 00. 0%

This procedure is complete. Press the Esc key to return to the previous menu if you wish to
set up a different loopback.
5.39.5 SNCP USER Command
The menu path for T1 SNCP USER Command Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
K > SNCP USER Command

163

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS
Press K from the Unit Menu.
Unit TG 1 - T1

= == Unit Me nu ===

13 :13 :27 09/ 11/ 2007

HW V ers ion : D

[DIS PLA Y]
N -> Li ne Impe dan ce Disp lay
D -> Li ne Conf ig Dis play
S -> Un it Diag nos tic s Di spl ay
H -> E1 /T1 SNC P S tat us
A -> Cu rre nt A lar m S tatu s
P -> Un it Perf orm anc e

[SET UP]
T -> E1 /T1 Mod e S etu p
C -> Li ne Conf ig Set up
G -> Un it Diag nos tic s Se tup
K -> SN CP User Co mma nd
M -> Un it Alar m S etu p
R -> Pe rfo rman ce Set up/C lea r

[LOG ]
F -> Lo g O ff
O -> Lo g O n
U -> Ch oos e a Uni t
E -> Re tur n to Ma in Menu

[MIS C]
X -> Cl ear Uni t A lar m Qu eue
W -> Un it Load De fau lt

>>SP ACE ba r to re fre sh o r e nte r a com man d == =>

The SNCP User Command screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to
each field. Use the Tab key to scroll in your settings.
Port setting: range is 1~16.
Command settings are listed in the table below. Some commands have higher priorities than
others. If the command you select has a lower priority than the existing setting, your selection
will be rejected. If you want to use a setting with a lower priority, use the clear command first.
This will clear the existing setting and allow you to choose a lower priority setting.
Note: The command field settings can only be changed if the cross-connect is in PP-AD
mode.
System mode type must be ADM (SNCP).
Table 5-36 SNCP Command Settings
Priority

SNCP Command Settings
Setting
Description

1 (high)
2
3
3
4 (low)
4 (low)

Clear
Lock-out
FS-Ea
FS-Wa
MS-Ea
MS-Wa

Clear any existing setting
Lock out protection
Force switch to East side(Ea)
Force switch to West side (Wa)
Manual switch to East side (Ea)
Manual switch to West side (Wa)

Press the Enter key.
Unit TG1 -T1
=== SNCP User Command ===
13:14:32 09/11/2007
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, Please Input: 1~16, BACKSPACE to edit
Port
:
Command :

01
NONE

Note :
FS = Force Switch
MS = Manual Switch

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

164

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS
A prompt will ask if you are sure. Press Y for yes.
>>Ar e y ou sure (Y /N) ?

A new prompt will appear.
SNCP Us er Comm and OK .

This procedure is complete. Press the ESC key twice to return to the Unit Menu.
5.39.6 T1 Unit Alarm Setup
The menu path for T1 Unit Alarm Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
M > Unit Alarm Setup
Press M from the Unit Menu.
Unit TG 1 - T1

= == Unit Me nu ===

13 :13 :27 09/ 11/ 2007

HW V ers ion : D

[DIS PLA Y]
N -> Li ne Impe dan ce Disp lay
D -> Li ne Conf ig Dis play
S -> Un it Diag nos tic s Di spl ay
H -> E1 /T1 SNC P S tat us
A -> Cu rre nt A lar m S tatu s
P -> Un it Perf orm anc e

[SET UP]
T -> E1 /T1 Mod e S etu p
C -> Li ne Conf ig Set up
G -> Un it Diag nos tic s Se tup
K -> SN CP User Co mma nd
M -> Un it Alar m S etu p
R -> Pe rfo rman ce Set up/C lea r

[LOG ]
F -> Lo g O ff
O -> Lo g O n
U -> Ch oos e a Uni t
E -> Re tur n to Ma in Menu

[MIS C]
X -> Cl ear Uni t A lar m Qu eue
W -> Un it Load De fau lt

>>SP ACE ba r to re fre sh o r e nte r a com man d == =>

The Unit Alarm Setup screen will appear.
Unit TG 1 - T1

= == Uni t Al arm Se tup ===

13 :26 :26 09/ 11/ 2007

A -> U nit Al arm Mas k/R elay Se tup
B -> U nit Al arm Sev eri ty S etu p

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to Main Me nu or e nte r a com man d > >

5.39.6.1 T1 Unit Alarm Mask/Relay Setup
The menu path for T1 Unit Alarm Mask/Relay Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
M > Unit Alarm Setup
A > Unit Alarm Mask/Relay Setup
Press A from the Unit Alarm Setup menu. The Unit Alarm setup screen will appear. To
select a port move the cursor to the T1# field. Use the Tab key to scroll in a port number.
Setting range is 1~16. Press the Enter key.

165

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS
Unit TG 1 - T1
= == Uni t Al arm Se tup ===
13 :28 :22 09/ 11/ 2007
ARRO W K EYS : CU RSO R M OVE, Pl eas e In put : 1 ~16, BA CKS PACE to ed it
T1# : 0 1

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to prev iou s m enu >>

An expanded screen will appear. Use the Tab key to scroll in an Alarm and Relay setting for
each alarm type. If you wish to copy the same configuration to different channels, key in the
channel settings. Press the Enter key.
Unit TG1 -T1
=== Unit Alarm Mask/Relay Setup ===
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB/`: ROLL UP/DOWN OPTIONS
T1# : 01

Type
-------TU-LOP
TU-AIS
LP-TIM
LP-UNEQ
LP-PLM
LP-RDI-S
LP-RDI-C
LP-RDI-P
LP-V5-BI
LP-V5-REI
T1-LOS
T1-AIS
T1-UAS

Alarm
-------ENABLED
ENABLED
ENABLED
ENABLED
ENABLED
ENABLED
ENABLED
ENABLED
ENABLED
ENABLED
ENABLED
ENABLED
ENABLED

Relay
-------DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED

10:07:56 04/16/2009

Copy the same config. From Chan#01 to Chan#01

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

A prompt will ask if you want to change the configuration. Press Y for Yes. You will be
returned to the unit menu. Press the Esc. key
>> Change configuration (Y/N)? (Note:to save,please use V-command)
You will be returned to the Unit Menu. Press E to return to the Main Menu. From the Main
Menu press V to save the change. The Store/Retrieve Configuration screen will appear. Use
the arrow key to move the asterisk to STORE. Press the Enter key.
O940 0SA

>> S ele ct ?

== =Sto re/ Ret riev e C onf igur ati on= ==

*ST ORE

1 5:4 1:57 09 /03 /200 7

R ETR IEVE

The following prompt will appear. Press Y for Yes.
>> Store Current Configuration ? [Y/N]
A password prompt will appear. Key in your password. Press the Enter key.
==>> En ter pas swo rd :

The following message will appear briefly. This procedure is now complete.
===> Saving.......

166

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS
5.39.6.2 Unit Alarm Severity Setup
The menu path for T1 Unit Alarm Mask/Relay Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
M > Unit Alarm Setup
B > Unit Alarm Severity Setup
Press B from the Unit Alarm Setup menu. The Unit Alarm Severity Setup screen will appear.
Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to each alarm field. Use the Tab key to scroll in a
setting. Settings are: INFO, MINR, MAJR, CRIT. Press the Enter key.
Unit TG1 -T1
=== Unit Alarm Severity Setup ===
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB/`: ROLL UP/DOWN OPTIONS

Type
-------TU-LOP
TU-AIS
LP-TIM
LP-UNEQ
LP-PLM
LP-RDI-S
LP-RDI-C
LP-RDI-P
LP-V5-BI
LP-V5-REI
T1-LOS
T1-AIS
T1-UAS

Severity
-------ENABLED
ENABLED
ENABLED
ENABLED
ENABLED
ENABLED
ENABLED
ENABLED
ENABLED
ENABLED
ENABLED
ENABLED
ENABLED

10:11:25 04/16/2009

Copy the same config. From Chan#01 to Chan#01

(CRIT:CRITICAL, MAJR:MAJOR, MINR:MINOR, INFO:INFORM)
<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

A prompt will ask if you want to change the configuration. Press Y for Yes. You will be
returned to the unit menu. Press the Esc. key
>> Change configuration (Y/N)? (Note:to save,please use V-command)
You will be returned to the Unit Menu. Press E to return to the Main Menu. From the Main
Menu press V to save the change. The Store/Retrieve Configuration screen will appear. Use
the arrow key to move the asterisk to STORE. Press the Enter key.
O940 0SA

>> S ele ct ?

== =Sto re/ Ret riev e C onf igur ati on= ==

*ST ORE

1 5:4 1:57 09 /03 /200 7

R ETR IEVE

The following prompt will appear. Press Y for Yes.
>> Store Current Configuration ? [Y/N]
A password prompt will appear. Key in your password. Press the Enter key.
==>> En ter pas swo rd :

The following message will appear briefly. This procedure is now complete.
===> Saving.......

167

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS
5.39.7 Performance Setup/Clear
The menu path for T1 /Performance Setup/Clear is as follows:
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
R > Performance Setup/Clear
Press R from the Unit Menu.
Unit TG 1 - T1

=== Uni t M enu ===

1 3:1 3:27 09 /11 /200 7

HW V ers ion : D

[DIS PLA Y]
N -> Li ne Impe dan ce Disp lay
D -> Li ne Conf ig Dis play
S -> Un it Diag nos tic s Di spl ay
H -> E1 /T1 SNC P S tat us
A -> Cu rre nt A lar m S tatu s
P -> Un it Perf orm anc e

[SET UP]
T -> E1 /T1 Mod e S etu p
C -> Li ne Conf ig Set up
G -> Un it Diag nos tic s Se tup
K -> SN CP User Co mma nd
M -> Un it Alar m S etu p
R -> Pe rfo rman ce Set up/C lea r

[LOG ]
F -> Lo g O ff
O -> Lo g O n
U -> Ch oos e a Uni t
E -> Re tur n to Ma in Menu

[MIS C]
X -> Cl ear Uni t A lar m Qu eue
W -> Un it Load De fau lt

>>SP ACE ba r to re fre sh o r e nte r a com man d == =>

The SDH/SONET Performance Setup/Clear screen will appear.
Unit TG 1 - E1

== = S DH/S ONE T P erfo rma nce Set up/ Cle ar = ==1 1:1 2:51 09 /04 /200 7

A -> Clear Performance Data
B -> Performance Threshold Setup

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to Main Me nu or e nte r a com man d > >

5.39.7.1 Clear Performance Data
The menu path for E1 Clear Performance Data setup is as follows:
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
R > Performance Setup/Clear
A > Clear Performance Data
Press A from the SDH/SONET Performance Setup/Clear menu.
Unit TG 1 - E1

== = S DH/S ONE T P erfo rma nce Set up/ Cle ar = ==1 1:1 2:51 09 /04 /200 7

A -> Clear Performance Data
B -> Performance Threshold Setup

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to Main Me nu or e nte r a com man d > >

The Clear Performance Data screen will appear. Press Y to clear performance data.

168

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS
Unit TG 1 - T1

=== Cle ar Perf orm anc e Da ta ===

13 :33 :55 09/ 11/ 2007

>> C lea r p erfo rma nce dat a - ar e yo u s ure [Y/ N] ?

This procedure is complete.
5.39.7.2 Unit Performance TCA Setup
The menu path for T1 Unit Performance TCA Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
R > Performance Setup/Clear
B > Unit Performance TCA Setup
Press B from the SDH/SONET Performance Setup/Clear menu.
Unit TG 1 - E1

=== SD H/SO NET Pe rfor man ce Setu p/C lea r == =11 :12 :51 09/ 04/ 2007

A -> Clear Performance Data
B -> Performance Threshold Setup

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to Main Me nu or e nte r a com man d > >

The Unit Performance TCA Setup screen will appear. Use the Arrow keys to move the cursor
to each field.
Note: Some settings must be keyed in.
Press the Enter key after you have finished making all of your settings for this screen.

Table 5-37 Unit Performance TCA Settings
Field

Setting Options

Default Setting

Alarm
Severity
Threshold

ENABLED, DISABLED
INFO, MINR, MAJR, CRIT
Range: 1~9999

ENABLED
MINR
600, 600, 1544

Note

Unit TG 1 - T1 = == Per form anc e T hres hol d C ross Al arm Set up 13: 36:3 4 0 9/1 1/20 07
ARRO W K EYS : CU RSO R M OVE, TA B/` : RO LL UP/ DOWN OP TIO NS

Ty pe
-- --- --LP -BI P
LP -RE I
Li ne BPV

A lar m
- --- ---E NAB LED
E NAB LED
E NAB LED

Se ver ity
-- --- --MI NR
MI NR
MI NR

Thr esh old
--- --- --060 0
060 0
154 4

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to prev iou s m enu >>

A prompt will ask if you want to change the configuration. Press Y for Yes. You will be
returned to the unit menu. Press the Esc. key
>> C han ge conf igu rat ion (Y/ N)? (No te: to save ,pl eas e us e V -co mman d)

169

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS
You will be returned to the Unit Menu. Press E to return to the Main Menu. From the Main
Menu press V to save the change. The Store/Retrieve Configuration screen will appear. Use
the arrow key to move the asterisk to STORE. Press the Enter key.
O940 0SA

>> S ele ct ?

== =Sto re/ Ret riev e C onf igur ati on= ==

*ST ORE

1 5:4 1:57 09 /03 /200 7

R ETR IEVE

The following prompt will appear. Press Y for Yes.
>> Store Current Configuration ? [Y/N]

A password prompt will appear. Key in your password. Press the Enter key.
==>> En ter pas swo rd :

The following message will appear briefly. This procedure is now complete.
===> Saving.......

5.39.8 T1 Performance Report
5.39.8.1 1-Hour Performance Report
The full menu path for T1 one hour performance report is as follows:
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
P > Unit Performance
1 > 1-Hour Performance
Press Enter
O9400SA
=== 1-Hour Performance ===
LP-BIP(V5)
-- Valid Seconds in Current 15-Min Interval : 0 seconds

Current 15-Min Interval
1st Nearest 15-Min Interval
2nd Nearest 15-Min Interval
3rd Nearest 15-Min Interval
4rd Nearest 15-Min Interval

:
:
:
:
:

(EB)
0
---------------------

(BBE)
0
---------------------

(ES)
0
---------------------

10:05:09 11/20/2009

(BES)
0
---------------------

<< Press TAB key to show Statistics Report >>
<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>

5.39.8.2 24-Hour Performance Report
The full menu path for T1 24 hour performance report is as follows:
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
P > Unit Performance
2 > 24-Hour Performance
Press Enter

170

(SES)
0
---------------------

(UAS)
0
---------------------

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS

O9400SA
=== 24-Hour Performance ===
10:05:49 11/20/2009
EB LP-BIP(V5)
-- Valid Seconds in Current 15-Min Interval : 0 seconds
-- Valid 15-Min Intervals in Current 24-Hour Interval: 0
(EB)
(BBE)
(ES)
(BES)
(SES)
(UAS)
Current 15-Min Interval
: 0
0
0
0
0
0
Current Day
: ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ------- EB
01-08
09-16
17-24
25-32
33-40
41-48
49-56
57-64
65-72
73-80
81-88
89-96

, Last 96
(09:45) >
(07:45) >
(05:45) >
(03:45) >
(01:45) >
(23:45) >
(21:45) >
(19:45) >
(17:45) >
(15:45) >
(13:45) >
(11:45) >

15-Min Interval :
------ ------ ----------- ------ ----------- ------ ----------- ------ ----------- ------ ----------- ------ ----------- ------ ----------- ------ ----------- ------ ----------- ------ ----------- ------ ----------- ------ ------

-------------------------------------------------------------

-------------------------------------------------------------

-------------------------------------------------------------

-------------------------------------------------------------

-------------------------------------------------------------

<< Press TAB key to show Statistics Report >>
<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>

5.39.8.3 7-Day Performance
The full menu path for T1 7 Day performance report is as follows:
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
P > Unit Performance
1 > 1-Hour Performance
Press Enter
O9400SA
=== 7-Day Performance ===
LP-BIP(V5)
-- Valid 15-Min Intervals in Current Day : 0

Current Day
11/19/2009
11/18/2009
11/17/2009
11/16/2009
11/15/2009
11/14/2009
11/13/2009

:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:

(EB)
-----------------------------------------

(BBE)
-----------------------------------------

(ES)
-----------------------------------------

10:06:11 11/20/2009

(BES)
-----------------------------------------

(SES)
-----------------------------------------

(UAS)
-----------------------------------------

<< Press TAB key to show Statistics Report >>
<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>

Note: The maximum value for line ES, BES, SES, UAS, and BPV is 65,535 respectively.

171

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS

5.40 E3 Setup
Note: E3 signal can only be mapped into AU4/TU3 format.
5.40.1 Choose a Unit
To setup E3 you must first choose a unit. The menu path is as follows:
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
A screen by screen setup example is shown below. Press U.
O9400SA

=== Main Menu ===

14:31:07 09/03/2007

Serial Number
: 000031
Hardware Version: D
Software Version: V1.01.01 07/10/2007

Connect Port: SUPV_PORT
Start Time : 13:24:48 09/03/2007

[DISPLAY]
C -> System Config Display
I -> System Information
B -> SDH/SONET Config Display
Q -> Alarm Queue
T -> System Log Information
A -> SDH/SONET Alarm Status
P -> SDH/SONET Performance Statistics

[SETUP]
S -> System Config Setup
D -> SDH/SONET Config Setup
M -> Alarm Setup
V -> Store/Retrieve Backup Config
L -> File Transfer
R -> Performance Setup/Clear

[LOG]
F -> Log Off
O -> Log On
U -> Choose a Unit

[MISC]
Y -> Alarm Cut Off
Z -> System Reset
X -> Clear Alarm Queue
W -> Return to Default

>>SPACE bar to refresh or enter a command ===>

A prompt will ask you to press the Tab key to select a unit. TG2 is the unit you want for E3/T3.
Press the Enter key.
==>> Pr ess Tab ke y t o se lec t t he u nit : T G2

A unit menu will appear. Note that the label “Unit TG2 –E3” at the top of the sample screen
below identifies the unit as an E3 unit which is the default setting of Unit TG2.
U Unit TG2 -E3

=== Unit Menu ===

13:53:53 10/19/2009

HW Version
: A
CPLD Version : Ver 1

[DISPLAY]
N -> E3/T3 Mode Display
D -> Line Config Display
S -> Unit Diagnostics Display
H -> E3/T3 SNCP Status
A -> Current Alarm Status
P -> Unit Performance

[SETUP]
T -> E3/T3 Mode Setup
C -> Line Config Setup
G -> Unit Diagnostics Setup
K -> SNCP User Command
M -> Unit Alarm Setup
R -> Performance Setup/Clear

[LOG]
F -> Log Off
O -> Log On
U -> Choose a Unit
E -> Return to Main Menu

[MISC]
X -> Clear Unit Alarm History
W -> Unit Load Default

>>SPACE bar to refresh or enter a command ===>

172

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS
To change to E3 or T3, press T from the unit menu. The E3/T3 Mode Setup screen will
appear. Use the Tab key to scroll in a E3/T3 mode setting. The choices are: E3 (HDB3)
or T3 (B3ZS). Press the Enter key. A prompt will ask if you want to change the configuration.
Press Y for Yes. You will be returned to the unit menu. Press the Esc. key.
nit TG2 -E 3
= == E3/T 3 M ode Set up ===
ARRO W K EYS : CU RSO R M OVE, TA B/` : RO LL UP/ DOWN OP TIO NS

E3/T 3 M ode

13 :55: 30 10/ 19/2 009

: E3( HDB3 )

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to prev iou s m enu >>

You will be returned to the Unit Menu. Press E to return to the Main Menu. From the Main
Menu press V to save the change. The Store/Retrieve Configuration screen will appear. Use
the arrow key to move the asterisk to STORE. Press the Enter key.
O940 0SA

>> S ele ct ?

== =Sto re/ Ret riev e C onf igur ati on= ==

*ST ORE

1 5:4 1:57 09 /03 /200 7

R ETR IEVE

The following prompt will appear. Press Y for Yes.
>> Store Current Configuration ? [Y/N]

A password prompt will appear. Key in your password. Press the Enter key.
==>> En ter pas swo rd :

The following message will appear briefly. This procedure is now complete.
===> Saving.......

5.40.2 E3/T3 Mode Setup
The menu path for E3/T3 Mode Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
T > E3/T3 Mode Setup
The setup procedure has already been fully explained in Section 5.35.1, above.
5.40.3 Line Config Setup
The menu path for E3 Line Config Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
C > Line Config Setup

173

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS
Press C from the Unit Menu.
Unit TG2 -E3

=== Unit Menu ===

11:13:30 10/20/2009

HW Version
: A
CPLD Version : Ver 1

[DISPLAY]
N -> E3/T3 Mode Display
D -> Line Config. Display
S -> Unit Diagnostics Display
H -> E3/T3 SNCP Status
A -> Current Alarm Status
P -> Unit Performance

[SETUP]
T -> E3/T3 Mode Setup
C -> Line Config. Setup
G -> Unit Diagnostics Setup
K -> SNCP User Command
M -> Unit Alarm Setup
R -> Performance Setup/Clear

[LOG]
F -> Log Off
O -> Log On
U -> Choose a Unit
E -> Return to Main Menu

[MISC]
X -> Clear Unit Alarm History
W -> Unit Load Default

>>SPACE bar to refresh or enter a command ===>

The Config Setup menu screen will appear.
Unit TG2 -E3

=== Line Config. Setup ===

14:07:12 01/04/2010

A -> SDH/SONET Path Overhead Setup
B -> Customer Information Setup

<< Press ESC key to return to Main Menu or enter a command >>

5.40.3.1 SDH/SONET Path Overhead Setup
The menu path for SDH/SONET Path Overhead Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
C > Line Config Setup
A > SDH/SONET Path Overhead Setup
Press A from the Config Setup screen.
Unit TG 2 - E3
01/0 4/2 010

= == Line Co nfi g. S etu p = ==

1 4:07 :12

A -> S DH/ SON ET P ath Ov erhe ad Set up
B -> C ust ome r In for mat ion Set up

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to Main Me nu or e nte r a com man d > >

The SDH/SONET Path Overhead Setup screen wll appear. Key in a setting from the range
1~3. Press the Enter key.

174

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS
Unit TG 2 - E3
=== SDH /SO NET Pat h O verh ead Se tup ===
1 4:02 :51
12/1 6/2 009
ARRO W K EYS : CU RSO R M OVE, Pl eas e In put : 1 ~3, BAC KSP ACE to edi t
E3# : 1 _

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to prev iou s m enu >>

An expanded setup screen will appear. Key in your settings and press the Enter key.

Table 5-38 SDH/SONET Path Overhead Settings
Field

Setting Options

Default Setting

J2_LEN

NULL, 1-BYTE
16-BYTE (NULL padding),
16-BYTE (SPACE padding)
64-BYTE (NULL padding)
64-BYTE (SPACE padding)
Key in your message
Key in your message
Key in your message
Range 0~0xFF
Range 0~0xFF
Fixed

NULL

Expected_J2_MSG
TX_J2_MSG
RX_J2_MSG
TX_PSL
EPSL
RX-PSL

Note

0x4
0x4

Unit TG2 -E3
=== SDH/SONET Path Overhead Setup === 17:57:38 12/02/2009
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB/`: ROLL UP/DOWN OPTIONS
E3# : 01

J1_LEN
Expected_J1_MSG
TX_J1_MSG
RX_J1_MSG

: NULL
:
:
:

Tx_PSL : 0x4 ( Asynchronous mapping into Container-3 )
EPSL : 0x4 ( Asynchronous mapping into Container-3 )
Rx-PSL : 0x0 ( Unequipped )
<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>
<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

A prompt will ask if you want to change the configuration. Press Y for Yes. You will be
returned to the unit menu. Press the Esc. key
>> Change configuration (Y/N)? (Note:to save,please use V-command)

You will be returned to the Unit Menu. Press E to return to the Main Menu. From the Main
Menu press V to save the change. The Store/Retrieve Configuration screen will appear. Use
the arrow key to move the asterisk to STORE. Press the Enter key.
O940 0SA

>> S ele ct ?

=== Stor e/R etr ieve Co nfi gura tio n== =

*ST ORE

R ETR IEVE

The following prompt will appear. Press Y for Yes.
>> Store Current Configuration ? [Y/N]

175

15 :41 :57 09/ 03/ 2007

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS
A password prompt will appear. Key in your password. Press the Enter key.
==>> En ter pas swo rd :

The following message will appear briefly. This procedure is now complete.
===> Saving.......

5.40.3.2 E3 Customer Information Setup
The menu path for E3 Customer Information Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
C > Line Config Setup
C > Customer Information Setup
Press C from the Config Setup screen. The Config Setup screen will appear. Press B.
Unit TG2 -E3

=== Line Config. Setup ===

14:07:12 01/04/2010

A -> SDH/SONET Path Overhead Setup
B -> Customer Information Setup

<< Press ESC key to return to Main Menu or enter a command >>

The Customer Information Setup screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to move
the cursor to each E3# field. Key in your customer information. Press the Enter key.
Unit TG 2 - E3
=== Cu sto mer Inf orm atio n S etu p == =
ARRO W K EYS : CU RSO R M OVE, BA CKS PACE to ed it, ESC to abo rt

E3#
01
02
03

11 :47: 34 10/ 20/2 009

Cus tome r I nfo rmat ion
E3- Line ___ ___ ____ ___
E3- Line
E3- Line

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to prev iou s m enu >>

A prompt will ask if you want to change the configuration. Press Y for Yes. You will be
returned to the unit menu. Press the Esc. key
>> Change configuration (Y/N)? (Note:to save,please use V-command)

You will be returned to the Unit Menu. Press E to return to the Main Menu. From the Main
Menu press V to save the change. The Store/Retrieve Configuration screen will appear. Use
the arrow key to move the asterisk to STORE. Press the Enter key.
O940 0SA

>> S ele ct ?

=== Stor e/R etr ieve Co nfi gura tio n== =

*ST ORE

15 :41 :57 09/ 03/ 2007

R ETR IEVE

The following prompt will appear. Press Y for Yes.
>> Store Current Configuration ? [Y/N]

A password prompt will appear. Key in your password. Press the Enter key.
==>> En ter pas swo rd :

176

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS
The following message will appear briefly. This procedure is now complete.
===> Saving.......

5.40.4 Unit Diagnostics Setup
The menu path for E1 Unit Diagnostics Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
G > Unit Diagnostics Setup
Press G from the Unit Menu.
Unit TG2 -E3

=== Unit Menu ===

11:13:30 10/20/2009

HW Version
: A
CPLD Version : Ver 1

[DISPLAY]
N -> E3/T3 Mode Display
D -> Line Config. Display
S -> Unit Diagnostics Display
H -> E3/T3 SNCP Status
A -> Current Alarm Status
P -> Unit Performance

[SETUP]
T -> E3/T3 Mode Setup
C -> Line Config. Setup
G -> Unit Diagnostics Setup
K -> SNCP User Command
M -> Unit Alarm Setup
R -> Performance Setup/Clear

[LOG]
F -> Log Off
O -> Log On
U -> Choose a Unit
E -> Return to Main Menu

[MISC]
X -> Clear Unit Alarm History
W -> Unit Load Default

>>SPACE bar to refresh or enter a command ===>

The Unit Diagnostics Setup screen will appear.
Unit TG 2 - E3

=== Uni t D iagn ost ics Set up ===

12 :06 :56 10/ 20/ 200 9

A -> C han nel Loo pba ck Setu p
B -> U nit Di agno sti cs Setu p

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to Main Me nu or e nte r a com man d > >

5.40.4.1 Channel Loopback Setup
The menu path for E3 Channel Loopback Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
G > Unit Diagnostics Setup
A > Channel Loopback Setup
Press A from the Unit Diagnostics Setup screen.
Unit TG 2 - E3

=== Un it Diag nos tic s Se tup == =

1 2:0 6:5 6 10 /20 /20 09

A -> C han nel Loo pba ck Setu p
B -> U nit Di agno sti cs Setu p

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to Main Me nu or e nte r a com man d > >

177

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS
The Channel Loopback Test screen will appear. All setting choices are displayed on the
screen. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the selection you want for a particular
field. Then press the Enter key. Repeat this process for each setting you wish to make.
Note: The Loopback Timer is set up separately if you are using the O9400S-1US1 main Main
Menu. Timer setup is a very simple procedure. The menu path is as follows:
Unit TG 2 - E3

= == Cha nnel Lo opb ack Tes t = ==

12 :08: 01 10/ 20/2 009

Loop bac k T imer : 000 000 sec .
Unit
E3#
01
02
03

*O FF

TO- ALL -E3 T3-L INE

*O FF
*O FF
*O FF

TO- OPT ICA L-LI NE
TO- OPT ICA L-LI NE
TO- OPT ICA L-LI NE

TO -E3T 3-L INE
TO -E3T 3-L INE
TO -E3T 3-L INE

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to prev iou s m enu >>

This procedure is complete. Press the Esc key twice to return to the Unit Menu.
5.40.4.2 Unit Diagnostics Setup
The menu path for E3 Unit Diagnostics Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
G > Unit Diagnostics Setup
B > Unit Diagnostics Setup
Press B from the Unit Diagnostics Setup screen.
Unit TG 2 - E3

=== Uni t D iagn ost ics Set up ===

12 :06 :56 10/ 20/ 200 9

A -> C han nel Loo pba ck Setu p
B -> U nit Di agno sti cs Setu p

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to Main Me nu or e nte r a com man d > >

The Unit Diagnostics screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to
the E1# field. Use the Tab key to scroll in a setting. The range is 1~3. Press
the Enter key.
Unit TG 2 - E3
= == Uni t Di agn ost ics Set up ===
12 :13: 33 10/ 20/2 009
ARRO W K EYS : CU RSO R M OVE, Pl eas e In put : 1 ~3, BAC KSP ACE to edi t
Sen d T est Pat ter n t o == >
E3 # :

1_

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to prev iou s m enu >>

An expanded screen will appear. All setting choices are displayed on the screen.
Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the selection you want for a particular
field. Then press the Enter key.

178

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS
Unit TG 2 - E3
=== Un it D iag nos tics Se tup ===
10/2 0/2 009
ARRO W K EYS : C URS OR MOVE , ENT ER K EY : I TEM SEL ECT

1 2:13 :33

Sen d T est Pat ter n t o == >
E3 # :

1

Dire cti on

: *O pti cal- Lin e

TEST pa tte rn : *O FF

2^1 5-1

E3T3 -Li ne
2^ 23- 1

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to prev iou s m enu >>

A further screen will display the Test Pattern information.
Unit TG 2 - E3
= == Uni t Di agn ost ics Set up ===
ARRO W K EYS : C URS OR MOVE , ENT ER K EY : I TEM SEL ECT

12 :13: 33 10/ 20/2 009

Sen d T est Pat ter n t o == >
E3 # :

1

Dire cti on

: *O pti cal- Lin e

TEST pa tte rn : *O FF

2^1 5-1

E3T3 -Li ne
2^ 23- 1

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to prev iou s m enu >>

This procedure is complete. Press the Esc key to return to the previous menu if yo wish to
set up a different loopback.
5.40.5 SNCP USER Command
The menu path for E1 SNCP USER Command Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
K > SNCP USER Command
Press K from the Unit Menu.
Unit TG 2 - E3

=== Uni t M enu ===

1 2:16 :40 10 /20/ 200 9

HW V ers ion
: A
CPLD Ve rsi on : Ve r 1
[DIS PLA Y]
N -> E3 /T3 Mod e D isp lay
D -> Li ne Conf ig. Di spla y
S -> Un it Diag nos tic s Di spl ay
H -> E3 /T3 SNC P S tat us
A -> Cu rre nt A lar m S tatu s
P -> Un it Perf orm anc e

[SET UP]
T -> E3 /T3 Mod e S etu p
C -> Li ne Conf ig. Se tup
G -> Un it Diag nos tic s Se tup
K -> SN CP User Co mma nd
M -> Un it Alar m S etu p
R -> Pe rfo rman ce Set up/C lea r

[LOG ]
F -> Lo g O ff
O -> Lo g O n
U -> Ch oos e a Uni t
E -> Re tur n to Ma in Menu

[MIS C]
X -> Cl ear Uni t A lar m Hi sto ry
W -> Un it Load De fau lt

>>SP ACE ba r to re fre sh o r e nte r a com man d == =>

179

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS
The SNCP User Command screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to
each field. Use the Tab key to scroll in your settings. Press the Enter key.
Port setting: range is 1~3.
Command settings are listed in the table below. Some commands have higher priorities than
others. If the command you select has a lower priority than the existing setting, your selection
will be rejected. If you want to use a setting with a lower priority, use the clear command first.
This will clear the existing setting and allow you to choose a lower priority setting.
Note: The command field settings can only be changed if the cross-connect is in PP-AD
mode. System mode type must be ADM(SNCP).

Table 5-39 SNCP Command Settings
Priority
1 (high)
2
3
3
4 (low)
4 (low)

SNCP Command Settings
Setting
Description
Clear
Clear any existing setting
Lock-out
Lock out protection
FS-Ea
Force switch to East side(Ea)
FS-Wa
Force switch to West side (Wa)
MS-Ea
Manual switch to East side (Ea)
MS-Wa
Manual switch to West side (Wa)

Unit TG 2 - E3
== = S NCP Use r C omma nd ===
12 :17: 35 10/ 20/2 009
ARRO W K EYS : CU RSO R M OVE, Pl eas e In put : 1 ~3, BAC KSP ACE to edi t
Port
:
Comm and :

1_
FS-Wa

Note :
FS = Fo rce Sw itch
MS = Ma nua l S witc h

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to prev iou s m enu >>

A prompt will ask if you are sure. Press Y for yes.
>>Ar e y ou sure (Y /N) ?

A new prompt will appear.
SNCP User Command OK.

This procedure is complete. Press the ESC key twice to return to the Unit Menu.
5.40.6 E3 Unit Alarm Setup
The menu path for E3 Unit Alarm Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
M > Unit Alarm Setup

180

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS
Press M from the Unit Menu.
Unit TG 2 - E3

= == U nit Me nu = ==

12 :16: 40 10/ 20/2 009

HW V ers ion
: A
CPLD Ve rsi on : Ve r 1

[DIS PLA Y]
N -> E3 /T3 Mod e D isp lay
D -> Li ne Conf ig. Di spla y
S -> Un it Diag nos tic s Di spl ay
H -> E3 /T3 SNC P S tat us
A -> Cu rre nt A lar m S tatu s
P -> Un it Perf orm anc e

[SET UP]
T -> E3 /T3 Mod e S etu p
C -> Li ne Conf ig. Se tup
G -> Un it Diag nos tic s Se tup
K -> SN CP User Co mma nd
M -> Un it Alar m S etu p
R -> Pe rfo rman ce Set up/C lea r

[LOG ]
F -> Lo g O ff
O -> Lo g O n
U -> Ch oos e a Uni t
E -> Re tur n to Ma in Menu

[MIS C]
X -> Cl ear Uni t A lar m Hi sto ry
W -> Un it Load De fau lt

>>SP ACE ba r to re fre sh o r e nte r a com man d == =>

The Unit Alarm Setup screen will appear.
Unit TG 2 - E3

= == Unit Al arm Set up ===

12 :29: 56 10/ 20/2 009

A -> U nit Al arm Mas k/R elay Se tup
B -> U nit Al arm Sev eri ty S etu p

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to Main Me nu or e nte r a com man d > >

5.40.6.1 E3 Unit Alarm Mask/Relay Setup
The menu path for E1 Unit Alarm Mask/Relay Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
M > Unit Alarm Setup
A > Unit Alarm Mask/Relay Setup
Press A from the Unit Alarm Setup menu. The Unit Alarm Mask/Relay Setup screen will
appear. To select a port move the cursor to the E3# field. Use the Tab key to scroll in a port
number. Setting range is 1~3. Press the Enter key.
Unit TG 2 - E3
=== Uni t A larm Ma sk/ Rela y S etu p == =
12 :31: 04 10/ 20/2 009
ARRO W K EYS : CU RSO R M OVE, Pl eas e In put : 1 ~3, BAC KSP ACE to edi t
E3# : 1 _

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to prev iou s m enu >>

An expanded screen will appear. Use the Tab key to scroll in an Alarm and Relay setting for
each alarm type. If you wish to copy the same configuration to different channels, key in the
channel settings. Press the Enter key.

181

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS
Unit TG 2 - E3
=== Uni t A larm Ma sk/ Rela y S etu p == =
ARRO W K EYS : CU RSO R M OVE, TA B/` : RO LL UP/ DOWN OP TIO NS
E3# : 1

Ty pe
-- --- --TU -LO P
TU -AI S
LP -TI M
LP -UN EQ
LP -PL M
LP -RD I-S
LP -RD I-C
LP -RD I-P
LP -B3 -BI P
LP -RE I
E3 -LO S
E3 -AI S
E3 -BP V
Co py the sam e

A lar m
Re lay
- --- ---- -- --- --E NAB LED
DI SAB LED
E NAB LED
DI SAB LED
E NAB LED
DI SAB LED
E NAB LED
DI SAB LED
E NAB LED
DI SAB LED
E NAB LED
DI SAB LED
E NAB LED
DI SAB LED
E NAB LED
DI SAB LED
D ISA BLED DI SAB LED
E NAB LED
DI SAB LED
E NAB LED
DI SAB LED
E NAB LED
DI SAB LED
E NAB LED
DI SAB LED
c onf ig. fro m C han# 1

12 :31: 04 10/ 20/2 009

to chan #3

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to prev iou s m enu >>

A prompt will ask if you want to change the configuration. Press Y for Yes. You will be
returned to the unit menu. Press the Esc key
>> Change configuration (Y/N)? (Note:to save,please use V-command)

You will be returned to the Unit Menu. Press E to return to the Main Menu. From the Main
Menu press V to save the change. The Store/Retrieve Configuration screen will appear. Use
the arrow key to move the asterisk to STORE. Press the Enter key.
O940 0SA

>> S ele ct ?

== =Sto re/ Ret riev e C onf igur ati on= ==

*ST ORE

1 5:4 1:57 09 /03 /200 7

R ETR IEVE

The following prompt will appear. Press Y for Yes.
>> Store Current Configuration ? [Y/N]

A password prompt will appear. Key in your password. Press the Enter key.
==>> En ter pas swo rd :

The following message will appear briefly. This procedure is now complete.
===> Saving.......

5.40.6.2 Unit Alarm Severity Setup
The menu path for E3 Unit Alarm Mask/Relay Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
M > Unit Alarm Setup
B > Unit Alarm Severity Setup
Press B from the Unit Alarm Setup menu. The Unit Alarm Severity Setup screen will appear.
Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to each alarm field. Use the Tab key to scroll in a
setting. Settings are: INFO, MINR, MAJR, CRIT. Press the Enter key.

182

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS
Unit TG2 -E3
=== Unit Alarm Severity Setup ===
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB/`: ROLL UP/DOWN OPTIONS

Type
-------TU-LOP
TU-AIS
LP-TIM
LP-UNEQ
LP-PLM
LP-RDI-S
LP-RDI-C
LP-RDI-P
LP-B3-BIP
LP-REI
E3-LOS
E3-AIS
E3-BPV

12:37:36 10/20/2009

Severity
-------MAJR
MAJR
MINR
MINR
MINR
MINR
MINR
MINR
MINR
MINR
MAJR
MINR
MINR

(CRIT:CRITICAL, MAJR:MAJOR, MINR:MINOR, INFO:INFORM)
<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

A prompt will ask if you want to change the configuration. Press Y for Yes. You will be
returned to the unit menu. Press the Esc. key
>> Change configuration (Y/N)? (Note:to save,please use V-command)

You will be returned to the Unit Menu. Press E to return to the Main Menu. From the Main
Menu press V to save the change. The Store/Retrieve Configuration screen will appear. Use
the arrow key to move the asterisk to STORE. Press the Enter key.
O940 0SA
>> S ele ct ?

=== Stor e/R etr ieve Co nfi gura tio n== =
*ST ORE

15 :41 :57 09/ 03/ 2007

R ETR IEVE

The following prompt will appear. Press Y for Yes.
>> Store Current Configuration ? [Y/N]

A password prompt will appear. Key in your password. Press the Enter key.
==>> En ter pas swo rd :

The following message will appear briefly. This procedure is now complete.
===>
Saving.......

5.40.7 Performance Setup/Clear
The menu path for E3 Performance Setup/Clear is as follows:
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
R > Performance Setup/Clear

183

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS
Press R from the Unit Menu.
Unit TG 2 - E3

== Uni t M enu ===

1 2:5 0:41 10 /20 /200 9

HW V ers ion
: A
CPLD Ve rsi on : Ve r 1

[DIS PLA Y]
N -> E3 /T3 Mod e D isp lay
D -> Li ne Conf ig. Di spla y
S -> Un it Diag nos tic s Di spl ay
H -> E3 /T3 SNC P S tat us
A -> Cu rre nt A lar m S tatu s
P -> Un it Perf orm anc e

[SET UP]
T -> E3 /T3 Mod e S etu p
C -> Li ne Conf ig. Se tup
G -> Un it Diag nos tic s Se tup
K -> SN CP User Co mma nd
M -> Un it Alar m S etu p
R -> Pe rfo rman ce Set up/C lea r

[LOG ]
F -> Lo g O ff
O -> Lo g O n
U -> Ch oos e a Uni t
E -> Re tur n to Ma in Menu

[MIS C]
X -> Cl ear Uni t A lar m Hi sto ry
W -> Un it Load De fau lt

>>SP ACE ba r to re fre sh o r e nte r a com man d == =>

The Performance Setup/Clear screen will appear.
Unit TG 2 - E3
10/2 0/2 009

= == Per form anc e S etup /Cl ear ===

1 2:54 :04

A - > C lea r Pe rfo rma nce Dat a
B - > P erf orma nce Th resh old Se tup

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to Main Me nu or e nte r a com man d > >

5.40.7.1 Clear Performance Data
The menu path for E3 Clear Performance Data setup is as follows:
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
R > Performance Setup/Clear
A > Clear Performance Data
Press A from the Performance Setup/Clear menu.
Unit TG 2 - E3
10/2 0/2 009

= == Per form anc e S etup /Cl ear ===

1 2:54 :04

A - > C lea r Pe rfo rma nce Dat a
B - > P erf orma nce Th resh old Se tup

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to Main Me nu or e nte r a com man d > >

The Clear Performance Data screen will appear. Press Y to clear performance data.
Unit TG 2 - E3
10/2 0/2 009

=== Cl ear Per for manc e D ata ===

>> C lea r p erfo rma nce dat a - ar e yo u s ure [Y/ N]

This procedure is complete.

184

1 2:55 :43

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS
5.40.7.2 Performance Threshold Setup
The menu path for E3 Performance Threshold Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
R > Performance Setup/Clear
B > Performance Threshold Setup
Press B from the Performance Setup/Clear menu.
Unit TG 2 - E3
10/2 0/2 009

= == Per form anc e S etup /Cl ear ===

1 2:54 :04

A - > C lea r Pe rfo rma nce Dat a
B - > P erf orma nce Th resh old Se tup

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to Main Me nu or e nte r a com man d > >

The Perf. Threshold Cross Alarm Setup screen will appear. Use the Arrow keys to
move the cursor to each field.
Note: Some settings must be keyed in.
Table 5-40 Perf. Threshold Cross Alarm Settings
Field
Alarm
Severity
Threshold

Setting Options

Default Setting

ENABLED, DISABLED
INFO, MINR, MAJR, CRIT
Range: 1~9999

Note

ENABLED
MINR
600, 600, 2048

Press the Enter key after you have finished making all of your settings for this screen.
Unit TG 2 - E3
== = Pe rf. Th resh old Cr oss Ala rm Setu p = ==1 2:59 :52
10/2 0/2 009
ARRO W K EYS : CU RSO R M OVE, TA B/` : RO LL UP/ DOWN OP TIO NS

Ty pe
-- --- --HP -BI P
HP -RE I
Li ne BPV

A lar m
- --- ---D ISA BLED
D ISA BLED
D ISA BLED

Se ver ity
-- --- --CR IT
CR IT
CR IT

Thr esh old
--- --- --000 0
000 0
000 0

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to prev iou s m enu >>

A prompt will ask if you want to change the configuration. Press Y for Yes. You will be
returned to the unit menu. Press the Esc. key
>> Change configuration (Y/N)? (Note:to save,please use V-command)
You will be returned to the Unit Menu. Press E to return to the Main Menu. From the Main
Menu press V to save the change. The Store/Retrieve Configuration screen will appear. Use
the arrow key to move the asterisk to STORE. Press the Enter key.
O940 0SA

>> S ele ct ?

=== Sto re/ Retr iev e C onfi gur ati on== =

*ST ORE

R ETR IEVE

The following prompt will appear. Press Y for Yes.
>> Store Current Configuration ? [Y/N]

185

1 5:41 :57 09 /03/ 200 7

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS
A password prompt will appear. Key in your password. Press the Enter key.
==>> En ter pas swo rd :

The following message will appear briefly. This procedure is now complete.
===> Saving.......
5.40.8 E3 Performance Report
5.40.8.1 1-Hour Performance
The full menu path for E3 one hour performance report is as follows:
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
P > Unit Performance
1 > 1-Hour Performance
Press Enter
O9400SA
=== 1-Hour Performance ===
TG2-Ch#1 HP-BIP(B3)
-- Valid Seconds in Current 15-Min Interval : 0 seconds

Current 15-Min Interval
1st Nearest 15-Min Interval
2nd Nearest 15-Min Interval
3rd Nearest 15-Min Interval
4rd Nearest 15-Min Interval

:
:
:
:
:

(EB)
0
---------------------

(BBE)
0
---------------------

(ES)
0
---------------------

09:44:15 11/20/2009

(BES)
0
---------------------

(SES)
0
---------------------

(UAS)
0
---------------------

<< Press TAB key to show Statistics Report >>
<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>

5.40.8.2 24-Hour Performance Report
The full menu path for E3 24 hour performance report is as follows:
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
P > Unit Performance
2 > 24-Hour Performance
Press Enter
O9400SA
=== 24-Hour Performance ===
09:44:41 11/20/2009
TG2-Ch#1 EB HP-BIP(B3)
-- Valid Seconds in Current 15-Min Interval : 0 seconds
-- Valid 15-Min Intervals in Current 24-Hour Interval: 0
(EB)
(BBE)
(ES)
(BES)
(SES)
(UAS)
Current 15-Min Interval
: 0
0
0
0
0
0
Current Day
: ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ------- EB
01-08
09-16
17-24
25-32
33-40
41-48
49-56
57-64
65-72
73-80
81-88
89-96

, Last 96
(09:15) >
(07:15) >
(05:15) >
(03:15) >
(01:15) >
(23:15) >
(21:15) >
(19:15) >
(17:15) >
(15:15) >
(13:15) >
(11:15) >

15-Min Interval :
------ ------ ----------- ------ ----------- ------ ----------- ------ ----------- ------ ----------- ------ ----------- ------ ----------- ------ ----------- ------ ----------- ------ ----------- ------ ----------- ------ ------

-------------------------------------------------------------

-------------------------------------------------------------

-------------------------------------------------------------

<< Press TAB key to show Statistics Report >>
<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>

186

-------------------------------------------------------------

-------------------------------------------------------------

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS

5.40.8.3 7-Day Performance Report
The full menu path for E3 7 day performance report is as follows:
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
P > Unit Performance
3 > 7-Day Performance
Press Enter
O9400SA
=== 7-Day Performance ===
TG2-Ch#1 HP-BIP(B3)
-- Valid 15-Min Intervals in Current Day : 0

Current Day
11/19/2009
11/18/2009
11/17/2009
11/16/2009
11/15/2009
11/14/2009
11/13/2009

:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:

(EB)
-----------------------------------------

(BBE)
-----------------------------------------

(ES)
-----------------------------------------

09:45:07 11/20/2009

(BES)
-----------------------------------------

(SES)
-----------------------------------------

(UAS)
-----------------------------------------

<< Press TAB key to show Statistics Report >>
<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>

Note: The maximum value for line ES, BES, SES, UAS, and BPV is 65,535 respectively.

187

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS

5.41 T3 Setup
Note: T3 signal can only be mapped into AU4/TU3, AU3/C3, or STS-1 format
5.41.1 Choose a Unit
To setup T3 you must first choose a unit. The menu path is as follows:
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
A screen by screen setup example is shown below. Press U.
O9400SA

=== Main Menu ===

09:14:39 10/21/2009

Serial Number
: 146
Hardware Version: D
Software Version: V1.11.01 10/08/2009

Device Name : O9400SA
Start Time : 10:43:43 10/20/2009
Connect Port: SUPV_PORT

[DISPLAY]
C -> System Config Display
I -> System Information
B -> SDH/SONET Config Display
Q -> Alarm Queue
T -> System Log Information
A -> SDH/SONET Alarm Status
P -> SDH/SONET Performance

[SETUP]
S -> System Config Setup
D -> SDH/SONET Config Setup
M -> Alarm Setup
V -> Store/Retrieve Backup Config
L -> File Transfer
R -> Performance Setup/Clear

[LOG]
F -> Log Off
O -> Log On
U -> Choose a Unit

[MISC]
Y -> Alarm Cut Off
Z -> System Reset
X -> Clear Alarm Queue
W -> Return to Default

>>SPACE bar to refresh or enter a command ===>

A prompt will ask you to press the Tab key to select a unit. TG2 is the unit you want for E3/T3.
Press the Enter key.
==>> Pr ess Tab ke y t o se lec t t he u nit : T G2

A unit menu will appear. Note that the label “Unit TG2 –E3” at the top of the sample screen shown
below identifies the unit as an E3 unit which is the default setting of the Unit TG2. Instructions for
changing to T3 are listed below.
Unit TG2 -E3

=== Unit Menu ===

09:16:55 10/21/2009

HW Version
: A
CPLD Version : Ver 1

[DISPLAY]
N -> E3/T3 Mode Display
D -> Line Config. Display
S -> Unit Diagnostics Display
H -> E3/T3 SNCP Status
A -> Current Alarm Status
P -> Unit Performance

[SETUP]
T -> E3/T3 Mode Setup
C -> Line Config. Setup
G -> Unit Diagnostics Setup
K -> SNCP User Command
M -> Unit Alarm Setup
R -> Performance Setup/Clear

[LOG]
F -> Log Off
O -> Log On
U -> Choose a Unit
E -> Return to Main Menu

[MISC]
X -> Clear Unit Alarm History
W -> Unit Load Default

>>SPACE bar to refresh or enter a command ===>

188

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS
5.41.2 E3/T3 Mode Setup
The menu path for E3/T3 Mode Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
T > E3/T3 Mode Setup
To change to T3, press T from the unit menu.
Unit TG2 -E3

=== Unit Menu ===

09:16:55 10/21/2009

HW Version
: A
CPLD Version : Ver 1

[DISPLAY]
N -> E3/T3 Mode Display
D -> Line Config. Display
S -> Unit Diagnostics Display
H -> E3/T3 SNCP Status
A -> Current Alarm Status
P -> Unit Performance

[SETUP]
T -> E3/T3 Mode Setup
C -> Line Config. Setup
G -> Unit Diagnostics Setup
K -> SNCP User Command
M -> Unit Alarm Setup
R -> Performance Setup/Clear

[LOG]
F -> Log Off
O -> Log On
U -> Choose a Unit
E -> Return to Main Menu

[MISC]
X -> Clear Unit Alarm History
W -> Unit Load Default

>>SPACE bar to refresh or enter a command ===>

The E3/T3 Mode Setup screen will appear. Use the Tab key to scroll in the setting for E3/T3
Mode. The choices are: E3(HDB3) or T3(B3ZS). Press the Enter key. A prompt will ask if
you want to change the configuration. Press Y for Yes. Press the Enter key to return to the
main menu.
5.41.3 Line Config Setup
The menu path for T3 Line Config Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
C > Line Config Setup
Press C from the Unit Menu.
Unit TG2 -T3

=== Unit Menu ===

09:16:55 10/21/2009

HW Version
: A
CPLD Version : Ver 1

[DISPLAY]
N -> E3/T3 Mode Display
D -> Line Config Display
S -> Unit Diagnostics Display
H -> E3/T3 SNCP Status
A -> Current Alarm Status
P -> Unit Performance

[SETUP]
T -> E3/T3 Mode Setup
C -> Line Config Setup
G -> Unit Diagnostics Setup
K -> SNCP User Command
M -> Unit Alarm Setup
R -> Performance Setup/Clear

[LOG]
F -> Log Off
O -> Log On
U -> Choose a Unit
E -> Return to Main Menu

[MISC]
X -> Clear Unit Alarm History
W -> Unit Load Default

>>SPACE bar to refresh or enter a command ===>

The Config Setup menu screen will appear.

189

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS
Unit TG2 -T3

=== Line Config Setup ===

A
B
C
D

->
->
->
->

09:51:40 10/21/2009

Line Transmit Length Setup
Mapping Mode Setup
SDH/SONET Path Overhead Setup
Customer Information Setup

<< Press ESC key to return to Main Menu or enter a command >>

5.41.3.1 Line Transmit Length Setup
The menu path for T3 Line Transmit Length Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
C > Line Config Setup
A > Line Transmit Length Setup
Press A from the Config Setup screen
Unit TG2 -T3

=== Line Config Setup ===

A
B
C
D

->
->
->
->

09:51:40 10/21/2009

Line Transmit Length Setup
Mapping Mode Setup
SDH/SONET Path Overhead Setup
Customer Information Setup

<< Press ESC key to return to Main Menu or enter a command >>

The Line Transmit Length Setup screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to
each field. Use the Tab key to scroll in your settings. Press the Enter key.
Cable Length setting choices are: 0~133 and 133~266.
Unit TG2 -T3
=== Line Transmit Length Setup ===
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB/`: ROLL UP/DOWN OPTIONS

T3#
===
01
02
03

10:12:38 10/21/2009

Length
==============
0~133ft
0~133ft
0~133ft

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

A prompt will ask if you want to change the configuration. Press Y for Yes.
>> C han ge conf igu rat ion (Y/ N)? (No te: to save ,pl eas e us e V -co mman d)

A “Success” message will appear on the left. Press the Enter key to return the the unit menu.
Success.
>> Change configuration (Y/N)? (Note:to save,please use V-command)Y

190

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS
You will be returned to the Unit Menu. Press E to return to the Main Menu. From the Main
Menu press V to save the change. The Store/Retrieve Configuration screen will appear. Use
the arrow key to move the asterisk to STORE. Press the Enter key.
O940 0SA

>> S ele ct ?

=== Stor e/R etr ieve Co nfi gura tio n== =

*ST ORE

15 :41 :57 09/ 03/ 2007

R ETR IEVE

The following prompt will appear. Press Y for Yes.
>> Store Current Configuration ? [Y/N]
A password prompt will appear. Key in your password. Press the Enter key.
==>> En ter pas swo rd :

The following message will appear briefly. This procedure is now complete.
===> Saving.......

5.41.3.2 Mapping Mode Setup
The menu path for T3 Mapping Mode Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
C > Line Config Setup
B > Mapping Mode Setup
Press B from the Config Setup screen.
Unit TG2 -T3

=== Line Config Setup ===

A
B
C
D

->
->
->
->

09:51:40 10/21/2009

Line Transmit Length Setup
Mapping Mode Setup
SDH/SONET Path Overhead Setup
Customer Information Setup

<< Press ESC key to return to Main Menu or enter a command >>

The Mapping Mode Setup screen will appear. Mapping Mode setting choices
are: AU3/C3 or AU4/TU3. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Mapping Mode
field. Use the Tab key to scroll in your setting. Press the Enter key.
Unit TG 2 - T3
= == Mapp ing Mo de S etu p = ==
10/2 1/2 009
ARRO W K EYS : CU RSO R M OVE, TA B/` : RO LL UP/ DOWN OP TIO NS
Mapp ing Mo de

:

1 0:23 :13

A U3/C 3

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to prev iou s m enu >>

A prompt will ask if you want to change the configuration. Press Y for Yes.
>> C han ge conf igu rat ion (Y/ N)? (No te: to save ,pl eas e us e V -co mman d)

To return tho the Unit Menu, press Esc. twice. Press E to return to the Main Menu. From the
Main Menu press V to save the change. The Store/Retrieve Configuration screen will appear.
Use the arrow key to move the asterisk to STORE. Press the Enter key.

191

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS
O940 0SA

>> S ele ct ?

= ==S tore /Re tri eve Con fig urat ion ===

*ST ORE

15: 41: 57 0 9/0 3/2 007

R ETR IEVE

The following prompt will appear. Press Y for Yes.
>> Store Current Configuration ? [Y/N]

A password prompt will appear. Key in your password. Press the Enter key.
==>> En ter pas swo rd :

The following message will appear briefly. This procedure is now complete.
===>
Saving.......

5.41.3.3 SDH/SONET Path Overhead Setup
The menu path for TU11/TU12 Mapping Mode Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
C > Line Config Setup
C > SDH/SONET Path Overhead Setup
Press C from the Config Setup screen.
Unit TG2 -T3

=== Line Config Setup ===

A
B
C
D

->
->
->
->

09:51:40 10/21/2009

Line Transmit Length Setup
Mapping Mode Setup
SDH/SONET Path Overhead Setup
Customer Information Setup

<< Press ESC key to return to Main Menu or enter a command >>

The TU11/TU12 Mapping Mode Setup screen will appear. Use the Tab key to scroll in
your T3# setting. Setting choices are 1,2,or 3. Press the Enter key.
Unit TG 2 - T3
=== SDH /SO NET Pat h O verh ead Se tup === 10 :40: 28 10/ 21/2 009
ARRO W K EYS : CU RSO R M OVE, Pl eas e In put : 1 ~3, BAC KSP ACE to edi t
T3# : 1 _

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to prev iou s m enu >>

192

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS

Table 5-41 SDH/SONET Path Overhead Setting Options
Field

Setting Options

Default Setting

T3#
J1_LEN

1
NULL

Expected_J1_MSG
TX_J1_MSG
RX_J1_MSG
Tx_PSL

1,2, or 3
NULL, 1-BYTE
16-BYTE (NULL padding),
16-BYTE (SPACE padding)
64-BYTE (NULL padding),
64-BYTE (SPACE padding)
Key in your message
Key in your message
Key in your message
Range: 0~0xFF

EPSL

Range: 0~0xFF

Rx_PSL

Fixed

0x4
into
0x4
into

Notes

(Asynch. mapping
container-3)
(Asynch. mapping
Container-3 )

An expanded screen wll appear. Key or scroll in your settings. Press the Enter key.
Unit TG 2 - T3
=== SDH /SO NET Pat h O verh ead Se tup === 18 :07: 26 12/ 02/2 009
ARRO W K EYS : CU RSO R M OVE, TA B/` : RO LL UP/ DOWN OP TIO NS
T3# : 0 1

J 1_LE N
Expe cte d_J 1_MS G
T X_J 1_MS G
R X_J 1_MS G

: NU LL
:
:
:

T x_PS L : 0x 4 ( Asy nch rono us map ping in to Cont ain er- 3 )
EPS L : 0x 4 ( Asy nch rono us map ping in to Cont ain er- 3 )
R x-PS L : 0x 0 ( Une qui pped )

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to prev iou s m enu >>

A prompt will ask if you want to change the configuration. Press Y for Yes. Press the Esc.
key to return to the Config Setup menu.
>> Change configuration (Y/N)? (Note:to save,please use V-command)
Press Esc. to return to the Unit Menu. Press E to return to the Main Menu. From the Main
Menu press V to save the change. The Store/Retrieve Configuration screen will appear. Use
the arrow key to move the asterisk to STORE. Press the Enter key.
O940 0SA

>> S ele ct ?

=== Stor e/R etr ieve Co nfi gura tio n== =

*ST ORE

15 :41 :57 09/ 03/ 2007

R ETR IEVE

The following prompt will appear. Press Y for Yes.
>> S tor e C urre nt Con figu rat ion ? [ Y/N ]

A password prompt will appear. Key in your password. Press the Enter key.
==>> En ter pas swo rd :

193

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS
The following message will appear briefly. This procedure is now complete.
===> Sa vin g... ... .

5.41.3.4 Customer Information Setup
The menu path for T3 Customer Information Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
C > Line Config Setup
D > Customer Information Setup
Press D from the Config Setup screen.
Unit TG2 -T3

=== Line Config Setup ===

A
B
C
D

->
->
->
->

09:51:40 10/21/2009

Line Transmit Length Setup
Mapping Mode Setup
SDH/SONET Path Overhead Setup
Customer Information Setup

<< Press ESC key to return to Main Menu or enter a command >>

The Customer Information Setup screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to move
the cursor to each T3# field. Key in your customer information. Press the Enter key.
Unit TG 2 - T3
== = C ust omer In for mati on Set up = ==
10/2 1/2 009
ARRO W K EYS : CU RSO R M OVE, BA CKS PACE to ed it, ESC to abo rt

T3#
01
02
03

1 1:29 :47

Cus tome r I nfo rmat ion
T3- Line ___ ___ ____ ___
T3- Line
T3- Line

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to prev iou s m enu >>

A prompt will ask if you want to change the configuration. Press Y for Yes. Press the Esc.
key to return to the Config Setup menu.
>> Change configuration (Y/N)? (Note:to save,please use V-command)
Press the Esc. key again to return to the Unit Menu. Press E to return to the Main Menu.
From the Main Menu press V to save the change. The Store/Retrieve Configuration screen
will appear. Use the arrow key to move the asterisk to STORE. Press the Enter key.
O940 0SA

>> S ele ct ?

=== Stor e/R etr ieve Co nfi gura tio n== =

*ST ORE

15 :41 :57 09/ 03/ 2007

R ETR IEVE

The following prompt will appear. Press Y for Yes.
>> Store Current Configuration ? [Y/N]
A password prompt will appear. Key in your password. Press the Enter key.
==>> En ter pas swo rd :

The following message will appear briefly. This procedure is now complete.
===> Saving.......

194

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS
5.41.4 Unit Diagnostics Setup
The menu path for T3 Unit Diagnostics Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
G > Unit Diagnostics Setup
Press G from the Unit Menu.
Unit TG2 -T3

=== Unit Menu ===

09:16:55 10/28/2009

HW Version
: A
CPLD Version : Ver 1

[DISPLAY]
N -> E3/T3 Mode Display
D -> Line Config Display
S -> Unit Diagnostics Display
H -> E3/T3 SNCP Status
A -> Current Alarm Status
P -> Unit Performance

[SETUP]
T -> E3/T3 Mode Setup
C -> Line Config Setup
G -> Unit Diagnostics Setup
K -> SNCP User Command
M -> Unit Alarm Setup
R -> Performance Setup/Clear

[LOG]
F -> Log Off
O -> Log On
U -> Choose a Unit
E -> Return to Main Menu

[MISC]
X -> Clear Unit Alarm History
W -> Unit Load Default

>>SPACE bar to refresh or enter a command ===>

The Unit Diagnostics Setup screen will appear.
Unit TG 2 - T3

== = Un it Dia gnos tic s S etup == =

22:2 0:2 6

10/ 28/ 200 9

A -> C han nel Loo pba ck Setu p
B -> U nit Di agno sti cs Setu p

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to Main Me nu or e nte r a com man d > >

5.41.4.1 Channel Loopback Setup
The menu path for T3 Channel Loopback Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
G > Unit Diagnostics Setup
A > Channel Loopback Setup
Press A from the Unit Diagnostics Setup screen.
Unit TG 2 - T3

== = Un it Dia gnos tic s S etup == =

11 :32 :05 10/ 21/ 200 9

A -> C han nel Loo pba ck Setu p
B -> U nit Di agno sti cs Setu p

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to Main Me nu or e nte r a com man d > >

The Channel Loopback Test screen will appear. All setting choices are displayed on the
screen. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the selection you want for a particular field.
Then press the Enter key. Repeat this process for each setting you wish to make.

195

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS
U Unit TG 2 -T3

=== Cha nne l Lo opb ack Tes t = ==

11 :33 :19

10 /21 /200 9

Loop bac k T imer : 000 000 sec .
Unit
T3#
01
02
03

*O FF

TO- ALL -E3 T3-L INE

*O FF
*O FF
*O FF

TO- OPT ICA L-LI NE
TO- OPT ICA L-LI NE
TO- OPT ICA L-LI NE

TO -E3T 3-L INE
TO -E3T 3-L INE
TO -E3T 3-L INE

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to prev iou s m enu >>< < P ress ES C k ey t o r etu rn t o
prev iou s m enu >>

Note: The Loopback Timer is set up separately using the O9400S main Main Menu. Timer
setup is a very simple procedure. The menu path is as follows:
O > Logon
S > System Config Setup
C > Loopback Timer setup
This procedure is complete. Press the Esc key twice to return to the Unit Menu.
5.41.4.2 Unit Diagnostics Setup
The menu path for T1 Channel Loopback Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
G > Unit Diagnostics Setup
B > Unit Diagnostics Setup
Press B from the Unit Diagnostics Setup screen.
Unit TG 2 - T3

== = Un it Dia gnos tic s S etup == =

11:3 2:0 5 1 0/21 /20 09

A -> C han nel Loo pba ck Setu p
B -> U nit Di agno sti cs Setu p

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to Main Me nu or e nte r a com man d > >

The Unit Diagnostics screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the T1#
field. Use the Tab key to scroll in a setting. The range is 1~3. Press the Enter key.
Unit TG 2 - T3

=== Un it Diag nos tic s Se tup == =

11 :37 :22

1 0/2 1/20 09

ARRO W K EYS : CU RSO R M OVE, Pl eas e In put : 1 ~3, BAC KSP ACE to edi t
Sen d T est Pat ter n t o == >
T3 # :

1_

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to prev iou s m enu >>

An expanded screen will appear. All setting choices are displayed on the screen. Use the
arrow keys to move the cursor to the selection you want for a particular field. Then press the
Enter key.

196

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS
Unit TG 2 - T3

=== Un it Diag nos tic s Se tup == =

11 :37 :22

10/ 21/2 009

ARRO W K EYS : C URS OR MOVE , ENT ER K EY : I TEM SEL ECT
Sen d T est Pat ter n t o == >
T3 # :

1

Dire cti on

: *O pti cal- Lin e

TEST pa tte rn : *O FF

2^1 5-1

E3T3 -Li ne
2^ 23- 1

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to prev iou s m enu >>

A further screen will display the Test Pattern information.
Unit TG 2 - T3
=== Un it D iag nos tics Se tup ===
10/2 1/2 009
ARRO W K EYS : C URS OR MOVE , ENT ER K EY : I TEM SEL ECT

1 1:37 :22

Sen d T est Pat ter n t o == >
T3 # :

1

Dire cti on

: *O pti cal- Lin e

TEST pa tte rn : *O FF

S YNC
ES
UAS
To tal

St ate
Co unt
Co unt
Co unt

=
=
=
=

2^1 5-1

UN SYNC
0
6
6

E3T3 -Li ne
2^ 23- 1

ES Rat io =
UAS Rat io =

0. 0%
1 00. 0%

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to prev iou s m enu >>

This procedure is complete. Press the Esc key to return to the previous menu if you wish to
set up a different loopback.
5.41.5 SNCP USER Command
The menu path for T1 SNCP USER Command Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
K > SNCP USER Command
Press K from the Unit Menu.
Unit TG2 -T3

=== Unit Menu ===

22:58:48 10/28/2009

HW Version
: A
CPLD Version : Ver 1

[DISPLAY]
N -> E3/T3 Mode Display
D -> Line Config Display
S -> Unit Diagnostics Display
H -> E3/T3 SNCP Status
A -> Current Alarm Status
P -> Unit Performance

[SETUP]
T -> E3/T3 Mode Setup
C -> Line Config Setup
G -> Unit Diagnostics Setup
K -> SNCP User Command
M -> Unit Alarm Setup
R -> Performance Setup/Clear

[LOG]
F -> Log Off
O -> Log On
U -> Choose a Unit
E -> Return to Main Menu

[MISC]
X -> Clear Unit Alarm History
W -> Unit Load Default

>>SPACE bar to refresh or enter a command ===>

197

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS
The SNCP User Command screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to
each field. Use the Tab key to scroll in your settings.
Port setting: range is 1~3.

Unit TG2 -T3
=== SNCP User Command ===
00:35:16 10/29/2009
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, Please Input: 1~3, BACKSPACE to edit
Port
:
Command :

1_
NONE

Note :
FS = Force Switch
MS = Manual Switch

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

Command settings are listed in the table below. Some commands have higher priorities than
others. If the command you select has a lower priority than the existing setting, your selection
will be rejected. If you want to use a setting with a lower priority, use the clear command first.
This will clear the existing setting and allow you to choose a lower priority setting.
Note: The command field settings can only be changed if the cross-connect is in PP-AD
mode. System mode type must be ADM (SNCP).

Table 5-42 SNCP Command Settings
Priority

SNCP Command Settings
Setting
Description

1 (high)
2
3
3
4 (low)
4 (low)

Clear
Lock-out
FS-Ea
FS-Wa
MS-Ea
MS-Wa

Clear any existing setting
Lock out protection
Force switch to East side(Ea)
Force switch to West side (Wa)
Manual switch to East side (Ea)
Manual switch to West side (Wa)

Press the Enter key.
Unit TG2 -T3
=== SNCP User Command ===
00:51:19 10/29/2009
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, Please Input: 1~3, BACKSPACE to edit
Port
:
Command :

1_
NONE

Note :
FS = Force Switch
MS = Manual Switch

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

A prompt will ask if you are sure. Press Y for yes.

198

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS
>>Ar e y ou sure (Y /N) ?

A new prompt will appear.
SNCP Us er Comm and OK .

This procedure is complete. Press the ESC key twice to return to the Unit Menu.
5.41.6 T3 Unit Alarm Setup
The menu path for T3 Unit Alarm Setup is as follows:
O > Log On
U > Choose a Unit
M > Unit Alarm Setup
Press M from the Unit Menu.
Unit TG 2 - T3

== = Un it Men u == =

0 0:5 4:38

1 0/2 9/20 09

HW V ers ion
: A
CPLD Ve rsi on : Ve r 1

[DIS PLA Y]
N -> E3 /T3 Mod e D isp lay
D -> Li ne Conf ig Dis play
S -> Un it Diag nos tic s Di spl ay
H -> E3/T3 SNCP St atu s
A -> Cu rre nt A lar m S tatu s
P -> Un it Perf orm anc e

[SET UP]
T -> E3 /T3 Mod e S etu p
C -> Li ne Conf ig Set up
G -> Un it Diag nos tic s Se tup
K -> SN CP User Co mma nd
M -> Un it Alar m S etu p
R -> Pe rfo rman ce Set up/C lea r

[LOG ]
F -> Lo g O ff
O -> Lo g O n
U -> Ch oos e a Uni t
E -> Re tur n to Ma in Menu

[MIS C]
X -> Cl ear Uni t A lar m Hi sto ry
W -> Un it Load De fau lt

>>SP ACE ba r to re fre sh o r e nte r a com man d == =>

The Unit Alarm Setup screen will appear.
Unit TG 2 - T3

=== Un it A lar m S etup == =

0 1:0 1:33

A -> U nit Al arm Mas k/R elay Se tup
B -> U nit Al arm Sev eri ty S etu p

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to Main Me nu or e nte r a com man d > >

5.41.6.1 T3 Unit Alarm Mask/Relay Setup
The menu path for T3 Unit Alarm Mask/Relay Setup is as follows:
O > Log On
U > Choose a Unit
M > Unit Alarm Setup
A > Unit Alarm Mask/Relay Setup

199

10/ 29/2 009

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS
Press A from the Unit Alarm Setup menu. The Unit Alarm setup screen will appear. To
select a port move the cursor to the T1# field. Use the Tab key to scroll in a port number.
Setting range is 1~3. Press the Enter key.
Unit TG 2 - T3
=== Un it Alar m M ask /Rel ay Set up = ==
0 1:20 :52
10/2 9/2 009
ARRO W K EYS : CU RSO R M OVE, Pl eas e In put : 1 ~3, BAC KSP ACE to edi t
T3# : 1 _

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to prev iou s m enu >>

An expanded screen will appear. Use the Tab key to scroll in an Alarm and Relay setting for
each alarm type. If you wish to copy the same configuration to different channels, key in the
channel settings. Press the Enter key.
Unit TG2 -T3
=== Unit Alarm Mask/Relay Setup ===
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB/`: ROLL UP/DOWN OPTIONS
T3# : 1

Type
-------TU-LOP
TU-AIS
LP-TIM
LP-UNEQ
LP-PLM
LP-RDI-S
LP-RDI-C
LP-RDI-P
LP-B3-BIP
LP-REI
T3-LOS
T3-AIS
T3-BPV
Copy the same

Alarm
Relay
-------- -------ENABLED DISABLED
ENABLED DISABLED
ENABLED DISABLED
ENABLED DISABLED
ENABLED DISABLED
ENABLED DISABLED
ENABLED DISABLED
ENABLED DISABLED
DISABLED DISABLED
ENABLED DISABLED
ENABLED DISABLED
ENABLED DISABLED
ENABLED DISABLED
config. from Chan#1

01:24:51 10/29/2009

to chan#3

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

A prompt will ask if you want to change the configuration. Press Y for Yes. You will be
returned to the unit menu. Press the Esc. key
>> Change configuration (Y/N)? (Note:to save,please use V-command)
You will be returned to the Unit Menu. Press E to return to the Main Menu. From the Main
Menu press V to save the change. The Store/Retrieve Configuration screen will appear. Use
the arrow key to move the asterisk to STORE. Press the Enter key.
O940 0SA

>> S ele ct ?

== =Sto re/ Ret riev e C onf igur ati on= ==

*ST ORE

1 5:4 1:57 09 /03 /200 7

R ETR IEVE

The following prompt will appear. Press Y for Yes.
>> Store Current Configuration ? [Y/N]
A password prompt will appear. Key in your password. Press the Enter key.

200

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS
==>> En ter pas swo rd :

The following message will appear briefly. This procedure is now complete.
===> Saving.......

5.41.6.2 Unit Alarm Severity Setup
The menu path for T1 Unit Alarm Mask/Relay Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
M > Unit Alarm Setup
B > Unit Alarm Severity Setup
Press B from the Unit Alarm Setup menu. The Unit Alarm Severity Setup screen will appear.
Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to each alarm field. Use the Tab key to scroll in a
setting. Settings are: INFO, MINR, MAJR, CRIT. Press the Enter key.
Unit TG2 -T3
=== Unit Alarm Severity Setup ===
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB/`: ROLL UP/DOWN OPTIONS

Type
-------TU-LOP
TU-AIS
LP-TIM
LP-UNEQ
LP-PLM
LP-RDI-S
LP-RDI-C
LP-RDI-P
LP-B3-BIP
LP-REI
T3-LOS
T3-AIS
T3-BPV

01:33:23 10/29/2009

Severity
-------MAJR
MAJR
MINR
MINR
MINR
MINR
MINR
MINR
MINR
MINR
MAJR
MINR
MINR

(CRIT:CRITICAL, MAJR:MAJOR, MINR:MINOR, INFO:INFORM)
<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

A prompt will ask if you want to change the configuration. Press Y for Yes. You will be
returned to the unit menu. Press the Esc. key
>> Change configuration (Y/N)? (Note:to save,please use V-command)
You will be returned to the Unit Menu. Press E to return to the Main Menu. From the Main
Menu press V to save the change. The Store/Retrieve Configuration screen will appear. Use
the arrow key to move the asterisk to STORE. Press the Enter key.
O940 0S

>> S ele ct ?

=== Stor e/R etr ieve Co nfi gura tio n== =

*ST ORE

15 :41 :57 09/ 03/ 2007

R ETR IEVE

The following prompt will appear. Press Y for Yes.
>> Store Current Configuration ? [Y/N]
A password prompt will appear. Key in your password. Press the Enter key.
==>> En ter pas swo rd :

The following message will appear briefly. This procedure is now complete.
===> Saving.......

201

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS
5.41.7 Performance Setup/Clear
The menu path for T1 /Performance Setup/Clear is as follows:
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
R > Performance Setup/Clear
Press R from the Unit Menu.
Unit TG 2 - T3
10/2 9/2 009

=== Uni t M enu ===

0 1:45 :25

HW V ers ion
: A
CPLD Ve rsi on : Ve r 1

[DIS PLA Y]
N -> E3 /T3 Mod e D isp lay
D -> Li ne Conf ig Dis play
S -> Un it Diag nos tic s Di spl ay
H -> E3/T3 SNCP St atu s
A -> Cu rre nt A lar m S tatu s
P -> Un it Perf orm anc e

[SET UP]
T -> E3 /T3 Mod e S etu p
C -> Li ne Conf ig Set up
G -> Un it Diag nos tic s Se tup
K -> SN CP User Co mma nd
M -> Un it Alar m S etu p
R -> Pe rfo rman ce Set up/C lea r

[LOG ]
F -> Lo g O ff
O -> Lo g O n
U -> Ch oos e a Uni t
E -> Re tur n to Ma in Menu

[MIS C]
X -> Cl ear Uni t A lar m Hi sto ry
W -> Un it Load De fau lt

>>SP ACE ba r to re fre sh o r e nte r a com man d == =>

The SDH/SONET Performance Setup/Clear screen will appear.
Unit TG 2 - T3

=== Per for manc e S etu p/Cl ear == =

0 1:4 8:08

10/ 29/2 009

A - > C lea r Pe rfo rma nce Dat a
B - > P erf orma nce Th resh old Se tup

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to Main Me nu or e nte r a com man d > >

5.41.7.1 Clear Performance Data
The menu path for T3 Clear Performance Data setup is as follows:
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
R > Performance Setup/Clear
A > Clear Performance Data
Press A to clearn performance data.
Unit TG 2 - T3

=== Pe rfo rman ce Set up/C lea r = ==

01: 51:4 9

A - > C lea r Pe rfo rma nce Dat a
B - > P erf orma nce Th resh old Se tup

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to Main Me nu or e nte r a com man d > >

202

10/ 29/2 009

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS
The Clear Performance Data screen will appear. Press Y to clear performance data.
>> C lea r p erfo rma nce dat a - ar e yo u s ure [Y/ N] ?

This procedure is complete.
5.41.7.2 Unit Performance TCA Setup
The menu path for T1 Unit Performance TCA Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
R > Performance Setup/Clear
B >Performance Threshold Setup
Press B for Performance Threshold Setup.
Unit TG 2 - T3
10/2 9/2 009

= == Per form anc e S etup /Cl ear ===

1 7:01 :35

A - > C lea r Pe rfo rma nce Dat a
B - > P erf orma nce Th resh old Se tup

<< P res s E SC k ey to retu rn to Main Me nu or e nte r a com man d > >

The Unit Performance TCA Setup screen will appear. Use the Arrow keys to move the cursor
to each field.
Note: Some settings must be keyed in.
Press the Enter key after you have finished making all of your settings for this screen.

203

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS

Table 5-43 Unit Performance TCA Settings
Field

Setting Options

Default Setting

Alarm
Severity
Threshold

ENABLED, DISABLED
INFO, MINR, MAJR, CRIT
Range: 1~9999

DISABLE
CRIT
0000

Unit TG 2 - T3
=== Pe rf. Thr esh old Cro ss Alar m S etu p == =
10/2 9/2 009
ARRO W K EYS : CU RSO R M OVE, TA B/` : RO LL UP/ DOWN OP TIO NS

Ty pe
-- --- --HP -BI P
HP -RE I
Li ne BPV

A lar m
- --- ---E NAB LED
E NAB LED
E NAB LED

Se ver ity
-- --- --MI NR
MI NR
MI NR

Note

17:0 9:5 3

Thr esh old
--- --- --223 0
550 0
126 0

A prompt will ask if you want to change the configuration. Press Y for Yes. You will be
returned to the unit menu. Press the Esc. key
>> C han ge conf igu rat ion (Y/ N)? (No te: to save ,pl eas e us e V -co mman d)

You will be returned to the Unit Menu. Press E to return to the Main Menu. From the Main
Menu press V to save the change. The Store/Retrieve Configuration screen will appear. Use
the arrow key to move the asterisk to STORE. Press the Enter key.
O940 0SA

>> S ele ct?

== =Sto re/ Ret riev e C onf igur ati on= ==

* STO RE

1 5:4 1:57 09 /03 /200 7

RE TRI EVE

The following prompt will appear. Press Y for Yes.
>> Store Current Configuration? [Y/N]
A password prompt will appear. Key in your password. Press the Enter key.
==>> En ter pas swo rd :

The following message will appear briefly. This procedure is now complete.
===> Saving.......
5.41.8 T3 Performance Report
5.41.8.1 1-Hour Performance Report
The full menu path for T3 one hour performance report is as follows:
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
P > Unit Performance
1 > 1-Hour Performance
Press Enter

204

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS
O9400SA
=== 1-Hour Performance ===
TG2-Ch#1 HP-BIP(B3)
-- Valid Seconds in Current 15-Min Interval : 0 seconds

Current 15-Min Interval
1st Nearest 15-Min Interval
2nd Nearest 15-Min Interval
3rd Nearest 15-Min Interval
4rd Nearest 15-Min Interval

:
:
:
:
:

(EB)
0
---------------------

(BBE)
0
---------------------

(ES)
0
---------------------

10:07:31 11/20/2009

(BES)
0
---------------------

(SES)
0
---------------------

(UAS)
0
---------------------

<< Press TAB key to show Statistics Report >>
<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>

5.41.8.2 24-Hour Performance Report
The full menu path for T3 24 hour performance report is as follows:
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
P > Unit Performance
2 > 24-Hour Performance
Press Enter
O9400SA
=== 24-Hour Performance ===
10:09:11 11/20/2009
TG2-Ch#1 EB HP-BIP(B3)
-- Valid Seconds in Current 15-Min Interval : 0 seconds
-- Valid 15-Min Intervals in Current 24-Hour Interval: 0
(EB)
(BBE)
(ES)
(BES)
(SES)
(UAS)
Current 15-Min Interval
: 0
0
0
0
0
0
Current Day
: ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ------- EB
01-08
09-16
17-24
25-32
33-40
41-48
49-56
57-64
65-72
73-80
81-88
89-96

, Last 96
(09:45) >
(07:45) >
(05:45) >
(03:45) >
(01:45) >
(23:45) >
(21:45) >
(19:45) >
(17:45) >
(15:45) >
(13:45) >
(11:45) >

15-Min Interval :
------ ------ ----------- ------ ----------- ------ ----------- ------ ----------- ------ ----------- ------ ----------- ------ ----------- ------ ----------- ------ ----------- ------ ----------- ------ ----------- ------ ------

-------------------------------------------------------------

-------------------------------------------------------------

-------------------------------------------------------------

<< Press TAB key to show Statistics Report >>
<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>

205

-------------------------------------------------------------

-------------------------------------------------------------

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS
5.41.8.3 7-Day Performance
The full menu path for T3 7 Day performance report is as follows:
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
P > Unit Performance
1 > 1-Hour Performance
Press Enter
O9400SA
=== 7-Day Performance ===
TG2-Ch#1 HP-BIP(B3)
-- Valid 15-Min Intervals in Current Day : 0

Current Day
11/19/2009
11/18/2009
11/17/2009
11/16/2009
11/15/2009
11/14/2009
11/13/2009

:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:

(EB)
-----------------------------------------

(BBE)
-----------------------------------------

(ES)
-----------------------------------------

10:09:41 11/20/2009

(BES)
-----------------------------------------

(SES)
-----------------------------------------

(UAS)
-----------------------------------------

<< Press TAB key to show Statistics Report >>
<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>

Note: The maximum value for line ES, BES, SES, UAS, and BPV is 65,535 respectively.

206

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS

5.42 Ethernet Switch Setup
For background information on Ethernet please refer to CHAPTER 7, ETHERNET
APPENDIX.
5.42.1 Unit Menu Tree
Ethernet Interface Card with Switch
VT- 100 Menu Tree
[ DISPLAY ]
C > WAN (VCG) & Link Display
A > Add/Drop Channel Count
B > Customer Information Display
C > LAN Link Status
D > LCAS Channel Status

A > Current Alarm Status
A > Path Alarm Status
B > Linkdown Alarm Status

P > Unit Performance
1 > 01-Hour Performance
2 > 24-Hour Performance
3 > 07-Day Performance

H > Enet SNCP Status
G > WAN (VCG) Statistics
I > Switch Status
A > Switch Statistics
B > VLAN ID Info
C > VLAN Port Association Table
D > RSTP Bridge Info
E > RSTP Port Info

[ SETUP ]
M>
S>

Mode Setup
VCG & Link Setup
A > Payload/LCAS Setup
B > Encapsulation Type Setup
C > Encapsulation Parameter Setup
D > Path Alarm Setup
E > VCG Alarm Threshold Setup
F > Linkdown Alarm Setup
G > Link Config Setup
H > Customer Information Setup
I > Link Fail Propagation Setup
J > Inter-Frame Gap (IFG) Setup

R > Performance Setup/Clear
A > Clear Performance Data
B > Performance Threshold Setup

L > Loopback Test
K > SNCP User Command
T > Switch Setup
A > VLAN Setup
A > VLAN Tag Protocol ID Setup
B > VLAN Port Configuration Setup
C > VLAN Port Association Setup

B > PortMap Setup
A > WAN Portmap Setup
B > LAN Portmap Setup

C > Port Trunk Setup
D > MSTP/RSTP Setup
A > MSTP Region/CIST Setup
B > Spantree Port Enable
C > MSTP Instance/VLAN Setup
D > MSTP Instance/Priority Setup
E > MSTP/RSTP Port Setup Setup
F > RSTP Bridge Setup

E > IGMP Setup
A > IGMP Snooping
B > IGMP Fast Leave
C > IGMP Router Port
D > IGMP IP Multicast Range
E > IGMP Cross Vlan Ι
F > IGMP Cross Vlan ΙΙ

F > Flow Control Setup

[LOG]
F > Log Off
O > Log On
U > Choose a Unit
E > Return to Main Menu

G > QoS Setup
A > Class of Service Setup
B > TCP/UDP Port Access Control
C > Transmission Scheduling
D > Transmission WRED Setup
E > Rate Control Setup

H > MAC Learning Setup

[MISC]
W > Unit Load Default and Reset

Figure 5-12 Ethernet Interface Card with Switch VT-100 Menu Tree

207

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS
5.42.2 Choosing a Trib Unit
Press U from the O9400S Main Menu to choose a unit.
O9400SA

=== Main Menu ===

17:11:39 03/21/2008

Serial Number
: 000012
Hardware Version: D
Software Version: V1.04.01 03/19/2008

Connect Port: SUPV_PORT
Start Time : 09:29:54 03/21/2008

[DISPLAY]
C -> System Config Display
I -> System Information
B -> SDH/SONET Config Display
Q -> Alarm Queue
T -> System Log Information
A -> SDH/SONET Alarm Status
P -> SDH/SONET Performance

[SETUP]
S -> System Config Setup
D -> SDH/SONET Config Setup
M -> Alarm Setup
V -> Store/Retrieve Backup Config
L -> File Transfer
R -> Performance Setup/Clear

[LOG]
F -> Log Off
O -> Log On
U -> Choose a Unit

[MISC]
Y -> Alarm Cut Off
Z -> System Reset
X -> Clear Alarm Queue
W -> Return to Default

>>SPACE bar to refresh or enter a command ===>

A prompt will appear. Use the Tab key to scroll in the card’s Tributary slot number. TG3 is the
unit you want for the Ethernet card with switch.. Press the Enter key.
==>> Press Tab key to select the unit: TG3
The unit menu will appear for that card.
Unit TG3 -FE-SW

=== Unit Menu ===

11:27:26 08/27/2009

HW Version
: B
CPLD Version : Ver 255

[DISPLAY]
C -> WAN(VCG) & Link Display
A -> Current Alarm Status
P -> Unit Performance
H -> Enet SNCP Status
G -> WAN(VCG) Statistics
I -> Switch Status

[SETUP]
M -> Mode Setup
S -> VCG & Link Setup
R -> Performance Setup/Clear
L -> Loopback Test
K -> SNCP User Command
T -> Switch Setup

[LOG]
F -> Log Off
O -> Log On
U -> Choose a Unit
E -> Return to Main Menu

[MISC]
W -> Unit Load Default & Reset

>>SPACE bar to refresh or enter a command ===>

208

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS

5.42.3 Mode Setup
The path for Mode Setup is as follows:
M> Mode Setup
The Mode Setup screen will appear. Use the Tab key to scroll in your setting. Then press
the Enter key.
Unit TG3 -FE-SW
=== Mode Setup ===
ARROW KEYS : CURSOR MOVE , ENTER KEY : ITEM SELECT

17:39:47 03/21/2008

Mode Selection : e-line
<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

Table 5-44 Mode Setting Options
Field

Setting

Default Setting

Note

Mode Selection

e-line,
e-lan,
portmap

e-line

e-lan settings must be used if you
wish to use the Ethernet switch for
VLAN
portmap settings must be used if
you wish to use the Ethernet switch
for Port Mapping

Table 5-45 Mode Support Table
Daughter Card
Fast-Ethernet SW
Giga-Ethernet SW
Fast-Ethernet
Giga-Ethernet

E-Line
Yes--(4 WAN / 4
LAN)
Yes--(1 WAN / 1
LAN)
Yes--(4 LAN)
Yes--(1 LAN)

E-LAN
Yes--(8 WAN / 4
LAN)
Yes--(1 WAN / 4
LAN)
N/A
N/A

Portmap
Yes--(8 WAN / 4
LAN)
Yes--(1 WAN / 4
LAN)
N/A
N/A

Note: Please refer to Section 3.7.4, Functional Block Diagrams
A prompt will ask if you wish to change to this new configuration. Press Y for yes.
>> Change configuration (Y/N)? (Note:to save,please use V-command)

A prompt will advise you that the change was successful.
SUCCESS

5.42.4 VCG & Link Setup
The Unit Menu path for VCG & Link Setup is as follows:
S > WAN (VCG) & Link Setup

209

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS
The VCG & LinkSetup screen will appear.
Unit TG3 -GE-SW

=== VCG & Link Setup ===

A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J

->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->

11:58:31 09/03/2009

Payload/LCAS Setup
Encapsulation Type Setup
Encapsulation Parameter Setup
Path Alarm Setup
VCG Alarm Threshold Setup
Linkdown Alarm Setup
Link Config Setup
Customer Information Setup
Link Fail Propagation Setup
Inter-Frame Gap(IFG) Setup

<< Press ESC key to return to Main Menu or enter a command >>

Press one of the following:
A > Payload/LCAS Setup
B > Encapsulation Type Setup
C > Encapsulation Parameter Setup
D > Path Alarm Setup
E > VCG Alarm Threshold Setup
F-> Linkdown Alarm Setup
G > Link Config Setup
H > Customer Information Setup
I > Link Fail Propagation Setup
J > Inter-Frame Gap (IFG) Setup
Screen by screen setup examples are shown below:
5.42.4.1 Payload/LCAS Setup
The Unit Menu path for Payload/LCAS Setup is as follows:
S > WAN (VCG) & Link Setup
A > Payload/LCAS Setup
The Payload/LCAS Setup Setup screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor
to the various fields. Then use the Tab key to scroll in your settings. Press the Enter key.
Note: The user needs to check to make sure that there is no cross-conect map in this WAN
before changing the payload or LCAS type.

Unit TG3 -FE-SW
=== Payload/LCAS Setup ===
ARROW KEYS : CURSOR MOVE , ENTER KEY : ITEM SELECT

[WAN]
WAN#1(FE)
WAN#2(FE)
WAN#3(FE)
WAN#4(FE)

:
:
:
:

[payload]

[lcas mode]

TU12
TU12
TU12
TU12

LCAS
LCAS
LCAS
LCAS

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

210

17:48:51 03/21/2008

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS

Table 5-46 Payload/LCAS Setting Options
VCG Field

Payload
Settings

Default
Payload
Setting

LCAS
Mode
Settings

LCAS Mode
Default
Setting

Note:

TU11
TU12
LCAS,
TU12
LCAS
TU3
Non LCAS
AU4/C4
AU3/C3
*This setting depends on the card type. Please refer to Table 5-38.
WAN1~8*

The following prompt will appear. Press Y to change the configuration. If you want to save
this configuration you must return to the O9400S Main Menu and press V
>> Change configuration (Y/N)? (Note:to save,please use V-command)

5.42.4.2 Encapsulation Type Setup
The Unit Menu path for Encapsulation Type Setup is as follows:
S > WAN (VCG) & Link Setup
B > Encapsulation Type Setup
The Encapsulation Type Setup screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to
the various fields. Then use the Tab key to scroll in your settings. Press the Enter key.
Unit TG3 -FE-SW
=== Encapsulation Type Setup ===
ARROW KEYS : CURSOR MOVE , ENTER KEY : ITEM SELECT

17:53:33 03/21/2008

Encapsulation Type
WAN#1(FE)
WAN#2(FE)
WAN#3(FE)
WAN#4(FE)

:
:
:
:

GFP
GFP
GFP
GFP

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

Table 5-47 Encapsulation Type Setting Options
Field
Type

Encapsulation
Type Settings

Default
Setting

GFP
LAPS
BCP

GFP

Note

The following prompt will appear. Press Y to change the configuration. If you want to save
this configuration you must return to the O9400S Main Menu and press V
>> Change configuration (Y/N)? (Note:to save,please use V-command)

211

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS
5.42.4.3 Encapsulation Parameter Setup
The Unit Menu path for Encapsulation Parameter Setup is as follows:
S > WAN (VCG) & Link Setup
C > Encapsulation Parameter Setup
The Encapsulation Parameter Setup screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to move the
cursor to the (VCG) WAN# field. Then key in the WAN# setting. Press the Enter key.
Unit TG3 -FE-SW
=== Encapsulation Par Setup ===
17:55:19 03/21/2008
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, Please Input: 1~4, BACKSPACE to edit
(VCG) WAN# : 1

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

Table 5-48 Encapsulation Parameter Setting Options
Field

Setting Range

Default
Setting

(VCG) WAN#

1~8*

1

Note

WAN# depends on the Ethernet mode in use.
e-line = WAN1~4
e-lan and portmap = WAN1~8
*This setting depends on the card type. Please refer to Table 5-37.

If your encapsulation type is GFP, the GFP Parameter Setup screen will appear. Use the
arrow keys to move the cursor to the various fields. Some settings must be keyed in. Some
must be scrolled in using the Tab key. Press the Enter key.
Unit TG3 -FE-SW
=== GFP Parameter Setup ===
17:59:25 03/21/2008
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, Please Input: 0~7, BACKSPACE to edit
(VCG) WAN# : 1
Rx PTI
Rx EXI
Rx UPI
DELTA

:
:
:
:

0
0
1
1

Rx Descramble

: Enable

Tx
Tx
Tx
Tx

PTI
EXI
UPI
PFI

Tx Scramble

:
:
:
:

0
0
1
0

: Enable

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

Table 5-49 GFP Parameter Setting Options
Field

Settings

Default Setting

Rx PTI
Rx EXI
Rx UPI
DELTA
Rx Descramble
Tx PTI
Tx EXI
Tx UPI
Tx PFI
Tx Scramble

0~7
0~0xF
0~0xFF
1~4
Disable, Enable
0~7
0~0xF
0~0xFF
0~1
Disable, Enable

0
0
01
1
Enable
0
0
01
1
Enable

212

Note

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS
If your encapsulation type is LAPS, the LAPS Parameter Setup screen will appear. Use the
arrow keys to move the cursor to the various fields. Some settings must be keyed in. Some
must be scrolled in using the Tab key. Press the Enter key.
Unit TG3 -FE-SW

=== LAPS Parameter Setup ===

18:01:11 03/21/2008

(VCG) WAN# : 1
Rx
Rx
Rx
Rx

Address
Control
SAPI MSB
SAPI LSB

:
:
:
:

0
0
0
0

Tx
Tx
Tx
Tx

Address
Control
SAPI MSB
SAPI LSB

Rx
Rx
Rx
Rx

Descramble
Payload FCS Check
Address&Control Check
SAPI Check

:
:
:
:

Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable

Tx Scramble
Tx Payload FCS

:
:
:
:

0
0
0
0

: Disable
: Disable

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

Table 5-50 LAPS Parameter Setting Options
Field

Settings

Default Setting

Rx Address
Rx Control
Rx SAPI MSB
Rx SAPI LSB
Rx Descramble
Rx Payload FCS Check
Rx Address & Control Check
Rx SAPI Check
Tx Address
Tx Control
Tx SAPI MSB
Tx SAPI LSB
Tx Scramble
Tx Payload FCS Insert

0~0xFF
0~0xFF
0~0xFF
0~0xFF
Disable/Enable
Disable/Enable
Disable/Enable
Disable/Enable
0~0xFF
0~0xFF
0~0xFF
0~0xFF
Disable/Enable
Disable/Enable

4
03
FE
01
Enable
Disable
Disable
Disable
04
03
FE
01
Enable
Disable

Note

If your encapsulation type is BCP, the BCP Parameter Setup screen will appear. Use the
arrow keys to move the cursor to the various fields. Some settings must be keyed in. Some
must be scrolled in using the Tab key. Press the Enter key.
Unit TG3 –FE-SW
=== BCP Parameter Setup ===
14:35:09 12/02/2009
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, Please Input: 0~0xFF, BACKSPACE to edit
(VCG) WAN# : 1
Rx
Rx
Rx
Rx

Address
Control
Protocol MSB
Protocol LSB

:
:
:
:

FF
3
0
31

Tx
Tx
Tx
Tx

Rx
Rx
Rx
Rx

Descramble
Payload FCS Check
Address&Control Check
Protocol Check

:
:
:
:

Enable
Enable
Disable
Disable

Tx Scramble
Tx Payload FCS Insert
Tx/Rx Payload FCS Mode

: Enable
: Enable
: CRC-32

Rx
Rx
Rx
Rx

Bit F
Bit Z
Pads
MAC Type

:
:
:
:

0
1
0
1

Tx
Tx
Tx
Tx

:
:
:
:

Rx BCP Flags Check
Rx MAC Type Check

Address
Control
Protocol MSB
Protocol LSB

Bit F
Bit Z
Pads
MAC Type

: Disable
: Disable

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

213

:
:
:
:

FF
3
0
31

0
1
0
1

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS

Table 5-51 BCP Parameter Setting Options
Field

Settings

Default Setting

Rx Address
Rx Control
Rx Protocol MSB
Rx Protocol LSB
Rx Descramble
Rx Payload FCS Check
Rx Address & Control Check
Rx Protocol Check
Tx Address
Tx Control
Tx Protocol MSB
Tx Protocol LSB
Tx Scramble
Tx Payload FCS Insert
Tx/Rx Payload FCS Mode
Rx Bit F
Rx Bit Z

0~0xFF
0~0xFF
0~0xFF
0~0xFF
Disable/Enable
Disable/Enable
Disable/Enable
Disable/Enable
0~0xFF
0~0xFF
0~0xFF
0~0xFF
Disable/Enable
Disable/Enable
CRC-16/CRC-32
0/1
0/1

FF
03
0
31
Enable
Enable
Disable
Disable
FF
03
0
31
Enable
Enable
CRC-32
0
1

Rx Pads
Rx MAC Type
Rx BCP Flags Check
Rx MAC Type Check
Tx F
Tx Z
Tx Pads
Tx MAC Type

0~0xFF
0~0xFF
Enable/Disable
Enable/Disable
0/1
0/1
0~0xFF
0~0xFF

0
1
Disable
Disable
0
1
0
1

Note

The following prompt will appear. Press Y to change the configuration. If you want to save
this configuration you must return to the O9400S Main Menu and press V
>> Change configuration (Y/N)? (Note:to save,please use V-command)

5.42.4.4 Path Alarm Setup
The Unit Menu path for Path Alarm Setup is as follows:
S > WAN (VCG) & Link Setup
D > Path Alarm Setup
The Path Alarm Setup screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the
various fields. Then use the Tab key to scroll in your settings. Press the Enter key.
Unit TG3 -FE-SW
=== Path Alarm Setup ===
09:37:41 03/24/2008
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, Please Input: 1~4, BACKSPACE to edit
(VCG) WAN# : 1

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

Table 5-52 Path Alarm Setting Options 1
Field

Settings

Default
Setting

(VCG) WAN#
Path

Range is 1~4*
low-order,

1

214

Note

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS
high-order
*This setting depends on the card type. Please refer to Table 5-37.

An advanced Path Alarm Setup screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to
the various fields. Then use the Tab key to scroll in your settings. Press the Enter key.
Unit TG3 -FE-SW
=== Path Alarm Setup ===
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB/`: ROLL UP/DOWN OPTIONS

09:37:41 03/24/2008

(VCG) WAN# :
type
TU-LOP
TU-AIS
LP-UNEQ
LP-RDI-P
LP-RDI-S
LP-RDI-C
LP-REI
LP-BIP

alarm
ENABLED
ENABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED

relay
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED

severity
MAJR
MAJR
INFO
INFO
INFO
INFO
INFO
INFO

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

Table 5-53 Path Alarm Setting Options 2
Low-order
Path Type

Alarm
Settings

Alarm
Default

Relay
Settings

Relay
Default

Severity
Settings

Severity
Default

TU-LOP
TU-AIS
LP-UNEQ
LP-RDI-P
LP-RDI-S
LP-RDI-C
LP-REI
LP-BIP

ENABLED
DISABLED

ENABLED
ENABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED

ENABLED
DISABLED

DISABLED

INFO
MINR
MAJR
CRIT

MAJR
MAJR
INFO
INFO
INFO
INFO
INFO
INFO

Hi-order
Path Type
AU-LOP
AU-AIS
HP-UNEQ
HP-RDI-P
HP-RDI-S
HP-RDI-C
HP-B3-REI
HP-B3-BIP
HOP-LOM

Alarm
Settings
ENABLED
DISABLED

Alarm
Default
ENABLED
ENABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED

Relay
Settings
ENABLED
DISABLED

Relay
Default
DISABLED

Severity
Settings
INFO
MINR
MAJR
CRIT

Severity
Default
MAJR
MAJR
INFO
INFO
INFO
INFO
INFO
INFO
INFO

The following prompt will appear. Press Y to change the configuration. If you want to save
this configuration you must return to the O9400S Main Menu and press V.
>> Change configuration (Y/N)? (Note:to save,please use V-command)

5.42.4.5 WAN (VCG) Alarm Threshold Setup
The Unit Menu path for WAN (VCG) Alarm Threshold Setup is as follows:
S > WAN (VCG) & Link Setup
E > WAN (VCG) Alarm Threshold Setup
The WAN (VCG) Alarm Threshold Setup screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to move the
cursor to the various fields. Then use the Tab key to scroll in your settings. Threshold
settings must be keyed in. Press the Enter key.

215

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS
Unit TG3 -FE-SW
=== WAN(VCG) Alarm Threshold Setup === 10:10:09 03/24/2008
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB/`: ROLL UP/DOWN OPTIONS
En/Dis
Rx error FCS count
DIS
Rx error packet discarded count DIS

severity
CRIT
CRIT

Threshold
03000
03000

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

Table 5-54 WAN (VCG) Alarm Threshold Setting Options
Field

En/Dis
Settings

En/Dis
Default

Severity
Settings

Severity
Default

Threshold
Settings

Threshold
Default

Rx error FCS count
Rx errore FCS packet
discarded count

EN
DIS

DIS

INFO
MINR
MAJR
CRIT

MINR

1~99999

3000

The following prompt will appear. Press Y to change the configuration. If you want to save
this configuration you must return to the O9400S Main Menu and press V
>> Change configuration (Y/N)? (Note:to save,please use V-command)

5.42.4.6 Linkdown Alarm Setup
The Unit Menu path for Linkdown Alarm Setup is as follows:
S > WAN (VCG) & Link Setup
F-> Linkdown Alarm Setup
The Linkdown Alarm Setup screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the
various fields. Then use the Tab key to scroll in your settings. Press the Enter key.
Unit TG3 -FE-SW
=== Linkdown Mask Setup ===
ARROW KEYS : CURSOR MOVE , ENTER KEY : ITEM SELECT
port
alarm
relay
severity
----------------------------------------LAN1
ENABLED
DISABLED MAJR
LAN2
ENABLED
DISABLED MAJR
LAN3
ENABLED
DISABLED MAJR
LAN4
ENABLED
DISABLED MAJR
<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

216

10:14:12 03/24/2008

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS

Table 5-55 Linkdown Alarm Setting Options
Port

Alarm
Settings

Alarm
Default

Relay
Settings

Relay
Default

Severity
Settings

Severity
Default

LAN1~4*

ENABLED
DISABLED

ENABLED

ENABLED
DISABLED

DISABLED

INFO
MINR
MAJR
CRIT

MINR

*This setting depends on the card type. Please refer to Table 5-37.

The following prompt will appear. Press Y to change the configuration. If you want to save
this configuration you must return to the O9400S Main Menu and press V
>> Change configuration (Y/N)? (Note:to save,please use V-command)

5.42.4.7 Link Config Setup
The Unit Menu path for Link Config Setup is as follows:
S > WAN (VCG) & Link Setup
G > Link Config Setup
The Link Config Setup screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the
various fields. Then use the Tab key to scroll in your settings. Press the Enter key.
Unit TG3 -FE-SW
=== Link Config Setup ===
ARROW KEYS : CURSOR MOVE , ENTER KEY : ITEM SELECT

10:15:53 03/24/2008

port
link config
---------------------------LAN1
Auto negotiation
LAN2
Auto negotiation
LAN3
Auto negotiation
LAN4
Auto negotiation
<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

Table 5-56 Link Config Setting Options for Ethernet with Switch
Port

Link Config Settings

Default Setting

Note

LAN4

Auto negotiation

Auto negotiation

1000M full-duplex is available in
Fast Ethernet SW, Giga Ethernet
SW and Giga Ethernet.Card.

Auto negotiation

The MTU (Maximum Transfer
Unit) of 10 M (full/half duplex) is
up to 5000 bytes

100M full-duplex
10M full-duplex
100M half-duplex
10M half-duplex
1000M full-duplex
LAN1~3

Auto negotiation
100M full-duplex
10M full-duplex
100M half-duplex
10M half-duplex

The following prompt will appear. Press Y to change the configuration. If you want to save
this configuration you must return to the O9400S Main Menu and press V
>> Change configuration (Y/N)? (Note:to save,please use V-command)

217

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS

5.42.4.8 Customer Information Setup
The Unit Menu path for Customer Information Setup is as follows:
S > WAN (VCG) & Link Setup
H > Customer Information Setup
The Customer Information Setup screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor
to the various fields. Then key in the customer name for each LAN. Press the Enter key.
Unit TG3 -FE-SW
=== Customer Information Setup ===
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, BACKSPACE to edit, ESC to abort

Port#
LAN1
LAN2
LAN3
LAN4

10:18:31 03/24/2008

Customer Information
Name of link#1______
Name of link#2
Name of link#3
Name of link#4

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

The following prompt will appear. Press Y to change the configuration. If you want to save
this configuration you must return to the O9400S Main Menu and press V
>> Change configuration (Y/N)? (Note:to save,please use V-command)

5.42.4.9 Link Failure Propagation Setup
Note: Local LAN Port failure is reflected upstream at the WAN Port. The Ethernet port of
each device is monitored. If a link failure is detected at either device a signal will
automatically be sent to the other device to shut down the corresponding Ethernet port. Thus,
the shut down of an Ethernet port is propagated.
Similarly, if WAN (VCG) port failure occurs, link failure propagation will shut down the
corresponding LAN ports.
The Unit Menu path for Link Failure Propagation is as follows:
S > VCG & Link Setup
I > Link Fail Propagation
Table 5-57 Link Failure Propagation Setting Options
Field
WAN (VCG) Lost
Propagation

Settings

Default Setting

Note

DISABLED

Link Failure Propagation only works
when in E-line or PortMap/Trunk
mode.

ENABLED,
DISABLED

Remote Link Down
Propagation

218

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS

Unit TG3 -FE-SW

=== Link Fail Propagation Setup ===

21:16:02 O7/01/2008

ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, ENTER KEY: ITEM SELECT

Wan(VCG) Lost PROPAGATION

: ENABLED

Remote link Down Propagation : ENABLED

Note:

“Remote Link Down Propagation” is only supported in GFP mode.

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

Note:
For E-Line mode, Link Fault Propagation is activated if a WAN1 alarm occurs or if a LAN1
alarm occurs. See the diagram below.

Table 5-58 Link Fault Propagation—E-Line Mode
Link Fault Propagation
Activated by Alarm

WAN1 Alarm

LAN1 Alarm

Yes

Yes

For Portmap/Trunk modes, Link Fault Propagation is activated if a WAN1 and WAN2 alarm
both occur or if a LAN1 alarm occurs. See the diagram below.

Trunk
LAN1

WAN1

WAN1

WAN2

WAN2

LAN1

Table 5-59 Link Fault Propagation—Portmap/Trunk Mode

Link Fault Propagation
Activated by Alarm

WAN1 Alarm

WAN2 Alarm

No

No

219

WAN1 Alarm &
WAN2 Alarm
Yes

LAN1 Alarm
Yes

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS
5.42.4.10 Inter-Frame Gap (IFG) Setup
The Unit Menu path for Inter-Frame Gap (IFG) Setup is as follows:
S > VCG & Link Setup
J > Inter-Frame Gap (IFG) Setup
Table 5-60 Inter-Frame Gap (IFG) Setting Options
Field

Settings

Default Setting

LAN1
LAN2
LAN3
LAN4

80, 88, 96
80, 88, 96
80, 88, 96
80, 88, 96

88
88
88
88

Note

Input your settings. Press the Enter key.
Unit TG3 -GE-SW

=== Inter-Frame Gap(IFG) Setup ===

11:03:03 09/03/2009

ARROW KEYS : CURSOR MOVE , ENTER KEY : ITEM SELECT
Port

IFG (Bit Times)

------

---------------

LAN1

88

LAN2

88

LAN3

88

LAN4

88

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

The following prompt will appear. Press Y to change the configuration. If you want to save
this configuration you must return to the O9400S Main Menu and press V
>> Change configuration (Y/N)? (Note:to save,please use V-command)

5.42.5 Performance Setup/Clear
The Unit Menu path for Performance Setup/Clear is as follows:
R > Performance Setup/Clear
Then press one of the following:
A > Clear Performance Data
B > Performance Threshold Setup
Screen by screen setup examples are shown below:

220

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS
5.42.5.1 Clear Performance Data
The Unit Menu path for Clear Performance Data is as follows:
R > Performance Setup/Clear
A > Clear Performance Data
A prompt will ask if you want to clear the performance data. Press Y for Yes or N for No.
Press the Enter key.
Unit TG3 -FE-SW

=== Performance Setup/Clear ===

10:20:55 03/24/2008

A -> Clear Performance Data
B -> Performance Threshold Setup
<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu or enter a command >>

5.42.5.2 Performance Threshold Setup
The Unit Menu path for Performance Threshold Setup is as follows:
R > Performance Setup/Clear
B > Performance Threshold Setup
The Performance threshold Cross Alarm Setup screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to
move the cursor to the various fields. Then use the Tab key to scroll in your settings. Press
the Enter key.
Unit TG3 -FE-SW
=== Perf. Threshold Cross Alarm Setup ===10:21:34 03/24/2008
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB/`: ROLL UP/DOWN OPTIONS
Monitor Point
HP-BIP(B3)
HP-REI
LP-BIP(V5)
LP-REI(V5)
LP-BIP(B3)
LP-REI(B3)

En/Dis
EN
EN
EN
EN
EN
EN

severity
MINR
MINR
MINR
MINR
MINR
MINR

Threshold
02400
02400
00600
00600
02400
19200

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

Table 5-61 Performance Threshold Setting Options
Monitor
Point

EN/DIS
Settings

EN/DIS
Default

Severity
Settings

Severity
Default

Threshold
Settings

Threshold
Default

HP-BIP(B3)
HP-REI
LP-BIP(V5)
LP-REI(V5
LP-BIP(B3)
LP-REI(B3)

EN
DIS

EN

INFO
MINR
MAJR
CRIT

INFO

1~99999

02400
02400
00600
00600
02400
19200

The following prompt will appear. Press Y to change the configuration. If you want to save
this configuration you must return to the O9400S Main Menu and press V
>> Change configuration (Y/N)? (Note:to save,please use V-command)

221

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS

5.42.6 Loopback Test
The Unit Menu path for Loopback is as follows:
L > Loopback Test
The following Loopback Test screen will appear. Enter your settings. Press the Enter key.
Unit TG3 -GE-SW
=== Loopback Test ===
ARROW KEYS : CURSOR MOVE , ENTER KEY : ITEM SELECT

WAN#1(GE) : *OFF

12:44:46 08/27/2009

TO-OPTICAL-LINE

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

Table 5-62 Loopback Test Setting Options
Field

Settings

Default Setting

WAN#1 (GE)

OFF, TO-OPTICAL-LINE

TO-OPTICAL-LINE

Notes

5.42.7 SNCP User Command
The Unit Menu path for SNCP User Command is as follows:
K > SNCP User Command
The following SNCP User Command screen will appear. Input your settings. Press the Enter
key.
Unit TG3 -GE-SW
=== SNCP User Command ===
13:03:18 08/27/2009
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, Please Input: 1~1, BACKSPACE to edit
(VCG) WAN# :
Chan#
:
Command
:

1_
01
NONE

Note :
FS = Force Switch
MS = Manual Switch

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

Table 5-63 SNCP Setting Options
Field

Settings

Default Setting

(VCG) WAN#
Chan#
Command

1
Range is 1 to 64
CLEAR, Lock-out,
FS-WA, MS-WA, FSEA, MS-EA,

1
01
CLEAR

222

Notes

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS

5.42.8 Switch Setup
The Unit Menu path for Switch Setup is as follows:
T > Switch Setup
The following VLAN Setup screen will appear.
Unit TG3 -GE-SW

=== Switch Setup ===

A
B
C
D
F
G

->
->
->
->
->
->

11:57:29 10/29/2008

VLAN Setup
PortMap Setup
Port Trunk Setup
MSTP/RSTP Setup
Flow Control Setup
Qos Setup

<< Press ESC key to return to Main Menu or enter a command >>

Screen by screen setup examples are shown below:
5.42.8.1 VLAN Setup
The Unit Menu path for VLAN Setup is as follows:
T > Switch Setup
A > VLAN Setup
The VLAN Setup screen will appear. Press A, B, or C.
Note: You will not be able to access this screen unless you have already set the Ethernet
Switch card to an e-lan mode setting. (Please refer to Section 5.15, SDH/SONET Mode
Setup.)

Unit TG3 -FE-SW

=== VLAN Setup ===

16:44:20 03/24/2008

A -> VLAN Tag Protocol ID Setup
B -> VLAN Port Configuration Setup
C -> VLAN Port Association Setup

<< Press ESC key to return to Main Menu or enter a command >>

VLAN Tag Protocol ID Setup
The Unit Menu path for VLAN Tag Protocol ID Setup is as follows:
T > Switch Setup
A > VLAN Setup
A -> VLAN Tag Protocol ID Setup

223

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS
The VLAN Tag Protocol ID Setup screen will appear. Key in the VLAN TPID setting. Press
the Enter key.
Unit TG3 -FE-SW
=== VLAN Tag Protocol ID Setup ===
10:49:33 03/24/2008
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, Please Input: 0~9, A~F, BACKSPACE to edit

VLAN

TPID

: 0x8100

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

Table 5-64 VLAN Tag Protocol ID Setting Options
Field
VLAN TPID

Settings
Key in setting

Default Setting
0x8100

Note
Use characters 0~9
and A~F

The following prompt will appear. Press Y to change the configuration. If you want to save
this configuration you must return to the O9400S Main Menu and press V
>> Change configuration (Y/N)? (Note:to save,please use V-command)

VLAN Port Configuration Setup
The Unit Menu path for VLAN Port Configuration Setup is as follows
T > Switch Setup
A > VLAN Setup
B -> VLAN Port Configuration Setup
The VLAN Port Configuration Setup screen will appear. Use the Tab key to scroll in the Port#
setting. Press the Enter key.
Unit TG3 -FE-SW
=== VLAN Port Configuration Setup ===
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB/`: ROLL UP/DOWN OPTIONS
Port# :
WAN1

10:54:51 03/24/2008

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

Table 5-65 VLAN Tag Protocol ID Setting Options for Screen 1
Field

Settings

Default Setting

Note

Port#

WAN1~8*
WAN1
LAN 1~4*
*This setting depends on the card type. Please refer to Table 5-37.

An updated screen will appear. Enter your settings and press the Enter key.
Unit TG3 -FE-SW
=== VLAN Port Configuration Setup === 10:54:51 03/24/2008
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, Please Input: 1~4094, BACKSPACE to edit
Port# :
WAN1

Port VLAN ID(PVID)

: 0001

Port Force_untag_out

: Disable

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

224

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS

Table 5-66 VLAN Tag Protocol ID Setting Options for Screen 2
Field

Settings

Default Setting

Note

Port VLAN ID(PVID)

Setting range is:
1~4094
Enable
Disable

0001

Key in your setting

Port untagged out

Disable for WAN,
Enable for LAN

The following prompt will appear. Press Y to change the configuration. If you want to save
this configuration you must return to the O9400S Main Menu and press V
>> Change configuration (Y/N)? (Note:to save,please use V-command)

VLAN Port Association Setup
The Unit Menu path for VLAN Port Port Association Setup is as follows:
T > Switch Setup
A > VLAN Setup
C -> VLAN Port Association Setup
The VLAN Port Association Setup screen will appear. Key in your setting. Press the Enter
key.
Unit TG3 -FE-SW
=== VLAN Port Association Setup ===
11:01:54 03/24/2008
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, Please Input: 1~4094, BACKSPACE to edit
VID# :
0001

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

Table 5-67 VLAN Port Association ID Setting Options for Screen 1
Field

Settings

Default Setting

Note

VID#

Setting range is:
1~4094

0001

Key in your setting

An updated screen will appear. Enter your settings and press the Enter key.
Unit TG3 -FE-SW
=== VLAN Port Association Setup ===
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB/`: ROLL UP/DOWN OPTIONS
VID# :
0001
( valid )
WAN1(FE) : ON
WAN2(FE) : ON
WAN3(FE) : ON
WAN4(FE) : ON
WAN5(FE) : ON
WAN6(FE) : ON
WAN7(FE) : ON
WAN8(FE) : ON
LAN1(FE) : ON
LAN2(FE) : ON
LAN3(FE) : ON
LAN4(FE) : ON
Filter Broadcast: No
<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

225

11:01:54 03/24/2008

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS

Table 5-68 VLAN Port Association ID Setting Options for Screen 2
Field

Settings

Default Setting

Note

ON, OFF
ON
WAN1~8*
LAN1~4*
Filter Broadcast
No, Yes
No
*This setting depends on the card type. Please refer to Table 5-37.

The following prompt will appear. Press Y to change the configuration. If you want to save
this configuration you must return to the O9400S Main Menu and press V
>> Change configuration (Y/N)? (Note:to save,please use V-command)

5.42.8.2 Port Map Setup
The Unit Menu path for Port Map Setup is as follows:
T > Switch Setup
B > Port Map Setup
The Port Map Setup screen will appear. Press A or B.
Note: You will not be able to access this screen unless you have already set the Ethernet
Switch
card to the Port Map mode setting. (Please refer to Section 5.15, Mode Setup).
Unit TG3 -FE-SW

=== PortMap Setup ===

11:34:18 03/24/2008

A -> WAN PortMap Setup
B -> LAN PortMap Setup

<< Press ESC key to return to Main Menu or enter a command >>

WAN PortMap Setup
The Unit Menu path for WAN PortMap Setup is as follows:
A > WAN PortMap Setup
The WAN PortMap Setup screen will appear. Scroll in your settings. Press the Enter key.
Unit TG3 -FE-SW
=== WAN PortMap Setup ===
ARROW KEYS : CURSOR MOVE , ENTER KEY : ITEM SELECT

11:35:41 03/24/2008

port WAN1(FE) WAN2(FE) WAN3(FE) WAN4(FE) WAN5(FE) WAN6(FE) WAN7(FE) WAN8(FE)
destination
WAN1(FE) off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
WAN2(FE) off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
WAN3(FE) off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
WAN4(FE) off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
WAN5(FE) off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
WAN6(FE) off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
WAN7(FE) off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
WAN8(FE) off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
LAN1(FE) off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
LAN2(FE) off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
LAN3(FE) off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
LAN4(FE) off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

226

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS

Table 5-69 WAN Port Map Setting Options
Field

Settings

Default Setting

Note

on, off
off
WAN1~8*
LAN1~4*
*This setting depends on the card type. Please refer to Table 5-37.

The following prompt will appear. Press Y to change the configuration. If you want to save
this configuration you must return to the O9400S Main Menu and press V
>> Change configuration (Y/N)? (Note:to save,please use V-command)

LAN Port Map Setup
The Unit Menu path for LAN PortMap Setup is as follows:
B > LAN PortMap Setup
The LAN PortMap Setup screen will appear. Scroll in your settings. Press the Enter key.
Unit TG3 -FE-SW
=== LAN PortMap Setup ===
ARROW KEYS : CURSOR MOVE , ENTER KEY : ITEM SELECT

11:37:43 03/24/2008

port LAN1(FE) LAN2(FE) LAN3(FE) LAN4(FE)
destination
WAN1(FE) off
off
off
off
WAN2(FE) off
off
off
off
WAN3(FE) off
off
off
off
WAN4(FE) off
off
off
off
WAN5(FE) off
off
off
off
WAN6(FE) off
off
off
off
WAN7(FE) off
off
off
off
WAN8(FE) off
off
off
off
LAN1(FE) off
off
off
off
LAN2(FE) off
off
off
off
LAN3(FE) off
off
off
off
LAN4(FE) off
off
off
off
<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

Table 5-70 LAN Port Map Setting Options
Field

Settings

Default Setting

Note

on, off
off
WAN1~8*
LAN1~4*
*This setting depends on the card type. Please refer to Table 5-37.

The following prompt will appear. Press Y to change the configuration. If you want to save
this configuration you must return to the O9400S Main Menu and press V
>> Change configuration (Y/N)? (Note:to save,please use V-command)

227

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS
5.42.8.3 Port Trunk Setup
The Unit Menu path for Port Trunk Setup is as follows:
T > Switch Setup
C > Port Trunk Setup
The Port Trunk Setup screen will appear.
Note: The screen below will appear exactly as shown for Fast Ethernet card e-lan mode and
port mapping mode. For Gigabit Ethernet only WAN#1 will appear on the screen.
Unit TG3 -FE-SW
=== Port Trunk Setup ===
ARROW KEYS : CURSOR MOVE , ENTER KEY : ITEM SELECT
trunk1
trunk2
trunk3
trunk4
member\leader port
WAN1
none
none
none
WAN#1(FE)
off
off
off
off
WAN#2(FE)
off
off
off
off
WAN#3(FE)
off
off
off
off
WAN#4(FE)
off
off
off
off
WAN#5(FE)
off
off
off
off
WAN#6(FE)
off
off
off
off
WAN#7(FE)
off
off
off
off
WAN#8(FE)
off
off
off
off
LAN#1(FE)
off
off
off
off
LAN#2(FE)
off
off
off
off
LAN#3(FE)
off
off
off
off
LAN#4(GE)
off
off
off
off

17:42:56 10/21/2008

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

Table 5-71 Port Trunk Setting Options for Ethernet with Switch
Trunk 1

Trunk 2

Trunk 3

member/
leader port

Wan 1-8,
LAN 1-4,
none

Wan 1-8,
LAN 1-4,
none

Wan 1-8,
LAN 1-4,
none

Settings
Trunk 4
Trunk Default
Settings
Wan 1-8, none
LAN 1-4,
none

WAN#1
WAN#2
WAN#3
WAN#4
WAN#5
WAN#6
WAN#7
WAN#8
LAN#1
LAN#2
LAN#3
LAN#4

on,
off

on,
off

on,
off

on,
off

Field

(FE)
(FE)
(FE)
(FE)
(FE)
(FE)
(FE)
(FE)
(FE)
(FE)
(FE)
(FE)

228

off

Note

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS
5.42.8.4 MSTP/RSTP Setup
The Unit Menu path for MSTP/RSTP Setup is as follows:
T > Switch Setup
D > MSTP/RSTP Setup
The Switch Setup screen will appear. Press A, B, C, D, E or F.
Note: MSTP is accessible only when the Loop device is in E-LAN mode. RSTP is accessible
only when the Loop device is in E-LINE mode or PORTMAP mode. To set the mode
refer to Section 5.39.3 Mode Setup.

O9400SA

=== MSTP/RSTP Setup ===

A
B
C
D
E
F

->
->
->
->
->
->

14:12:44 25/38/20UU

MSTP Region/CIST Setup
Spantree Port Enable
MSTP Instance/Vlan Setup
MSTP Instance/Priority Setup
MSTP/RSTP Port Setup
RSTP Bridge Setup

<< Press ESC key to return to Main Menu or enter a command >>

A. MSTP Region/CIST Setup
The Unit Menu path for MSTP Region/CIST Setup is as follows:
T > Switch Setup
D > MSTP/RSTP Setup
A -> MSTP Region/CIST Setup
The MSTP Region/CIST screen will appear. Enter your settings. Press the Enter key.
Unit TG3 -GE-SW
=== MSTP Region/CIST Setup ===
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB/`: ROLL UP/DOWN OPTIONS

17:14:39 25/38/20UU

STP : Disable
Region Name : MSTname
Revision
: 00001
Bridge ID MAC ADDR : 00-1F-BF-BF-0F-62
Bridge ID Priority : 32768 (MST instance 0)
Bridge Max Age : 20 sec
Hello Time : 02 sec

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

229

Forward Delay :

15 sec

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS

Table 5-72 MSTP Region/CIST Setup
Field

Setting Options

Default
Settings

STP
Region Name
Revision
Bridge ID MAC ADDR

Enable, Disable
MST name
00001

Bridge ID Priority
Bridge Max Age
Hello Time
Forward Delay

Setting range is: 0~65535
Setting range is: 6~40
Setting range is: 1~10
Setting range is: 4~300

Notes

This setting is for display only. It
cannot be changed on this screen.
32768
20 sec.
02 sec
15 sec

The following prompt will appear. Press Y to change the configuration. If you want to save
this configuration you must return to the O9400S Main Menu and press V
>> Change configuration (Y/N)? (Note:to save,please use V-command)

B. Spantree Port Enable
The Unit Menu path for Spantree Port Enable is as follows:
T > Switch Setup
D > MSTP/RSTP Setup
B -> Spantree Port Enable
The Spantree Port Enable screen will appear. Enter your settings. Press the Enter key.
Unit TG3 -GE-SW
=== Spantree Port Enable ===
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB/`: ROLL UP/DOWN OPTIONS
Port
Spantree
--------- ----------WAN#1(GE)
enable
LAN#1(FE)
enable
LAN#2(FE)
enable
LAN#3(FE)
enable
LAN#4(GE)
enable

17:27:02 25/38/20UU

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

Table 5-73 Spantree Port Enable Setting Options
Field

Setting Options

Default Settings

WAN#1(GE)
LAN#1(FE)
LAN#2(FE)
LAN#3(FE)
LAN#4(GE)

Enable, Disable
Enable, Disable
Enable, Disable
Enable, Disable
Enable, Disable

Enable
Enable
Enable
Enable
Enable

Notes

The following prompt will appear. Press Y to change the configuration. If you want to save
this configuration you must return to the O9400S Main Menu and press V
>> Change configuration (Y/N)? (Note:to save,please use V-command)

C. MSTP Instance/Vlan Setup
The Unit Menu path for MSTP Instance/Vlan Setup is as follows:
T > Switch Setup
D > MSTP/RSTP Setup
C -> MSTP Instance/Vlan Setup

230

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS
The MSTP Instance/Vlan Setup screen will appear. Enter your settings. Press the Enter key.
Unit TG3 -GE-SW
=== MSTP Instance/Vlan Setup ===
17:27:38 25/38/20UU
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, Please Input: 1~64, BACKSPACE to edit
MST instance :01

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

Table 5-74 MSTP Instance/Vlan Setting Options #1
Field

Setting Options

Default Settings

MST Intance

Range is 1 to 64

O1

Notes

An expanded screen will appear. You will be given the option to either Add or Delete. Use
the Tab key to scroll in your choice. Press the Enter key.
Unit TG3 -GE-SW
=== MSTP Instance/Vlan Setup ===
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB/`: ROLL UP/DOWN OPTIONS
MST instance :01
Priority : 32768
Delete from Vlan#0001 to Vlan#0001

15:19:45 18/09/20UU

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

The following prompt will appear. Press Y to change the configuration. If you want to save
this configuration you must return to the O9400S Main Menu and press V
>> Change configuration (Y/N)? (Note:to save,please use V-command)

D. MSTP Instance/Priority Setup
The Unit Menu path for MSTP Instance/Priority Setup is as follows:
T > Switch Setup
D > MSTP/RSTP Setup
D -> MSTP Instance/Priority Setup
The MSTP Instance/Priority Setup screen will appear. Enter your settings. Press the Enter
key.
Unit TG3 -GE-SW
=== MSTP Instance/Priority Setup === 17:28:05 25/38/20UU
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, Please Input: 1~64, BACKSPACE to edit
MST instance :01

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

231

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS

Table 5-75 MSTP Instance/Priority Settng Options
Field

Setting Options

Default Settings

Notes

MST Instance

Range is 1 to 64

01

Only applicable in E-Lan
mode

An expanded screen will appear. You will be given the option to either Add or Delete. Use the
Tab key to scroll in your choice. Press the Enter key.
The following prompt will appear. Press Y to change the configuration. If you want to save
this configuration you must return to the O9400S Main Menu and press V
>> Change configuration (Y/N)? (Note:to save,please use V-command)

E. MSTP/RSTP Port Setup
The Unit Menu path for MSTP/RSTP Port Setup is as follows:
T > Switch Setup
D > MSTP/RSTP Setup
E > MSTP/RSTP Port Setup
Either the MSTP Port Setup screen or the RSTP Port Setup screen will appear depending on
what mode you are in (ie. E-LAN for MSTP, E-LINE fort RSTP). Enter your settings. Press
the Enter key.
Note: For MSTP you must first select an MST instance.
Unit TG3 -GE-SW
=== MSTP Port Setup ===
17:28:30 25/38/20UU
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, Please Input: 0~64, BACKSPACE to edit
MST instance :00

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

Table 5-76 MST instance Setting Options
Field

Setting Options

Default Settings

MST Intance

Range is 1 to 64

01

Notes

An expanded screen will appear. Scroll in your settings for each port (eg. WAN#1, LAN#1, etc).
Press the Enter key. An MSTP screen is shown below.
Unit TG3 -GE-SW
=== MSTP Port Setup ===
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB/`: ROLL UP/DOWN OPTIONS
Port
Role
State Cost
Prio Edg-P
------------------- ----- --------- ---- ----WAN#1(GE)
disabled
Blk 000003392 128 No
LAN#1(FE)
disabled
Blk 000003392 128 No
LAN#2(FE)
disabled
Blk 000003392 128 No
LAN#3(FE)
disabled
Blk 000003392 128 No
LAN#4(GE)
disabled
Blk 000003392 128 No

MST instance:0
<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

232

15:45:32 18/09/20UU
Type
Boundary
-------- -----------auto
Internal
auto
Internal
auto
Internal
auto
Internal
auto
Internal

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS

Table 5-77 MSTP Port Setting Options
Port

Field

Settings

Default Setting

WAN1~8*
LAN1~4*

Cost
Setting range is: 1~999
019
Prio
Setting range is: 0~255
128
Edg-p
No, Yes
No
P-P
No, Yes
No
*E-LAN mode must be used if you wish to use the Ethernet switch for VLAN. Portmap mode must be
used if you wish to use the Ethernet switch for Port Mapping. Please refer to Table 5-37.

The RSTP screen appears as shown below. Scroll in your settings for each port (eg. WAN#1,
LAN#1, etc). Press the Enter key.
Unit TG3 -GE-SW
=== RSTP Port Setup ===
16:05:23 18/09/20UU
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB/`: ROLL UP/DOWN OPTIONS
Port
Role
State Cost
Prio Edg-P
Type
------------------- ----- --------- ---- ----- -------WAN#1(GE)
disabled
Blk 000003392 128 No
auto
LAN#4(GE)
disabled
Blk 000003392 128 No
auto

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

Table 5-78 RSTP Port Setting Options
Port

Field

Settings

Default Setting

WAN1~8*
LAN1~4*

Cost
Setting range is: 1~200000000
019
Prio
Setting range is: 0~255
128
Edg-p
No, Yes
No
Type
auto, share, pt. to pt.
auto
*E-LAN mode must be used if you wish to use the Ethernet switch for VLAN. Portmap mode must be
used if you wish to use the Ethernet switch for Port Mapping. Please refer to Table 5-37.

The following prompt will appear. Press Y to change the configuration. If you want to save
this configuration you must return to the O9400S Main Menu and press V
>> Change configuration (Y/N)? (Note:to save,please use V-command)

F. RSTP Bridge Setup
The Unit Menu path for RSTP Bridge Setup is as follows:
T > Switch Setup
D > MSTP/RSTP Setup
F > RSTP Bridge Setup
The RSTP Bridge Setup screen will appear. Enter your settings. Press the Enter key.
Note: The screen below is for Ethernet with a switch. The screen for Ethernet without a
switch will be different.
Unit TG3 -GE-SW
=== RSTP Bridge Setup ===
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB/`: ROLL UP/DOWN OPTIONS

14:15:52 25/38/20UU

STP : Disable

Bridge ID MAC ADDR : 00-1F-BF-BF-0F-62
Bridge ID Priority : 32768
Bridge Max Age : 20 sec
Hello Time :

02 sec

Forward Delay :

15 sec

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

Note: Bridge max. age must be ≥ 2 x (Hello time+1) and ≤ 2 x (Forward Delay – 1).

233

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS
Table 5-79 RSTP Bridge Setting Options for Ethernet with Switch
Field

Settings

Default Setting

RSTP
Bridge ID MAC ADDR
Bridge ID Priority

Enable, Disable

Disable

Setting range is:
0~65535
Setting range is: 6~40
Setting range is: 1~10
Setting range is: 4~300

32768

Bridge Max Age
Hello Time
Forward Delay

Note

20 sec.
02 sec
15 sec

The following prompt will appear. Press Y to change the configuration. If you want to save
this configuration you must return to the O9400S Main Menu and press V
>> Change configuration (Y/N)? (Note:to save,please use V-command)

5.42.8.5 IGMP Setup
The Unit Menu path for IGMP Setup is as follows:
T > Switch Setup
E > IGMP Setup
The Switch Setup screen will appear. Press A, B, C, D, E or F.
Unit TG3 -FE-SW

=== IGMP Setup ===

A
B
C
D
E
F

->
->
->
->
->
->

IGMP
IGMP
IGMP
IGMP
IGMP
IGMP

13:38:32 02/02/2010

Snooping
Fast Leave
Router Port
IP Multicast Range
Cross Vlan I
Cross Vlan II

<< Press ESC key to return to Main Menu or enter a command >>

A. IGMP Snooping
The Unit Menu path for RSTP Bridge Setup is as follows:
T > Switch Setup
E > IGMP Setup
A > IGMP Snooping
The IGMP Snooping screen will appear.
Unit TG3 -FE-SW
=== IGMP Snooping ===
ARROW KEYS : CURSOR MOVE , ENTER KEY : ITEM SELECT

IGMP Snooping
: OFF
Last Query Interval : 00000 (milli-seconds)

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

234

14:13:22 02/02/2010

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS
Table 5-80 IGMP Snooping Setting Options
Field
IGMP Snooping
Last Query Interval
(in milli-seconds)

Setting Options
ON, OFF
0 ~ 65535

Default Setting
OFF
00000

Note

B. IGMP Fast Leave
The Unit Menu path for IGMP Fast Leave is as follows:
T > Switch Setup
E > IGMP Setup
B > IGMP Fast Leave
The IGMP fast leave screen will appear. Enter a number between 1 to 4094 and press enter.
Unit TG3 -FE-SW
=== IGMP Fast Leave ===
17:02:22 02/02/2010
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, Please Input: 1~4094, BACKSPACE to edit
VID# :
0001

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

Then the system will ask you to set the Vid IGMP Fast Leave. Use Tab to select and press
enter after you have made your setting.
Unit TG3 -FE-SW
=== IGMP Fast Leave ===
ARROW KEYS : CURSOR MOVE , ENTER KEY : ITEM SELECT
VID# :
0001

Vid IGMP Fast Leave : OFF

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

235

17:07:00 02/02/2010

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS
C. IGMP Router Port
The Menu path for IGMP Router Port is as follows:
T > Switch Setup
E > IGMP Setup
C > IGMP Router Port
The IGMP Router Port screen will appear.
Unit TG3 -FE-SW
=== IGMP Router Port ===
ARROW KEYS : CURSOR MOVE , ENTER KEY : ITEM SELECT
Router Port
WAN#1(FE): No
WAN#2(FE): No
WAN#3(FE): No
WAN#4(FE): No
WAN#5(FE): No
WAN#6(FE): No
WAN#7(FE): No
WAN#8(FE): No
LAN#1(FE): No
LAN#2(FE): No
LAN#3(FE): No
LAN#4(GE): No

17:11:04 02/02/2010

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

Table 5-81 IGMP Router Port Setting Options
Field
WAN1~ 8
LAN1 ~ 3, LAN4(GE)

Setting Options
Yes, No
Yes, No

Default Setting
No
No

D. IP Multicast Range
The Menu path for IGMP IP Multicast Range is as follows:
T > Switch Setup
E > IGMP Setup
D > IGMP IP Multicast Range
The IGMP IP Multicast Range screen will appear.
Unit TG3 -FE-SW
=== IGMP IP Multicast Range ===
17:19:40 02/02/2010
Please Input: 224.0.1.0 to 239.255.255.255, BACKSPACE to edit
MC IP - start
MC IP - end
WAN1
000.000.000.000
000.000.000.000
WAN2
000.000.000.000
000.000.000.000
WAN3
000.000.000.000
000.000.000.000
WAN4
000.000.000.000
000.000.000.000
WAN5
000.000.000.000
000.000.000.000
WAN6
000.000.000.000
000.000.000.000
WAN7
000.000.000.000
000.000.000.000
WAN8
000.000.000.000
000.000.000.000
LAN1
000.000.000.000
000.000.000.000
LAN2
000.000.000.000
000.000.000.000
LAN3
000.000.000.000
000.000.000.000
LAN4
000.000.000.000
000.000.000.000

Only multicast IPs between 'start' and 'end' are acceptable for that port.
<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

236

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS
Table 5-82 IP Multicast Range Setting Options
Field
MC IP start
MC IP end

Setting Options
From 224.0.1.0 to
239.255.255.255

Default Setting

Note
The multicast range from
224.0.0.0 to 224.0.0.255 is not
configurable. Packets with
multicast IPs in this range are
always passed.

E. IGMP Cross Vlan I
The Menu path for IGMP Cross Vlan Ι is as follows:
T > Switch Setup
E > IGMP Setup
E > IGMP Cross Vlan Ι
The IGMP Cross Vlan Ι screen will appear.
Unit TG3 -FE-SW
=== IGMP Cross Vlan I ===
ARROW KEYS : CURSOR MOVE , ENTER KEY : ITEM SELECT
IGMP Cross Vlan
: OFF
IGMP Cross VlanID : 0000
Multicast IP
WAN#1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 LAN#1 2 3 4
1 000.000.000.000
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
2 000.000.000.000
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
3 000.000.000.000
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
4 000.000.000.000
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
5 000.000.000.000
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
6 000.000.000.000
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
7 000.000.000.000
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
8 000.000.000.000
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
9 000.000.000.000
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
10 000.000.000.000
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
11 000.000.000.000
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
12 000.000.000.000
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
13 000.000.000.000
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
14 000.000.000.000
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
15 000.000.000.000
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
16 000.000.000.000
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0

17:29:56 02/02/2010

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

Table 5-83 IGMP Cross Vlan Ι Setting Options
Field
IGMP Cross Vlan
IGMP Cross Vlan ID
Multicast IP
WAN1 ~ WAN8
LAN1 ~ LAN4

Setting Options
ON, OFF
1 ~ 4094
224.0.1.0 to
239.255.255.255
0, 1

Default Setting
OFF

Note

0

0 = port is not selected
1 = selected
Use the tab key to make this
configuration.

237

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS
F. IGMP Cross Vlan II
The Menu path for IGMP Cross Vlan ΙΙ is as follows:
T > Switch Setup
E > IGMP Setup
F > IGMP Cross Vlan ΙΙ
The IGMP Cross Vlan ΙΙ screen will appear.
Unit TG3 -FE-SW
=== IGMP Cross Vlan II ===
18:21:48 02/02/2010
Please Input: 224.0.1.0 to 239.255.255.255, BACKSPACE to edit

17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32

Multicast IP
WAN#1
000.000.000.000
0
000.000.000.000
0
000.000.000.000
0
000.000.000.000
0
000.000.000.000
0
000.000.000.000
0
000.000.000.000
0
000.000.000.000
0
000.000.000.000
0
000.000.000.000
0
000.000.000.000
0
000.000.000.000
0
000.000.000.000
0
000.000.000.000
0
000.000.000.000
0
000.000.000.000
0

2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

4
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

5
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

6
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

7
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

8
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

LAN#1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

4
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

Table 5-84 IGMP Cross Vlan ΙΙ Setting Options
Field
Multicast IP (17 ~ 32)

Setting Options
224.0.1.0 to
239.255.255.255

Default Setting

WAN1~WAN8
LAN1 ~ LAN4

Note
0 means the port is not
selected for the
corresponding multicast IP,
whereas 1 means the port is
selected. Use the tab key to
make this configuration.

5.42.8.6 Flow Control Setup
The Unit Menu path for Flow Control Setup is as follows:
T > Switch Setup
F > Flow Control Setup
The Flow Control Setup screen will appear.
Note: The screen below will appear exactly as shown for Fast Ethernet card e-lan mode and
port mapping mode. In e-line mode only four WAN ports (WAN#1-WAN#4) will appear on the
screen. For Gigabit Ethernet only WAN#1 will appear on the screen.

238

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS
Unit TG3 -FE-SW
=== Flow Control Setup ===
ARROW KEYS : CURSOR MOVE , ENTER KEY : ITEM SELECT
port
Flow control
Asymmetric
WAN#1(FE) :ON
OFF
WAN#2(FE) :ON
OFF
WAN#3(FE) :ON
OFF
WAN#4(FE) :ON
OFF
WAN#5(FE) :ON
OFF
WAN#6(FE) :ON
OFF
WAN#7(FE) :ON
OFF
WAN#8(FE) :ON
OFF
LAN#1(FE) :ON
OFF
LAN#2(FE) :ON
OFF
LAN#3(FE) :ON
OFF
LAN#4(GE) :ON
OFF

17:43:53 10/21/2008

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

Table 5-85 Flow Control Setting Options for Ethernet with Switch
Field
WAN#1
WAN#2
WAN#3
WAN#4
WAN#5
WAN#6
WAN#7
WAN#8
LAN#1
LAN#2
LAN#3
LAN#4

(FE)
(FE)
(FE)
(FE)
(FE)
(FE)
(FE)
(FE)
(FE)
(FE)
(FE)
(FE)

Flow
Control
ON,
OFF

Default
Setting
ON

Assymetric
ON,
OFF

Settings
Default
Setting
OFF

Note

5.42.8.7 QoS Setup
The Unit Menu path for QoS Setup is as follows:
T > Switch Setup
G > QoS Setup
The Qos Setup screen will appear.
Unit TG3 -FE-SW

=== Qos Setup ===

A
B
C
D
E

->
->
->
->
->

17:44:50 10/21/2008

Class of Service Setup
TCP/UDP Port Access Control
Transmission Scheduling
Transmission WRED Setup
Rate Control Setup

<< Press ESC key to return to Main Menu or enter a command >>

239

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS
5.42.8.7.1
Class of Service Setup
The Unit Menu path for Class of Service Setup is as follows:
T > Switch Setup
F > QoS Setup
A > Class of Service Setup
The following screen will appear. Press A, B, C, D or E.
Unit TG3 -FE-SW

= Class of Service Setup =

A
B
C
D
E

->
->
->
->
->

17:45:12 10/21/2008

Priority Mode Setup
Fixed Priority Setup
Vlan Tag Priority Setup
TOS field Priority Setup
Distrusted Port Setup

<< Press ESC key to return to Main Menu or enter a command >>

Priority Mode Setup
The Unit Menu path for Priority Mode Setup is as follows:
A > Priority Mode Setup
The Priority Mode Setup screen will appear. Enter your settings. Press the Enter key.
Unit TG3 -FE-SW
=== Priority Mode Setup ===
ARROW KEYS : CURSOR MOVE , ENTER KEY : ITEM SELECT

17:46:00 10/21/2008

WAN#1(FE)
Tag/TOS
WAN#2(FE)
Tag/TOS
WAN#3(FE)
Tag/TOS
WAN#4(FE)
Tag/TOS
WAN#5(FE)
Tag/TOS
WAN#6(FE)
Tag/TOS
WAN#7(FE)
Tag/TOS
WAN#8(FE)
Tag/TOS
LAN#1(FE)
Tag/TOS
LAN#2(FE)
Tag/TOS
LAN#3(FE)
Tag/TOS
LAN#4(GE)
Tag/TOS
Packet Priority : Tag
<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

Table 5-86 Priority Mode Setting Options for Ethernet with Switch
Field
WAN#1 (FE)
WAN#2 (FE)
WAN#3 (FE)
WAN#4 (FE)
WAN#5 (FE)
WAN#6 (FE)
WAN#7 (FE)
WAN#8 (FE)
LAN#1 (FE)
LAN#2 (FE)
LAN#3 (FE)
LAN#4 (FE)
Packet Priority

Setting Options
Tag/TOS,
Fixed

Default Setting
Tag/TOS

Tag, TOS

Tag

240

Note

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS
Fixed Priority Setup
The Unit Menu path for Fixed Priority Setup is as follows:
B > Fixed Priority Setup
The Fixed Priority Setup screen will appear. Enter your settings. Press the Enter key.
Unit TG3 -FE-SW
=== Fixed Priority Setup ===
ARROW KEYS : CURSOR MOVE , ENTER KEY : ITEM SELECT
Transmission priority
Drop precedence
WAN#1(FE)
P0
low-drop
WAN#2(FE)
P0
low-drop
WAN#3(FE)
P0
low-drop
WAN#4(FE)
P0
low-drop
WAN#5(FE)
P0
low-drop
WAN#6(FE)
P0
low-drop
WAN#7(FE)
P0
low-drop
WAN#8(FE)
P0
low-drop
LAN#1(FE)
P0
low-drop
LAN#2(FE)
P0
low-drop
LAN#3(FE)
P0
low-drop
LAN#4(GE)
P0
low-drop

17:46:17 10/21/2008

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

Table 5-87 Fixed Priority Setting Options for Ethernet with Switch
Field
WAN#1
WAN#2
WAN#3
WAN#4
WAN#5
WAN#6
WAN#7
WAN#8
LAN#1
LAN#2
LAN#3
LAN#4

(FE)
(FE)
(FE)
(FE)
(FE)
(FE)
(FE)
(FE)
(FE)
(FE)
(FE)
(FE)

Transmission
Priority Setting
Options

Default
Setting

Drop
Precedence
Setting Options

Default
Setting

P0,
P1,
P2,
P3

P0

low-drop,
high-drop

low-drop

Note

VLAN Tag Priority Setup
The Unit Menu path for VLAN Tag Priority Setup is as follows:
C > VLAN Tag Priority Setup
The VLAN Tag Priority Setup screen will appear. Enter your settings. Press the Enter key.
Unit TG3 -FE-SW
=== Vlan Tag Priority Setup ===
ARROW KEYS : CURSOR MOVE , ENTER KEY : ITEM SELECT
Tag priority
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

Transmission priority
P0
P0
P0
P0
P0
P0
P0
P0

Drop precedence
low-drop
low-drop
low-drop
low-drop
low-drop
low-drop
low-drop
low-drop

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

241

17:46:38 10/21/2008

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS
Table 5-88 VLAN Tag Priority Setting Options for Ethernet with Switch
Tag Priority
Field

Transmission
Priority Setting
Options

Default
Setting

Drop
Precedence
Setting Options

Default
Setting

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

P0,
P1,
P2,
P3

P0

low-drop,
high-drop

low-drop

Note

TOS Field Priority Setup
The Unit Menu path for TOS Field Priority Setup is as follows:
D > TOS Field Priority Setup
The TOS Field Priority Setup screen will appear. Enter your settings. Press the Enter key.
Unit TG3 -FE-SW
=== TOS field Priority Setup ===
ARROW KEYS : CURSOR MOVE , ENTER KEY : ITEM SELECT
Tos priority
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

Transmission priority
P0
P0
P0
P0
P0
P0
P0
P0

17:47:01 10/21/2008

Drop precedence
low-drop
low-drop
low-drop
low-drop
low-drop
low-drop
low-drop
low-drop

TOS field: [4:2]
<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

Table 5-89 TOS Field Priority Setting Options for Ethernet with Switch
Tag Priority
Field

Transmission
Priority Setting
Options

Default
Setting

Drop
Precedence
Setting Options

Default
Setting

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

P0,
P1,
P2,
P3

P0

low-drop,
high-drop

low-drop

TOS Field

[4:2], [7:5}

[4:2]]

242

Note

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS
Distrusted Port Setup
The Unit Menu path for Distrusted Port Setup is as follows:
E > Distrusted Port Setup
The Distrusted Port Setup screen will appear. Enter your settings. Press the Enter key.
Note: Distrusted Port Setup is only available in e-lan mode.
Unit TG3 -FE-SW
=== Distrusted Port Setup ===
17:47:34 10/21/2008
ARROW KEYS : CURSOR MOVE , ENTER KEY : ITEM SELECT
Port
Distrusted
New Tag Priority(for distrusted port)
WAN#1(FE)
trusted
0
WAN#2(FE)
trusted
0
WAN#3(FE)
trusted
0
WAN#4(FE)
trusted
0
WAN#5(FE)
trusted
0
WAN#6(FE)
trusted
0
WAN#7(FE)
trusted
0
WAN#8(FE)
trusted
0
LAN#1(FE)
trusted
0
LAN#2(FE)
trusted
0
LAN#3(FE)
trusted
0
LAN#4(GE)
trusted
0
<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

Table 5-90 Distrusted Port Setting Options
Port
WAN#1
WAN#2
WAN#3
WAN#4
WAN#5
WAN#6
WAN#7
WAN#8
LAN#1
LAN#2
LAN#3
LAN#4

(FE)
(FE)
(FE)
(FE)
(FE)
(FE)
(FE)
(FE)
(FE)
(FE)
(FE)
(GE)

Distrusted
Setting
Options

Default
Setting

New Tag
Priority (for
distrusted port)

Default
Setting

trusted,
distrusted

trusted

0-7

0

Note

5.42.8.7.2
TCP/UDP Port Access Control
The Unit Menu path for TCP/UDP Port Access Control is as follows:
T > Switch Setup
F > QoS Setup
B > TCP/UDP Port Access Control
The following screen will appear. Press A, B, or C.
Unit TG3 -FE-SW

= TCP/UDP Port priority Setup =

17:47:51 10/21/2008

A -> TCP/UDP Well Known Port Priority Setup
B -> TCP/UDP User Define Port Priority Setup
C -> TCP/UDP Port Range Priority Setup

<< Press ESC key to return to Main Menu or enter a command >>

243

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS
TCP/UDP Well Known Port Priority Setup
The Unit Menu path for TCP/UDP Well Known Port Priority Setup is as follows:
A > TCP/UDP Well Known Port Priority Setup
The Well Known Port Priority screen will appear. Enter your settings. Press the Enter key.
Unit TG3 -FE-SW
=== Well Known Port Priority ===
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB/`: ROLL UP/DOWN OPTIONS
TCP/UDP Port
23
512
6000
443
111
22555
22
554

Port Enable
DISABLE
DISABLE
DISABLE
DISABLE
DISABLE
DISABLE
DISABLE
DISABLE

17:48:08 10/21/2008

Priority(tx) Precedence(drop) Discard
P0
low-drop
DISABLE
P0
low-drop
DISABLE
P0
low-drop
DISABLE
P0
low-drop
DISABLE
P0
low-drop
DISABLE
P0
low-drop
DISABLE
P0
low-drop
DISABLE
P0
low-drop
DISABLE

NOTE: P0=lowest priority

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

TCP/UDP User Define Port Priority Setup
The Unit Menu path for TCP/UDP User Define Port Priority Setup is as follows:
B > TCP/UDP User Define Port Priority Setup
The User Define Port Priority screen will appear. Enter your settings. Press the Enter key.
Unit TG3 -FE-SW
=== User Define Port Priority ===
17:48:22 10/21/2008
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, Please Input: 1~65535, BACKSPACE to edit
TCP/UDP Port
00000
00000
00000
00000
00000
00000
00000
00000

Port Enable
DISABLE
DISABLE
DISABLE
DISABLE
DISABLE
DISABLE
DISABLE
DISABLE

Priority(tx) Precedence(drop) Discard
P0
low-drop
DISABLE
P0
low-drop
DISABLE
P0
low-drop
DISABLE
P0
low-drop
DISABLE
P0
low-drop
DISABLE
P0
low-drop
DISABLE
P0
low-drop
DISABLE
P0
low-drop
DISABLE

NOTE: P0=lowest priority
<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

Table 5-91 User Define Port Priority Setting Options
TCP/UD
P Port
Settings
0-65535

Default
Setting
00000

Port
Enable
Settings
ENABLE,
DISABLE

Default
Setting

Priority
Settings

Default
Setting

Precedence
Settings

Default
Setting

Discard
Settings

Default
Setting

DISABLE

P0, P1,
P2, P3

P0

low-drop,
high-drop

lowdrop

ENABLE,
DISABLE

DISAB
LE

TCP/UDP Port Range Priority Setup
The Unit Menu path for TCP/UDP Port Range Priority Setup is as follows:
C > TCP/UDP Port Range Priority Setup
The Port Range Priority Setup screen will appear. Enter your settings. Press the Enter key.

244

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS
Unit TG3 -FE-SW
=== Port Range Priority Setup ===
17:48:38 10/21/2008
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, Please Input: 1~65535, BACKSPACE to edit

Port Num(Min):00000
Port Num(Max):00000
Tx Priority :P0
Drop Priority:low-drop
Filtering
:NO

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

Table 5-92 CP/UDP Port Range Priority Settings
Field

Settings

Default Setting

Note

Port Num(Min)
Port Num(Max)

0-65535
0-65535

00000
00000

Max value must be
greater than Min.
value

Tx Priority
Drop Priority
Filtering

P0, P1, P2, P3
Low-drop, hig-drop
NO, YES

P0
low-drop
NO

5.42.8.7.3
Transmission Scheduling
The Unit Menu path for Transmission Scheduling is as follows:
T > Switch Setup
F > QoS Setup
C > Transmission Scheduling
The following screen will appear. Press A or B.
Unit TG3 -FE-SW

=== Transmission Scheduling ===

17:48:55 10/21/2008

A -> Scheduling Algorithm
B -> WFQ Weight Setup

<< Press ESC key to return to Main Menu or enter a command >>

245

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS
Scheduling Algorithm
The Unit Menu path for Scheduling Algorithm is as follows:
A > Scheduling Algorithm
The Scheduling Algorithm screen will appear. Enter your settings. Press the Enter key.
Note: The screen below will appear exactly as shown for Fast Ethernet card e-lan mode and
port mapping mode. In e-line mode only four WAN ports (WAN#1-WAN#4) will appear
on the screen. For Gigabit Ethernet only WAN#1 will appear on the screen.

Unit TG3 -FE-SW
=== Scheduling Algorithm ===
ARROW KEYS : CURSOR MOVE , ENTER KEY : ITEM SELECT
port
P0 queue
P1 queue
P2 queue
P3 queue
WAN#1(FE) : SP
SP
SP
SP
WAN#2(FE) : SP
SP
SP
SP
WAN#3(FE) : SP
SP
SP
SP
WAN#4(FE) : SP
SP
SP
SP
WAN#5(FE) : SP
SP
SP
SP
WAN#6(FE) : SP
SP
SP
SP
WAN#7(FE) : SP
SP
SP
SP
WAN#8(FE) : SP
SP
SP
SP
LAN#1(FE) : SP
SP
SP
SP
LAN#2(FE) : SP
SP
SP
SP
LAN#3(FE) : SP
SP
SP
SP
LAN#4(GE) : SP
SP
SP
SP

17:49:38 10/21/2008

SP:Strict Priority, WFQ:Weighted Fair Queuing
<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

Table 5-93 Scheduling Algorithm Setting Options
Port
WAN#1
WAN#2
WAN#3
WAN#4
WAN#5
WAN#6
WAN#7
WAN#8
LAN#1
LAN#2
LAN#3
LAN#4

(FE)
(FE)
(FE)
(FE)
(FE)
(FE)
(FE)
(FE)
(FE)
(FE)
(FE)
(GE)

Queue Settings for:
P0, P1, P2 & P3

Default Setting

Note

SP, WFQ

SP

SP= Strict Priority
WFQ= Weighted Fair Queuing

WFQ Weight Setup
The Unit Menu path for WFQ Weight Setup is as follows:
B > WFQ Weight Setup
The WFQ Weight Setup screen will appear. Enter your settings. Press the Enter key.
Note: The screen below will appear exactly as shown for Fast Ethernet card e-lan mode and
port mapping mode. In e-line mode only four WAN ports (WAN#1-WAN#4) will appear on the
screen. For Gigabit Ethernet only WAN#1 will appear on the screen.

246

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS
Unit TG3 -FE-SW
=== WFQ Weight Setup ===
17:49:57 10/21/2008
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, Please Input: 0~100, BACKSPACE to edit
port
P0 queue
P1 queue
P2 queue
P3 queue
WAN#1(FE) : 025%
025%
025%
025%
WAN#2(FE) : 025%
025%
025%
025%
WAN#3(FE) : 025%
025%
025%
025%
WAN#4(FE) : 025%
025%
025%
025%
WAN#5(FE) : 025%
025%
025%
025%
WAN#6(FE) : 025%
025%
025%
025%
WAN#7(FE) : 025%
025%
025%
025%
WAN#8(FE) : 025%
025%
025%
025%
LAN#1(FE) : 025%
025%
025%
025%
LAN#2(FE) : 025%
025%
025%
025%
LAN#3(FE) : 025%
025%
025%
025%
LAN#4(GE) : 025%
025%
025%
025%

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

Table 5-94 WFQ Weight Setup Setting Options
Port
WAN#1
WAN#2
WAN#3
WAN#4
WAN#5
WAN#6
WAN#7
WAN#8
LAN#1
LAN#2
LAN#3
LAN#4

(FE)
(FE)
(FE)
(FE)
(FE)
(FE)
(FE)
(FE)
(FE)
(FE)
(FE)
(GE)

5.42.8.7.4

Queue Settings for:
P0, P1, P2 & P3

Default Setting

0-100%

025%

Note

Transmission WRED Setup

The Unit Menu path for Transmission WRED Setup is as follows:

T > Switch Setup
F > QoS Setup
D > Transmission WRED Setup
The Transmission WRED Setup screen will appear. Enter your settings. Press the Enter key.
Unit TG3 -FE-SW
=== Transmission WRED Setup ===
17:50:16 10/21/2008
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, Please Input: 0~15, BACKSPACE to edit

X%
Y%
Z%
Level1
Level2

:
:
:
:
:

12(x6.25%)
00(x6.25%)
00(x6.25%)
0032
0064

Level1 : When destination queue size reaches Level1 threshold,
the high-drop packets will be dropped at X%,
the low-drop packets will be dropped at Y%.
Level2 : When destination queue size reaches Level2 threshold,
the high-drop packets will be dropped at 100%,
the low-drop packets will be dropped at Z%.

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

247

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS

Table 5-95 Transmission WRED Setting Options
Field

Setting
Options

Default
Setting

X%
Y%
Z%
Level 1
Level 2

0-15

12
0
0
0032
0064

0-2000

5.42.8.7.5

Note
Level 1: When destination queue size reaches Leve 1 threshold,
the high-drop packets will be dropped at X%, the low-drop packets
will be dropped at Y%.

When destination queue size reaches Level1 threshold,
the high-drop packets will be dropped at X%,the low-drop
packets will be dropped at Y%.

Rate Control Setup

The Unit Menu path for Rate Control Setup is as follows:

T > Switch Setup
F > QoS Setup
E > Rate Control Setup
The following screen will appear. Press A or B.
Unit TG3 -FE-SW

=== Rate Control Setup ===

17:50:30 10/21/2008

A ->Rate Ctrl/Ingress WRED Setup
B ->Port Bitrate Setup

<< Press ESC key to return to Main Menu or enter a command >>

Rate Ctrl/Ingress WRED Setup
The Unit Menu path for Rate Ctrl/Ingress WRED Setup is as follows:
A > Rate Ctrl/Ingress WRED Setup
The Rate Ctrl/Ingress WRED Setupscreen will appear. Enter your settings. Press the Enter
key.
Unit TG3 -FE-SW
=== Rate Ctrl/Ingress WRED Setup ===
ARROW KEYS : CURSOR MOVE , ENTER KEY : ITEM SELECT

17:51:01 10/21/2008

[Rate control for egress/ingress]
Egress Rate Control: DISABLE
Ingress Rate Control: DISABLE
[Drop percentage for ingress WRED]
Ra%(granularity 6.25%): 00
Rb%(granularity 6.25%): 00

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

Table 5-96 Rate Ctrl/Ingress WRED Setting Options
Field

Setting Options

Egrerss Rate Control
Ingress Rate Control
Ra% (granularity 6.25%)
Rb% (granularity 6.25%)

ENABLE,
DISABLE

Default Setting
DISABLE
00

0-15

248

Note

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS
Port Bitrate Setup
The Unit Menu path for Port Bitrate Setup is as follows:
A > Port Bitrate Setup
The Port Bitrate Setup screen will appear. Enter your settings. Press the Enter key.
Note: The screen below will appear exactly as shown for Fast Ethernet card e-lan mode and
port mapping mode. In e-line mode only four WAN ports (WAN#1-WAN#4) will appear on the
screen. For Gigabit Ethernet only WAN#1 will appear on the screen.
Unit TG3 -FE-SW
=== Port Bitrate Setup ===
17:51:14 10/21/2008
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, Please Input: 0~1600, BACKSPACE to edit
port
Egress rate
Ingress rate
=multiple*gran
=multiple*gran
WAN#1(FE) : 0160 x 640k
0160 x 640k
WAN#2(FE) : 0160 x 640k
0160 x 640k
WAN#3(FE) : 0160 x 640k
0160 x 640k
WAN#4(FE) : 0160 x 640k
0160 x 640k
WAN#5(FE) : 0160 x 640k
0160 x 640k
WAN#6(FE) : 0160 x 640k
0160 x 640k
WAN#7(FE) : 0160 x 640k
0160 x 640k
WAN#8(FE) : 0160 x 640k
0160 x 640k
LAN#1(FE) : 0160 x 640k
0160 x 640k
LAN#2(FE) : 0160 x 640k
0160 x 640k
LAN#3(FE) : 0160 x 640k
0160 x 640k

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

Table 5-97 Port Bitrate Setting Options
Port

WAN#1
WAN#2
WAN#3
WAN#4
WAN#5
WAN#6
WAN#7
WAN#8
LAN#1
LAN#2
LAN#3

(FE)
(FE)
(FE)
(FE)
(FE)
(FE)
(FE)
(FE)
(FE)
(FE)
(FE)

Egress Rate
Setting
Options

Default
Setting

Ingress
Rate
Setting
Options

Default
Setting

0-1600x640k,
64K

0160 x 640k

0-1600x640k,
64K

0160 x
640k

249

Note

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS
5.42.9 MAC Learning Setup
The menu path for MAC learning is as follows:
T > Switch Setup
H > MAC Learning Setup
The MAC Learning Setup screen will appear. Use the tab key to change the setting.
Unit TG3 -FE-SW
=== MAC Learning Setup ===
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB/`: ROLL UP/DOWN OPTIONS

18:30:38 02/02/2010

Switch MAC Learning in "e-line" Mode: Enable

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

Table 5-98 MAC Learning Setting Options
Field
MAC Learning

Setting Options
Enable, Disable

Default Setting
Enable

Note
The disable option is only
available in e-line mode. MAC
learning is always enabled in e-lan
and portmap mode.

5.42.10 Unit Load Default and Reset
The Unit Menu path for Unit Load Default and Reset is as follows:
W > Unit Load Default and Reset
Press W. The following prompt will appear. Press Y for Yes
Reset - are you sure ? [Y/N]

Key in your password. Press the Enter key.
>>Password:

250

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS

5.43 Ethernet No-Switch Setup
For bachground information on Ethernet please refer to CHAPTER 7 ETHERNET APPENDIX.
5.43.1 Unit Menu Tree

Figure 5-13 Ethernet Interface Card without Switch VT-100 Menu Tree

251

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS

5.43.2 Choosing a Trib Unit
Press U from the O9400S Main Menu to choose a unit.
O9400SA

=== Main Menu ===

17:11:39 03/21/2008

Serial Number
: 000012
Hardware Version: D
Software Version: V1.04.01 03/19/2008

Connect Port: SUPV_PORT
Start Time : 09:29:54 03/21/2008

[DISPLAY]
C -> System Config Display
I -> System Information
B -> SDH/SONET Config Display
Q -> Alarm Queue
T -> System Log Information
A -> SDH/SONET Alarm Status
P -> SDH/SONET Performance

[SETUP]
S -> System Config Setup
D -> SDH/SONET Config Setup
M -> Alarm Setup
V -> Store/Retrieve Backup Config
L -> File Transfer
R -> Performance Setup/Clear

[LOG]
F -> Log Off
O -> Log On
U -> Choose a Unit

[MISC]
Y -> Alarm Cut Off
Z -> System Reset
X -> Clear Alarm Queue
W -> Return to Default

>>SPACE bar to refresh or enter a command ===>

A prompt will appear. Use the Tab key to scroll in the card’s Tributary slot number. Press the
Enter key.
==>> Press Tab key to select the unit: TG3
The unit menu will appear for that card.
Unit TG2 -FE

=== Unit Menu ===

09:45:06 08/28/2009

HW Version
: A
CPLD Version : Ver 1

[DISPLAY]
C -> WAN(VCG) & Link Display
A -> Current Alarm Status
P -> Unit Performance
H -> Enet SNCP Status
G -> WAN(VCG) Statistics

[SETUP]
M -> Mode Setup
S -> VCG & Link Setup
R -> Performance Setup/Clear
L -> Loopback Test
K -> SNCP User Command

[LOG]
F -> Log Off
O -> Log On
U -> Choose a Unit
E -> Return to Main Menu

[MISC]
W -> Unit Load Default & Reset

>>SPACE bar to refresh or enter a command ===>

252

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS

5.43.3 Mode Setup
The path for Mode Setup is as follows:
M> Mode Setup
The Mode Setup screen will appear. Use the Tab key to scroll in your setting. Then press
the Enter key.
Unit TG3 -FE
=== Mode Setup ===
ARROW KEYS : CURSOR MOVE , ENTER KEY : ITEM SELECT

17:39:47 03/21/2008

Mode Selection : e-line
<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

Table 5-99 Mode Setting Options
Field

Setting

Default Setting

Mode Selection

e-line

e-line

Note

Table 5-100 Mode Support Table
Daughter Card
Fast-Ethernet
Giga-Ethernet

E-Line
Yes--(4 LAN)/4WAN
Yes--(1 LAN)/1WAN

Note: Please refer to Section 3.7.4, Functional Block Diagrams
A prompt will ask if you wish to change to this new configuration. Press Y for yes.
>> Change configuration (Y/N)? (Note:to save,please use V-command)

A prompt will advise you that the change was successful.
SUCCESS

5.43.4 WAN (VCG) & Link Setup
The Unit Menu path for VCG & Link Setup is as follows:
S > WAN (VCG) & Link Setup
The VCG & LinkSetup screen will appear.
Unit TG3 -FE

=== VCG & Link Setup ===

A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J

->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->

11:58:31 09/03/2009

Payload/LCAS Setup
Encapsulation Type Setup
Encapsulation Parameter Setup
Path Alarm Setup
VCG Alarm Threshold Setup
Linkdown Alarm Setup
Link Config Setup
Customer Information Setup
Link Fail Propagation Setup
Inter-Frame Gap(IFG) Setup

<< Press ESC key to return to Main Menu or enter a command >>

253

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS
Press one of the following:
A > Payload/LCAS Setup
B > Encapsulation Type Setup
C > Encapsulation Parameter Setup
D > Path Alarm Setup
E > VCG Alarm Threshold Setup
F-> Linkdown Alarm Setup
G > Link Config Setup
H > Customer Information Setup
I > Link Fail Propagation Setup
J > Inter-Frame Gap (IFG) Setup
Screen by screen setup examples are shown below:
5.43.4.1 Payload/LCAS Setup
The Unit Menu path for Payload/LCAS Setup is as follows:
S > WAN (VCG) & Link Setup
A > Payload/LCAS Setup
The Payload/LCAS Setup Setup screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor
to the various fields. Then use the Tab key to scroll in your settings. Press the Enter key.
Note: The user needs to check to make sure that there is no cross-conect map in this WAN
before changing the payload or LCAS type.

Unit TG3 -FE
=== Payload/LCAS Setup ===
ARROW KEYS : CURSOR MOVE , ENTER KEY : ITEM SELECT

[WAN]
WAN#1(FE)
WAN#2(FE)
WAN#3(FE)
WAN#4(FE)

:
:
:
:

[payload]

[lcas mode]

TU12
TU12
TU12
TU12

LCAS
LCAS
LCAS
LCAS

17:48:51 03/21/2008

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

Table 5-101 Payload/LCAS Setting Options
VCG Field

Payload
Settings

Default
Payload
Setting

LCAS
Mode
Settings

LCAS Mode
Default
Setting

Note:

TU11
TU12
LCAS,
TU12
LCAS
TU3
Non LCAS
AU4/C4
AU3/C3
*This setting depends on the card type. Please refer to Table 5-77.
WAN1~4*

The following prompt will appear. Press Y to change the configuration. If you want to save
this configuration you must return to the O9400S Main Menu and press V
>> Change configuration (Y/N)? (Note:to save,please use V-command)

254

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS

5.43.4.2 Encapsulation Type Setup
The Unit Menu path for Encapsulation Type Setup is as follows:
S > WAN (VCG) & Link Setup
B > Encapsulation Type Setup
The Encapsulation Type Setup screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to
the various fields. Then use the Tab key to scroll in your settings. Press the Enter key.
Unit TG3 -FE
=== Encapsulation Type Setup ===
ARROW KEYS : CURSOR MOVE , ENTER KEY : ITEM SELECT

17:53:33 03/21/2008

Encapsulation Type
WAN#1(FE)
WAN#2(FE)
WAN#3(FE)
WAN#4(FE)

:
:
:
:

GFP
GFP
GFP
GFP

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

Table 5-102 Encapsulation Type Setting Options
Field

Encapsulation
Type Settings

Type

Default
Setting

GFP
LAPS

Note

GFP

BCP

The following prompt will appear. Press Y to change the configuration. If you want to save
this configuration you must return to the O9400S Main Menu and press V
>> Change configuration (Y/N)? (Note:to save,please use V-command)

5.43.4.3 Encapsulation Parameter Setup
The Unit Menu path for Encapsulation Parameter Setup is as follows:
S > WAN (VCG) & Link Setup
C > Encapsulation Parameter Setup
The Encapsulation Parameter Setup screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to move the
cursor to the (VCG) WAN# field. Then key in the WAN# setting. Press the Enter key.
Unit TG3 -FE
=== Encapsulation Par Setup ===
17:55:19 03/21/2008
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, Please Input: 1~4, BACKSPACE to edit
(VCG) WAN# : 1

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

Table 5-103 Encapsulation Parameter Setting Options
Field

Setting Range

Default
Setting

(VCG) WAN#

1~4*

1

Note

WAN# depends on the Ethernet mode in use.
e-line = WAN1~4*
*This setting depends on the card type. Please refer to Table 5-77.

255

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS
If your encapsulation type is GFP, the GFP Parameter Setup screen will appear. Use the
arrow keys to move the cursor to the various fields. Some settings must be keyed in. Some
must be scrolled in using the Tab key. Press the Enter key.
Unit TG3 -FE
=== GFP Parameter Setup ===
17:59:25 03/21/2008
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, Please Input: 0~7, BACKSPACE to edit
(VCG) WAN# : 1
Rx PTI
Rx EXI
Rx UPI
DELTA

:
:
:
:

0
0
1
1

Rx Descramble

: Enable

Tx
Tx
Tx
Tx

PTI
EXI
UPI
PFI

:
:
:
:

Tx Scramble

0
0
1
0

: Enable

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

Table 5-104 GFP Parameter Setting Options
Field

Settings

Default Setting

Rx PTI
Rx EXI
Rx UPI
DELTA
Rx Descramble
Tx PTI
Tx EXI
Tx UPI
Tx PFI
Tx Scramble

0~7
0~0xF
0~0xFF
1~4
Disable, Enable
0~7
0~0xF
0~0xFF
0~1
Disable, Enable

0
0
01
1
Enable
0
0
01
1
Enable

Note

If your encapsulation type is LAPS, the LAPS Parameter Setup screen will appear. Use the
arrow keys to move the cursor to the various fields. Some settings must be keyed in. Some
must be scrolled in using the Tab key. Press the Enter key.
Unit TG3 -FE

=== LAPS Parameter Setup ===

18:01:11 03/21/2008

(VCG) WAN# : 1
Rx
Rx
Rx
Rx

Address
Control
SAPI MSB
SAPI LSB

:
:
:
:

0
0
0
0

Tx
Tx
Tx
Tx

Address
Control
SAPI MSB
SAPI LSB

Rx
Rx
Rx
Rx

Descramble
Payload FCS Check
Address&Control Check
SAPI Check

:
:
:
:

Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable

Tx Scramble
Tx Payload FCS

:
:
:
:

0
0
0
0

: Disable
: Disable

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

Table 5-105 LAPS Parameter Setting Options
Field

Settings

Default Setting

Rx Address
Rx Control
Rx SAPI MSB
Rx SAPI LSB
Rx Descramble
Rx Payload FCS Check
Rx Address & Control Check
Rx SAPI Check
Tx Address
Tx Control
Tx SAPI MSB
Tx SAPI LSB

0~0xFF
0~0xFF
0~0xFF
0~0xFF
Disable/Enable
Disable/Enable
Disable/Enable
Disable/Enable
0~0xFF
0~0xFF
0~0xFF
0~0xFF

4
03
FE
01
Enable
Disable
Disable
Disable
04
03
FE
01

256

Note

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS
Tx Scramble
Tx Payload FCS Insert

Disable/Enable
Disable/Enable

Enable
Disable

If your encapsulation type is BCP, the BCP Parameter Setup screen will appear. Use the
arrow keys to move the cursor to the various fields. Some settings must be keyed in. Some
must be scrolled in using the Tab key. Press the Enter key.
Unit TG3 –FE
=== BCP Parameter Setup ===
14:35:09 12/02/2009
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, Please Input: 0~0xFF, BACKSPACE to edit
(VCG) WAN# : 1
Rx
Rx
Rx
Rx

Address
Control
Protocol MSB
Protocol LSB

:
:
:
:

FF
3
0
31

Tx
Tx
Tx
Tx

Rx
Rx
Rx
Rx

Descramble
Payload FCS Check
Address&Control Check
Protocol Check

:
:
:
:

Enable
Enable
Disable
Disable

Tx Scramble
Tx Payload FCS Insert
Tx/Rx Payload FCS Mode

: Enable
: Enable
: CRC-32

Rx
Rx
Rx
Rx

Bit F
Bit Z
Pads
MAC Type

:
:
:
:

0
1
0
1

Tx
Tx
Tx
Tx

:
:
:
:

Rx BCP Flags Check
Rx MAC Type Check

Address
Control
Protocol MSB
Protocol LSB

Bit F
Bit Z
Pads
MAC Type

:
:
:
:

FF
3
0
31

0
1
0
1

: Disable
: Disable

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

Table 5-106 BCP Parameter Setting Options
Field

Settings

Default Setting

Rx Address
Rx Control
Rx Protocol MSB
Rx Protocol LSB
Rx Descramble
Rx Payload FCS Check
Rx Address & Control Check
Rx Protocol Check
Tx Address
Tx Control
Tx Protocol MSB
Tx Protocol LSB
Tx Scramble
Tx Payload FCS Insert
Tx/Rx Payload FCS Mode
Rx Bit F
Rx Bit Z

0~0xFF
0~0xFF
0~0xFF
0~0xFF
Disable/Enable
Disable/Enable
Disable/Enable
Disable/Enable
0~0xFF
0~0xFF
0~0xFF
0~0xFF
Disable/Enable
Disable/Enable
CRC-16/CRC-32
0/1
0/1

FF
03
0
31
Enable
Enable
Disable
Disable
FF
03
0
31
Enable
Enable
CRC-32
0
1

Rx Pads
Rx MAC Type
Rx BCP Flags Check
Rx MAC Type Check
Tx F
Tx Z
Tx Pads
Tx MAC Type

0~0xFF
0~0xFF
Enable/Disable
Enable/Disable
0/1
0/1
0~0xFF
0~0xFF

0
1
Disable
Disable
0
1
0
1

Note

The following prompt will appear. Press Y to change the configuration. If you want to save
this configuration you must return to the O9400S Main Menu and press V
>> Change configuration (Y/N)? (Note:to save,please use V-command)

257

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS

5.43.4.4 Path Alarm Setup
The Unit Menu path for Path Alarm Setup is as follows:
S > WAN (VCG) & Link Setup
D > Path Alarm Setup
The Path Alarm Setup screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the
various fields. Then use the Tab key to scroll in your settings. Press the Enter key.
Unit TG3 -FE
=== Path Alarm Setup ===
09:37:41 03/24/2008
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, Please Input: 1~4, BACKSPACE to edit
(VCG) WAN# : 1

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

Table 5-107 Path Alarm Setting Options 1
Field

Settings

Default
Setting

Note

(VCG) WAN#
Path

Range is 1~4*
1
low-order,
high-order
*This setting depends on the card type. Please refer to Table 5-77.

An advanced Path Alarm Setup screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to
the various fields. Then use the Tab key to scroll in your settings. Press the Enter key.
Unit TG3 -FE
=== Path Alarm Setup ===
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB/`: ROLL UP/DOWN OPTIONS
(VCG) WAN# :
type
TU-LOP
TU-AIS
LP-UNEQ
LP-RDI-P
LP-RDI-S
LP-RDI-C
LP-REI
LP-BIP

alarm
ENABLED
ENABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED

relay
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED

severity
MAJR
MAJR
INFO
INFO
INFO
INFO
INFO
INFO

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

258

09:37:41 03/24/2008

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS

Table 5-108 Path Alarm Setting Options 2
Low-order
Path Type

Alarm
Settings

Alarm
Default

Relay
Settings

Relay
Default

Severity
Settings

Severity
Default

TU-LOP
TU-AIS
LP-UNEQ
LP-RDI-P
LP-RDI-S
LP-RDI-C
LP-REI
LP-BIP

ENABLED
DISABLED

ENABLED
ENABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED

ENABLED
DISABLED

DISABLED

INFO
MINR
MAJR
CRIT

MAJR
MAJR
INFO
INFO
INFO
INFO
INFO
INFO

Hi-order
Path Type
AU-LOP
AU-AIS
HP-UNEQ
HP-RDI-P
HP-RDI-S
HP-RDI-C
HP-B3-REI
HP-B3-BIP
HOP-LOM

Alarm
Settings
ENABLED
DISABLED

Alarm
Default
ENABLED
ENABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED

Relay
Settings
ENABLED
DISABLED

Relay
Default
DISABLED

Severity
Settings
INFO
MINR
MAJR
CRIT

Severity
Default
MAJR
MAJR
INFO
INFO
INFO
INFO
INFO
INFO
INFO

The following prompt will appear. Press Y to change the configuration. If you want to save
this configuration you must return to the O9400S Main Menu and press V.
>> Change configuration (Y/N)? (Note:to save,please use V-command)

5.43.4.5 WAN (VCG) Alarm Threshold Setup
The Unit Menu path for WAN (VCG) Alarm Threshold Setup is as follows:
S > WAN (VCG) & Link Setup
E > WAN (VCG) Alarm Threshold Setup
The WAN (VCG) Alarm Threshold Setup screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to move the
cursor to the various fields. Then use the Tab key to scroll in your settings. Threshold
settings must be keyed in. Press the Enter key.
Unit TG3 -FE
=== WAN(VCG) Alarm Threshold Setup === 10:10:09 03/24/2008
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB/`: ROLL UP/DOWN OPTIONS
En/Dis
Rx error FCS count
DIS
Rx error packet discarded count DIS

severity
CRIT
CRIT

Threshold
03000
03000

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

Table 5-109 WAN (VCG) Alarm Threshold Setting Options
Field

En/Dis
Settings

En/Dis
Default

Severity
Settings

Severity
Default

Threshold
Settings

Threshold
Default

Rx error FCS count
Rx error packet
discarded count

EN
DIS

DIS

INFO
MINR
MAJR
CRIT

MINR

1~99999

3000

The following prompt will appear. Press Y to change the configuration. If you want to save
this configuration you must return to the O9400S Main Menu and press V

259

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS

>> Change configuration (Y/N)? (Note:to save,please use V-command)

5.43.4.6 Linkdown Alarm Setup
The Unit Menu path for Linkdown Alarm Setup is as follows:
S > WAN (VCG) & Link Setup
F-> Linkdown Alarm Setup
The Linkdown Alarm Setup screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the
various fields. Then use the Tab key to scroll in your settings. Press the Enter key.
Unit TG3 -FE
=== Linkdown Mask Setup ===
ARROW KEYS : CURSOR MOVE , ENTER KEY : ITEM SELECT

10:14:12 03/24/2008

port
alarm
relay
severity
----------------------------------------LAN1
ENABLED
DISABLED MAJR
LAN2
ENABLED
DISABLED MAJR
LAN3
ENABLED
DISABLED MAJR
LAN4
ENABLED
DISABLED MAJR
<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

Table 5-110 Linkdown Alarm Setting Options
Port

Alarm
Settings

Alarm
Default

Relay
Settings

Relay
Default

Severity
Settings

Severity
Default

LAN1~4*

ENABLED
DISABLED

ENABLED

ENABLED
DISABLED

DISABLED

INFO
MINR
MAJR
CRIT

MINR

*This setting depends on the card type. Please refer to Table 5-77.

The following prompt will appear. Press Y to change the configuration. If you want to save
this configuration you must return to the O9400S Main Menu and press V
>> Change configuration (Y/N)? (Note:to save,please use V-command)

5.43.4.7 Link Config Setup
The Unit Menu path for Link Config Setup is as follows:
S > WAN (VCG) & Link Setup
G > Link Config Setup
The Link Config Setup screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the
various fields. Then use the Tab key to scroll in your settings. Press the Enter key.
Unit TG3 -FE
=== Link Config Setup ===
ARROW KEYS : CURSOR MOVE , ENTER KEY : ITEM SELECT
port
link config
---------------------------LAN1(FE)
Auto negotiation
LAN2(FE)
Auto negotiation
LAN3(FE)
Auto negotiation
LAN4(FE)
Auto negotiation
<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

260

10:15:53 03/24/2008

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS

Table 5-111 Link Config Setting Options for Ethernet with Switch
Port

Link Config Settings

Default Setting

Note

LAN1(GE)

1000M full-duplex

1000M full duplex

This is for Giga Ethernet Card

LAN1~ 4(FE)

Auto negotiation

Auto negotiation

This is for Fast Ethernet Card

100M full-duplex

The MTU (Maximum Transfer
Unit) of 10 M (half/full duplex) is
up to 5000 bytes

10M full-duplex
100M half-duplex
10M half-duplex

The following prompt will appear. Press Y to change the configuration. If you want to save
this configuration you must return to the O9400S Main Menu and press V
>> Change configuration (Y/N)? (Note:to save,please use V-command)

5.43.4.8 Customer Information Setup
The Unit Menu path for Customer Information Setup is as follows:
S > WAN (VCG) & Link Setup
H > Customer Information Setup
The Customer Information Setup screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor
to the various fields. Then key in the customer name for each LAN. Press the Enter key.
Unit TG3 -FE
=== Customer Information Setup ===
10:18:31 03/24/2008
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, BACKSPACE to edit, ESC to abort

Port#
LAN1
LAN2
LAN3
LAN4

Customer Information
Name of link#1______
Name of link#2
Name of link#3
Name of link#4

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

The following prompt will appear. Press Y to change the configuration. If you want to save
this configuration you must return to the O9400S Main Menu and press V
>> Change configuration (Y/N)? (Note:to save,please use V-command)

5.43.4.9 Link Failure Propagation Setup
Note: Local LAN Port failure is reflected upstream at the WAN Port. The Ethernet port of
each device is monitored. If a link failure is detected at either device a signal will
automatically be sent to the other device to shut down the corresponding Ethernet port. Thus,
the shut down of an Ethernet port is propagated.
Similarly, if WAN (VCG) port failure occurs, link failure propagation will shut down the
corresponding LAN ports.
The Unit Menu path for Link Failure Propagation is as follows:
S > VCG & Link Setup

261

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS
I > Link Fail Propagation
Table 5-112 Link Failure Propagation Setting Options
Field

Settings

WAN (VCG) Lost
Propagation
Remote Link Down
Propagation
Remote Link Down
Guard Time

Default Setting

Note

ENABLED,
DISABLED

DISABLED

Link Failure Propagation only
works when in E-line or
PortMap/Trunk mode.

Range is 1 to
5 .seconds

1 second

Note: When the LAN link down time is longer than the “guard time”, the “remote link down
propagation” sends a message to force the far-end LAN to power down.
Unit TG3 -FE

=== Link Fail Propagation Setup ===

21:16:02 O7/01/2008

ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, ENTER KEY: ITEM SELECT

Wan(VCG) Lost PROPAGATION

: ENABLED

Remote link Down Propagation : ENABLED
Remote Link Guard Time

Note:

: 1 second

“Remote Link Down Propagation” is only supported in GFP mode.

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

Note:
For E-Line mode, Link Fault Propagation is activated if a WAN1 alarm occurs or if a LAN1
alarm occurs. See the diagram below.

Table 5-113 Link Fault Propagation—E-Line Mode
Link Fault Propagation
Activated by Alarm

WAN1 Alarm

LAN1 Alarm

Yes

Yes

5.43.4.10 Inter-Frame Gap (IFG) Setup
The Unit Menu path for Inter-Frame Gap (IFG) Setup is as follows:
S > VCG & Link Setup
J > Inter-Frame Gap (IFG) Setup

262

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS

Table 5-114 Inter-Frame Gap (IFG) Setting Options
Field

Settings

Default Setting

LAN1
LAN2
LAN3
LAN4

80, 88, 96
80, 88, 96
80, 88, 96
80, 88, 96

88
88
88
88

Note

Input your settings. Press the Enter key.
Unit TG3 -GE-SW

=== Inter-Frame Gap(IFG) Setup ===

11:03:03 09/03/2009

ARROW KEYS : CURSOR MOVE , ENTER KEY : ITEM SELECT
Port

IFG (Bit Times)

------

---------------

LAN1

88

LAN2

88

LAN3

88

LAN4

88

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

The following prompt will appear. Press Y to change the configuration. If you want to save
this configuration you must return to the O9400S Main Menu and press V
>> Change configuration (Y/N)? (Note:to save,please use V-command)

5.43.5 Performance Setup/Clear
The Unit Menu path for Performance Setup/Clear is as follows:
R > Performance Setup/Clear
Then press one of the following:
A > Clear Performance Data
B > Performance Threshold Setup
Screen by screen setup examples are shown below:
5.43.5.1 Clear Performance Data
The Unit Menu path for Clear Performance Data is as follows:
R > Performance Setup/Clear
A > Clear Performance Data
A prompt will ask if you want to clear the performance data. Press Y for Yes or N for No.
Press the Enter key.
Unit TG3 –FE

=== Performance Setup/Clear ===

10:20:55 03/24/2008

A -> Clear Performance Data
B -> Performance Threshold Setup
<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu or enter a command >>

263

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS

5.43.5.2 Performance Threshold Setup
The Unit Menu path for Performance Threshold Setup is as follows:
R > Performance Setup/Clear
B > Performance Threshold Setup
The Performance threshold Cross Alarm Setup screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to
move the cursor to the various fields. Then use the Tab key to scroll in your settings. Press
the Enter key.
Unit TG3 –FE
=== Perf. Threshold Cross Alarm Setup ===10:21:34 03/24/2008
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB/`: ROLL UP/DOWN OPTIONS
Monitor Point
HP-BIP(B3)
HP-REI
LP-BIP(V5)
LP-REI(V5)
LP-BIP(B3)
LP-REI(B3)

En/Dis
EN
EN
EN
EN
EN
EN

severity
MINR
MINR
MINR
MINR
MINR
MINR

Threshold
02400
02400
00600
00600
02400
19200

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

Table 5-115 Performance Threshold Setting Options
Monitor
Point

EN/DIS
Settings

EN/DIS
Default

Severity
Settings

Severity
Default

Threshold
Settings

Threshold
Default

HP-BIP(B3)
HP-REI
LP-BIP(V5)
LP-REI(V5
LP-BIP(B3)
LP-REI(B3)

EN
DIS

EN

INFO
MINR
MAJR
CRIT

INFO

1~99999

02400
02400
00600
00600
02400
19200

The following prompt will appear. Press Y to change the configuration. If you want to save
this configuration you must return to the O9400S Main Menu and press V
>> Change configuration (Y/N)? (Note:to save,please use V-command)

5.43.6 Loopback Test
The Unit Menu path for Loopback Test is as follows:
L > Loopback Test
The Loopback Test setup screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the
various fields. Then use the Tab key to scroll in your settings. Press the Enter key.
Unit TG2 -FE
=== Loopback Test ===
ARROW KEYS : CURSOR MOVE , ENTER KEY : ITEM SELECT

WAN#1(FE)
WAN#2(FE)
WAN#3(FE)
WAN#4(FE)

:
:
:
:

*OFF
*OFF
*OFF
*OFF

TO-OPTICAL-LINE
TO-OPTICAL-LINE
TO-OPTICAL-LINE
TO-OPTICAL-LINE

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

264

09:51:30 08/28/2009

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS

Table 5-116 Loopback Test Setting Options
Field

Settings

Default Setting

WAN#1 (FE)
WAN#2 (FE)
WAN#3 (FE)
WAN#4 (FE)

OFF, TO-OPTICAL-LINE
OFF, TO-OPTICAL-LINE
OFF, TO-OPTICAL-LINE
OFF, TO-OPTICAL-LINE

TO-OPTICAL-LINE
TO-OPTICAL-LINE
TO-OPTICAL-LINE
TO-OPTICAL-LINE

Notes

5.43.7 SNCP USER Command
The Unit Menu path for SNCP User Command is as follows:
K > SNCP User Command
The following SNCP User Command screen will appear. Input your settings. Press the Enter
key.
Unit TG2 -FE
=== SNCP User Command ===
09:59:21 08/28/2009
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, Please Input: 1~4, BACKSPACE to edit
(VCG) WAN# :
Chan#
:
Command
:

1_
01
NONE

Note :
FS = Force Switch
MS = Manual Switch
<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

Table 5-117 LoopbackTest Setting Options
Field

Settings

Default Setting

(VCG) WAN#
Chan#
Command

Range is 1 to 4
Range is 1 to 64
CLEAR, Lock-out,
FS-WA, MS-WA, FSEA, MS-EA

1
01
CLEAR

5.43.8 Unit Load Default and Reset
The Unit Menu path for Unit Load Default and Reset is as follows:
W > Unit Load Default and Reset
Press W. The following prompt will appear. Press Y for Yes
Reset - are you sure ? [Y/N]

Key in your password. Press the Enter key.
>>Password:

265

Notes

CHAPTER 6 SDH/SONET FEATURES

6 SDH/SONET FEATURES
6.1

Introduction

SONET and SDH use different terms to describe the three layers. SONET uses the terms Section, Line,
and Path. SONET terminology is illustrated in Figure 6-1, below.

SONET
Multiplexer

SONET SONET
Regenerator

Section

SONET

#

SONET

Cross
Connect

SONET
Multiplexer

Section
Line

Line
Path

Figure 6-1 SONET Layer Terminology
SDH uses the terms Regenerator Section, Multiplex Section and Path. SDH terminology is illustrated in
Figure 6-2, below.

Figure 6-2 SDH Layer Terminology

266

CHAPTER 6 SDH/SONET FEATURES

6.2

Multiplexing structure and Mapping modes

The O9400S complies with the basic multiplexing principles outlined in ITU-T G.707 clause 6
and ETSI EN 300147 clause 4. The O9400S supports the multiplexing structure outlined in
Figure 6-1. This is a subset of the possible multiplexing structures defined in ITU-T G.707
clause 6 and ETSI EN 300 147 clause 4.

Figure 6-3 Multiplexing/Mapping Structure adapted from ITU-T G.707/Y.1322
The O9400S complies with the multiplexing methods outlined in ITU-T G.707 clause 7 and
ETSI EN 300 147 clause 5 for the supported multiplexing structures.
6.2.1

Mapping of Tributaries into VC-n

6.2.1.1 Asynchronous mapping of 44 736 kbps
The O9400S supports asynchronous mapping of 44 736 Kbps signal into a VC-3 container
as shown in Figure 6-2, below. The mapping is in accordance to ITU-T G.707 clause
10.1.2.1 and ETSI EN 300 147 Clause 8.

Figure 6-4 Asynchronous Mapping of 44 736 kbps Tributary into VC-3

267

CHAPTER 6 SDH/SONET FEATURES

6.2.1.2 Asynchronous mapping of 34 368 kbps
The O9400S supports asynchronous mapping of 34 368 kbps signal into a VC-3
container as shown in Figure 6-3, below. The mapping is in accordance to ITU-T G.707
clause 10.1.2.2 and ETSI EN 300 147 Clause 8

Figure 6-5 Asynchronous Mapping of 34 368 kbps Tributary into VC-3

6.2.1.3 Asynchronous mapping of 2048kbps
The O9400S supports Asynchronous mapping of 2048kbps signal into a VC-12 container as
shown in Figure 6-4. The mapping is in accordance to ITU-T G.707 clause 10.1.4.1 and
ETSI EN 300 147 Clause 8.

Figure 6-6 Asynchronous Mapping of 2048kbps into VC-12

268

CHAPTER 6 SDH/SONET FEATURES

6.2.1.4 Mapping of GFP Frames
The O9400S supports the generic framing procedure (GFP) to encapsulate variable length
payload of various client signals for subsequent transport over SDH networks as defined in
ITU-T G.707. The O9400S supports mapping of a GFP frame stream into a Container-n
(n=12,3,4 or12/3/4-Xv) as shown in Figure 6-5, below. The mapping is in accordance to
ITU-T G.707 clause 10.6.

Figure 6-7 Mapping of GFP Frames into C-n

6.2.1.5 Loop Proprietary Mapping of RS232
The O9400S provides a proprietary mapping scheme for mapping of RS232 encapsulated
Ethernet frames traffic into C-12 containers. The proprietary mapping scheme used to map
the data into a C-12 container is described in Figure 6-6, below.

Figure 6-8 Loop Proprietary Mapping of RS232

269

CHAPTER 6 SDH/SONET FEATURES
6.2.1.6

TM-N Physical layer

The O9400S offers the following physical interfaces:
• Optical STM-1 interfaces, S1.1, L1.1, L1.2
• Optical STM-4 interfaces, S4.1, L4.1, L4.2

The O9400S implements the supported Physical layer functions in accordance to ITU-T
G.783 clause 9.
6.2.1.7

STM-N Regenerator and Multiplex Section layer

The O9400S implements the STM-N (n=1,4) Regenerator and Multiplex Section layer
functions in accordance to ITU-T G.783 clause 10 and 11.
SOH implementation
The O9400S complies with the SOH implementation methods outlined in ITU-T G.707
clause 9 and ETSI EN 300 147 clause 7. The assignment of the STM-n SOH is outlined in
Figure 6-7, below.

Figure 6-9 STM-n Section Overhead (SOH)

6.2.1.8 VC-n/m Path layer
The O9400S offers the support of the following payloads:






VC-4
VC-4-Xv
VC-3
VC-3-Xv
VC-12
VC-12-Xv
VC-11

The O9400S implements the supported Path layer functions in accordance to ITU-T
G.783 clause 12 for VC-n, where n=4-X, 4, 3-X, 3.

270

CHAPTER 6 SDH/SONET FEATURES

The O9400S implements the supported Path layer functions in accordance to ITU-T
G.783 clause 13 for VC-m, where m=12-X, 12. 11

6.2.1.9
VC4-Xc/VC-4/VC-3 POH Implementation
The O9400S complies with the POH implementation methods outlined in ITU-T G.707
clause 9 and ETSI EN 300 147 clause 7. The assignment of the VC-4 POH is outlined in
Figure 6-8, below.
The O9400S supports all the VC-4/VC-3 POH bytes as described in ITU-T G.707 Clause
9.3.1, with the following exceptions:
• G1 bit 6 and 7 Enhanced RDI, Clause 9.3.1.4 is not supported
• Path user channels F2 and F3, Clause 9.3.1.5 are not supported
• K3 byte, Clause 9.3.1.7, 9.3.1.9-10 is not supported
• Network operator byte N1, Clause 9.3.1.8 is not supported

Figure 6-10 VC-4 POH

271

CHAPTER 6 SDH/SONET FEATURES

6.2.1.10 VC-2/VC-1 POH Implementation
The O9400S complies with the POH implementation methods outlined in ITU-T G.707 clause
9 and ETSI EN 300 147 clause 7. The assignment of the VC-12 POH is outlined in Figure 6-9,
below.

Figure 6-11 VC-12 POH
The O9400S supports all the VC-2/VC-1 POH bytes as described in ITU-T G.707 Clause
9.3.1, with the following exceptions:
• Network operator byte N2, Clause 9.3.2.3 is not supported
• K4 byte (b3-b8), clause 9.3.2.6-8 is not supported
6.2.2
Cross-connect
The O9400S implements a full non-blocking STM-1/4 cross connect with VC11, VC12, VC-3
and VC-4 granularity.
The following cross connect types are supported:
• Bi-directional connections on all levels
• Uni-directional connections on all levels
6.2.3

Concatenation schemes

6.2.3.1
Virtual concatenation
The O9400S supports virtual concatenation, the following VC-n-Xv are supported:
• VC-12-Xv
• VC-3-Xv
• VC-4-Xv
The O9400S implements the supported VC-4-Xv and VC-3-Xv functionality in accordance
to ITU-T G.707 clause 11.2 and ETSI EN 300 147 Clause 9.
The O9400S implements the supported VC-12-Xv functionality in accordance to ITU-T G.707
clause 11.4 and ETSI EN 300147 Clause 9. Virtual concatenation is supported in conjunction
with EOS mapping and is module dependent.

272

CHAPTER 6 SDH/SONET FEATURES
6.2.4
Protection
The O9400S offers the following different protection schemes:
• MSP 1+1 protection
• SNC protection

MSP 1+1
Protection
SNC
Protection

SDH

Figure 6-12 Protection schemes for O9400S

6.2.4.1

MSP 1+1 linear

The O9400S offers Multiplex Section Protection (MSP) 1+1 linear on all optical STM-N
interfaces.
The following rules apply for the MSP 1+1 protection:
• Protection can only be enabled between two ports of the same STM-N type
The MSP 1+1 functionality is in accordance with ITU-T G.841, clause 7.1. The following
parameters are configurable on an MSP object:
• Enabled/disabled
• Mode, unidirectional or bi-directional
• Operation Type, revertive or non-revertive
The protocol used for K1 and K2 (b1-b5) is defined in ITU-T G.841, clause 7.1.4.5.1. The
protocol used is 1+1 bi-directional switching compatible with 1:n bi-directional switching.

6.2.4.2

SNC Protection

Two types of SNC protection are supported: SNC/I (Sub Network Connection protection with
Inherent monitoring) and SNC/N (Sub Network Connection protection with non-intrusive
monitoring). SNC is supported for the following objects:
• VC-11
• VC-12
• VC-3

273

CHAPTER 6 SDH/SONET FEATURES
• VC-4
The SNCP functionality is in accordance with ITU-T G.841 Clause 8. The following
parameters are configurable on an SNCP object:
• Enabled/disabled
• Operation Type, revertive or non-revertive
The Application architecture supported is 1+1 unidirectional switching, according to
ITU-T G.841 clause 8.3.2. The switch initiation criteria are implemented as described
in ITU-T G.841 clause 8.4. The protection algorithm is implemented according to ITUT G.841 clause 8.6.
SNC Protected Uni-directional Cross-connection Limitations
When one direction of a path forms part of an SNC protected uni- directional cross connection,
the other direction can not form part of a different SNC protected uni-directional crossconnection. But the two directions can form part of two different uni-directional un-protected
cross connections. This applies to uni-directional cross-connections on all path layers.

6.2.5
Performance Monitoring
In the subsequent chapters the following definition are used, according to G.826:
• Errored second (ES): A one second period with one or more errored blocks or at
least one defect.
• Severely errored second (SES): A one second period which contains >=
30% errored blocks or at least one defect
• Background block error (BBE): An errored block not occurring as a part of an SES
• Unavailable seconds (UAS): A period of unavailable time begins at the onset of ten
consecutive SES events. These ten seconds are considered to be part of unavailable time.
A new period of available time begins at the onset of 10 consecutive non-SES events.
These ten seconds are considered to be part of available time. UAS is the number of
second of unavailable time.
6.2.5.1

Regenerator and multiplex section performance monitoring

The O9400S offers full performance monitoring on regenerator and multiplex sections
according to G.829.
The following parameters are calculated:
• ES
• SES
• BBE
• UAS
For the regenerator section near end data are presented, for the multiplex section both
near end and far end data are presented.
The available time periods are:
• 15 minutes
• 24 hours
The system presents current data and historical data, the number of time periods are:
• 96x15 minute
• 7x24 hours
The O9400S calculates excessive error and degrade signal defects assuming Poisson
distribution of errors, according to ITU-T G.826.

274

CHAPTER 6 SDH/SONET FEATURES
The excessive error defect (dEXC) is detected if the equivalent BER exceeds a pre-set
threshold of 10E-5, and be cleared if the equivalent BER is better than 10E-6, according to
ITU-T G.806.
The degraded signal defect (dDEG) is detected if the equivalent BER exceeds a pre-set
threshold of 10E-X, where x=6, 7, 8 or 9. The dDEG is cleared if the equivalent BER is
better than 10E-(X+1), according to ITU-T G.806 .The threshold is individual configurable
for the regenerator and multiplex section, from 10E-6 to 10E-9.
6.2.5.2

Path performance monitoring

The O9400S offers full performance monitoring on the SDH path level according to G.828,
the following objects are supported:
• VC-11
• VC-12
• VC-3
• VC-4
The following parameters are calculated:
• ES
• SES
• BBE
• UAS
Both near end and far end data are presented. The available time periods are:
• 15 minutes
• 24 hours
The system presents current data and historical data, the number of time periods are:
• 96x15 minute
• 7x24 hours
The O9400S calculates excessive error and degrade signal defects assuming Poisson
distribution of errors, according to ITU-T G.826.
The excessive error defect (dEXC) is detected if the equivalent BER exceeds a pre-set
threshold of 10E-5, and be cleared if the equivalent BER is better than 10E-6, according to
ITU-T G.806.
The degraded signal defect (dDEG) is detected if the equivalent BER exceeds a pre-set
threshold of 10E-X, where x=6, 7, 8 or 9. The dDEG is cleared if the equivalent BER is
better than 10E-(X+1), according to ITU-T G.806 .The threshold is individual configurable
for the different objects, from 10E-6 to 10E-9.
6.2.5.3 Synchronization
The O9400S offers synchronization from a range of different interfaces.
In addition to the module interfaces it is possible to synchronize from a 2MHz
synchronization input source. The interface is according to ITU-T G.703. The O9400S also
offers a synchronization output port, according to ITU-T G703.
The different interfaces allowed for synchronization are listed below.
Synchronization sources:
• E1/T1 interface
• E3/T3 interface
• STM-1/4
• 2MHz sync input
• 2Mbps
• 1.5Mbps

275

CHAPTER 6 SDH/SONET FEATURES
Through the SETS (Synchronous Equipment Timing Source), the synchronization signals
are distributed to the equipment ports.
The O9400S offers a list of 4 possible synchronization sources for the T0, selection of the
sync source is based upon the quality level.
The O9400S supports SSM messaging on the STM-N interfaces, this is not supported on
the E1/T1/E3/T3 interface.

276

CHAPTER 6 SDH/SONET FEATURES

6.3

PDH Features

6.3.1 E1 features
6.3.1.1 General information
O9400S supports a number of E1 interfaces that are mapped into SDH VC-12 containers.
Different E1 tributary modules are available supporting up to 8 or 16 E1 channels interface.

6.2.1.2

Transparent Leased Line

The transparent or unstructured leased line service delivers a full digital bit rate of 2048
kbps with no restriction on the binary content.
The service is symmetrical in both directions and only supports point-to- point connections.
The service is specified in EN 300 247 and the network interface is specified in EN 300 418.
An alarm indication signal (AIS) is inserted toward the network if loss of signal (LOS) is
detected from the customer.
AIS is also inserted towards the customer if LOS or other major alarms are detected from
the networks.
6.3.2

E3/T3 Features

6.3.2.1 General information
The O9400S supports a number of E3/T3 interfaces that are mapped into SDH VC-3
containers.
E3/T3 tributary module supports 3 channel E3/T3 interface.
The E3/T3 interface provides a number of different services as shown below:
• E3 Transparent leased line
• T3 Transparent leased line
It is possible to configure the E3/T3 interfaces individually to support the different services.
6.3.2.2 E3 transparent leased line
The transparent or unstructured leased line service delivers a full digital bit rate of 34.368
Mbps with no restriction on the binary content. The service is symmetrical in both directions
and only supports point-to-point connections. An alarm indication signal (AIS) is inserted
toward the network if loss of signal (LOS) is detected from the customer. AIS is also
inserted towards the customer if LOS or other major alarms are detected from the networks.
6.3.2.3 T3 transparent leased line
The transparent or unstructured leased line service delivers a full digital bit rate of 44.736
Mbps with no restriction on the binary content. The service is symmetrical in both directions
and only supports point-to-point connection. An alarm indication signal (AIS) is inserted
toward the network if loss of signal (LOS) is detected from the customer. AIS is also
inserted towards the customer if LOS or other major alarms are detected from the networks.
6.3.3 Loop-back
Two types of Loop-back are supported for the interface; Customer Loop (LL3) and Network
Loop (LL2).

277

CHAPTER 6 SDH/SONET FEATURES

Loop-O9400-S

Optical

1

2

3

1

To Optical Line

2

To Tributary Line

3

To Optical Line

4

To E1/T1 Line

4

E1/T1 or
E3/T3

Figure 6-13 O9400S Loopback Diagram
A customer Loop takes the incoming customer traffic and sends it back towards the customer.
Note that AIS is sent towards the network.
A network Loop takes the incoming traffic from the network and sends it back towards
the network. Note that in this case AIS is sent towards the customer.
The Loops can be activated from the O9400S terminal or from the management system.

278

CHAPTER 6 SDH/SONET FEATURES

6.4

Management Features

This section presents the O9400S interfaces, and communication functions used for
management communications.
6.4.1 Introduction
In this context the term "management” is used to denote the network that transports
management information between a management station and the NE. The O9400S
management solution is based on SNMP over IP.
6.4.2

Management Interfaces

The management traffic pertinent to the O9400S is IP carrying SNMP, TELNET and TFTP
application protocols. In order to support management connectivity in any possible topology
and application, the O9400S supports management traffic on the following interfaces:
6.4.2.1

Management port

The O9400S has a dedicated Ethernet port for management. It can be used for connecting to
a separate external management network. The management port can be turned off to avoid
unauthorized local access. The management port cannot be a member of a VLAN.
6.4.2.2

DCC channels

The SDH architecture defines data communication channels (DCC) for transport of
management traffic in the regenerator section (DCCR - 192 kbit/s) and in the multiplexer
section (DCCM - 576 kbit/s).
Each SDH-module may terminate up to 3 DCCR (D1-D3) and/or 4 DCCM (D4-D12) channels,
i.e. an absolute upper limitation on the number of active DCC-channels is 12. For one SDHport, both DCC channels may be active simultaneously. Activation/deactivation of DCC
channels are configurable.
6.4.2.3

Device
Table 6-1 O9400S Device (System) Alarms
O9400S Device Alarms
Alarm Type

Default Severity

Description

Alarm Cut Off

Informative

Cut off alarm

Power Loss

Major

Power 1 or Power 2 loss

TS Sync Loss

Minor

Valid clock loss

SNCP Switch

Major

SNCP protection switch

MSP Switch

Major

MSP protection switch

Login/Logout
FOM Equip/Uneq
SFP Tx Fail
SFP Rx Fail
SFP Temperature

Informative
Informative
Informative
Informative
Informative

Log in/out
FOM equipped/unequipped
SFP module transmit failure
SFP module receive failure
SFP module overheating

279

CHAPTER 6 SDH/SONET FEATURES
6.4.2.4

SDH
Table 6-2 SDH Alarms
SDH Alarms

Alarm Id

Default Severity

Description

LOS

Critical

Loss Of Signal

LOF

Critical

Loss Of Frame

RS-TIM

Minor

Trace Identifier Mismatch

B1 UAS

Minor

Unavailable Seconds triggered by B1-BIP

MS-SF

Minor

Signal Failure

MS-SD

Minor

Signal Degrade

MS-AIS

Major

Alarm Indication Signal

MS-RDI

Minor

Remote Defect Indication

B2 UAS

Minor

Unavailable Seconds triggered by B2-BIP

MS-REI UAS

Minor

Unavailable Seconds triggered by MS-REI

AU-AIS

Major

Alarm Indication Signal

AU-LOP

Major

Loss Of Pointer

HP-SF

Minor

Signal Failure

HP-SD

Minor

Signal Degrade

HP-TIM

Minor

Trace Identifier Mismatch

HP-RDI-S

Minor

Remote Server Defect Indication

HP-RDI-C

Minor

Remote Connectivity Defect Indication

HP-RDI-P

Minor

Remote Payload Defect Indication

LOM

Major

Loss of Multiframe

HP-UNEQ

Minor

Unequipped

HP-PLM

Minor

Payload Label Mismatch

HP-B3-BIP UAS

Minor

Unavailable Seconds triggered by B3-BIP

HP-REI-BIP UAS

Minor

Unavailable Seconds triggered by HP-REI

TU-AIS

Major

Alarm Indication Signal

TU-LOP

Major

Loss Of Pointer

LP-SF

Minor

Signal Failure

LP-SD

Minor

Signal Degrade

LP-TIM

Minor

Trace Identifier Mismatch

LP-RDI-S

Minor

Remote Server Defect Indication

LP-RDI-C

Minor

Remote Connectivity Defect Indication

LP-RDI-P

Minor

Remote Payload Defect Indication

LP-UNEQ

Minor

Unequipped

LP-PLM

Minor

Payload Label Mismatch

LP-AIS

Minor

Alarm Indication

LP-V5-BIP UAS

Minor

Unavailable Seconds triggered by V5-BIP

LP-V5-REI-BIP
UAS

Minor

Unavailable Seconds triggered by LP-V5-REI

280

CHAPTER 6 SDH/SONET FEATURES
6.4.2.5

Tributary Module
Table 6-3 Miscellaneous Alarms
Miscellaneous Alarms
Alarm Id

Default Severity

Description

E1/T1 Module
TU-AIS

Major

Alarm Indication Signal

TU-LOP

Major

Loss Of Pointer

LP-SF

Major

Signal Failure

LP-SD

Major

Signal Degrade

LP-TIM

Major

Trace Identifier Mismatch

LP-RDI-S

Major

Remote Server Defect Indication

LP-RDI-C

Major

Remote Connectivity Defect Indication

LP-RDI-P

Major

Remote Payload Defect Indication

LP-UNEQ

Major

Unequipped

LP-PLM

Major

Payload Mismatch

LP-V5-BIP UAS

Major

Unavailable Seconds triggered by V5-BIP

LP-V5-REI UAS Major

Unavailable Seconds triggered by LP-REI-BIP

LOS

Major

Loss Of Signal

AIS

Major

Alarm Indication Signal

UAS

Major

Unavailable Second

RAI

Major

Remote Alarm Indication

Parameters associated with an alarm entry as stored in the alarm log on the network
element, are detailed in Table 6-5, below.

Table 6-4 Alarm Parameters
Parameters
Alarm Des String
Alarm Time Stamp
Alarm Tributary Unit
Alarm Tributary
Module Type
Alarm Port Num
Alarm Type

Alarm Severity
Alarm Status

Alarm severity:

Alarm Parameters
Descriptions
A string object to give a text description of alarm trap. The alarm description
string of free style. But it’s strongly recommended to use the same order of
the format above.
A string object to describe the time & date of the alarm. The time stamp format
shall be of “ hh:mm:ss MM/DD/YYYY”.
An integer object to describe Unit number.
e.g. Unit-1(1), Unit-2(2)…
An integer object to describe card/module types
e.g. E1(1), E3(2), T1(3).
An integer object to describe Port Number
e.g. port-1(1), port-2(2),....
An integer object to describe alarm types. The alarm type shall be as generic
as possible to gain maximum reuse by all types of interface. For example, the
alarm type for E1-LOS shall defined as LOS
e.g. LOS(1), LOF(2), Card_OUT, Card_IN, .....
An integer object to describe alarm severity. (e.g. critical, major, minor,
informative …).
An integer object to describe alarm Status (e.g. active, cleared, ABS (Active
but suppressed))

It is possible for the operator to assign an alarm severity for
each combination of Object Type + Alarm Id. The severity

281

CHAPTER 6 SDH/SONET FEATURES
levels are INFORM, MINOR, MAJOR and CRITICAL. Default
values are assigned automatically.
Alarm presentation:

It is possible to view a list of all current alarms and a log of
alarm events. The size of the log of alarm events is 5000.
The graphical representation of managed objects reflects the
alarm state (severity level) by use of an appropriate colour.

Alarm filtering:

Alarms are suppressed if the object subject to alarm is
disabled (by setting its administrative state down). Alarm
disabling applies to device, module and port objects.
Disabling an object also applies to its subordinate objects.
For the SDH objects AU-4, VC-4, TU-3, VC-3, TU-11/12
and VC-11/12, the administrator is able to configure an
alarm mask for each object type. This alarm mask applies
as a general filter to all SDH objects of the corresponding
type.
For E1 and E3 ports, the administrator is able to
configure an alarm mask for each port instance.

Alarm suppression:

If an alarm is active, it may also suppress other (lower-order)
alarms. How active alarms may suppress other (lower-order)
alarms, are defined by the tables below.

282

CHAPTER 6 SDH/SONET FEATURES

Table 6-5 Alarm Suppression Table for SDH Related Items
Note: Alarm suppression (as stated in Table 4-6, below) is only performed for alarms
confined to one side of the DXC. Alarm suppression is not provided across the DXC.
Object Type (class)
SPI
LOS

RS

MS

Au-4

VC-4

TU-3
TU11/12

VC-3
VC11/12

PDH
(RX)

x

Suppression of other alarms?
Yes, all with higher

LOF

x

Yes, all with higher numbers

TIM

x

No

AIS

x

Yes, all with higher numbers

RDI

x

No

LOP

x

Yes, all with higher numbers

AIS

x

Yes, all with higher numbers

UNEQ

x

Yes, all with higher numbers

TIM

x

No

RDI

x

No

PLM

x

No

AIS

x

Yes, all with higher numbers

LOM

x

Yes, all with higher numbers

LOP

x

Yes, all with higher numbers

AIS

x

Yes, all with higher numbers

UNEQ

x

Yes, all with higher numbers

TIM

x

No

RDI

x

No

PLM

x

No

Table 6-6 Alarm Suppression Table for PDH (tributary) Alarms
Alarm Suppression Table for PDH (tributary) Alarms
Alarm ID
Suppress alarms with higher numbers
LOS
AIS
UAS
RAI

Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes

283

CHAPTER 6 SDH/SONET FEATURES

Line LOS

Line LOF

Line SF

Line SD

MS-AIS

RS-TIM

B1-UAS

B2-UAS

AU-LOP

AU-AIS

HP-SF

HP-SD

HP-PLM

HP-UNEQ

HP-LOM

HP-TIM

HP-AIS

TU-LOP

TU-AIS

LP-SF

LP-SD

LP-PLM

LP-UNEQ

LP-TIM

LP-AIS

Figure 6-14 Alarm Suppression Sequence

284

V5-UAS

B3-UAS

CHAPTER 6 SDH/SONET FEATURES

6.5

Configuration Management

6.5.1 Backup and Restoration of Configuration Data
It is possible to back-up the configuration data of an O9400S device. It is also possible to
reload the configuration from the backup. The back-up media is in a central repository.
6.5.2

Software download

It is possible to download new software and FPGA code to the O9400S device itself and to
modules/external modules. For all software and FPGA code items there are capacity of
storing two different versions in the device, and switchover from one version to the other
one is possible by operator command.
6.5.3 Feature management
The embedded software in the O9400S is capable of supporting all features (licensed or
not licensed) finalised at the time of the release. To activate a specific feature, the device
checks whether it has the corresponding licensed right to do it. Licenses can be ordered
individually for each available functionality (OSI, HW Routing). This will be a unique file for
each NE, generated based on a software key bound to the serial number of each O9400S
device, and they are stored internally in each O9400S.
6.5.4 Device reset
It is possible to reset (reboot) the device with or without resetting the current configuration.
Reboot have minimal impact on traffic processing.
The period of time from the moment you have triggered a restart to the time that the device is
up and running is dependent on equipped modules and SW configuration of the device.

285

CHAPTER 7 ETHERNET APPENDIX

7 ETHERNET APPENDIX
7.1

Flow control

In full duplex mode, the MAC transmitter sends flow control frames when necessary. The
MAC receiver interprets and processes incoming flow control frames. The Flow Control
Frame Received statistics counter is incremented whenever a flow control frame is received.
By default, flow control is symmetric when the port is operating in full duplex mode. This
means that when flow control is enabled, the MAC transmitter sends flow control frames and
the MAC receiver interprets and processes incoming flow control frames. The device also
provides the option to program each port to work in asymmetric mode. When a port is in
asymmetric flow control mode and flow control is enabled, the MAC transmitter does not send
flow control frames but the MAC receiver interprets and processes flow control frames.

7.2

Trunk

A port group (i.e., trunk or link aggregate) can include up to 8 physical ports, all of the ports in
a group are in the same device. There are four (4) trunk groups total.
If a VLAN includes the leader port in a trunk group, all the ports in that trunk group will be in
the same VLAN member map like the leader port in that trunk.(This will be done internally by
switch. User do not need to modify the port association table configuration.)

7.3

Quality of Service (QoS)

With strict priority and/or WFQ transmission scheduling, and WRED dropping schemes, the
ethernet switch provides powerful QoS functions for various multimedia and mission-critical
applications. Each port provides 4 transmission priorities and 2 levels of dropping precedence.
Each packet is assigned a transmission priority and dropping precedence that may be based
on:
-Ingress port
-IEEE 802.1p priority field in a VLAN tagged frame
-TOS field in an IP frame
-UDP/TCP logical port fields in a L4 frame
We assume that the network manager can recognize applications, such as voice, video, file
transfer, or web or email traffic, and can evaluate their relative time-sensitivity or importance.
The network manager can then group the applications into classes, which will determine
which frames have priority for transmission or which frames are more likely to be dropped
when resources run low.
The purpose of this section is to explain the basic QoS features and guide the user into
programming the QoS registers of the switch.

286

CHAPTER 7 ETHERNET APPENDIX

Fixed port priority?

Yes

Use default port setting

No
TOS precedence
over VLAN?

Yes

No
Yes

VLAN tag present?

No

Logical port match?

No

Use TOS

Yes
Use VLAN priority

Use logical port

Figure 7-1 Rule for Determining Transmission Class
7.3.1 Internal Priority Setup (Class of Service)
Each ingress port can be programmed to use one of the following options to map the
incoming packets to assign a traffic class to each incoming packet:
1
Using a fixed priority defined for that ingress port
2
Using the IEEE 802.1p priority defined in the VLAN tag
3
Using bits [7:5] or [4:2] of the TOS field in the IP header
4
Using TCP/UDP port configuration

7.3.1.1
Using Fixed Priority
In fixed priority mode, a frame's class is associated with its ingress port only, and not with
anything contained in the frame itself. For example, the user can assign all frames originating
from port 15 to traffic class 2.
The values programmed here also serve as default priority if the packet is not an IP frame
and contains no VLAN tag. Therefore, even if fixed port-based priority has been disabled,
the register settings here may play an important role.
7.3.1.2
Using the Priority Defined in the VLAN Tag
For each ingress port, the switch provides the option of using information in the packet header
to assign a priority, instead of assigning a fixed priority to all frames. Additionally, the user
may decide whether the IEEE 802.1p priority field in the VLAN tag or the TOS field of the IP
header is preferred for priority assignment.
The 3 bits of VLAN tag priority are translated using switch registers. These registers allow the
user to map each of the eight VLAN tag priorities to an internal 3-bit priority used by the
switch for transmission scheduling and buffer management. Note that the translated priority is
only used internally by the switch; the VLAN field in the outgoing packet is, of course,
unchanged.
7.3.1.3
Distrusted Port
If a previous stage in the network is sending traffic with an inappropriate VLAN tag priority or
with a rate higher than the bandwidth allocated for that traffic priority, then the port receiving
the data may be considered a "distrusted" public access port. The switch provides the user
with the option of marking any port distrusted. When a port has been marked distrusted, a
packet’s VLAN tag priority field is automatically replaced with a predefined value - most
typically, 0. The outgoing packet carries the new VLAN tag priority. The internal transmission
priority for this packet may also be based on the new value, if VLAN tag-based priority

287

CHAPTER 7 ETHERNET APPENDIX
assignment has been enabled.
Note that this feature only applies when the switch is configured in tag-based VLAN mode.
7.3.1.4
Using the Priority Defined in the TOS Field of the IP Header
The switch can also assign packet priority using the type of service (TOS) field in the IP
header. First, the user must disable fixed port-based priority. Second, the user must choose
the TOS field instead of the VLAN tag as the means of detraining priority. Third, the user must
decide which 3 bits in the TOS byte will be used to extract the packet priority.
7.3.2
Layer 4 TCP/UDP Port Configure(TCP/UDP Port Access Control)
Another way in which the switch allows priority to be assigned to a packet is by using the
source and destination port fields in the Layer 4 (TCP or UDP) header. If fixed port-based
priority has been disabled, and an incoming packet contains an L4 header with either the
source or destination TCP/UDP port field matching a programmed value, then the packet will
be assigned a priority that has been programmed for that logical port. Note that this is not
applicable for the packets with double vlan tagging.
Well-known network services with logical port numbers below 1024 are defined in Assigned
Numbers RFC. The switch supports eight of these well-known ports, as well as eight
additional user-defined logical ports and one user-defined range.

7.3.2.1

Well Known Ports

The eight well known ports supported by the switch are as follows:
Table 7-1 Well-known Port Number versus Service Type
Well-known Port Number

Service Type

23

Telnet

512

Exec (Remote process
execution)

6000

Windows

443

HTTPS

111

SUN rpc (Remote
procedure call)

22555

IP phone call setup

22

SSH

554

RTSP

The priority associated with each of the eight well-known ports can be programmed. The
priority assignment for each well-known port can be individually enable or disable.
7.3.2.2
User Defined Logical Ports
The switch also allows the user to configure eight additional logical ports for use in packet
priority assignment. If either the source or destination TCP/UDP logical port number in the
packet header matches a programmed value, then a predefined priority will be assigned to
the packet. Also the user can enable or disable each of the eight configurable logical ports.

288

CHAPTER 7 ETHERNET APPENDIX
7.3.2.3
User Defined Logical Port Range
The switch also permits the user to define one logical port range - an interval with a defined
lower and upper bound. Packets that contain a source or destination L4 logical port in this
range will be assigned a priority that has been associated with this range.
Note that the user defined logical range does not include the upper and lower limits
themselves. To disable priority assignment based on logical port range, set the value in the
upper limit to be less than or equal to the value in the lower limit.
7.3.3
Transmission Queues
We have seen the many ways in which a transmission priority can be assigned to a packet in
the switch. Once a priority has been assigned, it is used to determine into which transmission
queue (or simply queue) the packet will be inserted prior to transmission. In the switch, each
port has four queues.
7.3.4
Transmission Scheduling Setup
Packets are selected for transmission from among the queues during a process called
transmission scheduling. Only a packet at the head-of-line of one of the queues is eligible to
be scheduled for transmission to the corresponding port. If more than one of the queues for a
port contains a packet, then a transmission scheduling algorithm determines which packet
should be transmitted first. The switch supports two basic transmission scheduling algorithms:
strict priority (SP) and weighted fair queuing (WFQ).
7.3.5
Strict Priority (SP)
When all queues for a port use the SP algorithm, then queue 3 is considered "higher priority"
than queue 2; queue 2 is considered "higher priority" than queue 1; and so on. Queue 0 has
the lowest priority. Whenever a frame is scheduled, it is always selected from the highest
priority queue that contains a packet. For example, if only queues 3, 2, and 1 contain packets,
then the head-of-line entry in queue 3 will be scheduled next. If, in the same example, queue
3 were to contain five packets, then all five packets would be transmitted before any of the
packets in queues 2 or 1. The SP algorithm guarantees minimum latency for the traffic
assigned to the highest priority queues. It is important that strict priority traffic be either
policed or implicitly bounded, so as to keep from harming other traffic classes.
7.3.5.1
Weighted Fair Queuing (WFQ)
When all queues for a port use the WFQ algorithm, then no queue receives higher or lower
priority than any other. Instead, each queue receives a configured minimum percentage of the
port bandwidth, and the switch computes the correct sequence of packet transmissions
needed to achieve this bandwidth allocation for each queue. When the port is congested
with a lot of traffic in all queues, then packets will be transmitted in an order that adheres to
the programmed bandwidth ratio among traffic classes. When the port is not congested, then
excess bandwidth that is, bandwidth unused by one or more idle traffic classes - will be
temporarily redistributed to those traffic classes for packets are queued.
Minimum bandwidth assignments to each of the queues for a port are configured using
weights. For example, on a 10/100 port, to partition the bandwidth by giving 25 Mbps to class
3, 50 Mbps to class 2, 17 Mbps to class 1, and 8 Mbps to class 0, then the weights must be
set as follows: W3 =25; W2=50; W1=17; and W0=8. The resulting ratio W3:W2:W1:W0 =
25:50:17:8 matches the desired bandwidth allocation to the four queues.
In the switch, the user may also configure some of the queues to use the SP algorithm, with
other queues using WFQ. In this case, all queues that are configured as SP have higher
priority than any of the queues using WFQ. For example, if queues 3 and 2 are configured as
SP and queues 1 and 0 are configured as WFQ, then packets will be scheduled with highest
priority from queue 3, and then from queue 2. But if none of these queues contain any
packets, then the WFQ algorithm is used to select a packet from among queues 0 and 1.
In the previous example, the sum of the weights distributed to queues 0 and 1 can still be 100.
However, one should note that if there is a large quantity of traffic in the strict priority queues,
then the WFQ-scheduled queues will not necessarily receive the bandwidth they were
allocated. Therefore, for optimal results, we recommend that if SP is mixed with WFQ, then

289

CHAPTER 7 ETHERNET APPENDIX
the SP queues should support only very light traffic.
7.3.6
Drop Precedence
In the switch, every packet is assigned a 1-bit drop precedence in addition to its transmission
priority. Two levels of drop precedence are provided: high and low. When traffic conditions
necessitate packet dropping, frames that are identified as high drop precedence are more
likely to be dropped than frames that are identified as low drop precedence.
A packet dropping discipline is an unfortunate but necessary part of any network node. Traffic
congestion always results in a packet backlog, which, if the congestion lasts long enough,
eventually fills up a switch's limited memory. Because of buffer management and traffic
prioritization mechanisms in the switch, well-behaved users or flows rarely lose any packets,
regardless of traffic conditions. But poorly behaved users or flows will encounter frame loss.
For example, if a 100 Mbps port sends traffic at full wire speed to a 10 Mbps port, packets will
rapidly accumulate in memory and will eventually result in packet loss. On the other hand,
short-term congestion - for example, a burst of a few hundred packets - may be stored inside
the packet memory with no data loss observed.
Because frame loss is unavoidable under some traffic conditions, the switch uses drop
precedence to selectively discard traffic that is least sensitive to loss. Of course, if discarding
such "high drop" frames is insufficient to relieve the congestion, then eventually some "low
drop" frames must also be discarded.
In addition to drop precedence, the switch additionally softens the impact of packet drop by
using Weighted Random Early Drop (WRED). If the switch were to simply wait until the
memory is full before dropping any packets, then certain traffic groups could unfairly receive
especially good or especially bad treatment, based only on minor, coincidental differences in
when their packets arrive. For example, consider a scenario in which ports A and B send
equal-length packets at full wire speed to port C. If the switch were to drop packets only when
its memory is full, then one can imagine that port A might drop 0% of its packets, and port B
would drop 100% of its packets, or vice versa - a completely unfair outcome.
A second consideration is that in higher layer protocols (such as TCP) that regulate the rate of
packet transmission by using feedback, a long period of missing acknowledgment messages
may cause excessive slowdown or loss of a session entirely. During a session, the TCP
protocol constantly adjusts the sender's rate of transmission based on acknowledgment
messages fed back from the receiver. As long as acknowledgment messages are received in
time, the sender will continually increase its rate of transmission, because it thinks the
receiver is "keeping up." But if the network device waits until the memory is full before
dropping packets, then at that time, packets will likely be dropped in bunches. As a result, the
TCP sender will observe a long period of no acknowledgments. The sender will
overcompensate with the "brake," and the session may be lost or excessively slowed.
The switch tackles these issues by using WRED, a packet dropping discipline that discards
packets even before the memory is full. The decision whether to discard a packet is made by
flipping a weighted coin. When memory availability falls below a first threshold, incoming
traffic is dropped with a configurable probability. When memory availability falls even lower, to
below a second threshold, traffic is dropped with a second (and higher) probability.
Furthermore, the switch differentiates between packets with high and low drop precedence by
applying different drop probabilities for each. The details of WRED in the switch are described
in the next section.
Note that if frame loss is unacceptable for a particular application, flow control may be
enabled at each ingress port independently. In this case, no packets from that port will be
dropped, although the rate of frame uptake may decrease.
7.3.6.1
Drop Precedence Setup
Each ingress port can be programmed to use one of the following options to assign a drop
precedence to each incoming packet:
- Using a fixed drop precedence defined for that port
- Using the IEEE 802.1p bits in the VLAN tag
- Using bits [7:5] or [4:2] of the TOS field in the IP header
- Using TCP/UDP port configuration

290

CHAPTER 7 ETHERNET APPENDIX
Note: See Section 7.3.1, Internal Priority Setup (Class of Service), as described in the section
on setting transmission priority.
Example: To use the 802.1p bits in the VLAN tag for determining a packet's drop precedence,
set Priority MODE to “Tag/TOS” and Packet Priority to “Tag” . Now suppose that an incoming,
VLAN-tagged packet has 802.1p field(tag priority) equal to 5. Therefore, the drop precedence
assigned to this packet will depend on Drop Precedence field in Vlan Tag Priority Setup. If
Drop Precedence is set to “high-drop” then the packet will be classified as high drop
precedence. If Drop Precedence is set to “low-drop”, then the packet will be classified as low
drop precedence. "High drop" packets are more likely to be discarded during periods of traffic
congestion.

7.3.6.2
Weighted Random Early Drop Settings
We have previously discussed the advantages of WRED for packet discard. The following
table summarizes the behavior of the WRED mechanism in the switch for congested
transmission queues.
Table 7-2 WRED Logic Behaviour
Number of Bytes

Number of Bytes

>

>

Low Threshold

High Threshold

(L1)

(L2)

High Drop

X%

100%

Low Drop

Y%

Z%

Every queue in the switch applies the mechanism illustrated in the table above. However, for
queue 0 (low priority queue), a flow control enabled source port will not trigger WRED, but will
instead trigger flow control when the queue has exceeded the L2 threshold.
When the amount of data awaiting transmission in any queue exceeds the first threshold, then
any incoming packet destined for this queue will be dropped with some probability (either X%
or Y%, depending on the packet's drop precedence). When the amount of data awaiting
transmission in that queue exceeds the second, higher threshold, then any incoming packet
destined for this queue will be dropped with a second, higher probability (either 100% or Z%,
depending on the packet's drop precedence).
Note that adjustment of the WRED thresholds must be performed with no traffic running
through the switch.
7.3.7
Rate Control
Rate control is for fast ethernet ports only.
7.3.7.1
Egress Rate Control
When the rate at which frames are queued for transmission exceeds the configured egress
rate for that port, the switch will only transmit enough data so as not to exceed the rate bound.
As a result, over time, frames may accumulate in the queues at a rate-regulated egress port.
If the situation persists, high queue occupancy may trigger flow control of certain source ports
and/or selective dropping of frames.
See “Flow Control” section for details on flow control. See “Drop Precedence” section for
details on frame dropping because of destination congestion.

291

CHAPTER 7 ETHERNET APPENDIX

7.3.7.2
Ingress Rate Control
When the rate at which frames arrive in the switch exceeds the configured ingress rate for
that port, the switch will only process enough data so as not to exceed the rate bound.
If flow control is enabled on the ingress port question, then flow control will be triggered when
the switch detects that too much traffic has arrived in too short a period of time. Normal
reception will resume when enough time has elapsed to return the port to its average data
rate.
If flow control is disabled on the ingress port, then incoming frames will be subject to
Weighted Random Early Drop(WRED) whenever the average rate for that port has been
exceeded. During WRED, frames are differentiated based upon their drop precedence.
During Level 1 dropping, only RB% of "high-drop" frames will be dropped. If Level 1 dropping
is insufficient to reduce the incoming rate sufficiently, then Level 2 dropping will be enforced;
in this level, all high-drop frames will be dropped, and RA% of "low-drop" frames will also be
dropped. If the traffic is so nonconformant that even Level 2 dropping is not enough, then
Level 3 dropping will be performed. In Level 3 dropping, all frames are dropped until the traffic
falls below the configured rate.

292

CHAPTER 7 ETHERNET APPENDIX

7.4

Ethernet Card Functions and Descriptions

The purpose of this section is to illustrate the structure and system mode of each card. For a
summary of the functions of each card, please refer to section 7.4.1. For illustrations and
explanations of the functions please refer to sections 7.4.2 to 7.4.5.
Users should be aware that a limitation exists between the optical side (SDH/SONET) and the
Ethernet side. For example, if you set up a cross-connect with 63 TU12 (126 Mbps) on an FE
WAN (100 Mbps), the maximum bandwidth will be 100 Mbps.

7.4.1

Card Functions

The card type and the functions are listed in the table below.
Table 7-3 O9400S Ethernet Card Function Table
Card Type
E-Line
4EoS1SW
4EoS6SW
4FE4NSW
1GE4NSW

7.4.2
7.4.2.1

Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes

E-Lan
Yes
Yes
No
No

Card Functions
Port-Map
Yes
Yes
No
No

Port-Trunking
(Line Aggregation)

Yes
Yes
No
No

O9400S FE (4EoS1SW) Module
E- Line

E-Line Ethernet service is based on a point to point Ethernet virtual connection.
Note: All WAN ports are FE Ports.

.

293

CHAPTER 7 ETHERNET APPENDIX
Figure 7-2 FE (4EoS1SW) Module E-Line
7.4.2.2

E- Lan

E-Lan Ethernet service is based on the concept of Virtual LANs (VLANs). It supports IEEE
802.1Q specifations for “tagging” frames. This specification defines a way to coordinate
VLANs across multiple switches by inserting an additional 4-octet header (or “tag”) into a
frame after the source MAC address and before the frame type. Twelve bits of the tag are
used to define the VLAN ID.
Aggregate Line
VLAN
ID

Optical

WAN

2 ( 1 to 4095)
1

2

3 4

5

6

7

8

off on off off off on off off

WAN1~ WAN8

LAN
off

on

off

off

WAN Side

The Ethernet packet with
VID2 will go through via
LAN1 , WAN2 and WAN6

Mapper
SW

FE1

FE2

FE3

FE4

FE5

FE6

FE1

FE2

FE3

1

2

3

PHY

FEFE

FEFE

FE7

FE8

GbE4

4
GEGE

FEFE

LAN Side
1

2

3

4

LAN1 ~ LAN4

Figure 7-3 FE (4EoS1SW) Module E-Lan

294

CHAPTER 7 ETHERNET APPENDIX

7.4.2.3

Port Map

The Ethernet can be set up in either a one-way or a two-way direction. Any LAN and WAN
Port can be mapped to any LAN and WAN.
Note: In Port Map mode, packet forwarding decisions are based on the destination MAC
address and its associated port. The Port Map only governs the outgoing traffic (ie. it is unidirectional). Therefore, if yo wish to allow two subscriber ports to talk toeach other, you must
define the egress (outgoing) port for both ports.

Figure 7-4 FE (4EoS1SW) Module Port Map

295

CHAPTER 7 ETHERNET APPENDIX

7.4.2.4

Port Trunking (Line Aggregation)

Trunking can be set up at either the WAN side or the LAN side.

Aggregate Line

Optical

XC

Grouping

Mapper

SW

WAN Side

FE 1

FE 2

Grouping

FE

PHY

FE 3 FE 4 FE 5 FE 6

FE

FE 7 FE 8

FE

GE

1

2

3

4

FE

FE

FE

GE

1

2

3

4

Figure 7-5 FE (4EoS1SW) Module Port Trunking

296

LAN Side

CHAPTER 7 ETHERNET APPENDIX

7.4.3

O9400S FE (4EoS6SW) Module

E-Line Ethernet service is based on a point to point Ethernet virtual connection
7.4.3.1

E-Line

Note: There is one WAN Port. It is a GbE Port.

Aggregate Line

Optical

Mapper
WAN Side

SW

PHY

FE 1

X
FE
1

FE 2

FE 3

X

GE 4

X

FE
2

FE
3

GE
4

FE

FE

FE

GE

1

2

3

4

Figure 7-6 FE (4EoS6SW) Module E-Line

297

LAN Side

CHAPTER 7 ETHERNET APPENDIX

7.4.3.2

E-LAN

E-Lan Ethernet service is based on the concept of Virtual LANs (VLANs). It supports IEEE
802.1Q specifations for “tagging” frames. This specification defines a way to coordinate
VLANs across multiple switches by inserting an additional 4-octet header (or “tag”) into a
frame after the source MAC address and before the frame type. Twelve bits of the tag are
used to define the VLAN ID.

Figure 7-7 FE (4EoS6SW) Module E-LAN

298

CHAPTER 7 ETHERNET APPENDIX

7.4.3.3

Port MAP

The Ethernet can be set up in either a one-way or a two-way direction. Any LAN and WAN
Port can be mapped to any LAN and WAN.
Note: In Port Map mode, packet forwarding decisions are based on the destination MAC
address and its associated port. The Port Map only governs the outgoing traffic (ie. it is unidirectional). Therefore, if you wish to allow two subscriber ports to talk to each other, you
must define the egress (outgoing) port for both ports.

Figure 7-8 FE (4EoS6SW) Module Port Map

299

CHAPTER 7 ETHERNET APPENDIX

7.4.3.4

Port Trunking (Line Aggregation)

Any Ethernet LAN and WAN can be mapped to several other LANs and WANs and then
grouped. Trunking can be set up at either the WAN side or theLAN side.

Figure 7-9 FE (4EoS6SW) Module Port Trunking

7.4.4
7.4.4.1

O9400S FE (4FE4NSW) Module
E-Line

E-Line Ethernet service is based on a point to point Ethernet virtual connection

Figure 7-10 FE (4FE4NSW) Module

300

CHAPTER 7 ETHERNET APPENDIX

7.4.5
7.4.5.1

O9400S (1GE4NSW) Module
E-Line

E-Line Ethernet service is based on a point to point Ethernet virtual connection

Figure 7-11 1GE4NSW Module

301

CHAPTER 8 ALARM TRAP APPENDIX

8 ALARM TRAP APPENDIX
8.1

Local Alarm Trap

Trap definition -- trap MIB
loopO9400SLocalTrap TRAP-TYPE
ENTERPRISE loop-O9400SA
VARIABLES {alarmQueueString,
alarmQueueTimeStamp,
alarmQueueSubrack,
alarmQueueUnit,
alarmQueueCardModel,
alarmQueuePortNum,
alarmQueueVcChan,
alarmQueueAlmNum,
alarmQueueAUG1STS3Type,
alarmQueueVC1xVTxType,
alarmQueueAUG1STS3,
alarmQueueVC3STS1,
alarmQueueTUG2VTG,
alarmQueueTU1xVTx,
alarmQueueStatus,
alarmQueueSeverity }
DESCRIPTION
"Local alarm trap"
::= 3

8.2

Critical AlarmActive Trap

loopO9400SCriticalAlmActiveTrap TRAP-TYPE
ENTERPRISE loop-O9400SA
VARIABLES {alarmQueueString,
alarmQueueTimeStamp,
alarmQueueSubrack,
alarmQueueUnit,
alarmQueueCardModel,
alarmQueuePortNum,
alarmQueueVcChan,
alarmQueueAlmNum,
alarmQueueAUG1STS3Type,
alarmQueueVC1xVTxType,
alarmQueueAUG1STS3,
alarmQueueVC3STS1,
alarmQueueTUG2VTG,
alarmQueueTU1xVTx,
alarmQueueStatus,
alarmQueueSeverity }
DESCRIPTION
"Critical alarm active trap"
::= 6

302

CHAPTER 8 ALARM TRAP APPENDIX

8.3

Critical Alarm Cleared Trap

loopO9400SCriticalAlmClearedTrap TRAP-TYPE
ENTERPRISE loop-O9400SA
VARIABLES {alarmQueueString,
alarmQueueTimeStamp,
alarmQueueSubrack,
alarmQueueUnit,
alarmQueueCardModel,
alarmQueuePortNum,
alarmQueueVcChan,
alarmQueueAlmNum,
alarmQueueAUG1STS3Type,
alarmQueueVC1xVTxType,
alarmQueueAUG1STS3,
alarmQueueVC3STS1,
alarmQueueTUG2VTG,
alarmQueueTU1xVTx,
alarmQueueStatus,
alarmQueueSeverity }
DESCRIPTION
"Critical alarm clear trap"
::= 7

8.4

Major Alarm Active Trap

loopO9400SMajorAlmActiveTrap TRAP-TYPE
ENTERPRISE loop-O9400SA
VARIABLES {alarmQueueString,
alarmQueueTimeStamp,
alarmQueueSubrack,
alarmQueueUnit,
alarmQueueCardModel,
alarmQueuePortNum,
alarmQueueVcChan,
alarmQueueAlmNum,
alarmQueueAUG1STS3Type,
alarmQueueVC1xVTxType,
alarmQueueAUG1STS3,
alarmQueueVC3STS1,
alarmQueueTUG2VTG,
alarmQueueTU1xVTx,
alarmQueueStatus,
alarmQueueSeverity }
DESCRIPTION
"Major alarm active trap"
::= 8

303

CHAPTER 8 ALARM TRAP APPENDIX

8.5

Major Alarm Cleared Trap

loopO9400SMajorAlmClearedTrap TRAP-TYPE
ENTERPRISE loop-O9400SA
VARIABLES {alarmQueueString,
alarmQueueTimeStamp,
alarmQueueSubrack,
alarmQueueUnit,
alarmQueueCardModel,
alarmQueuePortNum,
alarmQueueVcChan,
alarmQueueAlmNum,
alarmQueueAUG1STS3Type,
alarmQueueVC1xVTxType,
alarmQueueAUG1STS3,
alarmQueueVC3STS1,
alarmQueueTUG2VTG,
alarmQueueTU1xVTx,
alarmQueueStatus,
alarmQueueSeverity }
DESCRIPTION
"Major alarm clear trap"
::= 9

8.6

Minor Alarm Active Trap

loopO9400SMinorAlmActiveTrap TRAP-TYPE
ENTERPRISE loop-O9400SA
VARIABLES {alarmQueueString,
alarmQueueTimeStamp,
alarmQueueSubrack,
alarmQueueUnit,
alarmQueueCardModel,
alarmQueuePortNum,
alarmQueueVcChan,
alarmQueueAlmNum,
alarmQueueAUG1STS3Type,
alarmQueueVC1xVTxType,
alarmQueueAUG1STS3,
alarmQueueVC3STS1,
alarmQueueTUG2VTG,
alarmQueueTU1xVTx,
alarmQueueStatus,
alarmQueueSeverity }
DESCRIPTION
"Minor alarm active trap"
::= 10

304

CHAPTER 8 ALARM TRAP APPENDIX

8.7

Minor Alarm Cleared Trap

loopO9400SMinorAlmClearedTrap TRAP-TYPE
ENTERPRISE loop-O9400SA
VARIABLES {alarmQueueString,
alarmQueueTimeStamp,
alarmQueueSubrack,
alarmQueueUnit,
alarmQueueCardModel,
alarmQueuePortNum,
alarmQueueVcChan,
alarmQueueAlmNum,
alarmQueueAUG1STS3Type,
alarmQueueVC1xVTxType,
alarmQueueAUG1STS3,
alarmQueueVC3STS1,
alarmQueueTUG2VTG,
alarmQueueTU1xVTx,
alarmQueueStatus,
alarmQueueSeverity }
DESCRIPTION
"Minor alarm clear trap"
::= 11

8.8

Info Active Trap

loopO9400SInfoActiveTrap TRAP-TYPE
ENTERPRISE loop-O9400SA
VARIABLES {alarmQueueString,
alarmQueueTimeStamp,
alarmQueueSubrack,
alarmQueueUnit,
alarmQueueCardModel,
alarmQueuePortNum,
alarmQueueVcChan,
alarmQueueAlmNum,
alarmQueueAUG1STS3Type,
alarmQueueVC1xVTxType,
alarmQueueAUG1STS3,
alarmQueueVC3STS1,
alarmQueueTUG2VTG,
alarmQueueTU1xVTx,
alarmQueueStatus,
alarmQueueSeverity }
DESCRIPTION
"Info active trap"
::= 12

305

CHAPTER 8 ALARM TRAP APPENDIX

8.9

Info Cleared Trap

loopO9400SInfoClearedTrap TRAP-TYPE
ENTERPRISE loop-O9400SA
VARIABLES {alarmQueueString,
alarmQueueTimeStamp,
alarmQueueSubrack,
alarmQueueUnit,
alarmQueueCardModel,
alarmQueuePortNum,
alarmQueueVcChan,
alarmQueueAlmNum,
alarmQueueAUG1STS3Type,
alarmQueueVC1xVTxType,
alarmQueueAUG1STS3,
alarmQueueVC3STS1,
alarmQueueTUG2VTG,
alarmQueueTU1xVTx,
alarmQueueStatus,
alarmQueueSeverity }
DESCRIPTION
"Info clear trap"
::= 13
8.9.1

alarmQueueUnit
Table 8-1 alarmQueueUnit: Unit index
Number
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

8.9.2

Unit Number
ea
wa-eb
tg1
tg2
tg3
in-band
rs232

alarmQueueCardModel: Card model type
Table 8-2 alarm Queue Card Model: Card model type
Number
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
12
13
20

Card Type
none
e1
t1
e3
t3
fast-EthernetSW
fast-Ethernet
giga-EthernetSW
giga-Ethernet
unknown

Card Type Description
E1 card
T1 card
E3 card
T3 card
Ethernet card with switch
Ethernet card without switch
Giga Ethernet card with switch
Ethernet card without switch
unknow

306

CHAPTER 8 ALARM TRAP APPENDIX

8.9.3

alarmQueuePortNum: Port index
Table 8-3 alarmQueuePortNum: Port index
Number
1~64
100

8.9.4

Port Number
Port 1~Port 64
not-available

alarmQueueVcChan: VC channel

Table 8-4 alarmQueueVcChan: VC channel
Number
1~64

8.9.5

VC channel Number
VC 1~VC 64

alarmQueueAlmNum 0 ~ 30: System alarm
Table 8-5 alarmQueueAlmNum 0 ~ 30: System alarm
Number
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13

Alarm Type
sys-alm-cutoff
sys-alm-power-fail
sys-alm-ts-sync-loss
sys-alm-sncp-switch
sys-alm-msp-switch
sys-alm-ms-sppring
sys-alm-log-inout
sys-alm-fom-eqp
sys-alm-fom-uneq
sys-alm-external-alarm
sys-alm-sfp-tx-fail-alarm
sys-alm-sfp-rx-fail-alarm
sys-alm-sfp-temperature-alarm

307

CHAPTER 8 ALARM TRAP APPENDIX

8.9.6

alarmQueueAlmNum 30 ~ 74: SDH alarm

Table 8-6 alarmQueueAlmNum 30 ~ 74: SDH alarm
Number
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104

Alarm type
pi-los-alarm
rs-lof-alarm
rs-tim-alarm
rs-bip-uas-alarm
ms-sd-alarm
ms-sf-alarm
ms-ais-alarm
ms-rdi-alarm
ms-bip-uas-alarm
ms-rei-uas-alarm
au-lop-alarm
au-ais-alarm
hp-pj-alarm
hp-nj-alarm
hp-sd-alarm
hp-sf-alarm
hp-tim-alarm
hp-uneq-alarm
hp-plm-alarm
hp-vc-ais-alarm
hp-rdi-s-alarm
hp-rdi-c-alarm
hp-rdi-p-alarm
hp-bip-uas-alarm
hp-rei-uas-alarm
hp-lom-alarm
tu-lop-alarm
tu-ais-alarm
lp-pj-alarm
lp-nj-alarm
lp-sd-alarm
lp-sf-alarm
lp-tim-alarm
lp-uneq-alarm
lp-plm-alarm
lp-vc-ais-alarm
lp-rdi-s-alarm
lp-rdi-c-alarm
lp-rdi-p-alarm
lp-bip-uas-alarm
lp-rei-uas-alarm

308

CHAPTER 8 ALARM TRAP APPENDIX
8.9.7

alarmQueueAlmNum 130 ~ 234: SONET alarm
Table 8-7 alarmQueueAlmNum 130 ~ 234: SONET alarm
Number

Alarm type

130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234

los-pi-alarm
lof-s-alarm
none1
bip-s-uas-alarm
sd-1-alarm
sf-1-alarm
ais-l-alarm
rdi-l-alarm
bip-l-uas-alarm
rei-l-uas-alarm
lop-p-alarm
ais-p-alarm
pj-p-alarm
nj-p-alarm
sd-p-alarm
sf-p-alarm
tim-p-alarm
uneq-p-alarm
plm-p-alarm
vt-ais-p-alarm
rdi-s-p-alarm
rdi-c--p-alarm
rdi-p-p-alarm
bip-uas-alarm
rei-p-uas-alarm
lom-p-alarm
lop-v-alarm
ais-v-alarm
pj-v-alarm
nj-v-alarm
sd-v-alarm
sf-v-alarm
tim-v-alarm
uneq-v-alarm
plm-v-alarm
vt-ais-v-alarm
rdi-s-v-alarm
rdi-c-v-alarm
rdi-p-v-alarm
bip-v-uas-alarm
rei-v-uas-alarm
rs-bip-tca-alarm
ms-bip-tca-alarm
ms-rei-tca-alalrm
hp-bip-tca-alarm
hp-rei-tca-alarm
lp-bip-tca-alarm
lp-rei-tca-alarm
cv-bip-tca-alarm
bip-s-tca-alarm
bip-l-tca-alarm
rei-l-tca-alarm
bip-p-tca-alarm
rei-p-tca-alarm
bip-v-tca-alarm
rei-v-tca-alarm

309

CHAPTER 8 ALARM TRAP APPENDIX

8.9.8

alarmQueueAlmNum 250 ~ 252: E1/T1 alarm
Table 8-8 alarmQueueAlmNum 220 ~ 252:E1/T1 alarm
Number
250
251
252

8.9.9

Alarm type
e1-t1-los-alarm
e1-t1-ais-alarm
e1-t1-cv-alarm

alarmQueueAlmNum 300 ~ 303: Ethernet alarm
Table 8-9 alarmQueueAlmNum 300 ~ 303:Ethernet alarm
Number
300
301
302
303

Alarm type
enet-fcs-err-tca-alarm
enet-err-frame-tca-alarm
enet-fifo-overflow-tca-alarm
enet-link-down-alarm

8.9.10 alarmQueueVC43STS31Type: AU4/ AU3 type in SDH, STS3-C or STS-1 type in
SONET
Table 8-10 alarmQueueVC43STS31Type: AU4 /AU3 type in SDH, STS-3c or
STS-1 type in SONET
Number
1
2
3
4
100

AU4 /AU3 type in SDH, STS-3c or STS-1 type in SONET
no-ho-map
vc4-sts3c
3au3-sts1
au4-tu3
not-available

8.9.11 alarmQueueTU1xVTxType: Tu1x type
Table 8-11 alarmQueueTU1xVTxType: Tu1x type
Number
1
2
3
4
5
6
100

Tu1x type
no-lo-map
tu3
au3-sts1
tu11-vt15
tu12-vt2
vc4-bypass
not-available

310

CHAPTER 8 ALARM TRAP APPENDIX

8.9.12 alarmQueueAUG1STS3: The number of STM1
Table 8-12 alarmQueueAUG1STS3: The number of STM1
Number
1
2
3
4
100

STM1 index
aug1-sts3-1
aug1-sts3-2
aug1-sts3-3
aug1-sts3-4
not-available

8.9.13 alarmQueueVC3STS1: The number of STS1
Table 8-13 alarmQueueVC3STS1: The number of STS1
Number
1
2
3

Tug3 index
STS1-1
STS1-2
STS1-3

8.9.14 alarmQueueTUG2VTG: The number of Tug2
Table 8-14 alarmQueueTUG2VTG: The number of Tug2
Number
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

Tug2 index
Tug2-1
Tug2-2
Tug2-3
Tug2-4
Tug2-5
Tug2-6
Tug2-7

8.9.15 alarmQueueTU1xVTx: The number of Tu1x

Table 8-15 alarmQueueTU1xVTx: The number of Tu1x
Number
1
2
3
4

Tu1x index
Tu1x-1
Tu1x-2
Tu1x-3
Tu1x-4

311

CHAPTER 9 GLOSSARY

9 GLOSSARY
A
AIS
AU

Alarm Indication Signal
Administrative Unit

M

B
BER
BIP

Bit Error Rate
Bit Interleaved Parity

N

C

O
OOF

Out of Frame

P
PLM

Payload Lable Mismatch

D

E
ES
ESR

Errored Second
Errored Second Ratio

Q

F
R
RS

Regenerator Section

S
SES
SESR

Severely Errored Second
Severely Errored Second Ratio

T
TIM

Trace Identifier Mismatch

U
UAS

Unavailable Second

G
H
HP

HO (higher order) path

I

J

V

K

W

L
LOF
LOM
LOS
LP

Loss of Frame
Loss of Multiframe
Loss of Signal
LO (lower order) Path

XYZ

312